10VFD-R - Measurement Daytronic - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL 10VFD-R Daytronic

Stand Alone MODULAR FRONT END Data Acquisition &Control

SYSTEM 10 Drytronic Covessor No. M Functional Audit Bottling Air: Del. Test: 2.00 gm Power Grid Test: 0.1 MHz Cycle Test: PnSS System Drytronic PUMP #45 Pressure 135 KPG LOW HIGH Flow 8.4 LIT/MIN LOW HIGH Torque (N=3) 0 10000 Speed 0 10000 LW 0 10000 Slight 0 10000

User's Guidebook

Version SB.8

PLEASE NOTE the following section- and figure-reference corrections for Sections 2, 3, and 5 of this Guidebook:

When you are You should told to refer to: actually refer to:

Section 1.B Section 1.A.3

Section 1.C Section 4 of the appropriate

"On the Air" Booklet

Section 1.D Section 5 of the appropriate

"On the Air" Booklet

Fig. 1.E.1 (Section 1.E.1) Fig. 1.5 (Section 1.E.1)

Fig. 1.E.2 (Section 1.E.1) Fig. 1.6 (Section 1.E.1)

Section 1.F.1 Section 1.F.2

Section 1.F.2 Section 1.F.3

Section 1.G.2 Section 1.G.1

Section 1.G.7 Section 1.G.6

Appendix B Section 1.B

Copyright © 1996, 2001 Daytronic Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reprinted, reproduced, or used in any form or by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, including photocopying and recording, or in any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Daytronic Corporation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

SYSTEM 10

USER'S GUIDEBOOK

Thank you for buying System 10.

If you have any questions or problems, please don't hesitate to call our CUSTOMER SUPPORT SERVICES or our SALES APPLICATIONS STAFF at

[phone]

FAX: [phone]

TOLL-FREE: [phone]

during normal business hours (Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). Or you can EMAIL us at

[e-mail]

To learn more about Daytronic Data Acquisition products and applications, visit our web site at

www.daytronic.com

GETTING YOUR SYSTEM 10 ON THE AIR FOR "A-SIZED" MAINFRAMES

1. Introduction

a. The Purpose of This Booklet ...... A - 1
b. "A-Sized" Mainframes and Extended Keyboards ...... A - 1
c. If You Need Help... A - 2

1. Physical Layout ...... A - 3

2. Powerup A-6

3. Keyboard Connection and Initialization A-6

4. LCD/VFD Data Display Setup A-7

5. Setup of Analog Inputs: Transducer Cabling A-9

6. Data Channel Configuration A-11

7. Setting System Scan Range ...... A - 13

8. Setting System Time and Date A-14

9. Data Channel Calibration A - 14

10. Setup of Cross-Channel Calculations ...... A - 16

12. Setup of Logic Bits and Logic Ports

a. "Sourcing" of Logic Bits A - 18
b. Initialization of Optional Model 10AIO-16 A - 19

1. Limit Setup A - 20

2. Setup of EXECUTE Functions A - 23

3. Setting Data-Transmission Characteristics ...... A - 25

16. Communication with External Devices

a. Introduction: System 10 Communication Modes ...... A - 26
b. Setup of RS-232-C Communications A - 27
c. Setup of IEEE-488 Communications ...... A - 27
d. Setup of RS-422 Communications ...... A - 27

1. Mainframe Keypad Functions A - 28

2. Further Optional Procedures ...... A - 29

App A. Summary of A-Sized Mainframe Features ...... A - 30

GETTING YOUR SYSTEM 10 ON THE AIR FOR "B-SIZED" MAINFRAMES

1. Introduction

a. The Purpose of This Booklet ...... B - 1
b. "B-Sized" Mainframes ...... B - 1
c. Monitor and Keyboard B-2
d. If You Need Help... B-3

1. Physical Layout B-3

2. Powerup B-8

3. Keyboard Connection B-8

4. CRT Video Setup B-9

5. Setup of Analog Inputs: Transducer Cabling B-15

6. Data Channel Configuration B-16

7. Setting System Scan Range B - 19

8. Setting System Time and Date B - 19

9. Data Channel Calibration B - 20

10. Setup of Cross-Channel Calculations ...... B - 22

11. Setup of Logic Bits and Logic Ports

a. "Sourcing" of Logic Bits B-24

b. Initialization of Optional Model 10BIO-16 B - 25

1. Limit Setup B - 26

2. Automatic Command Execution

a. Setup of EXECUTE Functions B - 30

b. Setup of CONDITIONAL and COMMAND Functions ...... B - 32

1. Setting Data-Transmission Characteristics ...... B - 33

2. Communication with External Devices

a. Introduction: System 10 Communication Modes ...... B - 34

b. Setup of "Main" RS-232-C Communications ...... B - 35

c. Setup of "Auxiliary" RS-232-C Communications (10BACI) ...... B - 36

d. Setup of RS-232-C Communications for an Optional Printer Interface Port (10VFO132) B - 37

e. Setup of IEEE-488 Communications B - 38

f. Setup of RS-422 Communications B - 38

1. Optional Bargraph Setup (Model 10VGM500) B - 39

2. Optional History Recording (Model 10BDR64) B - 42

3. Further Optional Procedures ...... B - 48

App A. Summary of B-Sized Mainframe Features ...... B - 49

SECTION 1

REQUIRED SYSTEM SETUP PROCEDURES

1.A GETTING STARTED

1. Using the "On the Air" Tutorial 1-1

2. Basic Precautions

a. EEPROM Memory Protection 1-1

b. Checking Line-Voltage Setting 1-1

c. Circuit-Card Insertion and Removal 1-2

d. Handling Cards with Internal Battery 1-2

e. Air Cooling Requirements 1-2

f. Dust Covers 1-2

1. Mainframe Powerup

a. AC Operation (All Models) 1-3

b. DC Operation ("V" Option) 1-6

1. Display and Keyboard Initialization

a. DISPLAY Settings for A-Sized Mainframes 1-7

b. DISPLAY Settings for B-Sized Mainframes 1-7

c. Initialization of Optional 10P80D Keyboard with Certain A-Sized Mainframes .... 1-8

1.B CARD INSERTION AND REMOVAL 1-9

1.C ENTRY OF MNEMONIC COMMANDS

1. Introduction 1-13
2. Conventions Used in Command Expressions 1-14

3. Command Entry and Display

a. Via Keyboard 1-15
b. Via Computer Interface 1-16

4. Interrogating for Setup Values

a. "Read" Commands and Responses 1-17
b. Sequential Keyboard Interrogations 1-18

1.D SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS 1-21

1.E TRANSDUCER CABLING AND CONDITIONER CARD SETUP

1. General Considerations ...... 1-23

a. "10A" Cards 1-23
b. "AA" Cards 1-24
c. Connection of Cable Shield 1-26
d. Use of the Model 10AX-2 Auxiliary Excitation Card 1-27

2. Connection and Setup of Analog Input Cards and Accessories

- Model 10A9-8C Eight-Channel Thermocouple Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A9-8C.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A9-8C.3

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Programming "Open TC" Detection 10A9-8C.5
b. Configuration and Calibration 10A9-8C.5

1. Optional "Remote" TC Connections: Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box

a. Purpose 10A9-8C.6
b. Connections 10A9-8C.6

- Model 10A10-4 Quad Isolated Thermocouple Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications .... 10A10-4.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A10-4.3

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Programming "Open TC" Detection 10A10-4.5
b. Configuration and Calibration 10A10-4.5

1. Optional "Remote" TC Connections: Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box

a. Purpose 10A10-4.5
b. Connections 10A10-4.5

- Model 10A15-8 Eight-Channel Thermistor Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications .... 10A15-8.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A15-8.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations a. Configuration and Calibration .... 10A15-8.3

- Model 10A16-4C Quad Platinum RTD Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A16-4C.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A16-4C.2

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Setting a 10A16-4C Channel for Four-Wire or Three-Wire RTD Cabling .... 10A16-4C.4
b. Configuration and Calibration 10A16-4C.4
c. High RTD Resolution with Specially Modified 10A16-4C ..... 10A16-4C.5

- Model 10A17-2 Dual High-Voltage Isolation RTD Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A17-4C.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A17-4C.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Configuration and Calibration 10A17-4C.3
b. High RTD Resolution with Specially Modified 10A17-2 ...... 10A17-4C.3

- Model 10A18-4C Quad 100-Ohm Platinum Linear RTD Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A18-4C.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A18-4C.3

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Setting a 10A18-4C Channel for Four-Wire or Three-Wire RTD Cabling .... 10A18-4C.5
b. Configuration and Calibration .... 10A18-4C.5 Calculated Calibration .... 10A18-4C.5 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration .... 10A18-4C.7

- Model 10A30-2C Dual LVDT Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A30-2C.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A30-2C.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Configuration and Calibration 10A30-2C.6

• Model 10A31-4 Quad LVDT Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A31-4.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A31-4.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Configuration and Calibration 10A31-4.8

• Model 10A35 Encoder Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A35.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A35.1
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Configuration and Operation Count Predivision .... 10A35.3 Zero-Indexing (Resetting) the 10A35 .... 10A35.3 Returning the 10A35 to “RUN MODE” .... 10A35.3

- Model 10A40 Frequency Input Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A40.1
2. Transducer Connections

a. Standard Cabling 10A40.2
b. Special Cabling

Ungrounded Frequency Source 10A40.4

Elimination of DC Offset 10A40.4

Suppression of High-Frequency Noise in Low-Frequency Input 10A40.4

c. Pull-Up Resistor 10A40.5

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Configuration and Calibration 10A40.5
Absolute Calibration 10A40.5
Calculated Calibration 10A40.6
Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A40.6
b. Trigger-Level Adjustment 10A40.6

- Model 10A41-2C Dual Frequency Input Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A41-2C.1
2. Transducer Connections
   a. Standard Cabling 10A41-2C.2
   b. Special Cabling
   Ungrounded Frequency Source 10A41-2C.4
   Elimination of DC Offset 10A41-2C.5
   Suppression of High-Frequency Noise in Low-Frequency Input 10A41-2C.5
   c. Pull-Up Resistor 10A41-2C.5

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Selecting Input Voltage Range 10A41-2C.6
b. Selecting Filter Bandwidth 10A41-2C.6
c. Configuration and Calibration 10A41-2C.7
Absolute Calibration 10A41-2C.7
Calculated Calibration 10A41-2C.8
Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A41-2C.8

• Model 10A43 Dwell Angle Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A43.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A43.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A43.3

- Model 10A45 Simmonds Shaft Torque Sensor Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A45.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A45.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A45.4
   b. Horsepower Calculation 10A45.4

- Model 10A48 Modulated Carrier Flow Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A48.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A48.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Transducer Alignment Adjustments 10A48.3
   b. Configuration and Calibration 10A48.4
   c. Use of Totalizer Output to Obtain a Total Volume or Total Mass Reading 10A48.4

• Model 10A60-4 Quad Voltage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A60-4.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A60-4.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A60-4.4
   Absolute Calibration 10A60-4.4
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A60-4.4

• Model 10A61-2 Dual 4-20 mA Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A61-2.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A61-2.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A61-2.3
   Absolute Calibration 10A61-2.3
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A61-2.3

- Model 10A62-8C Eight-Channel 4-20 mA Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A62-8C.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A62-8C.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A62-8C.3
   Absolute Calibration for a 4-20 mA Channel .... 10A62-8C.3
   Absolute Calibration for a 4-12-20 mA Channel .... 10A62-8C.3
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A62-8C.4

- Model 10A63-2 Dual Voltage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A63-2.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A63-2.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A63-2.4
   Absolute Calibration 10A63-2.4
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A63-2.5

- Model 10A64-8C Eight-Channel Voltage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A64-8C.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A64-8C.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A64-8C.3
   Absolute Calibration 10A64-8C.3
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A64-8C.4

- Model 10A65-8 Eight-Channel Low-Level Voltage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A65-8.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A65-8.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A65-8.3
   Absolute Calibration 10A65-8.3
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A65-8.4

- Model 10A68-2 Dual AC RMS Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A68-2.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A68-2.3
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A68-2.3
   Absolute Calibration 10A68-2.3
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A68-2.4

- Model 10A69-4 Quad AC RMS Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A69-4.1
2. Transducer Connections 10A69-4.2
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Configuration and Calibration 10A69-4.4

Absolute Calibration 10A69-4.4

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A69-4.5

- Model 10A70-2 Dual Strain Gage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A70-2.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A70-2.2

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations a. Configuration and Calibration ..... 10A70-2.4 Calculated Calibration ..... 10A70-2.4 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ..... 10A70-2.5

- Model 10A72-2C Enhanced Dual Strain Gage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A72-2C.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A72-2C.3

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Selection of Conditioner Modes 10A72-2C.5
   b. Selection of Excitation Levels 10A72-2C.5
   c. Selection of Analog Filters 10A72-2C.6
   d. Configuration and Calibration ..... 10A72-2C.6 Calculated Calibration ..... 10A72-2C.6 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ..... 10A72-2C.7 Simulated (Shunt) Calibration ..... 10A72-2C.7

4. Optional Bridge Completion: Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card

a. Purpose 10A72-2C.9
b. 10CJB-2 Transducer Connections ..... 10A72-2C.9
c. Calibration Calculated Calibration ..... 10A72-2C.11 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ..... 10A72-2C.11 Simulated (Shunt) Calibration ..... 10A72-2C.11 Coarse Zero Offset ..... 10A72-2C.11

- Model 10A73-4 1/2 & 1/4 Bridge Strain Gage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A73-4.1
2. Gage / Transducer Connections 10A73-4.2

a. 1/4-, 1/2-, or Full-Bridge Gage Connections Using a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector .... 10A73-4.4

b. 1/4-, 1/2-, or Full-Bridge Gage Connections Using the Model 10CJB-4 .... 10A73-4.6
c. Full-Bridge Transducer Connections (Without Bridge Completion) 10A73-4.7

1. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Selection of Excitation Level 10A73-4.8
b. Configuration and Calibration ..... 10A73-4.9 Calculated Calibration ..... 10A73-4.9 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ..... 10A73-4.10 Simulated (Shunt) Calibration ..... 10A73-4.10

c. Setting an Initial Zero Offset with the Model 10CJB-4 ...... 10A73-4.12

1. Lead-Wire and Nonlinearity Effects with Quarter-Bridge Strain Gage Configuration 10A73-4.12

a. Preventing the Effects of Lead-Wire Resistance 10A73-4.12
b. Preventing the Effects of Bridge Nonlinearity 10A73-4.14

- Model 10A74-4C Quad Strain Gage Track-Hold Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A74-4C.1

2. Gage / Transducer Connections 10A74-4C.4

a. 1/4-, 1/2-, or Full-Bridge Gage Connections Using a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector .... 10A74-4C.5
b. 1/4-, 1/2-, or Full-Bridge Gage Connections Using the Model 10CJB-4 .... 10A74-4C.7
c. Full-Bridge Transducer Connections (Without Bridge Completion) 10A74-4C.8

1. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Selection of Common Excitation Level 10A74-4C.9
b. Setup of Model 10A1 for Time-Coherent 10A74-4C Data Collection in System 10 .... 10A74-4C.10
c. Configuration and Calibration ..... 10A74-4C.10 EMM-Calculated Calibration ..... 10A74-4C.11 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ..... 10A74-4C.11 Simulated (Shunt) Calibration ..... 10A74-4C.11
d. Setting an Initial Zero Offset with the Model 10CJB-4 ...... 10A74-4C.13
e. Control of 10A74-4C Track/Hold Operation via Logic Input .... 10A74-4C.14

1. Lead-Wire and Nonlinearity Effects with Quarter-Bridge

Strain Gage Configuration 10A74-4C.14

a. Preventing the Effects of Lead-Wire Resistance 10A74-4C.14
b. Preventing the Effects of Bridge Nonlinearity 10A74-4C.16

1. Use of the Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor

with the Model 10A74-4C 10A74-4C.16
Absolute Calibration 10A74-4C.16
Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration 10A74-4C.17

• Model 10A76 Vibration Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A76.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A76.2

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Setting Excitation Level 10A76.3
b. Setting High-Pass Filter Gain 10A76.4
c. Setting Band-Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency 10A76.4
d. Configuration and Calibration 10A76.5

- Model 10A78 AC Strain Gage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A78.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A78.2

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Phase and Symmetry Adjustment for All Transducers Except a Lebow 1800 Series Transducer .... 10A78.5
b. Phase and Symmetry Adjustment for a Lebow 1800 Series Transducer .... 10A78.6
c. Configuration and Calibration ..... 10A78.7 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ..... 10A78.7 Simulated (Shunt) Calibration ..... 10A78.8

- Model 10A96 Amplified Accelerometer Vibration Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications 10A96.1

2. Transducer Connections 10A96.2

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Setting Front-End Amplifier Gain 10A96.3
b. Setting High-Pass Filter Gain 10A96.3
c. Setting Band-Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency 10A96.5

d. Configuration and Calibration 10A96.5

- Model AA14-4F010 Thermocouple Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications .... AA14-4F010.1

2. Transducer Connections ...... AA14-4F010.3

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Selection of "Open TC" Polarity ...... AA14-4F010.4
b. Selection of Analog Output Modes ...... AA14-4F010.6
c. Configuration and Calibration .... AA14-4F010.6 Absolute Calibration .... AA14-4F010.6 Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration .... AA14-4F010.8

1. Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins .... AA14-4F010.8

• Model AA30-4 LVDT Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications .... AA30-4.1
2. Connections

a. Transducer Connections ...... AA30-4.4

b. Connection of External Excitation Source ...... AA30-4.7

1. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Selection of Excitation Source ...... AA30-4.8
b. Selection of Analog Filtering ...... AA30-4.8
c. Selection of Analog Output Modes ...... AA30-4.9
d. Configuration and Calibration ...... AA30-4.10

1. Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins ...... AA30-4.11

- Model AA41-2 / AA41-4 Frequency Input Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications .... AA41-2/4.1

2. Transducer Connections
   a. Standard Cabling ...... AA41-2/4.4
   b. Special Cabling
   Ungrounded Frequency Source ...... AA41-2/4.5
   Elimination of DC Offset ...... AA41-2/4.7
   Suppression of High-Frequency Noise in
   Low-Frequency Input AA41-2/4.7
   c. Pull-Up Resistor ...... AA41-2/4.7

3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations

a. Selection of Input Voltage Range ...... AA41-2/4.7
b. Selection of Analog Filtering ...... AA41-2/4.8
c. Configuration and Calibration ...... AA41-2/4.9
Absolute Calibration ...... AA41-2/4.9
Calculated Calibration ...... AA41-2/4.9
Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ...... AA41-2/4.10

1. Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins ...... AA41-2/4.11

- Model AA72-2 / AA72-4 Strain Gage Conditioner Card

1. General Description and Specifications .... AA72-2/4.1
2. Transducer Connections ...... AA72-2/4.5
3. Setup and/or Operating Considerations
   a. Selection of Excitation Levels ...... AA72-2/4.7
   b. Selection of Analog Filtering ...... AA72-2/4.8
   c. Selection of Analog Output Modes ...... AA72-2/4.9
   d. Configuration and Calibration ...... AA72-2/4.9
   Calculated Calibration ...... AA72-2/4.9
   Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ...... AA72-2/4.10

Simulated (Shunt) Calibration ...... AA72-2/4.10

4. Optional Bridge Completion: Model 10CJB-2

Dual Bridge Completion Card

a. Purpose ...... AA72-2/4.12

b. 10CJB-2 Transducer Connections ...... AA72-2/4.12

c. Calibration

Calculated Calibration ...... AA72-2/4.14

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration ...... AA72-2/4.14

Simulated (Shunt) Calibration ...... AA72-2/4.14

Coarse Zero Offset ...... AA72-2/4.14

1. Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins ...... AA72-2/4.15

1.F SCAN AND TIME SETUP

1. Setting System Base Channel: SBC 1-29

2. Definition of Scan Range 1-29

a. Setting Default Scan Range: TER 1-30

b. Setting Temporary Scan Range: SCN 1-30

c. Flagging Out-of-Scan Channels: VSS 1-31

1. Setting System Time and Date: TME and DTE 1-31

1.G CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS

1. Setup of "Real" (Analog Input) Channels: TYP and LCT 1-33

2. Methods of Calibration 1-34

3. Absolute Calibration

a. CPU-Based Absolute Calibration 1-35

b. Absolute Calibration for a Frequency, Current, or Voltage Channel: EMM 1-36

1. Calculated Calibration

a. Frequency Input Channel: FRQ 1-36

b. Strain Gage Input Channel: MVV 1-36

c. Other Channel Types 1-37

1. Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration: ZRO and FRC 1-37

2. Simulated (Shunt) Calibration: SHP, SHN, and RSM 1-39

1.H FORMATTING AND MANAGEMENT OF STANDARD DATA TRANSMISSIONS

1. Introduction: Types of Transmissions 1-43

2. Specific Transmission Commands 1-45

a. CHANNEL (CHN) Command 1-45

b. DUMP (DMP) Command 1-46

c. SNAPSHOT (SNP) Command 1-46

d. STREAM (STR) and ESCAPE (ESC) Commands 1-47

e. HARD COPY (HCY) Command 1-47

f. LIMIT ZONE (LZN) Command 1-47

1. Formatting of Transmissions

a. Channel-Number "Echo": ECO and NCH 1-48

b. Limit-Zone Indication: LIM and NOL 1-48

c. "Header" and "Tailer" Strings: HDR and TLR 1-49

Use of Header or Tailer to Provide Nonscrolling "Datastream" Display .. 1-50

d. Characters Per Channel: CPC 1-50

e. Columnar Format: CLM 1-51

f. Alternative Line and/or Transmission Termination Specifying Output ("End-of-Line") Terminator: OPT 1-51 Specifying End-of-Transmission Terminator: EOT 1-52

1. Setting Intertransmission Delay: DLY 1-52

SECTION 2

OPTIONAL SYSTEM SETUP PROCEDURES

2.A INTRODUCTION

2.B INTERFACING OF COMPUTER, TERMINAL, PRINTER, ETC.

1. Introduction: The Computer Interface Port

2. RS-232-C Interfacing

a. Connections
b. Setting RS-232-C Interface Protocol
1. Via Menu Setup Program
2. Via Protocol Switches
3. Via BAUD RATE (BAU) Command

c. Verification of RS-232-C Interface Setup

1. Requesting of Current Protocol Settings: BAU Command

2. Verification of Interface

3. Uses of the Optional Model 10C232NET Network Adaptor

a. "Remote" RS-232-C Interfacing
b. "OR" Connection ("Daisy-Chaining") of Two RS-232-C Devices to a Single DataPAC or of two DataPACs to a Single RS-232-C Device
c. Switched Connection of Two RS-232-C Devices to a Single DataPAC or of two DataPACs to a Single RS-232-C Device
d. Connection of More Than Two RS-232-C Devices to a Single DataPAC or of More Than Two DataPACs to a Single RS-232-C Device

1. Optional RS-422 and IEEE-488 Interfacing

a. Converting RS-232-C to RS-422 Via the Model 10E422
b. Converting RS-422 to IEEE-488 Via the Model 10CLB488

1. Setting Command Terminator: CMT Command

a. The Command Terminator
b. Setting Command Terminator for DataPACs Without Keyboard
c. Interrogating for Current Command Terminator

1. Other Computer Communications Features

a. Setting Timeout Response: TMO Command
b. Setting and Transmitting Computer Interrupt: ITR Command
1. Defining an "Interrupt" Character String
2. Initiating the "Interrupt" Transmission
c. "Sending" to the Computer or PC-EGU: SND Command

1. Using the Model 10ESRE Serial Range Extender

Appendix: Modem Communications with a System 10 DataPAC

2.C COMPLETE CRT VIDEO SETUP

1. Setup of Internal CRT

a. Setting "BVS" and "VDU" Values: BVS and VDU Commands
b. Selecting Video Mode: VID Command
c. Setting Screen Refresh Rate: REF Command
d. Flagging Out-of-Scan Channels: VSS Command
e. Adjustment of CRT Controls

2. Video Pages and Directories

a. The Nature of the "Video Page"
b. The Page Directory: DIR Command
c. The Conditional Directory: SHO Command

3. Calling and Interrogation of Video Pages: PAG Command

a. Calling a Video Page for Display
b. Requesting the Number of the Page on Display
c. Requesting the Memory "Size" of a Video Page

4. General Formatting and "Word-Processor" Considerations

a. Specifying Billboard Logo: LGO Comm
b. Character and Page Size

1. Character Sizes

2. Page Size

c. Channel Display Fields

1. Data Field and Video Playback Field

2. Bit-State Field

3. Message Field

d. Cursor Movement: Arrow Keys
e. Repeated Character Entry

f. Insertion and Deletion of Fixed-Text Spaces: Insert and Delete Keys

1. Space Insertion
2. Space Deletion

g. Insertion and Deletion of Display Lines: Insert and Delete Keys with Control

1. Line Insertion
2. Line Deletion

h. Line Duplication: Tilde Key

5. Composing a Page Format

a. Calling a Blank Display
b. Entering Text Editor Mode: Video Format Key
c. Setting Line Size: Height and Width Keys
d. Setting Color or Intensity of Fixed Text within a Line: Color and Background Keys with Shift

1. Setting Text Color within a Line of Color Display
2. Setting Text Intensity within a Line of Monochrome Display

e. Entering and Deleting a Data Field

1. Entering a Data Field within a Line
2. Deleting an "Established" Data Field

f. Entering and Deleting a Bit-State Field

g. Entering and Deleting a Message Field

h. Entering and Deleting a Video Playback Field

i. Entering "Associated" Fixed Text

j. Exiting Text Editor Mode: Exit Key

1. Recalling the Last Formatted Page: RCL Command

2. Storing a Page Format: SAV Command

3. Editing an Existing Video Page

4. Setting "Sign-On" Page: SOP Command

5. Deleting a Video Page from EEPROM Memory: DEL Command

6. Uploading, Downloading, and Revising Video Page Formats

a. Introduction

b. Uploading a Video Page from the DataPAC: VUL Command

c. Downloading a Video Page to the DataPAC: VDL Command

d. Finding the Last Video Uploading/Downloading Error: VEL Command

e. Revising and Transmitting Format Lines: LNE Command

1. Revising a Line of Video page Format

2. Transmitting a Line of Video Page Format

3. Setting Visual Effects for Channel Display Fields

a. "Visual Effects" and "Status"

b. Setting Visual Effects for a Data Field

1. Internal vs. External Control of Data-Field "Status"

2. Internal (Default) Control of Data-Field "Status": VBC, VGT, VBT, and VLT Commands

a. The "BIT CONTROL" STATUS (VBC) Command

b. The "GREATER THAN" STATUS (VGT), "BETWEEN" STATUS (VBT), and "LESS THAN" STATUS (VLT) Commands

1. Temporary External Control of Data-Field "Status": STS Command

2. Setting Visual Effects for Time and Date Channels: VBT Command

c. Setting Visual Effects for a Bit-State Field

1. The Bit-State Display: Designator Pairs

2. Assigning a Designator Pair to a Bit-State Field: BSD Command

3. Specifying a New Designator Pair: BDP Command

d. Setting Text and Visual Effects for a Message Field: MES Command

1. Entering a System Message

2. Specifying New Visual Effects for an Existing Message

e. Setting Visual Effects for a Video Playback Field

2.D DOWNLOADING OF NUMERIC DATA: "CHN=" COMMAND

1. Introduction: System Pseudochannels

2. Setup of Download Pseudochannels

3. Loading One or More Download Pseudochannels with a Fixed Data Value

a. Volatile Download Pseudochannels (Type "D0")

b. Nonvolatile ("Keep-Alive") Pseudochannels (Type "D1")

1. Loading a Volatile Download Pseudochannel with the Reading of Another Data Channel

a. Loading of a Single Channel

b. Loading of a Range of Channels

2.E "LOCKING" AND "UNLOCKING" OF DATA

1. "Locking" One or More Data Channels: LOK Command

2. "Unlocking" One or More "Locked" Channels: UNL Command

2.F LIMITS

1. Introduction: A Limit Setup "Getting Started" Procedure
2. Setting Limit Values: LOL and HIL Commands

a. Setting Fixed Limit Values
b. Setting Variable Limit Values
c. Some Uses of Variable Limit Values

1. Continuous Display of Limit Value

2. Continuous Comparison of Two Data Channels

3. Limit-Zone Indication: LZN, LIM, and NOL Commands

4. Setting "Limit Logic": LLT, LBT, and LGT Commands

2.G SETTING OTHER DATA-CHANNEL PARAMETERS

1. Setting Scaling Factor and Zero Offset: EMM and BEE Commands
2. Setting Digital Filter: FIL Commands
3. Setting Tare Offset: TAR Command

2.H SYSTEM LOGIC BITS

1. Introduction: Bits, Bit Groups, and Logic Sources
2. Assignment of Logic Source: SRC Command

a. "Limit Logic"

1. Latching "Limit Logic"
2. Nonlatching "Limit Logic"

b. Logic Input

c. External Bit Control

1. Temporary ("Run-Time") External Control: BIT, BIN, BCD, and HEX Commands

a. Setting and Reading a Single Bit or a Range of Bits: BIT Command
b. Setting a Bit Group or Range of Bit Groups

1. Setting a Bit Group to Binary Configuration: BIN Command
2. Setting a Bit Group to Binary Coded Decimal Configuration: BCD Command

3. Setting One or More Bit Groups to Hexadecimal Configuration: HEX Command

4. Returning to Previous Logic Source

5. Default to External Control

d. "Special Bit" Assignment
e. "Coprocessor" Logic Sourcing

1. Use of EXECUTE (EXU) Commands to Set Multiple Logic Sources
2. Releasing a Latched Bit: RLS Command
3. Disabling the Reading of System Bits: NOB and BTS Commands

Appendix: Software Enabling of EEPROM Write Protect Switch

2.1 KEYBOARD "PROMPT" FUNCTIONS: KEY COMMAND

2.J CROSS-CHANNEL CALCULATIONS: CLC COMMAND

1. Setup of Calculate Pseudochannels
2. Resetting of "MAX" and "MIN" Channels: "CHN=" Command
3. Examples of the CALCULATE (CLC) Command

a. Specific Gravity Correction of Flow Measurement
b. Temperature-Scale Conversion
c. Cable Diameter Measurement
d. Calculation of Horsepower
e. Calculation of Power Factor

1. Cancelling a Calculate Pseudochannel: RST Command

2.K AUTOMATIC COMMAND EXECUTION: EXU AND CMD COMMANDS

1. Introduction
2. The EXECUTE (EXU) Command

a. Form and Use of the EXU Command
b. Examples of the EXU Command
c. Redefinition of "Execute Base Group": XBG Command
d. Monitoring Execute Command Queues: CSB and PSB Commands
e. Powerup Delay of Execute Functions: EXM Command
f. Disabling All Execute Functions: NOB and BTS Commands

1. The COMMAND (CMD) Command

a. Specifying Conditional Bits: CDL Command
b. Examples of Conditional Statements
c. Display of Conditional Statements: SHO Command
d. Form and Use of the COMMAND (CMD) Command

2.L LINEARIZATION OF DATA CHANNELS: LIN COMMAND

1. System 10 Custom Linearization
2. The LINEARIZE (LIN) Command

a. Setting Up a "Real" Linearization Channel
b. Setting Up a "Pseudochannel" Linearization Channel
3. Cancelling a Linearization Channel: RST Command

2.M INTERNAL COUNTER/TIMER FUNCTIONS

1. Event Counting Via Download Pseudochannel: INC and DEC Commands
2. Time-Interval Counting Via Timer Pseudochannel
3. Use of Timer Commands for "A-Sized" DataPACs: TMR and TBT Commands

2.N VIDEO INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

1. Introduction
2. Standard VGA Input / Output (Models 10KN3, 10KN6, 10KN8A)
3. Model 10KN7 Video Outputs

a. Monochrome (RS-170)

b. RGB Color (CGA)

2.O OPERATOR CONSOLE: MODEL 10CCONB

2.P BACKUP PROVISIONS

1. Introduction
2. Backup Storage of Channel Setup Configuration: CON Command
3. Backup Storage of Channel Calibration Constants: EMM and BEE Commands
4. Backup Storage of Video Page Formats: VUL, VDL, and LNE Commands

2.Q LCD GRAPHICS

NOTE: This manual section applies only to older LCD-display mainframes and accessories (Models 10K2C, 10K4T-D, 10LCD12A, and 10LCD12-2) equipped with the "G" Option.

1. Setup of LCD Graphics

a. Selecting Page Type: PGT Commands
b. Setup of an "XY" Page

1. Defining Page List: PGL Command
2. Setting Graph Scales: GRX and GRY Commands
3. Setting Graph Legends: LEG Command

c. Setup of a "Strip-Chart" Page

1. Defining Recorder List: LST Command
2. Defining Page List: PGL Command
3. Setting Graph Scales: GRX, GRY, and GRZ Commands
4. Setting Channel x Legend: LEG Command
5. Setting Recording Interval: INT Command
6. Setting "Strip-Chart" Display/Recorder Mode: GZL and GZR Commands

a. "Zero Left" Mode

b. "Zero Right" Mode

1. LCD Graphics Operation

a. Clearing a Displayed "XY" Graph: GCL Command
b. Raising and Lowering Graph "Pens": PEN Command

1. Control of "XY" Pen
2. Control of "Strip-Chart" Pens

c. "Pen Off-Screen" Indication
d. "Strip-Chart" Recorder Control

1. Clearing the Recorder: REC Command
2. Halting the Recorder: REH Command
3. Restarting the Recorder: RES Command

e. "Strip-Chart" Depth Interrogation: DPT Command

f. Manual Scrolling of "Strip-Chart" Pages in "Zero Left" Mode:

Arrow and Home Keys

2.R FRONT-PANEL KEYPAD OPERATIONS

1. Introduction

2. "CLEAR," "ENTER," "ARROWS," and "FUNCTION" Keys

a. The "CLEAR" and "ENTER" Keys

b. The "ARROW" Keys

c. The "FUNCTION" Key

3. Channel Interrogation

4. Channel Configuration

5. Bit Interrogation and Setting

a. Bit Interrogation

b. Setting a Bit

6. Logic Configuration

7. DataPAC Configuration

a. General Analog Configuration

b. General Logic Configuration

8. Port Configuration

2.S OPTIONAL OPERATOR'S KEYBOARDS: MODELS 10P25A AND 10P25D

1. Introduction

2. Keyboard Functions

a. "Key" Prompts: "FNCTN" Key

b. LCD Billboard "Scroll": "ARROW" Keys

c. Clearing LCD Billboard: "CLEAR" Key

d. Channel Interrogation: "CHAN" and "STEP" Keys

e. Bit Interrogation: "BIT" and "STEP" Keys

f. Bit Setting: "BIT" and "EQUALS" Keys

g. Calling a Video Page to Display: "PAGE" Key

SECTION 3

OPTIONAL PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC CARDS

3.A SPECIAL "A-CARD" FUNCTIONS

3.A.1 COUNTER/TIMER FUNCTIONS: MODEL 10ACT01 AND MODEL 10ACC-4

a. Introduction: Counter/Timer Modes of Operation

b. Model 10ACT01 Setup

1. 10ACT01 Connections

a. General Considerations

b. Suppression of Noise in Low-Frequency Input

c. Pull-Up Resistor

1. 10ACT01 Configuration

a. Setting 10ACT01 Mode: TYP Command
b. Setting Range and Resolution: RNG Command
c. Setting Input-Amplifier Sensitivity: SEN Command
d. "Slaving" of Multiple 10ACT01's

c. Model 10ACT01 Operation

1. Incrementing the Count: INC Command
2. Counter/Timer Control
   a. Holding the Count/Time Value: COH Command
   b. Updating the Count/Time Value: COU Command
   c. Resetting the Counter/Timer: COR Command
   d. Clearing the Counter/Timer: COC Command
3. Disabling and Enabling External Input During Timer Operation: EID and EIE Commands

d. Model 10ACC-4 Setup and Operation

1. 10ACC-4 Connections
2. 10ACC-4 Configuration
   a. Setting Range and Resolution: RNG Command
   b. Setting "Debounce" Time
3. Incrementing the Count: INC Command
4. Counter Control: COH, COU, COR, and COC Commands

3.A.2 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT OUTPUTS: MODEL 10AAO-8 AND MODEL 10CAI-8

a. Introduction

b. Setup of ±5-Volt Outputs

1. Model 10AAO-8 Connections
2. Configuration of Analog Output Channels
   a. Setting Channel Type: ANO Command
   b. Setting Channel Location: LCT Command
3. Setting Analog Output "Source": ANO Command
   a. Setting Analog Output Equal to a Fixed Millivolt Value
   b. Setting Analog Output as a Function of a System Data Channel
   c. Interrogating for "Source" and Value of an Analog Output
   d. Cancelling an Analog Output: RST Command

c. Setup of 4-20 mA and ± 10-Volt Outputs: Model 10CAI-8 Buffer Interface

1. 10CAI-8 Connections
2. Programming of 10CAI-8 Outputs

3.A.3 LOGIC AND DIGITAL I/O: MODEL 10AIO-16

a. Introduction
b. 10AIO-16 Connections

c. Setup of Logic I/O Ports

1. 10AIO-16 Initialization: ASL Command
2. Specifying Logic Inputs: SRC Command
3. Specifying Logic Outputs

d. Indication of Logic I/O Port Activity

e. Digital I/O

3.A.4 ANALOG PEAK CAPTURE: MODEL 10A79-4

a. Introduction: 10A79-4 Inputs and Outputs for Analog Peak Capture

b. Peak-Capture Setup

1. 10A79-4 Connections
   a. Connection of Analog Inputs
   b. Connection of Logic Inputs
   c. Connection of Analog Outputs
2. Setting Channel Mode
3. Configuring 10A79-4 Subchannels
4. Calibrating 10A79-4 Subchannels: TYP and CCH Commands

c. Peak-Capture Operation

1. "Tracking" the Analog Input
2. "+ Peak" Capture
3. "- Peak" Capture
4. Holding a "+ Peak" or "- Peak" Subchannel without Decay: CLC Command

3.A.5 ANALOG "MAX MINUS MIN" FUNCTION: MODEL 10A79-4

a. The 10A79-4 "MAX-MIN" Subchannel
b. "MAX-MIN" Setup

1. 10A79-4 Connections

2. Setting Channel Mode

3. Configuring and Calibrating "MAX-MIN" Subchannels

c. "MAX-MIN" Operation

1. "Tracking" the Analog Input
2. "MAX-MIN" Measurement
3. Inversion of "MAX-MIN" Polarity: EMM Command
4. Holding a "MAX-MIN" Subchannel without Decay: LOK and UNL Commands

3.A.6 ANALOG "TRACK AND HOLD" FUNCTION: MODEL 10A79-4

a. "Track and Hold" Outputs and Subchannels
b. "Track and Hold" Setup

1. 10A79-4 Connections

2. Setting Channel Mode

3. Setting "Track and Hold" Outputs and Subchannels

4. Configuring and Calibrating "Track and Hold" Subchannels

c. "Track and Hold" Operation

1. "Tracking" and "Holding" the Analog Input
2. "Holding" a Subchannel without Decay: LOK and UNL Commands

3.A.7 BUFFERING OF ANALOG SIGNALS: MODEL 10A79-4 AND MODEL 10AAO-4

a. Unscaled Analog Buffering with the Model 10A79-4
b. Scaled Analog Buffering with the Model 10AAO-4

1. Introduction

2. Setup of 10AAO-4 Outputs

a. Connection of Analog Inputs
b. Setting Output Configuration
c. Setting Output Gain Values
d. Adjusting Output Zero and Span

3.A.8 BUFFER STORAGE OF DATA OUTPUTS: MODEL 10AFIFO

a. Introduction

b. Model 10AFIFO Setup

1. Software EEPROM Enable: BIT Command
2. 10AFIFO Connections
3. Setup of 10AFIFO-10ACP100 Interface
   a. Setting Protocol for the DataPAC's Computer Interface Port
   b. Setting Output and End-of-Transmission Terminators for the DataPAC's Computer Interface Port: OPT and EOT Commands
4. Setup of FIFO Computer Port
   a. Setting Protocol
   b. Setting Command, Output, and End-of-Transmission Terminators for the FIFO Computer Port: CMT, OPT, and EOT Commands
5. Setting 10AFIFO Input Mode: DDI and NDI Commands
6. Setting 10AFIFO Output Mode: XEN and XDS Commands

c. Model 10AFIFO Operation

1. Initiating Data Transmissions in "Gated" Output Mode
   a. Destructive Data Output: DDO Command
   b. Nondestructive Data Output: NDO Command
2. Halting and Restarting 10AFIFO Transmissions
3. Bypassing the 10AFIFO Main Memory: BYP Command
4. Reaccessing 10AFIFO Memory: RFM Command
5. Clearing 10AFIFO Memory: FCL Command
6. Interrogating for Input/Output Mode: MOD Command
7. Checking Data Integrity: CSF Command

3.A.9 PID LOOP CONTROL: MODEL 10APID

a. Introduction

b. Model 10APID Subchannels

c. Model 10APID Setup

1. Setting Clamp Limit Values
2. Setting Proportional (P) Mode
3. Setting Initial "P," "I," and "D" Values for "Fixed P" Operation
4. Setting Initial "P," "I," and "D" Values for "Variable P" Operation

5. Setup of Command and Response Inputs
   a. Setting Input Modes
   b. Setup and Display of Digital Input(s)
   c. Connection of Analog Input(s)

6. Enabling the Integrator

7. Setup of 10APID Outputs
   a. Connection of Analog Command, Response, and Error-Signal Outputs b. Setup and Display of Digital Error-Signal Output

8. Tuning the Control Loop

3.B SPECIAL "B-CARD" FUNCTIONS

3.B.1 "ATTACHING" A DATAPAC COMMAND SOURCE TO A SPECIFIC B CARD: ATT, DET, AND VIA COMMANDS

3.B.2 LOGIC AND DIGITAL I/O: MODEL 10BIO-16

a. Introduction
b. 10BIO-16 Connections
c. Setup of Logic I/O Ports

1. 10BIO-16 Initialization: BSL Command
2. Specifying Logic Inputs: SRC Command
3. Specifying Logic Outputs

d. Indication of Logic I/O Activity

e. Digital I/O

1. Binary Output: BIN, HEX, and CCH Commands
   a. Binary Output to Represent a Fixed Decimal Value
   b. Binary Output to Represent a Fixed Hexadecimal Value
   c. Binary Output to Represent the Value of a Data Channel
   d. Cancelling the BIN Command: BIT Command

2. Binary Input: "CHN=" and HEX Commands

a. Reading the Decimal Value of a Binary Input
b. Reading the Hexadecimal Value of a Binary Input

1. BDC Output: BCD and CCH Commands

a. BCD Output to Represent a Fixed Decimal Value
b. BCD Output to Represent the Value of a Data Channel
c. Cancelling the BCD Command: BIT Command

1. BCD Input: "CHN=" Command

3.B.3 SATELLITE NETWORK SYSTEMS: MODEL 10BD4 AND MODEL 10BD1

a. Introduction

1. The Satellite Network
2. Types of Satellites
3. Synopsis of Satellite Setup Procedure
4. Satellite Card Status Indicators

b. Satellite Network Setup

1. Setting Command Terminator for "A-Sized" DataPAC Satellites: CMT Command
2. Assigning Satellite Numbers: ASN Command

a. Assigning Satellite Number to the Host
b. Assigning Satellite Numbers to Satellites

1. Network Interconnections

2. Setting Interface Protocol for "A-Sized" DataPAC Satellites

3. Setting Up "Global" Data Channels

a. Setting Host and Satellite Scan Ranges: TER and SCN Commands
b. Dedicating Global Channels to DataPAC Satellites and to the Host: SAT Command
c. Setting an "A-Sized" DataPAC Satellite to "Hear" Global Channels Not Dedicated to that Satellite: DLC and TYP Commands

d. Setting a "B-Sized" DataPAC Satellite to "Hear" Global Channels Not Dedicated to that Satellite: LCT and RST Commands

1. Setting Up "Global" Logic Bits

a. Dedicating Global Bit Groups to DataPAC Satellites and to the Host: SSB Command
b. Setting an "A-Sized" DataPAC Satellite to "Hear" Global Logic Bits Not Dedicated to that Satellite: DLB and SRC Commands
c. Setting a "B-Sized" DataPAC Satellite to "Hear" Global Logic Bits Not Dedicated to that Satellite: SRC and NOB Commands

1. Setting Host and Satellites for Local Data Acquisition and for Display of Global Data

2. Setting Satellite "Execute Base Groups": XBG Command

c. Satellite Network Operation

1. Introduction: Global Commands
2. Requesting the "Location" of a Global Data Channel from Any "B-Sized" DataPAC Node: LCT Command
3. Requesting the "Logic Source" of a Global Logic Bit from Any "B-Sized" DataPAC Node: SRC Command
4. Disabling the "Implicit Addressing" of Global Commands from a "B-Sized" DataPAC Node: GBL Command

5. "Explicit" Routing of Global Commands
   a. "Opening" a Direct Command Route Between Any Two Network Nodes: OPN Command
   b. Routing a Single Command Between Any Two DataPAC Nodes: NOD Command

6. Communications Diagnosis

a. Requesting Error Log: SEL Command

b. Resetting Error Log: REL Command

Appendix: Considerations for Altering an Existing Satellite Network

3.B.4 DIGITAL "HISTORY" RECORDING AND PLAYBACK: MODEL 10BDR64 AND ACCESSORIES

Note on New History Card Products

a. Introduction

1. The History Card
2. "Frames" and "Depth"
3. History Card Status Indicators

b. History Memory and Time Considerations

1. Calculating Recorder Memory Volume
2. Optional Extension of History Memory
3. Initiating Nonvolatile History Memory: NVH Command
4. "Clearing" and "Erasing" History Memory
   a. The HISTORY CLEAR (HCL) Command
   b. Other Memory-Clearing Commands: LST and DPT Commands
   c. "True Erasure" of History Memory: NVH Command
5. Requesting Total History Memory: MEM Command

c. Installation of the History Card Set

d. History Card Setup

1. Introduction
2. Entering Setup Mode: SMD Command

3. Listing Variables to Be Recorded: LST Command

4. Setting Recorder Depth: DPT

5. Specifying "Store" Conditions: STO Command

a. The STORE (STO) Command

b. STO Mnemonics

1. Data-Channel Limit Status: ZGT, ZLT, and ZVO

2. Logic State of System Bit: BIT

3. Logic-State Transition of System Bit: BGL and BGH

4. Time Interval: INT

c. Examples of the STO Command

1. Specifying "Halt" Conditions: HLT Command

2. Setting Halt Depth: HDP Command

3. Defining Playback Pseudochannels: PLA Command

a. Introduction: "Normal" and "Video" Playback Pseudochannels

b. The PLAYBACK (PLA) Command and Related "Run-Time" Commands (ZUM, FRZ, RPL)

c. Special Video Playbacks: Serial Number, Time, and Date

d. Statistical Playbacks: Model 10BSPC

1. "Continuous" Statistical Playbacks: Average, Maximum, and Minimum

2. "Industry Standard" Statistical Playbacks: X-BAR and Range

e. Resetting "X-BAR" and "Range" Playbacks: RSP Command

f. Cancelling Playback Assignments: PLA and RST Commands

1. Setting Up Playback of System Bit Groups: CHN, PLA, CCH, and BIN Commands

2. Formatting Recorder Outputs: IMA Command

e. History Card Operation

1. Introduction

2. Entering Record Mode: RMD Command

a. The RECORD MODE (RMD) Command

b. Automatic Entry of RMD Following Powerup in "Nonvolatile History" Mode

1. Resetting Serial Number: RSN Command

a. Resetting Next Frame to Zero

b. Resetting Next Frame to an Integral Number

1. Requesting Current Halt Status: CHS Command

2. Restarting a Halted Recorder: STH Command

3. "Emptying" and "Reaccessing" History Memory

a. The EMPTY (EMP) Command

b. The REACCESS HISTORY MEMORY (RHM) Command

1. "Dumping" History Memory: HDU Command

a. Frame Numbering

b. The HISTORY DUMP (HDU) Command

1. Playback Time Search

a. The ZOOM (ZUM) Command

b. "Zooming" a Data Set

c. "Freezing" the Search Frame: FRZ Command

1. History Replay: RPL Command

a. Initiating and Terminating Replays

b. Monitoring Replays: ZUM Command

3.B.5 AUXILIARY COMPUTER INTERFACE: MODEL 10BACIA

Note on New "BACI" Products

a. Introduction

b. Model 10BACI System Status Indicators

c. Setup of the Auxiliary Computer Interface

1. The ATTACH (ATT) and DETACH (DET) Commands
2. ACI Cabling
3. Setting ACI Protocol: BAU Command
4. Setting ACI Command Terminator: CMT Command
5. ACI Output Formatting
6. Setting Other ACI Communications Features
7. ACI "Local" Channels and Bits
   a. Locating "Off-Board" Volatile Download Pseudochannels to the 10BACI: LCT and RST Commands
   b. Sourcing Logic Bits to the 10BACI: SRC Command

d. Operation of the Auxiliary Computer Interface

1. Designating the Default Communications Port: COM Command
2. Routing Single Commands to an ACI: VIA Command

3.B.5 Supplement No. 1: Model 10BACIA New Features

1. Ensuring 10BACIA/Central Processor Compatibility: BCP Command
2. Transmitting a Time-Coherent Data "Frame": FCH Command
3. The MTC Command
4. Response to DSD Command

3.B.5 Supplement No. 2: Model 10BACI-422

1. Introduction
2. Ensuring 10BACI-422/Central Processor Compatibility: BCP Command
3. Setup of the RS-422 Auxiliary Computer Interface
4. Transmitting a Time-Coherent Data "Frame": FCH Command
5. Setting Up the Master Timing Clock: CLK and MTC Commands
6. Response to DSD Command

3.B.5 Supplement No. 3: Model 10BACI-488

1. Introduction
2. Ensuring 10BACI-488/Central Processor Compatibility: BCP Command
3. Connections
4. Setting System 10 IEEE-488 Bus Address
5. 10BACI-488 Mnemonic Commands (ADD and EOI)
6. "FP" (Floating Point) Commands: FPF and FDM

3.B.5 Supplement No. 4: 10BACI "Floating Point" Option

1. Introduction
2. Setting the Floating-Point Format
3. Initiating a Floating-Point Output
4. Floating-Point Output Formats

3.C SPECIAL "V-CARD" FUNCTIONS

3.C.1 INSTALLATION OF OPTIONAL "V CARDS"

a. DataPAC Models 10K3, 10K6, and 10K7
b. DataPAC Models 10K6E and 10K8

3.C.2 EXTENDED VIDEO MEMORY (WITHOUT BARGRAPH): MODEL 10VMO500

3.C.3 FORMATTABLE PRINTER OUTPUT: MODEL 10VFO132

a. Introduction
b. Printer Interface Setup

1. Connections
2. Setting RS-232-C Interface Protocol: PBR Command
3. Setting Intercharacter Delay: ICD Command
4. Setting Printer Type: PTY Command

c. Printing Video Pages

1. Printing the Page Directory: CAT Command
2. The PRINT PAGE (PRI) Command

a. Printing a Selected Video Page or Range of Pages
b. Printing the Currently Displayed Video Page
c. Transmitting a Carriage Return
3. Clearing a "Queue" of Video Pages: CLQ Command

d. Formatting of Page Printouts

1. Specifying "End of Line" Control Character(s): EOL Command
2. Specifying "End of Page" Control Character(s): EOP Command
3. Suppression of Blank Lines: BLS Command

e. Printing Channel Data

1. The PRINT CHANNEL DATA (PRT) Command
2. Specifying Default Header and Tailer Pages: DHT Command

f. Formatting of Channel-Data Printouts

1. Setting Channels Per Line: CPL Command
2. Defining Format "Template": TMP Command

3.C.4 VIDEO BARGRAPH DISPLAY: MODEL 10VGM500

a. Introduction
b. Setting "BVS" Number: BVS Command
c. Establishing a Bargraph in a Video Page Format

d. Other Bargraph Operations

1. Viewing and Modifying Bargraph Parameters
2. Deleting a Bargraph
3. Setting Visual Effects for a Bargraph
4. Printout of Bargraph Pages: PTY and PRI Commands

NOTE: This manual section applies only to older "T" versions of the Model 10KN6 Mainframe (10KN6T, 10KN6-2T, 10KN6-3T, and 10KN6-4T).

a. Introduction: BVT Command
b. Touchscreen Setup

1. Setting Touchscreen Type: TST Command
2. Enabling the Touchscreen: BON and BOF Commands
3. Recalibrating the Touchscreen: CAL Command

c. Establishing Display Buttons

1. Setting Button "Duration" Period
2. Setting Button "Conditionals"
3. Setting Button "Executes"

d. Highlighting and Disabling Buttons on a Page

1. Setting Button Highlight Color: BFC Command
2. Highlighting Page Buttons: SBL Command
3. Disabling Page Buttons: CLS Command

SECTION 4

ALPHABETICAL DIRECTORY OF SYSTEM 10 MNEMONIC COMMANDS

4.A INTRODUCTION
4.B COMMAND DIRECTORY

SECTION 5

GENERAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

5.A INTRODUCTION

1. System Diagnosis and Repair

5.B POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS

1. Powerup Problems
2. Data-Channel Problems
3. Logic-Bit Problems
4. Video Problems
5. Communications Problems
6. History Card Problems
7. Auxiliary Computer Interface Problems

5.C OPTIONAL DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS

1. Model 10AEX-20 "A Card" Extender Board
2. Model 10AST Analog Slot Test Card

b. Displaying Test Signals as Data Channels

1. Models 10AHM and 10BDHM Health Monitor Cards

a. Introduction

b. Installation and Configuration

c. 10AHM/10BDHM Subchannels

APPENDICES

[A] SYSTEM 10 DATA SHEET
[NOTE: This section will be included within the Guidebook itself only when a printed version is supplied.]
[B] [NOTE: This appendix has been superseded by the current Guidebook Section 1.B ("Card Insertion and Removal"), and has been removed.]
C DATA-CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION: TYP, LCT, AND RST COMMANDS

1. Uses of the RESET (RST) Command
2. Data-Channel Reconfiguration
3. System 10 Channel TYPE Codes

[D] [NOTE: This appendix has been superseded by material in the current Guidebook Section 1.A.3.a ("Mainframe Powerup, AC Operation"), and has been removed.]

E "REBOOTING" THE SYSTEM

H L INEARIZATION TECHNIQUES

L.1 BINARY TRANSMISSION MNEMONICS

1. The DUMP SYSTEM DATA (DSD) Command
2. The DUMP SYSTEM FIELD DATA (DSF) Command
3. The DUMP SYSTEM BIT DATA (DSB) Command
4. The DUMP SYSTEM MESSAGE (DSM) Command

N PER-CHANNEL PROCESSING SPEEDS

1. Introduction
2. Overview of the 10BCP200 Scan Cycle
3. Comparison of "System 10" and "System 10/2000" Processing Speed
4. Calculation of Scan Rate

DAYTRONIC

SB.2

GETTING YOUR

SYSTEM 10

ON THE AIR

FOR "A-SIZED" MAINFRAMES

Interior view of an electronic device showing exposed circuit board and internal components (no text or symbols visible)

Copyright © 1996, 2001 Daytronic Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reprinted, reproduced, or used in any form or by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, including photocopying and recording, or in any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Daytronic Corporation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

GETTING YOUR

SYSTEM 10

ON THE AIR

FOR "A-SIZED" MAINFRAMES

CONTENTS

1 Introduction a. The Purpose of This Booklet .... 1

b. "A-Sized" Mainframes and Extended Keyboards .... 1
c. If You Need Help.... 2

2 Physical Layout 3

3 Powerup 6
4 Keyboard Connection and Initialization 6
5 LCD/VFD Data Display Setup 7
6 Setup of Analog Inputs: Transducer Cabling 9
7 Data Channel Configuration 11
8 Setting System Scan Range 13
9 Setting System Time and Date 14

10 Data Channel Calibration 14
11 Setup of Cross-Channel Calculations 16
12 Setup of Logic Bits and Logic Ports a. "Sourcing" of Logic Bits .... 18 b. Initialization of Optional Model 10AIO-16 .... 19
13 Limit Setup 20
14 Setup of EXECUTE Functions 23
15 Setting Data-Transmission Characteristics 25
16 Communication with External Devices a. Introduction: System 10 Communication Modes ..... 26 b. Setup of RS-232-C Communications ..... 27 c. Optional IEEE-488 Communications ..... 27 d. Optional RS-422 Communications ..... 27
17 Mainframe Keypad Functions 28
18 Further Optional Procedures 29
App. A Summary of A-Sized Mainframe Features 30

1

INTRODUCTION

1.a THE PURPOSE OF THIS BOOKLET

Working for the first time with an instrument system as comprehensive and versatile as the Daytronic "System 10" can be a bit overwhelming. There are so many interrelated functions the system can be made to perform—functions for data collection, display, processing, communications, reporting, and process control. And there are so many critical setup procedures, all depending on the exact requirements of your particular measurement and control application.

All users agree that System 10 is comparatively easy to set up and run. Nonetheless, we realize that even the most technically competent first users could do with a little help. The purpose of this booklet is to familiarize you with the basic setup procedures required for proper system operation. To keep things on as simple a level as possible, we will not discuss a number of additional—and strictly optional—procedures. These are all treated in detail in your System 10 Guidebook.

By walking you step-by-step through the basic system setup, this booklet will help you get your system “on the air” as quickly as possible, without initially burdening you with “all the details.”

You'll probably want to read this booklet before you open your System 10 Guidebook. However, having done so, and having carefully performed all the tutorials given here, don't neglect to study the Guidebook itself! This is not a "short-form manual," but rather a simplified presentation of selected—but "basic"—setup procedures, along with some essential background information. Its only purpose is to GET YOU STARTED.

1.b "A-SIZED" MAINFRAMES AND EXTENDED KEYBOARDS

There are two basic types of System 10 mainframes: "A-sized" and "B-sized." This booklet treats only A-sized mainframes. Each A-sized mainframe contains a single rack for plug-in "A Cards" only. "A Cards" include all basic System 10 SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARDS, as well as certain SPECIAL FUNCTION CARDS. These include cards for Analog Outputs, Logic Inputs and Outputs, Analog Peak Capture and Hold, FIFO Buffer Memory, PID Loop Control, and Diagnostic Testing.* Features of all presently manufactured A-sized System 10 mainframes are summarized in Appendix A of this booklet.

The procedures in this booklet require that you issue appropriate mnemonic commands to your system. Such commands may be issued either "locally" or "remotely." You issue commands "locally" by typing them on an EXTENDED KEYBOARD connected to your mainframe. You issue commands "remotely" by using an EXTERNAL COMPUTER OR TERMINAL to deliver them via the mainframe's Computer Interface Port.** Note that some A-sized mainframes are supplied with a Model 10P80A Extended Keyboard, while for other mainframes, a keyboard—either the Model 10P80A or the Model 10P80D—is optional.

The Model 10P80D Extended Keyboard has a 2-line LCD "billboard" for display of command entries, system interrogation responses, and standard system prompting messages. It also has the special "keypad" setup and interrogation features of the 10KU-KD and 10K4T-KD mainframes (discussed Section 17 of this booklet and in Section 2.R of the System 10 Guidebook). Note also that the handheld Models 10P25A and 10P25D Operator's Keyboards can be used with A-sized mainframes to perform a limited number of "run-time" operations, as described in Section 2.S of the System 10 Guidebook.

FOR ALL PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN THIS BOOKLET, IT IS ASSUMED THAT YOU ARE USING AN EXTENDED KEYBOARD FOR LOCAL MANUAL ENTRY OF SETUP AND INTERROGATION COMMANDS. REMEMBER, HOWEVER, THAT YOU CAN JUST AS EASILY ENTER ALL COMMANDS GIVEN IN THIS BOOKLET THROUGH AN EXTERNAL COMPUTER OR TERMINAL, ONCE RS-232 LINKAGE THROUGH THE COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT HAS BEEN PROPERLY ESTABLISHED. For "remote" command entry, the easy-to-use TERMINAL program is included in the StartPAC V software supplied with your mainframe—although any conventional terminal emulation package will also work.

If your mainframe does not have an extended keyboard, you will have to enter all commands "remotely." In this case, you will need to set up your mainframe's Computer Interface Port before any other procedures are performed. Turn now to Section 2.B of your System 10 Guidebook and follow the interface setup instructions given there.

1.c IF YOU NEED HELP...

If at any time you need assistance in getting your System 10 "on the air"—or if problems arise at any later time—feel free to call our CUSTOMER SERVICES DEPARTMENT at

[phone]

FAX: [phone]

TOLL-FREE: [phone]

during normal business hours (Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). Or you can EMAIL us at

[e-mail]

New Windows®-based

System 10 Configurator Software for "A-Sized" Systems may now be ordered free of charge from daytronic.com

Employing the run-time version of Microsoft® Access 2000, this program lets you define, store, edit, download, and manage any number of "A-sized" configurations (only). This convenient utility will save a great deal of time and effort when it comes to setting up the system. And it provides complete backup security if an existing configuration ever needs to be reloaded.

A sequence of easy-to-use screens with complete context-sensitive HELP steps you through the entire setup process—all the way from selecting and "locating" the plug-in cards that go into the mainframe to "live" calibration of individual analog input channels, based on an appropriate user-selected method. Visit daytronic.com for complete details.

DO NOT PLUG IN YOUR MAINFRAME JUST YET.

Study the appropriate front- and rear-view drawings below to familiarize yourself with your mainframe's most important physical elements. Be sure that you know the locations of your particular mainframe's

• A Slots and A Cards, including Central Processor/Interface Card, if present (internal)
• System Status Indicators (visible from the front)
  • Power Connector, Fuse, and ON/OFF Switch (rear panel)
  • Voltage Selector Switch (rear panel)
• Plug-In Keyboard Connector (front or rear panel, depending on model)
  • Computer Interface Connector (rear panel)
  • RS-232 Protocol Switches (internal or rear panel, depending on model)
• EEPROM Write Protect Switch (internal or rear panel, depending on model)

NOTE: To access the EEPROM Write Protect Switch and RS-232 Protocol Switches of a mainframe of the "10K1/10K2" family, you will have to remove the front bezel by gently prying it off the snap-on posts that secure it to the mainframe. For the other A-sized mainframes, there is no reason to remove the front bezel (you would have to unscrew it anyway), unless you need to add, remove, or "swap" A Cards.

Shown in Fig. 2.4 is the Extended Keyboard you will use to set up your system. The only difference in appearance between the 10P80A and 10P80D keyboards is that the latter incorporates a 2-line LCD (“BILLBOARD”) for display of command entries, system interrogation responses, and standard system prompting messages.

Fig. 2.1.a "10KU" Mainframe Front Elements

"A SLOT" No. 4 Actuating Lever System Status Indicators "A SLOT" No. 1 Optional "A Cards" LCD Connector (for 10KU versions with display) Screws for Removal of Front Panel Front-Panel Two-Line LCD Display (Model 10KU-KD only) Front-Panel Keypad (Model 10KU-KD only)

Fig. 2.1.b "10KU" Mainframe Rear Elements Power ON/OFF Switch Fuse AC Power Connector Voltage Selector Switch Plug-In Keyboard Connector EEPROM Write Protect Switch Interface Protocol Switches Panel-Mount Slide "A Card" I/O Connectors (for connection of transducers and control I/O) Computer Interface Connector

Fig. 2.2.a "10K1/10K2" Mainframe Front Elements

Central Processor/Interface Card (Interface Protocol Switches are mounted on this board) EEPROM Write Protect Switch System Status Indicators Snap-On Front Bezel Post "A SLOT" No. 1 Optional "A Cards" "A SLOT" No. 20 Actuating Lever LCD / VFD Connector (Model 10K2C / 10K2D only) Larger cutout on 10K1C and 10K2C only Front-Panel Large-Scale LCD / VFD Display (Model 10K2C / 10K2D only) Plug-In Keyboard Connector Power ON/OFF Switch Fuse Removable "A Slot" Connector Cover AC Power Connector Voltage Selector Switch Computer Interface Connector "A Card" I/O Connectors (for connection of transducers and control I/O) Fig. 2.2.b "10K1/10K2" Mainframe Rear Elements

"A SLOT" No. 10 Actuating Lever "A SLOT" No. 1 System Status Indicators LCD / VFD Connector (for 10K4T versions with display) Optional "A Cards"

Fig. 2.3.a "10K4T" Mainframe Front Elements

Screws for Removal of Front Panel Front-Panel Large-Scale LCD / VFD Display (Model 10K4T-D / 10K4T-DA only) Front-Panel Two-Line LCD Display (Model 10K4T-KD only) Front-Panel Keypad (Model 10K4T-KD only)

Power ON/OFF Switch Fuse AC Power Connector Voltage Selector Switch Plug-In Keyboard Connector EEPROM Write Protect Switch Interface Protocol Switches Computer Interface Connector Panel-Mount Slide "A Card" I/O Connectors (for connection of transducers and control I/O)

Fig. 2.3.b "10K4T" Mainframe Rear Elements

3

POWERUP

a. IMPORTANT: Before powering it up, make sure your mainframe is set for the local line voltage (nominal 110 or 220 V-AC). Check the Voltage Selector Switch on the rear panel. If you need to change the voltage setting, see Section 1.A.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.
b. IMPORTANT: Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect Switch is OFF (downward position) before you power up your mainframe and before you turn it off. You should always take this precaution in order to avoid sporadic writes to the EEPROM and other possible EEPROM problems.
c. Plug the power cord supplied with your mainframe into the rear-panel AC Power Connector. Plug the other end of the cord into your primary power source.*
d. Turn on the mainframe by depressing the top half of the rear-panel ON/OFF switch. The four front-panel System Status Indicators labelled ERR, CHR, MNE, and RET should all light for about one second, and then go off, to verify proper system powerup. If your mainframe has an integral multichannel LCD or VFD display, it will normally display Page Format No. 1 (Channels 1 through 12 with legends of "MVV") when first powered up. The display "billboard"—whether on the mainframe or a connected 10P80D keyboard—will show your company's name, or other prespecified alphanumeric "logo."

4

KEYBOARD CONNECTION

AND INITIALIZATION

a. Plug the free terminal of your keyboard's connector cord into the KEYBOARD CONNECTOR on the front or rear of the mainframe. The lock lever will snap into place as the terminal is fully engaged.
b. Press the HOME key to establish proper keyboard communications with the system.**
c. To verify proper keyboard connection, press any key. The System 10 mainframe's green Status Indicator labelled KBD should blink.

LEAVE THE KEYBOARD CONNECTED DURING THE SETUP PROCEDURES THAT FOLLOW.

F1 F2 Esc 1 @ 2 # 3 S 4 % 5 ^ 6 & 7 8 9 0 - + = Back Space System Contg Video Form F3 F4 Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P Ex Begin Data Hot End Data Exit F5 F8 Ch A S D F G H J K L : " Retrn On Back Gnd Yes Clear Yes No Page A S D F G H J K L : " Retrn On Back Gnd Yes Clear F8 Call Shift Z X C V B N M < , > ? Shift Line Find Blue Ctrl Width Home F9 F10 Chan Caps Lock Innt Dioto Step Stop

Fig. 2.4 Model 10P80D Extended Keyboard

5

LCD/VFD DATA DISPLAY SETUP

This section applies only to A-sized mainframes with multichannel LCD or VFD data-display capability, either local or remote (see Appendix A of this booklet for details).* These mainframes can store up to 40 separate DATA DISPLAY PAGE FORMATS (or "DISPLAY PAGES"). Each LCD display page can be dedicated to up to 12 selected data channels, including system TIME and DATE. Each VFD display page can be dedicated to up to 12 selected data channels, in addition to system TIME and DATE, which are always displayed when the VFD display's two-line "billboard" is not being used for some other purpose.

In this section, you will learn how to

• define a "logo" for the display billboard, using the LOGO (LGO) command
  • c all a specific page to display, using the PAGE (PAG) command or key
• specify a channel "list" for a given display page, using the PAGE LIST (PGL) command
• specify individual channel legends, using the LEGEND (LEG) command

a. Turn ON your mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch by placing it in the upward position. An alternative method for enabling the EEPROM Write Protect function—especially useful when you don't want to have to remove the front bezel to access the switch—is to type a command of

$$ \text { BIT } 9 9 9 = 1 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

on the keyboard. Note that every keyboard-entered command must be termi-

* All currently manufactured "A-sized" mainframe models with integral multichannel data display use a vacuum fluorescent display (VFD).

ALSO NOTE: For a mainframe with multichannel LCD or VFD display (local or remote), you must set the Display (DIS) setup parameter to "2" (if it is not already set to this value) by commanding

$$ D I S = 2 [ C R ]. $$

If the mainframe has no display or if it has only a two-line "billboard" display (local or remote), the DIS value should be "1."

nated by pressing the CARRIAGE RETURN (Retrn) key, here designated by "[CR]."

The red Status Indicator labelled E2P will light when the EEPROM Write Protect function has been enabled.

b. Note the "logo" text presently in the display billboard. Change the "logo" to "ABC CORP." by typing

$$ \mathrm{LGO} = \text { ABC CORP. } [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

Note that every keyboard-entered command must be terminated by pressing the CARRIAGE RETURN (Retrn) key, here designated by "[CR]."

c. Now enter an LGO command to change the "logo" back to its original text, or to whatever other text you want. The "logo" text string can take up to 27 alphanumeric characters.

If your mainframe has a 7-line LCD display, you will set up Display Page No. 13 to display Data Channel Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 28, 119, 121, 998, and 999, in that order. If it is an 8-line VFD display, you will set up this page to display Data Channel Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 28, 119, 121, 122, and 129, in that order. In either case, you will also want to assign an appropriate engineering-unit legend to each channel, as explained in Step f, below. Your final display (if it is an LCD display) will then look like that shown in Fig. 5.1.a, below. If it is a VFD display, it will look like that shown in Fig. 5.1.b.

For every System 10 mainframe, Channel No. 998 always reads the system TIME, and Channel No. 999 always reads the system DATE. In Section 9, you will learn

ABC CORP. 001 37.5 PSI 002 97 % 003 0.046 IN 004 0.00 005 89.2 DEGF 007 50.1 LB 010 87.5 DEGF 028 4.38 FTLB 119 75.0 DEGF 121 7.54 FTLB 13:47:45 03/04/87

Fig. 5.1.a Multichannel LCD Display

ABC CORP. 09:04:02 03/17/94 001 37.5 ← PSI 002 97 ← % 003 0.046 ← IN 004 0.00 ← 005 89.2 ← DEGF 007 50.1 ← LB 010 87.5 ← DEGF 028 4.38 ← FTLB 119 75.0 ← DEGF 121 7.54 ← FTLB 122 8.5 ← MAMP 129 -1.3 ← V

Fig. 5.1.b Multichannel VFD Display

how to set your system's TIME and DATE. Note that TIME and DATE are included in every VFD display, in addition to the 12 user-selected data channels. Channels 998 and 999 need not therefore be specified in the "channel list" for any VFD display page.

A VFD display also has per-channel LIMIT-STATUS INDICATION: an arrow following the data reading points UP for a "HI LIMIT" violation, DOWN for a "LO LIMIT" violation, and LEFT for an "OK" (no violation) value—see Section 13 for "Limit Setup."

d. Call Page No. 13 to display by typing

PAG 13 [CR]

You can also use the keyboard's Page key to call pages to display. Simply press Page, the number of the desired page (1 through 40), and [CR].

e. Specify the appropriate "channel list" for Page No. 13 by typing (for an LCD display)*

$$ \mathrm{PGL} 1 3 = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 1 0, 2 8, 1 1 9, 1 2 1, 9 9 8, 9 9 9 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

or (for a VFD display)

$$ \mathrm{PGL} 1 3 = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 1 0, 2 8, 1 1 9, 1 2 1, 1 2 2, 1 2 9 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

f. Use the LEG command to assign a unit legend to each displayed channel, as shown in Fig. 5.1. For the first displayed channel (No. 1), type

$$ \text { LEG } 1 = \text { PSI } [ \text { CR } ] $$

For the second channel (No. 2), type

$$ \text { LEG } 2 = \% [ \mathbf {C} \mathbf {R} ] $$

And so on for all displayed channels. Note that the fourth displayed channel (No. 4) has no legend. For it, you will type

$$ \text { LEG 4 } = [ \text { SPACE } ] [ \text { CR } ] $$

A channel's displayed unit legend can have up to four alphanumeric characters, any or all of which may be spaces. For an LCD display, Channels 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE) do not take legends.

SETUP OF ANALOG INPUTS:

TRANSDUCER CABLING

If you ordered sensor cables with your System 10, these will be equipped with individual female 20- or 40-pin CONDITIONER CONNECTORS, all properly labelled and "keyed."

Fig. 6.1.a, below, shows the "standard" 20-pin connector for a Daytronic "10A" Conditioner Card, with internal solder terminals for up to eight separate transducer cables. "10A" Thermocouple Conditioners like the Models 10A9-8C and

Fig. 6.1.a Standard "10A" Conditioner Connector

"10A"-Card I/O Connector (rear of mainframe) "10A" Conditioner Card Pin 1 Captive Screw (for mounting to mainframe) Pin A Cables to Transducers 20-Pin Conditioner Connector (No. 60322) Connector "Keys" (to match slots in card I/O Connector) Pin 10 Pin L

100K Shunt Calibration Resistors* Screw-Terminals (for connection of transducer cables) 40-Pin Connector (attaches to rear I/O Connector of AA Card)

Fig. 6.1.b Typical "AA" Conditioner Connector Assembly (shown upside down)

Ground Lug (for grounding cable shields via mainframe mounting screws)

* Only present for strain gage conditioner cards.

10A10-4 require special screw-terminal connectors, similar to that shown in Section 1.E of the System 10 Guidebook.*

Fig. 6.a.b shows a typical 40-pin connector for a Daytronic "AA" Conditioner Card, with labelled screw terminals for direct connection of transducer cable leads.

If you're supplying your own sensor cables, you should carefully read Section 1.E of the System 10 Guidebook, along with the individual conditioner card subsection(s) of Section 1.E.2 that apply to your system. All necessary cabling instructions are given here.

To create your first "real-world" DATA CHANNEL, you should now connect at least one transducer to your mainframe. This should be a transducer that can be both zeroed and loaded with an arbitrary value of the measured parameter (NOT, in most cases, a Thermocouple, Thermistor, or RTD). A perfect example of such a transducer is a load cell.

* Several other "10A" cards require special I/O provisions. For example, the Model 10A68-2 Dual AC RMS Conditioner Card mates with a special connector board that has a separate screw-terminal block for each input channel, and the Model 10A74-4C Quad Strain Gage Track-Hold Conditioner Card will normally use a special Bridge Completion Connector in place of the standard connector. See the specific subsection of System 10 Guidebook Section 1.E.2 for complete details.

You will use this channel for the procedures given in the following sections. For a listing of all preconfigured data channels in your particular system, see the print-out in Appendix A of your System 10 Guidebook.*

NOTE: While most CONDITIONER CARDS are ready to be calibrated as soon as they are properly cabled to their respective transducers, a few of them require special setup procedures under certain circumstances. Be sure to check the section entitled "SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS" in each card-specific subsection of System 10 Guidebook Section 1.E.2 that applies to your system.

7 DATA CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

In this section, we will consider the configuration of your system's REAL CHANNELS. A “real channel” is an analog input channel containing physical measurement data from the “real world.” There are other types of data channels that must be configured before they can be used—including ANALOG OUTPUT CHANNELS, PSEUDOCHANNELS, and CONVERSION CHANNELS. You need not worry about these other types of channels right now.

NOTE: IN ALMOST ALL CASES, YOUR SYSTEM'S ANALOG-INPUT CHANNELS WILL HAVE BEEN FULLY CONFIGURED AT THE FACTORY, IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS GIVEN AT THE TIME OF ORDER. Therefore, you need not normally concern yourself (at least initially) with the configuration procedure, unless you need to reconfigure your system, through the addition or removal of one or more cards, the reassignment of transducer inputs, the physical interchange of cards within the mainframe, etc.

"Configuration" of a real channel ordinarily involves applying to that channel first a TYPE (TYP) command and then a LOCATE (LCT) command. In the following procedure, however, you will simply interrogate the system to confirm pre-entered TYP and LCT values for a few selected channels. YOU WILL NOT—AND SHOULD NOT—CHANGE THESE VALUES AT THIS TIME. If, in the future, you do need for some reason to reconfigure one or more real channels, refer to Appendix C of the System 10 Guidebook.

In this section you will also learn how to use the keyboard's Step and Back Space keys for rapid sequential interrogations.

a. Turn to Appendix A of your System 10 Guidebook.* There you will find a customized printout, which we will call the "System 10 Data Sheet." This is a complete listing of all data channels in your system as shipped, giving important setup information for each existing real channel, including

1. the MODEL NUMBER of the plug-in card that handles the channel
2. the "TYPE" designation for the channel
3. the "LOCATION" of the channel relative to the system's A SLOTS
4. the initial DIGITAL FILTER SETTING for the channel (0 through 9)
5. the initial SCALING FACTOR ("EMM") and ZERO OFFSET ("BEE") values for the channel
6. the initial LOW and HIGH LIMIT SETTINGS for the channel

7. the initial "LIMIT LOGIC" SETTINGS for the channel

8. other channel parameters that may apply (including Linearization Function, Conversion Channel assignment, Range value, and Sensitivity value)

The data sheet also shows which channels, if any, have been preassigned to CALCULATION and/or ANALOG OUTPUT functions. It lists all "EXECUTE" statements that have been pre-entered for your system, as well as all "LOGIC SOURCE" assignments for system bits. Other miscellaneous system parameters are also listed. If the mainframe has a multichannel LCD or VFD display, it gives all display-page channel lists and unit-legend assignments. Finally, it gives all relevant SERIAL NUMBERS and SOFTWARE/HARDWARE "VERSION" NUMBERS, plus all initial mainframe A-SLOT ASSIGNMENTS.

For the purposes of this tutorial procedure, you need only refer to the "CHANNEL CONFIGURATION" section of the data sheet.

b. Since you will not be entering any setup values here, but only interrogating the system for existing values, the EEPROM Write Protect function need not be enabled. Turn OFF the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch by placing it in the downward position.*

c. Enter from the keyboard a command of

TYP 1 [CR]

This is an INTERROGATION (or "READ") command. Unlike most SETUP (or "WRITE") commands, an interrogation command has no "equals" sign (=). It doesn't serve to enter (or "write") system configuration data into the Central Processor's EEPROM, but to retrieve (or "read") configuration data out of it.

The two-character (hexadecimal) "TYPE CODE" shown on the data sheet for Channel No. 1 should now appear in the billboard region of the mainframe or keyboard display. A channel's type code specifies one or more special processing factors that may apply to that channel, including range, sensitivity, linearization table, calibration procedures, etc. For example, a type of 19 signifies a "Type J" thermocouple input, and a type of 6B signifies a ±200 V-DC voltage input. A complete list of all channel type codes may be found in Appendix C of the System 10 Guidebook.

d. Press the keyboard's Step key. This "steps" the last-entered interrogation command to the next channel in numerical sequence. Thus, the type code for Channel No. 2 should now appear on the billboard. Check the data sheet to verify that this is indeed the case.

e. Use the Step key to continue "stepping" through several more channels. (For rapidly stepping through a whole range of channels, press Step and hold it down.)

f. Now use the Back Space key to "step" backwards through the interrogation series.

g. Enter from the keyboard a command of

LCT 1 [CR]

The appropriate "LOCATION" number for Channel No. 1 should now be displayed.** The location number consists of the A-SLOT NUMBER for the "A

* If you used the BIT 999 = 1 [CR] command to enable the EEPROM Write Protect function, you can disable this function simply by typing on the keyboard a command of BIT 999 = 0 [CR].
** The default "location" number for all channels to which the "WRITE" form of the LCT command has not been applied is "11." For a "nonlocated" channel—for example, a "pseudochannel" or "conversion channel"—the response to LCT x [CR] is "N/A."

CARD" that handles the given channel, followed by the SUBCHANNEL NUMBER corresponding to this channel (1 through 8).* A-Slot capacities vary with mainframe models. A mainframe of the "10KU" family can hold up to four optional A Cards; a "10K1/10K2" mainframe, up to twenty; and a "10K4T" mainframe, up to ten.

For example, the channel corresponding to the fifth subchannel of the card occupying a Model 10K4TA's "A SLOT No. 9" will have a location number of "95"; the channel corresponding to the first subchannel of the card occupying a 10K2D's "A SLOT No. 18" will have a location number of "181."

h. Again, use the Step and Back Space keys to interrogate a continuous sequence of channels for their respective locations. Remember that this "stepping" procedure will work following any initial keyboard interrogation of the form

[MNEMONIC] n [CR]

where "n" is the number of the first argument of the desired series (Channel No., Bit No., Page No., "Execute" No., etc.).

SETTING SYSTEM SCAN RANGE

Before you proceed to calibrate any of your system's data channels, you should define its default SCAN RANGE. In this section, you will learn to use the TERMINATOR (TER) command to do this.

a. Enable the EEPROM Write Protect function by turning ON the EEPROM Switch (placing it in the upward position).**
b. A System 10's initial default scan range is normally preset at the factory. The typical range is from Channel No. 1 through the highest Channel Number called for by the system configuration specified at the time of order. Determine this initial range by entering from the keyboard an interrogation of

TER [CR]

The number of the current “TERMINATOR CHANNEL” will be displayed. We will call this number “ t_1 .”

c. Refer to the Locate (LCT) column in Section 2 of your System 10 Data Sheet. You should already be aware of the "location" of the real channel that uses the source transducer you hooked up in Section 6, above. For example, if you cabled your real-world transducer to the first subchannel of the conditioner card in A Slot No. 3, the corresponding real channel would be the channel "located" at "31." Find the location value of your "live" real channel in the LCT column. Note the corresponding CHANNEL NUMBER in the Channel (CHN) column. We will call this number "x."

d. Now enter a command of

TER = t₂ [CR]

where “ t_2 ” is a number different from “ t_1 ” and higher than “x.” This command assigns Channel No. t_2 to be the new system Terminator Channel. On powerup, the Central Processor’s effective scan range will always be from

* An A Slot will usually have as many "subchannels" as the number of individual analog inputs its card can handle (e.g., eight for a Model 10A9-8C, four for a Model 10A10-4, one for a Model 10A40, etc.).

** Or by commanding BIT 999 = 1 [CR].

Channel No. 1 to and including Channel No. t_2 . As a general rule, you'll want to maximize your system's scan speed by making the Terminator Channel Number as low as possible.

SETTING SYSTEM TIME AND DATE

In this section, you'll learn to apply the TIME (TME) and DATE (DTE) commands.

a. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled.

b. Set your system's internal clock-time by entering from the keyboard a command of

TME = t [CR]

where “t” is a number of up to 6 digits expressing the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds. For example, if it were now exactly 3:07 p.m., you would enter for “t” the number 150700 (for hour “15,” minute “07,” and second “00”). ^2

c. To verify this setting, ask for the current system time by commanding

TME [CR]

d. Now set your system's internal date by commanding

DTE = d [CR]

where “d” is a number of up to 6 digits expressing the current date in month, day, and year. For example, if today were June 9, 2001, you would enter for “d” the number 60901 (for month “06,” day “09,” and year “01”). ^3

e. To verify this setting, ask for the current system date by commanding

DTE [CR]

DATA CHANNEL CALIBRATION

The purpose of this section is to lead you step-by-step through a typical System 10 “real-channel” calibration. As explained in Section 1.G.2 of the System 10 Guidebook, a number of different calibration methods are available. The method chosen for a given analog input channel will depend on the type of source transducer, the characteristics of the transducer/cable/conditioner combination, the extent of your knowledge of these characteristics, and the possibility and/or convenience of producing actual or simulated transducer inputs of known value.

TO FIND OUT WHICH CALIBRATION METHOD OR METHODS MAY BE USED WITH A GIVEN CONDITIONER CARD, YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE RESPECTIVE SUBSECTION OF SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK SECTION 1.E.2.

In very general terms, you will calibrate a signal-conditioner channel by commanding the system's Central Processor to compute and store two constant values: a SCALING FACTOR ("m") and a ZERO OFFSET ("b"). Automatically and continuously applied to all subsequent readings of the given channel, these two calibration constants define the linear proportionality expressed by the equation "y = mx + b."* In the following conventional "zero and span" technique, you will use the ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands to define a channel's "b" and "m" values, respectively. This is known as "Two-Point" or "Deadweight" calibration.

a. In Section 8, above, you determined the CHANNEL NUMBER of the "live" analog input channel you set up in Section 6. We will consistently refer to this channel as "Channel No. x." Thus, where "x" appears in the command syntax below, you should enter the actual Channel Number assigned to this channel. In Section 8, above, you ensured that Channel No. x is within the current system SCAN RANGE, as it must be if it is to be calibrated.

b. You should first arrange for a "live" display of Channel No. x.

If your mainframe has a multichannel LCD or VFD display, use the PAG command to invoke a display page that contains Channel No. x, as explained in Section 5, above. If "x" is a number from 1 through 12, the channel's data reading should initially appear on Display Page No. 1 (unless you have already specified a new channel list for this page); if "x" is from 13 through 24, it should appear on Page No. 2; etc.

If your mainframe does not have a multichannel LCD or VFD display, you will have to display Channel No. x by transmitting its data reading from the mainframe's Computer Interface Port to a receiving computer CRT or "dumb" terminal. You can use the STREAM (STR) command for this purpose, along with a special "header" or "tailer" that allows nonscrolling CRT display of the "datastream" output (see Sections 1.H.2 and 1.H.3 of the System 10 Guidebook for details). See Section 2.B of the System 10 Guidebook for complete setup of the interface link.

c. Establish a zero input for Channel No. x by removing all load from the source transducer.

d. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

ZRO x [CR]

The displayed value for Channel No. x should now be zero. If it is not, recheck the transducer connection, the channel number, and the channel TYPE and LOCATION assignments; also make sure that Channel No. x is in fact within the current scan range (see Sections 6, 7, and 8, above). This command sets the "BEE" value for Channel No. x—that is, the ZERO OFFSET to be applied to all subsequent channel readings.

* Where "y" is the measurement value reported for the channel and "x" is the ratio of the actual voltage of the analog input signal to the positive full-scale voltage of the channel's chosen input "type." As such, "x" is a unitless number operated upon by the "slope" coefficient "m" and the offset term "b" to yield a true analog measurement. Both "m" and "b" are expressed in the engineering units of the chosen input "type."

e. Now apply an accurately known value of input loading to the source transducer—a value (positive or negative) from 80% to 100% of the nominal full-scale rating.

f. Enter a command of

$$ F R C x = z [ C R ] $$

where “z” is the numerical value of the known input applied in Step e, in desired engineering units and with appropriate polarity. This command “forces” the data reading of Channel No. x to equal the value “z.” It thereby sets the “EMM” value for Channel No. x—that is, the SCALING FACTOR to be applied to all subsequent channel readings. Check the “live” display of Channel No. x to make sure that it reads the number “z.”

The FRC command also set the desired precision of Channel No. x. Suppose, for example, that you're measuring "pounds," and enter a "z" of "300." All subsequent readings of Channel No. x will be rounded to the nearest pound. If, however, the entry is "300.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a pound.

g. Remove all load from the source transducer. The "live" display of Channel No. x should return to zero. Check the accuracy of the calibration by applying various amounts of known loading to the transducer and noting the corresponding measurement readings on the channel's "live" display. (You may have to repeat Steps c through g to achieve final calibration.)

h. Do not disconnect the transducer. It will be used in some of the following procedures.

NOTE: Section 2.G of the System 10 Guidebook shows you how to set a data channel's SCALING FACTOR and ZERO OFFSET directly, using the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) and OFFSET (BEE) commands, respectively. Section 2.G also tells you how to set a channel's digital filter by means of the FILTER (FIL) command, and also, if desired, a "run-time" tare offset value, by means of the TARE (TAR) command.

SETUP OF CROSS-CHANNEL CALCULATIONS

In this section, you will apply the CALCULATE (CLC) command to define a system "CALCULATE" channel.

A CALCULATE channel is one form of System 10 “pseudochannel.” Its reported data does not represent a directly measured value, but rather a mathematical function of one or more other data channels (“real” or “pseudo”). In addition to standard algebraic operations, CALCULATE functions include square root, absolute value, maximum (most positive value), and minimum (least positive value). They permit real-time computation of such process variables as Efficiency, Horsepower, Specific Fuel Consumption, Power Factor, Lift-Drag Ratio, Spring Modulus, and many others.

The thirteen forms of the CLC "WRITE" command are listed in Section 2.J.1 of the System 10 Guidebook. Here, we will use only the first of these functions (multiplication of a single channel by a constant) to demonstrate the use of the CLC command. You will multiply the "live" data value for Channel No. x—the channel you calibrated in the previous section—by a given numerical constant. Examples of more complex cross-channel calculations are given in Section 2.J of the System 10 Guidebook.

a. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled.
b. Apply a value of stable input loading to the source transducer of Channel No. x. Observe the displayed data value for the channel.
c. Refer to your customized System 10 Data Sheet and choose a channel within the current scan range but not currently used by your system. Its present "TYPE" and "LOCATION" values are not important. We will call this "Channel No. y."
d. Arrange for a "live" display of the data reported by Channel No. y, preferably on the same display page that displays Channel No. x (see Section 10, Step b, above).

e. Enter from the keyboard a command of

CLC y = 2(CHN x) [CR]

where "y" is the number of the unused channel selected in Step c and "x" is the number of the real channel calibrated in Section 10.

Channel No. y's display should now report a value exactly twice that of Channel No. x, and with the same precision as was specified for Channel No. x in Section 10, Step f, above.

f. Change the input to Channel No. x, and the reading of Channel No. y should change accordingly.

g. To change the calculation offset constant from "0" (assumed in the above command) to "1," type

CLC y = 2.0(CHN x) + 1.0 [CR]

The reading of Channel No. y should now equal twice the reading of Channel No. x, plus one. Note that the offset (or "b") term of the CALCULATE expression is to be entered with the precision desired for the final "calculated data" reading. In this case, since this term was entered as "1.0," resolution will be to the nearest tenth of a unit.

Note also that we changed the decimal-point location of the “gain” (or “m”) coefficient of the CALCULATE expression from “2” to “2.0” in order to match the resolution of the offset term. It is always recommended that within a given CLC statement the gain coefficient and the offset term be expressed to the same resolution, as indicated by the decimal-point location. This will help prevent erroneous off-scale results. It is also recommended that you set up all of your CLC’s to the same decimal-place resolution. Mixing CLC resolutions will tend to slow down the system scan speed.

h. You may wish at this time to set up and display a second "real-world" data channel (call it "Channel No. z"), in order to try out some of the CLC functions that operate on two channels—for example,

CLC y = 2.0(CHN x + CHN z) [CR]

or

CLC y = (CHN x)(CHN z)/2.0 + 1.0 [CR]

12

SETUP OF LOGIC BITS AND LOGIC PORTS

12.a

"SOURCING" OF LOGIC BITS

Your system's 1000 internal LOGIC BITS are numbered from "Bit No. 0" through "Bit No. 999." Before it can be used, a given bit must be assigned a logic source. This source will continuously tell the bit what logic state it is to assume at any time: "1" or "0." The way a bit is "sourced" also determines whether or not it will latch on being set to "Logic 1." A "latched" bit must be released (as explained in Section 13) before it can again be set.

To show you how the LOGIC SOURCE (SRC) command works, we will have you assign a source of "LATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to a presently unused system bit. In Section 13, this bit will be used to observe the limit behavior of your "live" analog input Channel No. x as its transducer load is varied.

If your system has an optional Model 10AIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Card, you will use the SRC command in the following section to designate which of the 10AIO-16's I/O ports are to be Logic Input Ports and which are to be Logic Output Ports.

Before you set any logic sources, however, you must learn to use the SET BIT (BIT) command to set and read system logic-bit states.

1. You may disable the EEPROM Write Protect function if you want to, since it need not be enabled for the "WRITE" form of the BIT command to work.
2. First enter from the keyboard a "READ" command of

BIT 3 [CR]

The present logic state of Bit No. 3 will be displayed as either "3, 1" or "3, 0."

1. Use the Step key as you did in Section 7 to display a sequential range of existing bit states.
2. Now enter a "WRITE" command of

BIT 898 = 1 [CR]

(We are here assuming that Bit No. 898 is not presently involved in any of your system's preconfigured logic activities—channel "limit logic," "Execute" functions, etc. Just to be safe, however, you might want to check your "System 10 Data Sheet.")

1. Verify that Bit No. 898 has been properly "set" by commanding

BIT 898 [CR]

An answer of "898, 1" should be displayed.

1. "Reset" Bit No. 898 to "Logic 0" by commanding

BIT 898 = 0 [CR]

1. You will now assign a logic source of "LATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to Bit No. 898. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

SRC 898 = LIM, LAT [CR]

As with any SETUP (or "WRITE") command, you can always check to see that the command was effective by interrogating for the setup value you just specified. In this case, you would enter the corresponding "READ" command of

SRC 898 [CR]

If the above "WRITE" command was effective, you should get an answer of "LIM,LAT." If this is not the answer you get, you will need to re-enter the SETUP command.

NOTE: In Section 13, we will want Bit No. 899 to be controlled by "NONLATCHING LIMIT LOGIC." We do NOT have to apply an SRC command to this bit, however, as we just did to Bit No. 898. As we will see, the reference to any given bit by one of the three "LIMIT LOGIC" commands automatically sets the source of that bit to "NONLATCHING LIMIT LOGIC."

12.b

INITIALIZATION OF OPTIONAL MODEL 10AIO-16

IF YOU DON'T HAVE A MODEL 10AIO-16 UNIVERSAL LOGIC I/O CARD, YOU CAN SKIP THIS SECTION AND PROCEED DIRECTLY TO SECTION 13, BELOW.

Your system's 1000 logic bits are divided into "BIT GROUPS" of sixteen bits each. The first bit group consists of Logic Bit Nos. 0 through 15; the second, of Bit Nos. 16 through 31; the third, of Bit Nos. 32 through 47; etc. A complete table of bit groups is given in Section 2.H of the System 10 Guidebook.

Before you use the SRC command to specify which of the 10AIO-16's LOGIC I/O PORTS are to be INPUTS and which are to be OUTPUTS, you must first "initialize" the 10AIO-16 card. You will use the A SLOT (ASL) command to establish a one-to-one correspondence between the 10AIO-16's sixteen Logic I/O Ports and the sixteen members of a particular system bit group.

1. Find out which A SLOT your 10AIO-16 card is in (your customized System 10 Data Sheet will tell you this, if you can't tell by looking at the main-frame's A Rack).

2. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

ASL s = k [CR]

Here, "s" is the number of the A SLOT occupied by the 10AIO-16 and "k" is the number of a currently unused system BIT GROUP.

For example, to assign the sixteen bits of Bit Group No. 3 (= Bit Nos. 32 through 47) to the sixteen Logic I/O Ports of the 10AIO-16 in A SLOT No. 11, you would command ASL 11 = 3 [CR]. In this case, Bit No. 32 would now correspond to the 10AIO-16's Port No. 0, Bit No. 33 to Port No. 1, Bit No. 34 to Port No. 2, etc. (take a look at Fig. 3.A.3.1 in Section 3.A.3.c of the System 10 Guidebook).

Once you've assigned the 10AIO-16 to a specific system bit group, you must use the SRC command to indicate which of the card's sixteen ports are to be dedicated to LOGIC INPUTS. ANY LOGIC I/O PORT TO WHICH A SRC COMMAND HAS NOT BEEN APPLIED WILL BE AUTOMATICALLY DESIGNATED AS AN OUTPUT PORT. See Section 3.A.3 of the System 10 Guidebook for full details.

1. Select three bits from the bit group you specified in the above ASL command. Let's call them Bit Nos. b_1 , b_2 , and b_3 . If, for example, you specified Bit Group No. 3, then b_1 , b_2 , and b_3 could be any three numbers from 32 through 47.

2. Enter from the keyboard these three SRC commands:

$$ \mathbf {S R C} \mathbf {b} _ {1} = \text { INP }, \text { NON } [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ \mathbf {S R C} \mathbf {b} _ {2} = \text { INP }, \text { NON } [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ \mathbf {S R C} \mathbf {b} _ {3} = \text { INP }, \text { NON } [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

Since you have thus designated the three Logic I/O Ports corresponding to Bit Nos. b_1 , b_2 , and b_3 to be INPUT ports, the individual logic state of each of these three ports will now directly and continuously control the state of its corresponding system bit (in a NONLATCHING mode). All other ports are still automatically assumed to be OUTPUT ports. The individual logic state of each OUTPUT port will be directly and continuously controlled by the state of its corresponding system bit

13 LIMIT SETUP

In this section, you will learn how to

• define HIGH and LOW limit values for a given data channel, using the LOW LIMIT (LOL) and HIGH LIMIT (HIL) commands
• arrange for a data channel's HIGH-LIMIT violation to set a given system logic bit, using the "GREATER THAN" LOGIC (LGT) command
• arrange for a LOW-LIMIT violation of the same channel to set another logic bit, using the "LESS THAN" LOGIC (LLT) command
• r elease a "latched" bit, using the RELEASE (RLS) command
• cancel a channel's existing "GREATER THAN" and "LESS THAN" LOGIC, using the LGT and LLT commands

a. To set the LOW LIMIT value for Channel No. x (the channel you calibrated in Section 10, above), make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

$$ \text { LOL } x = L [ \text { CR } ] $$

where “x” is the channel number and “L” is the desired low-limit value expressed to the required precision. In this case, it should be about 20% of the channel’s full-scale reading. For example, if you’re using a 50-pound load cell as source transducer for Channel No. x, which was calibrated in Section 10 to read tenths of a pound, then enter an “L” value of “10.0.”

b. To set the HIGH LIMIT value for Channel No. x, enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{HIL} \mathrm{x} = \mathrm{H} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where “H” is the desired high-limit value expressed to the required precision. In this case, it should be about 80% of the channel’s full-scale reading. If, again, you were using a 50-pound load cell for readings precise to a tenth of a pound, then you would enter an “H” value of “40.0.”

In Section 12.a, above, you used the SRC command to assign a logic source of "LATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to Bit No. 898. Now you will cause this bit to be set and latched on the occurrence of a HIGH-LIMIT violation for Channel No. x.

c. To cause Bit No. 898 to be set and latched to a state of "Logic 1" when the data value for Channel No. x exceeds the high-limit value specified by the above HIL command, enter a command of

LGT x = 898 [CR]

Note that we could just as well have arranged for Bit No. 898 (or any other system bit) to "go high" when Channel No. x's data reading drops below the low-limit value specified by the LOL command, or when it re-enters the channel's "OK" ("BETWEEN") zone after either a high-limit or low-limit violation has occurred. See Section 2.F.4 of the System 10 Guidebook for a complete discussion of the three "LIMIT LOGIC" commands (LGT, LLT, and LBT).

d. To verify the activation of Bit No. 898 on occurrence of a high-limit violation for Channel No. x, first check to make sure that the bit is still at the "Logic 0" level by commanding

BIT 898 [CR]

The response should be "898, 0."

e. Now increase the load applied to Channel No. x's source transducer until it is greater than the high-limit value you entered in Step b, above. NOTE: If your mainframe has a multichannel VFD display, you should see the arrow displayed with Channel No. x's data reading point upward as soon as the high-limit is violated.

f. Use the BIT command to check the state of Bit No. 898. You should now get an answer of "898, 1," indicating the presence of the "GREATER THAN" limit violation for Channel No. x.

g. Decrease the transducer load until it is less than the high-limit value, but higher than the low-limit value. (If your mainframe has a multichannel VFD display, you should see Channel No. x's arrow point to the left as soon as the data reading drops below the high-limit value, indicating that it is once more within the "OK" limit zone.) Again check the state of Bit No. 898. Since the bit is latched, you should still get an answer of "898, 1."

h. To "release" the latched Bit No. 898 from its "Logic 1" state, enter a command of

RLS 898 [CR]

i. Use the BIT command once more to verify that Bit No. 898 has been reset to "Logic 0."

We also want a "LESS THAN" limit condition for Channel No. x to set Bit No. 899 to "Logic 1," but in a NONLATCHING fashion. That is, we want Bit No. 899 to revert automatically to a "Logic 0" state as soon as the low-limit violation of Channel No. x ceases to occur. The RLS command need not be applied to reset Bit No. 899, as it was to the latching Bit No. 898, above.

j. First make sure that Bit No. 899 is currently at "Logic 0" by commanding*

BIT 899 = 0 [CR]

* The application of the WRITE form of the BIT command to a given bit automatically sets that bit's logic source to "EXT, NON" (EXTERNAL, NONLATCHING). This is why we are having you set Bit 899 via the above "BIT=" command before you apply the LLT command to that bit.

k. Enter from the keyboard a command of

$$ \text { LLT } x = 8 9 9 [ \text { CR } ] $$

Bit No. 899 is now automatically assigned a "logic source" of "LIMIT, NON-LATCHING." NO PREVIOUS LOGIC SOURCE (SRC) COMMAND NEEDS TO HAVE BEEN APPLIED TO BIT NO. 899, AS IT WAS FOR THE "LIMIT, LATCHING" SOURCE OF BIT NO. 898 (Section 12.a, Step 7, above).

REMEMBER: The reference to any logic bit by one of the three "LIMIT LOGIC" commands (LGT, LLT, or LBT) automatically sets the source of that bit to "NONLATCHING LIMIT LOGIC."

I. To verify the activation of Bit No. 899 on occurrence of a low-limit violation for Channel No. x, decrease the load applied to Channel No. x's source transducer until it is less than the low-limit value you entered in Step a, above. An easy way to do this is to remove all load from the transducer, thus producing a reading of zero. If your mainframe has a multichannel VFD display, you should see the arrow displayed with Channel No. x's data reading point downward as soon as the low limit is violated.
m. Use the READ form of the BIT command (see Step d, above) to check the state of Bit No. 899. You should now get an answer of "899, 1," indicating the presence of the "LESS THAN" limit violation for Channel No. x.
n. Increase the transducer load until it is greater than the low-limit value, but less than the high-limit value. (If your mainframe has a multichannel VFD display, you should see Channel No. x's arrow point to the left as soon as the data reading rises above the low-limit value, indicating that it is once more within the "OK" limit zone.) Again check the state of Bit No. 899. Since the bit is not latched, you should get an answer of "899, 0."
o. To cancel the "GREATER THAN" and "LESS THAN" LOGIC you have set up for Channel No. x, enter the following commands:

$$ \mathrm{LGT} \mathrm{x} = \mathrm{N/A} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

$$ \text { LLT } x = \text { N / A [CR] } $$

The presence of a “GREATER THAN” or “LESS THAN” limit condition for Channel No. x will now have no effect on the state of any system logic bit, including Bit No. 898 or 899.

The extremely versatile EXECUTE (EXU) command lets you load one or a series of standard mnemonic commands in advance, to be executed automatically upon detection of a predefined logic event. It's as though the specified command(s) are received directly from the operator or computer the moment the triggering event occurs. ^1

In the following example, a given system logic bit will “go high”—i.e., will change its state from “Logic 0” to “Logic 1”—on detection of a HIGH-LIMIT violation of your calibrated Channel No. x. This “going high” transition will in turn trigger

• t he setting of a given logic bit to "Logic 1" via the BIT command, and
• t he loading of a constant numeric value into a special "DOWNLOAD PSEUDOCHANNEL" (which you will set up via the "WRITE" form of the CHN command).

NOTE: We are here assuming that your system's Channel No. 150 is presently unused. Just to be safe, however, you might want to check your "System 10 Data Sheet." If Channel No. 150 is not an unused channel, you will probably want to select another one for this procedure.

a. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled.
b. Arrange for a "live" display of the data reported by Channel No. 150 (see Section 10, Step b, above).
c. We want Channel No. 150 to be a "DOWNLOAD PSEUDOCHANNEL," so that we can load it with an arbitrary numeric constant. ^2 You must therefore assign it a "TYPE CODE" of "D0" ("D zero") by entering a TYPE (TYP) command of

TYP 150 = D0 [CR]

(for a full discussion of "Downloading of Numeric Data," see Section 2.D of the System 10 Guidebook).

d. To see how the downloading function works, enter a CHANNEL (CHN) command of

CHN 150 = 399 [CR]

The displayed Channel No. 150 should read "399."

e. To make sure that Bit No. 898 is presently at "Logic 0," enter a command of ^3

BIT 898 = 0 [CR]

1 Automatic execution of commands occurs during the "housekeeping" period at the end of a complete scan cycle (i.e., after all channels and bits have been scanned and evaluated). Command execution will be in the same sequence in which the commands are specified in the EXECUTE (EXU) command statement, unless the number and nature of commands to be executed require their temporary placement in a "COMMAND QUEUE" until such time as they may be put into effect. Command queues and the means of monitoring their status are discussed in Section 2.K.2(d) of the System 10 Guidebook.
2 Download pseudochannels need not be within the current scan range. In fact, you will generally want to keep them outside the scan in order to maximize system speed. There are actually two types of download pseudochannels: "volatile" (or RAM-resident) and "nonvolatile" (or EEPROM-resident). The former have a type code of "D0"; the latter, of "D1."
^3 Remember that this command automatically sets the logic source of Bit No. 898 to “EXT, NON.”

f. Before you define your "EXECUTE" function, you should first set up its "trigger bit." For this purpose you should select a currently unused bit from among your system's first 32 bits.*

g. Enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{LGT} \mathrm{x} = \mathrm{r} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where "x" is again the number of the channel you calibrated in Section 10, above, and "r" is the number of the selected trigger bit (it must be a number from 0 through 31).* As you learned in the previous section, this command automatically assigns a "logic source" of "NON LATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to Bit No. r.

h. Now command

$$ E X U r = B I T 8 9 8 = 1: C H N 1 5 0 = 0 [ C R ] $$

The command string specified by an EXU command can take up to 32 ASCII characters, including spaces; individual commands are separated by colons.

i. Increase the load applied to Channel No. x's source transducer until it is greater than the high-limit value you entered in Section 13, Step b, above.

j. As soon as Channel No. x's high limit is violated, Bit No. 898 should automatically "go high" and Channel No. 150 should automatically report a value of "0." Use the BIT command to verify that the state of Logic Bit No. 898 is now "1." Observe the displayed reading of channel No. 150 to verify that it is in fact "0."

k. Now enter a command of

$$ \text { BIT } 8 9 7 = 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

I. Keep the "high violation" load on the transducer, and enter a command of

$$ E X U / r = C H N 1 5 0 = 2 5: B I T 8 9 7 = 1 [ C R ] $$

where "r" is again the number of the selected trigger bit. This command instructs the system to

• load Channel No. 150 with the number "25," and
• set Logic Bit No. 897 to "Logic 1"

when Logic Bit No. r "goes low"—i.e., when the transition of Bit No. r from "Logic 1" to "Logic 0" is perceived.

m. Remove the transducer load. Channel No. 150 should now read "25."
n. Use the READ form of the BIT command to verify that the state of Logic Bit No. 897 is now "1."
o. You might now want to set up and verify an EXU or EXU/ function that increments the reading of Channel No. 150 by "1," and also "locks" (or "freezes") a given real channel (No. "y")**:

* This assumes that your mainframe has been initially set to employ the first two bit groups (Bits 0 through 31) for the purpose of triggering EXECUTE (EXU) command strings. It is possible to assign the system's EXU statements to the bits of any two bit groups (which need not be contiguous) by means of the EXECUTE BASE GROUP (XBG) command, as explained in Section 2.K.2 of the System 10 Guidebook.

** The LOCK (LOK) command can be used to inhibit the automatic updating of all channels, one selected channel, or a selected range of channels. To "unlock" (resume normal updating) of Channel No. y, you must enter an UNLOCK (UNL) command of UNL y [CR].

EXU r = INC150:LOKy [CR]

Trigger this “bit going high” EXECUTE as you did in Step i, above. Use an interrogation of CHN 150 [CR] to verify that the reading of Channel No. 150 has increased by “1.” Display Channel No. y—or use CHN y [CR]—to verify that the reading of this channel is “locked” at its current value, regardless of the behavior of the input signal.

If your mainframe has a multichannel LCD or VFD display, you might also want to set up and verify an EXU or EXU/ function that automatically calls a specific display page and sets a given channel unit legend, using the commands discussed in Section 5, above—for example,

EXU r = PAG29:LEG150=LBS [CR]

Since this EXECUTE contains a SETUP command ("LEG="), the EEPROM Write Protect function must be enabled at the time the EXECUTE is triggered in order for this command to be effective.

p. To cancel the two "EXECUTE" functions that are now activated by the "going high" and "going low" of Bit No. r, enter the following commands:

$$ E X U r = N / A [ C R ] $$

$$ E X U / r = N / A [ C R ] $$

For more examples of the EXECUTE (EXU) command, see Section 2.K.2 of the System 10 Guidebook.

SETTING DATA-

TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS

Your system can be made to transmit different kinds of "data" from its COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT, including

• n umerical values contained in system DATA CHANNELS (whether these values represent actual measurements, calculations, downloaded constants, etc.), and
• "limit status" information pertaining to these values

We won't go into the various kinds of output your system can be commanded to transmit in response to a CHANNEL (CHN), DUMP (DMP), SNAPSHOT (SNP), STREAM (STR), HARD COPY (HCY), or LIMIT ZONE (LZN) command. All this is discussed in detail in Section 1.H of the System 10 Guidebook.

All you'll do here will be to interrogate your system for a few important transmission characteristics you should be aware of. To modify these and other transmission characteristics, refer to Section 1.H.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

a. Enter a command of

OPT [CR]

For a mainframe that has just been shipped, the normal response to this interrogation should be “[0D,0A]”—that is, “zero D, zero A.” The OUTPUT TERMINATOR (or “OPT”) is a string of one or two standard ASCII characters added at the end of every line of transmission. In almost all cases, it is initially set to CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED ([CR][LF]). In hexadecimal, this string is expressed as “[0D, 0A].”

b. Enter a command of

EOT [CR]

For a mainframe that has just been shipped, the normal response should again be “[0D,0A].” The END-OF-TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR (or “EOT”) is a string of up to four standard ASCII characters added at the end of every complete transmission. Like the “OPT,” it is almost always initially set to CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED ([CR][LF], or, in hexadecimal, [0D, 0A]).

c. Now enter a command of

CMT [CR]

For a mainframe that has just been shipped, the normal response should be “[0D].” What you’ve asked for here is the current COMMAND TERMINATOR (or “CMT”). Discussed in Section 2.B.5 of the System 10 Guidebook, the CMT is not really a “transmission characteristic.” It is the single ASCII character recognized by your system as the termination of any command received through the Computer Interface Port. It is always set initially to CARRIAGE RETURN ([CR], or, in hexadecimal, [0D]). All keyboard-entered commands are always terminated with [CR].

For other (in some cases optional) transmission characteristics—including channel number “echo,” limit-zone indication, “header” and “tailer” character strings, characters per channel, column format, and intertransmission delay period—see Section 1.H.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

16

COMMUNICATION WITH

EXTERNAL DEVICES

16.a

INTRODUCTION: SYSTEM 10 COMMUNICATION MODES

Every A-sized System 10 mainframe has a single COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT.* This port allows two-way communication with a connected computer, terminal, modem, buffered printer, recorder, operator console, or other external device capable of RS-232-C, IEEE-488, or RS-422 data interchanges. Through the Computer Interface Port, the external device can

• issue to System 10 any MNEMONIC COMMAND in the standard command set for that system; and
• receive from System 10 any of the various kinds of formatted data transmissions discussed in Section 1.H of the System 10 Guidebook, plus any and all responses to interrogations that originate from the connected device.**

In addition to its Computer Interface Port, an A-sized mainframe can accommodate optional LOGIC I/O PORTS for the transfer of logic and digital data (requires one or more Model 10AIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Cards—see Section 12.b, above).

* When the optional Model 10AFIFO First-In-First-Out Buffer Memory Card is present, an A-sized mainframe's Computer Interface Port is effectively replaced by the 10AFIFO's "FIFO COMPUTER PORT." See Section 3.A.8 of the System 10 Guidebook for details.

**Responses to keyboard-entered interrogation commands will appear on the mainframe or keyboard "billboard" only.

As mentioned in Sections c and d, below, optional hardware allows conversion of the RS-232 output of the Computer Interface Port to either IEEE-488 or RS-422 standards, if such communications are required by your application. Also, an A-sized mainframe equipped with the "S" (Satellite) Option and an external RS-485 Converter attached to its Computer Interface Port can represent an individual "node" within a "Satellite Network" hosted by a B-sized System 10 mainframe. Setup and operation of a "satellite" A-sized mainframe are treated in Section 3.B.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

For a complete discussion of “Interfacing of Computer, Terminal, Printer, etc.” via an A-sized mainframe’s Computer Interface Port, see Section 2.B of the System 10 Guidebook.

16.b SETUP OF RS-232-C COMMUNICATIONS

We won't repeat here what is presented in detail in Section 2.B.2 of your System 10 Guidebook. When the time comes for you to establish RS-232-C data communications with an external device, you should study this manual section carefully. There you'll find recommended cabling for "full handshake," "incoming handshake," and "no handshake" interface situations.

For proper data interchange between a System 10 mainframe and a connected RS-232-C device to occur, the mainframe's Computer Interface Port must be set to conform exactly with the protocol stipulated by the connected device. The "protocol" applying to an RS-232-C link normally involves four basic data-transfer characteristics: BAUD RATE (standard rates up to 153.6K), NUMBER OF DATA BITS (7 or 8), NUMBER OF STOP BITS (1 or 2), and PARITY (ODD, EVEN, or NONE).

For an A-sized mainframe, these interface characteristics can only be set by means of the mainframe's PROTOCOL SWITCHES. Refer to the appropriate drawing in Section 2, above, for the location of these switches for your mainframe model. Section 2.B.2 of the System 10 Guidebook gives full instructions for setting the mainframe's PROTOCOL SWITCHES.

16.c OPTIONAL IEEE-488 COMMUNICATIONS

When connected to the Computer Interface Port, the optional Model 10CIF488A IEEE Interface Adaptor enables any System 10 mainframe to be established as a "Talker/Listener" peripheral on a standard IEEE-488 bus, with a switch-selectable bus address from 0 through 30. See Section 2.B.4 of the System 10 Guidebook for a full discussion of RS-232 to IEEE-488 conversion.

16.d OPTIONAL RS-422 COMMUNICATIONS

When connected to the Computer Interface Port, the optional Model 10E422 RS-232-C to RS-422 Converter enables any System 10 mainframe to be linked to an external device with RS-422 I/O. Again, see Section 2.B.4 of the System 10 Guidebook for a full discussion of RS-232 to RS-422 conversion.

This section applies to A-sized mainframes with integral front-panel keypad (Models 10KU-KD and 10K4T-KD).

Section 2.R of the System 10 Guidebook explains in detail the use of the front-panel keypad and two-line LCD display for the "KD" mainframes. The keypad greatly simplifies system setup by letting the operator review in rapid sequence all pertinent "configuration parameters" for any selected data channel or logic bit, for the system itself, and for the Computer Interface Port. Any displayed channel or bit parameter—with the exception of channel "type"—may in turn be "stepped" through an entire range of channels or bits.

Parameters involving purely numerical values (decimal or hexadecimal) may be immediately reset via the keypad, as prompted by a cursor in the display. Parameters which involve algebraic or literal expressions (such as CLC, EXU, SRC, etc.) may be not be modified by means of the keypad, but only through an optional Model 10P80A or 10P80D Extended Keyboard.

If you intend to use the front-panel keypad to configure your system, study the instructions given in Section 2.R of the System 10 Guidebook.

The System 10 KEY command lets you program a front-panel keypad for rapid entry of up to five selected System 10 commands.* Specifically, it allows any standard three-letter MNEMONIC to be communicated to the mainframe by pressing the keypad's FNCTN (FUNCTION) key—and then the 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 key. See Section 2.1 of the System 10 Guidebook for complete details.

In the following procedure, you will use the keypad's FNCTN key to ask for the system time-of-day (via the TME command), and to set a DOWNLOAD PSEUDOCHANNEL with a given numeric value (via the "write" form of the CHN command).

a. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled, and then use the extended keyboard connected to the System 10 mainframe to enter a command of

$$ \text { KEY } 0 = \text { TME } [ \text { CR } ] $$

b. Now press the FNCTN key on the mainframe's front-panel keypad, followed by the keypad's 0 key, followed by the keypad's ENTER key. The system time-of-day reading should appear in the billboard.

c. Enter (via extended keyboard) a command of

$$ \text { KEY } 3 = \text { CHN } [ \text { CR } ] $$

d. On the front-panel keypad, press the FNCTN key, followed by the 3 key. Then enter (via the keypad)**

$$ 1 5 0 = 1 4 2 3 [ E N T E R ] $$

Call Channel No. 150 to display—or use the CHN command—to verify that its reading has been set to "1423."

* A handheld Model 10P25A or 10P25D Operator's Keyboard may be similarly programmed (but NOT a Model 10P80A or 10P80D Extended Keyboard).

** This assumes that Channel No. 150 is still "typed" as a "D0" channel—see Section 14, Step c, above.

In this booklet we have taken you step-by-step through some important System 10 setup procedures that apply to "A-sized" mainframes. We have also briefly mentioned a number of other (essentially optional) procedures detailed in the System 10 Guidebook. To these we could add the following:

• setup of COUNTER/TIMER functions when the optional Model 10ACT01 Counter/Timer Card and/or Model 10ACC-4 Four-Channel Totalizer Card is present (Section 3.A.1 of the System 10 Guidebook)
• setup of ANALOG OUTPUT CHANNELS via the ANALOG OUTPUT (ANO) command when the optional Model 10AAO-8 Voltage Output Card is present, (Section 3.A.2)
• setup of DIGITAL I/O functions when the optional Model 10AIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Card is present (Section 3.A.3)
• setup of ANALOG PEAK CAPTURE, "MAX MINUS MIN," and/or TRACK AND HOLD functions when the optional Model 10A79-4 Four-Channel Analog Peak Capture Card is present (Sections 3.A.4-6)
• setup of ANALOG BUFFERING functions when the optional Model 10A79-4 Four-Channel Analog Peak Capture Card or Model 10AAO-4 Analog Buffer Card is present (Section 3.A.7)
• setup of BUFFER STORAGE functions when the optional Model 10AFIFO First-In-First-Out Buffer Memory Card is present (Section 3.A.8)
• setup of PID LOOP CONTROL functions when the optional Model 10APID Loop Control Card is present (Section 3.A.9)
• setup and use of optional DIAGNOSTIC CARDS: Model 10AST Analog Slot Test Card and Model 10AHM Health Monitor Card (Section 5.C)

To minimize the danger of losing critical setup information in the event of a power interruption, be sure to turn the EEPROM Switch OFF as soon as System 10 setup is complete.

Max. No.

Analog Max. No

Available Channels ^1 / Logic Bits /

A-Card Max. No. Max.No Data Display Available

Model Slots Analog I/O			^2 Logic I/O^3	and Keyboard/Keypad Options*
10KU	4	160 / 32	1000 / 64	OPTIONAL front-panel keypad with 2-line “billboard” LCD (10DISU);OPTIONAL remote multichannel VFD display with keyboard (10VFD-2);OPTIONAL extended or operator’s keyboard with 2-line “billboard” LCD (10P80D or 10P25D)	S, V
10KU-KD	4	160 / 32	1000 / 64	Integral front-panel keypad with 2-line “billboard” LCD;OPTIONAL extended or operator’s keyboard with or without 2-line “billboard” LCD (10P80D, 10P80A, (10P25D, or 10P25A)	S, V
10K1C	20	160 / 160	1000 / 320	OPTIONAL front-panel multichannel VFD display with keyboard (10VFD);OPTIONAL remote multichannel VFD display with keyboard (10VFD-2);OPTIONAL extended or operator’s keyboard with 2-line “billboard” LCD (10P80D or 10P25D)	S
10K2D	20	160 / 160	1000 / 320	Integral front-panel multichannel VFD display; extended keyboard (10P80A) supplied; operator’s keyboard (10P25A) OPTIONAL^4	—
10K4TA	10	160 / 80	1000 / 160	OPTIONAL front-panel keypad with 2-line “billboard” LCD (10DIS4T);OPTIONAL remote multichannel VFD display with keyboard (10VFD-2);OPTIONAL extended or operator’s keyboard with 2-line “billboard” LCD (10P80D or 10P25D)	V

(cont'd)

* Options:

S = Satellite (required for Model 10BD4-based networks)

V = Vehicle Operation (12 or 28 V-DC)

1 Up to 1000 channels can be handled when the "S" (Satellite) Option is present.
2 Assumes all A SLOTS dedicated to analog I/O only (with eight channels per slot).
3 Assumes all A SLOTS dedicated to logic I/O only; requires one optional Model 10AIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Card for every group of 16 bits to serve as logic I/O.
^4 The Model 10P80D or 10P25D keyboard may NOT be used with this mainframe.

Max. No.

Analog Max. No

Available Channels ^1 / Logic Bits /

A-Card Max. No. Max.No Data Display Available

Model Slots Analog I/O			^2 Logic I/O ^3	and Keyboard/Keypad Options*
10K4T-KD	10	160 / 80	1000 / 160	Integral front-panel keypad with 2-line “billboard” LCD;OPTIONAL extended or operator’s keyboard with or without 2-line “billboard” LCD (10P80D, 10P80A, (10P25D, or 10P25A)	S, V
10K4T-DA	10	160 / 80	1000 / 160	Integral front-panel multichannel VFD display; extended keyboard (10P80A) supplied; operator’s keyboard (10P25A)OPTIONAL ^4,5	—

* Options:

S = Satellite (required for Model 10BD4-based networks)

V = Vehicle Operation (12 or 28 V-DC)

1 Up to 1000 channels can be handled when the "S" (Satellite) Option is present.
2 Assumes all A SLOTS dedicated to analog I/O only (with eight channels per slot).
^3 Assumes all A SLOTS dedicated to logic I/O only; requires one optional Model 10AIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Card for every group of 16 bits to serve as logic I/O.
^4 The Model 10P80D or 10P25D keyboard may NOT be used with this mainframe.
^5 The front bezel of the Model 10K4T-DA may itself be used as a remote VFD display (up to 25 ft.), if an optional remote power supply (available from Daytronic) is provided.

DAYTRONIC

Daytronic Corporation

2211 Arbor Blvd. • Dayton, OH 45439-1521 • [phone]

Tel [phone] · Fax [phone] · www.daytronic.com

GETTING YOUR

SYSTEM 10

ON THE AIR

FOR "B-SIZED" MAINFRAMES

Corridor to 10 Cortical Roll 310 Cycle Test - Maximum FURF HS Pressure 135 Flow 8.4 Torque Speed System 10 CUTRICALS

Copyright © 1996, 2001 Daytronic Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reprinted, reproduced, or used in any form or by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, including photocopying and recording, or in any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Daytronic Corporation. All specifications are subject to change without notice.

GETTING YOUR

SYSTEM 10

ON THE AIR

FOR "B-SIZED" MAINFRAMES

1 Introduction a. The Purpose of This Booklet .... 1
b. "B-Sized" Mainframes 1
c. Monitor and Keyboard 2
d. If You Need Help... 3

2 Physical Layout 3

3 Powerup 8

4 Keyboard Connection 8

5 CRT Video Setup 9

6 Setup of Analog Inputs: Transducer Cabling* 15

7 Data Channel Configuration* 16

8 Setting System Scan Range* 19

9 Setting System Time and Date 19

10 Data Channel Calibration* 20

11 Setup of Cross-Channel Calculations* 22

12 Setup of Logic Bits and Logic Ports a. "Sourcing" of Logic Bits .... 24 b. Initialization of Optional Model 10BIO-16 .... 25

13 Limit Setup* 26

14 Automatic Command Execution a. Setup of EXECUTE Functions .... 30 b. Setup of CONDITIONAL and COMMAND Functions .... 32

15 Setting Data-Transmission Characteristics 33

16 Communication with External Devices a. Introduction: System 10 Communication Modes .... 34 b. Setup of "Main" RS-232-C Communications .... 35 c. Setup of "Auxiliary" RS-232-C Communications (10BACI) .... 36 d. Setup of RS-232-C Communications for an Optional Printer Interface Port (10VFO132) .... 37

e. Optional IEEE-488 Communications .... 38 f. Optional RS-422 Communications .... 38

17 Optional Bargraph Setup (Model 10VGM500) 39

18 Optional History Recording (Model 10BDR64) 42

19 Further Optional Procedures 48

App. A Summary of B-Sized Mainframe Features 49

1

INTRODUCTION

1.a THE PURPOSE OF THIS BOOKLET

Working for the first time with an instrument system as comprehensive and versatile as the Daytronic "System 10" can be a bit overwhelming. There are so many interrelated functions the system can be made to perform—functions for data collection, display, processing, communications, reporting, and process control. And there are so many critical setup procedures, all depending on the exact requirements of your particular measurement and control application.

All users agree that System 10 is comparatively easy to set up and run. Nonetheless, we realize that even the most technically competent first users could do with a little help. The purpose of this booklet is to familiarize you with the basic setup procedures required for proper system operation. To keep things on as simple a level as possible, we will not discuss a number of additional—and strictly optional—procedures. These are all treated in detail in your System 10 Guidebook.

By walking you step-by-step through the basic system setup, this booklet will help you get your system “on the air” as quickly as possible, without initially burdening you with “all the details.”

You'll probably want to read this booklet before you open your System 10 Guidebook. However, having done so, and having carefully performed all the tutorials given here, don't neglect to study the Guidebook itself! This is not a "short-form manual," but rather a simplified presentation of selected—but "basic"—setup procedures, along with some essential background information. Its only purpose is to GET YOU STARTED.

1.b "B-SIZED" MAINFRAMES

There are two basic types of System 10 mainframes: "A-sized" and "B-sized." This booklet treats only B-sized mainframes. Each B-sized mainframe contains

• a single rack for plug-in "B Cards" and "V Cards"
• up to four separate racks for plug-in "A Cards"*

"B Cards" are essentially for DIGITAL processing, while "V Cards" are concerned with VIDEO-related functions and plug into the Video Backplane in the rear of the mainframe. The system's CENTRAL PROCESSOR CARD (a version of the Model 10BCP200 or, for older systems, 10BCP100A) and RS-232 INTERFACE CARD (a version of the Model 10BIP232) always occupy the two rightmost "B Slots." In all B-sized mainframes except "10KN6" versions with the "E" (Extended B Rack) Option, the leftmost B Slot (No. 1) is always occupied by the system's VIDEO TEXT CARD (Model 10BVT60 or 10BVT65). All other V Cards are mounted to the left of the Video Text Card.**

In any B Slot not occupied by the Central Processor Card, the RS-232 Interface Card, or a V Card, any optional B Card may be installed to handle your system's

* The Model 10KN3 mainframe is an exception; it has NO "A Card" rack. See the Table of Contents for the sections of this booklet that do NOT apply to a 10KN3 system.
** In "10KN6" versions with the "E" (Extended B Rack) Option, the first four B Slots are used for the V-Card set. See Section 3.C.1 of the System 10 Guidebook for more details on V-Card installation.

more complex data-acquisition and communications tasks (such as logic inputs and outputs, "history" recording and playback, network management, auxiliary computer interfacing, etc.).

"A Cards" include all basic System 10 SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARDS, as well as certain SPECIAL FUNCTION CARDS. These include cards for Analog Outputs, Analog Peak Capture and Hold, PID Loop Control, and Diagnostic Testing. ^1

Features of all presently manufactured B-sized System 10 mainframes are summarized in Appendix A of this booklet.

1.c MONITOR AND KEYBOARD

Every B-sized mainframe except the Model 10KN7 provides output to drive an external large-scale VGA COLOR VIDEO DISPLAY. The Model 10KN7 has an internal 5" x 9" monochrome CRT, and provides both monochrome RS-170 and CGA-compatible "RGB" video output. The Model 10KN8A has an internal 12" COLOR CRT (multi-sync CGA/EGA/VGA).

Throughout this booklet, we will assume that you have a CRT monitor on which you can observe the current "live" values of system data channels and the current "live" states of system logic bits. ^2 You should now make all necessary arrangements for this display before proceeding any further in this booklet. For instructions regarding the required VIDEO CONNECTIONS, see Section 2.N of your System 10 Guidebook.

The procedures in this booklet require that you issue appropriate mnemonic commands to your system. Such commands may be issued either "locally" or "remotely." You issue commands "locally" by typing them on the Model 10P80A Extended Keyboard supplied with your B-sized mainframe. You issue commands "remotely" by using an EXTERNAL COMPUTER OR TERMINAL to deliver them either

• via the mainframe's Computer Interface Port;
• via the Auxiliary Computer Interface Port provided by an optional Model 10BACIA or other "10BACI" Card; or
• via the Satellite Interface Port provided by an optional Model 10BD4 or 10BD1 Card. ^3

FOR ALL PROCEDURES DESCRIBED IN THIS BOOKLET, IT IS ASSUMED THAT YOU ARE USING AN EXTENDED KEYBOARD FOR LOCAL MANUAL ENTRY OF SETUP AND INTERROGATION COMMANDS. REMEMBER, HOWEVER, THAT YOU CAN JUST AS EASILY ENTER ALL COMMANDS GIVEN IN THIS BOOKLET THROUGH AN EXTERNAL COMPUTER OR TERMINAL, ONCE RS-232 LINKAGE THROUGH THE COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT (OR OPTIONAL AUXILIARY PORT)

1 Certain cards—such as the Model 10AFIFO and the Model 10AIO-16—cannot be used in a B-sized mainframe.
2 If you have a 10KN7 mainframe, you can use the built-in multichannel monochrome display. It is recommended, however, that you connect a suitable COLOR monitor to your 10KN7 if at all possible, at least for the video setup procedures given in Section 4.
3 As you will see in Section 14 of this booklet, you can also arrange for one or more commands to be applied automatically on occurrence of predefined system conditions and events. Note also that the handheld Model 10P25A Operator's Keyboard can be used with B-sized mainframes to perform a limited number of "run-time" operations, as described in Section 2.S of the System 10 Guidebook.

HAS BEEN PROPERLY ESTABLISHED. For "remote" command entry, the easy-to-use TERMINAL program is included in the StartPAC V software supplied with your mainframe—although any conventional terminal emulation package will also work.

1.d IF YOU NEED HELP...

If at any time you need assistance in getting your System 10 "on the air"—or if problems arise at any later time—feel free to call our CUSTOMER SERVICES DEPARTMENT at

[phone]

FAX: [phone]

TOLL-FREE: [phone]

during normal business hours (Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.). Or you can EMAIL us at

[e-mail]

2 PHYSICAL LAYOUT

DO NOT PLUG IN YOUR MAINFRAME JUST YET.

Remove your mainframe's front bezel(s). For each bezel, pull down the two "swell-latch" levers and then pull the bezel forward. The upper bezel must be off in order for you to access your mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch and RS-232 PROTOCOL SWITCHES.

Study the appropriate front- and rear-view drawings below to familiarize yourself with your mainframe's most important physical elements. Be sure that you know the locations of your particular mainframe's

• B Rack and B Cards, including Central Processor Card and Interface Card (internal)
  • V Cards, including Video Signal Card and Video Text Card (internal)
  • A Rack(s), A Slots, and A Cards (internal)
• System Status Indicators (visible from the front)
  • ON/OFF Button (front or rear panel)
  • Power Connector and Fuse/Circuit Breaker (rear panel)
• Plug-In Keyboard Connector (front panel)
  • Computer Interface Connector (rear panel)
  • RS-232 Protocol Switches (internal)
• EEPROM Write Protect Switch (internal)
  • Power Selector Board (rear panel, Models 10KN3, 10KN6, and 10KN7)
  • CRT Controls (internal, Models 10KN7 and 10KN8A)
  • VGA Input Connector (rear panel, Models 10KN3, 10KN6, and 10KN8A)
  • VGA Output Connector (rear panel, Models 10KN3, 10KN6, and 10KN8A)
• "RGB" and RS-170 Output Connectors (rear panel, Model 10KN7)
• RS-232 Formatted Output Connector (rear panel, active only if a Model 10VFO132 card is present)

Shown in Fig. 2.3 is the Extended Keyboard you will use to set up your system.

Fig. 2.1.a Mainframe Front Elements, Models 10KN3, 10KN6, and 10KN7 (front bezel(s) removed)

Internal Monochrome Monitor* Internal CRT Controls* Video Text Card (occupies B Slot No. 1)** Power ON/OFF Button Central Processor Card RS-232 Interface Card (Interface Protocol Switches are also mounted on this board) EEPROM Write Protect Switch System Status Indicators Optional "B Cards" Plug-In Keyboard Connector "B SLOT" No. 9 "A CARD DECK" No. 1*** Swell Latch Bracket "A SLOT" No. 1 Optional "A Cards" "A SLOT" No. 24 Actuating Lever

* Model 10KN7 mainframes only. On mainframes with the "E" (Extended B Rack) Option, the CRT space will be occupied by additional B Slots.
** The Video Signal Card and any other optional video cards are located to the left of the Video Text Card (connected to the mainframe's Video Backplane). For mainframes with the "E" (Extended B Rack) Option, the Video Text Card will occupy B Slot No. 4.
*** Not present on the Model 10KN3 mainframe. A "10KN6" or "10KN7" mainframe may have up to four A Decks in all.

Fig. 2.1.b Mainframe Rear Elements, Models 10KN3, 10KN6, and 10KN7 (NOTE: 10KN7 Video Connector Panel is shown separately in Fig. 2.1.c)

"B Card" I/O Connectors* (for connection of digital/logic devices, satellite units, computers, etc.) RS-232 Touchscreen Connector VGA Input VGA Output RS-232 Formatted Output Connector (requires optional Model 10VFO132 Formatted Output Card for operation) Fuse and Power Selector Board Removable "B Slot" Cover AC Power Connector Computer Interface Connector Panel (NOT TO BE REMOVED) RS-232 Computer Interface Connector "A Card" I/O Connectors** (for connection of transducers and control I/O) Removable "A Slot" Cover** 10KN6 Video Connector Panel (NOT TO BE REMOVED)

* Many "B Cards" come with their own rear connector assemblies (not shown here).
** Not present on the 10KN3 mainframe, which has no "A Cards."

RS-232 Formatted Output Connector (requires optional Model 10VFO132 Formatted Output Card for operation) "RGB" Output (to external CGA color monitor) RS-170 Output (to external monochrome monitor)

Fig. 2.1.c Model 10KN7 Video Connector Panel

Fig. 2.2.a Mainframe Front Elements, Model 10KN8A (front bezel removed)

Internal Color Monitor Video Signal Card (occupies B Slot No. 3)* Video Text Card (occupies B Slot No. 4) * Central Processor Card RS-232 Interface Card (Interface Protocol Switches are also mounted on this board) EEPROM Write Protect Switch System Status Indicators Optional "B Cards" (B Slot Nos. 5 & 6) Plug-In Keyboard Connector "A CARD DECK" Actuating Lever "Swell Latch Bracket Contrast Control Brightness Control Optional "A Cards" "A SLOT" No. 8

* For the Model 10KNBA, B Slot Nos. 1 and 2 are used for optional "V Cards" only; an optional Model 10VGM500 will always go in B Slot No. 1, while an optional Model 10VFO132 will go in B Slot No. 2.

Fig. 2.2.b Mainframe Rear Elements, Model 10KN8A

Combined Power ON-OFF and Circuit Breaker Button AC Power Connector "B Card" I/O Connectors* (for connection of digital/logic devices, satellite units, computers, etc.) Computer Interface Connector Panel (NOT TO BE REMOVED) RS-232 Computer Interface Connector Removable "A Slot" Cover * Many "B Cards" come with their own rear con- nector assemblies (not shown here). RS-232 Touchscreen Connector (NOT NORMALLY USED WITH THE MODEL 10KN8A) VGA Input VGA Output RS-232 Formatted Output Connector (require's optional Model 10VFO132 Formatted Output Card for operation) "A Card" I/O Connectors (for connection of transducers and control I/O) Video Connector Panel (NOT TO BE REMOVED) Replaceable Fan Filter

F1 F2 Esc 1 @ 23 # 456 789 0 $ % & - ( ) - + Back Space System Contg Video Form F3 F4 Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P Black Begin Data Had Vnt End Data Exit F5 F6 AS D F G H J K L Ctrl Back Gnd Yes Clear F7 F8 Ch Shift Z X C V B N M < > / Shift Line Help Big Lib Width Home Page F9 Chan Ctrl Stop Case Lock Start Date Stop

Fig. 2.3 Model 10P80A Extended Keyboard

a. IMPORTANT: Before powering it up, make sure your mainframe is set for the local line voltage (nominal 110 or 220 V-AC). If it is a Model 10KN3, 10KN6, or 10KN7, check the Power Selector Board on the rear panel.* If you need to change the voltage setting, see Section 1.A.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

b. IMPORTANT: Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect Switch is OFF (downward position) before you power up your mainframe and before you turn it off. You should always take this precaution in order to avoid sporadic writes to the EEPROM and other possible EEPROM problems.

c. Plug the power cord supplied with your mainframe into the rear-panel AC Power Connector. Plug the other end of the cord into your primary power source.

d. Turn on the mainframe by pressing the ON/OFF button. For Model 10KN3, 10KN6, and 10KN7 mainframes, the button should light when power is ON. The four front-panel System Status Indicators labelled ERR, CHR, MNE, and RET should all light for about one second, and then go off, to verify proper system powerup. Also, the words "RAM TEST PASSED" may appear for about two seconds in the "billboard" region of your mainframe's CRT display, to be immediately replaced by your company's name, or other prespecified alphanumeric "logo."

The first time you powerup your mainframe, its initial "sign-on" video page will appear. Unless otherwise specified at the time of order, this display will include the current "logo" string, TIME, DATE, and "live" data for all channels up to and including Channel No. 15. You will learn in Section 5 how to specify a different "sign-on" page and a different "logo" text.

Plug the free terminal of your Extended Keyboard's connector cord into the KEYBOARD CONNECTOR on the front edge of the RS-232 Interface Card. The lock lever will snap into place as the terminal is fully engaged.

To verify proper keyboard connection, press any key. The System 10 mainframe's green Status Indicator labelled KBD should blink.

LEAVE THE KEYBOARD CONNECTED DURING THE SETUP PROCEDURES THAT FOLLOW.

As you will soon discover, your B-sized mainframe's extensive video capability is one of its premium features. Every B-sized mainframe can store up to 100 separate CRT VIDEO PAGE FORMATS (or "VIDEO PAGES").*

Each video page can be used to display a large number of "live" System 10 data channels either via digital readout or, if the Model 10VGM500 Card is present, via horizontal bargraph (see Section 17, below). The "live" states of system logic bits can be displayed using specific "bit designator" words. You can cause "live" alphanumeric messages to appear on display at appropriate times. When the Model 10BDR64 History Card is present, "playback" channels containing locally stored "historical" data can also be displayed (as explained in Section 18).

Any displayed data, logic-bit, message, or playback field—plus any adjacent “fixed text” you want to associate with that field—can instantaneously exhibit one or a combination of special visual effects in order to highlight important data values or call attention to various process trends, states, and alarm conditions. For the 10KN7’s monochrome display, these effects include Blink, Flash, Reverse, and Half Intensity. In addition to all possible background/foreground combinations of the eight available colors, all color displays provide optional Blink and Flash enhancements.

Video pages can be quickly and easily composed by the operator, using simple word-processor functions through the keyboard. If desired, a host computer can recompose displayed pages, line by line, during the measurement and control process. Video pages can also be transmitted to the computer, line by line, for storage in the computer's own memory. See Section 2.C.11 of the System 10 Guidebook for "Uploading, Downloading, and Revising Video Page Formats."

In the present section, you will learn how to

• set important monitor parameters using the VIDEO DISPLAY UNIT (VDU) command
• call the mainframe's Page Directory to display, using the DIRECTORY (DIR) command
• call a specific video page to display, using the PAGE (PAG) command or key
• use the TEXT EDITOR to compose a video page for "live" data-channel readings
• recall and save a composed page, using the RECALL (RCL) and SAVE (SAV) commands
• define a "logo" for the display billboard, using the LOGO (LGO) command
• specify a system "sign-on page," using the SIGN-ON PAGE (SOP) command

NOTE: The creation of “bit-state” fields and the definition of limit-dependent visual effects for channel data fields will be explained later, when we get to the setup of system limit monitoring in Section 13. Note too that all the procedures outlined here are discussed in greater detail in Section 2.C of the System 10 Guidebook. You should refer to this section if at any point you think that more detailed information would be helpful to you.

* Usable video memory is normally 157 "blocks" of 64 bytes (or characters) each. A typical CRT video page takes 5 to 7 memory blocks, with a nominal maximum of 32. In addition to providing the high-speed bargraph capability discussed in Section 17 of this booklet, the Model 10VGM500 Video Graphics Memory Option will increase the total video memory capacity to 661 blocks (see also Section 3.C.3 of the System 10 Guidebook).

a. Turn on your mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch by placing it in the upward position. An alternative method for enabling the EEPROM Write Protect function—especially useful when you don't want to have to remove the front bezel to access the switch—is to type a command of

$$ \text { BIT } 9 9 9 = 1 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

on the keyboard. Note that every keyboard-entered command must be terminated by pressing the CARRIAGE RETURN (Retrn) key, here designated by "[CR]."

The red Status Indicator labelled E2P will light when the EEPROM Write Protect function has been enabled.

b. If your mainframe is a version of the Model 10KN3, 10KN6, or 10KN8A, enter from the keyboard a command of either

$$ \mathrm{VDU} = \mathrm{C}, 5 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] \text { or } \mathrm{VDU} = \mathrm{C}, 6 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

depending on whether your local line frequency is 50 or 60 Hz, respectively ("C" stands for "COLOR MONITOR").

If your mainframe is a version of the Model 10KN7, enter either

$$ \mathrm{VDU} = \mathrm{M}, 5 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] \text { or } \mathrm{VDU} = \mathrm{M}, 6 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

again depending on your local line frequency ("M" stands for "MONO-CHROME MONITOR").

c. Call to display your mainframe's PAGE DIRECTORY by entering a command of

DIR [CR]

The Page Directory shows which of the 100 potential video pages have already been formatted and entered in nonvolatile EEPROM storage. It shows the relative amount of video memory dedicated to each stored page, and which pages (if any) are contained in the “memory extension” provided by an optional Model 10VGM500.* It also shows, after the words “PAGE DIRECTORY,” the “free” video memory available in both “standard” video memory and optional “extended” memory (if present). Finally, at the bottom right corner of the display is shown the total “free” memory at your disposal (both “standard” and “extended”).

Your mainframe will most likely come with a number of prestored video pages, including one or more initial data-display pages and the initial “blank” page (No. 100). Take note of any presently unused page number, which can be assigned to the practice page you are about to compose.

d. Call to display the mainframe's prestored "blank" Page No. 100 by pressing the Page key and then typing 100, followed by CARRIAGE RETURN (Retrn). This command, which has the general form of

PAG p [CR]

may be used to call any existing Page No. "p" to the CRT screen.

e. Now press the Page key (only), followed by Retrn. This asks the mainframe for the number of the page currently on display. The answer (PAG = 100) should appear in the display "billboard."

f. Press Retrn again, to remove PAG = 100 from the billboard and replace it with your mainframe's currently specified "logo."

* Pages in "standard" video memory are shown white on red (for monochrome, white on black), and those in optional "extended" memory, red on white (for monochrome, black on white).

g. Press the Video Formt (VIDEO FORMAT) key to enter TEXT EDITOR MODE. A blinking cursor will appear at the upper left ("HOME") corner of the screen. The cursor may be moved by means of the four "ARROW" keys and the Back Space key.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MOVE THE CURSOR BY PRESSING THE SPACE BAR.

h. Fig. 5.1, below, shows the text of the simple practice page we now wish to compose. The first screen (a) shows the page format while still in TEXT EDITOR MODE; the user-entered data fields are still occupied by channel-number entries. The second screen (b) shows the same page in LIVE DISPLAY MODE; the data fields are now occupied by "live" data readings from the measured process, and the billboard by the prespecified "logo" string.

Fig. 5.1.a Typical Composed Video Page Format, in TEXT EDITOR MODE

***** SYSTEM TEN TEXT EDITOR ***** WARNING! BOOST: 001 IN HG COOLANT: 002 DEG F OIL PRES: 003 PSI

Fig. 5.1.b The Same Video Page Format, in LIVE DISPLAY MODE

ABC CORP. WARNING! BOOST: 26.5 IN HG COOLANT: 238.4 DEG F OIL PRES: 46.7 PSI

i. To compose the video page shown in Fig. 5.1, ^1

1. Move the screen cursor down one single-height space by pressing the "DOWN ARROW" key.

2. Set a "4x4" CHARACTER SIZE ^2 for the first line of FIXED TEXT by
   a. First pressing the Width key and then 4.
   b. Then pressing the Hght (HEIGHT) key and then 4.

3. Set a color of red on white for the first line of FIXED TEXT ^4 :

a. Press the Shift key and hold it down.
b. Press the key labelled Red.
c. Press the Back Grnd (BACKGROUND) key.
d. Press the key labelled Wht (WHITE).
e. Release the Shift key.

You may wish at this time to experiment with other foreground/background color combinations. Remember, the sequence is

[SHIFT] CHARACTER COLOR KEY BACKGROUND KEY BACKGROUND COLOR KEY [UNSHIFT]

1. Now you're ready to enter the actual text of the line. Type the word "WARNING!" Press and hold down the Shift key (or press Caps Lock) to produce upper-case letters and the exclamation point (!). If you make a typing error, you can always use the Back Space or "LEFT ARROW" key and rewrite over any existing text—as long as you're in TEXT EDITOR MODE.

2. Using the "LEFT ARROW" key, move the cursor back to the letter "W." Press the Insrt (INSERT) key once. This inserts one white-background space to the left of the word "WARNING!" at the position of the cursor.

3. Now reset the color of this inserted space to white on black: [SHIFT], WHITE, BACKGROUND, BLACK [UNSHIFT]

4. Press the Insrt key several more times—thereby inserting black-background spaces—until the word is horizontally centered on the screen, as in Fig. 5.1. If you insert too many spaces, you can delete the space occupied by the cursor by pushing the Diete (DELETE) key.

5. The cursor should still be at the left edge of the screen. Move it down three single-height spaces, via the "DOWN ARROW" key. Note that, for purposes of vertical formatting, you may insert a line of spaces of appropriate size and color by moving the cursor to the extreme left edge of the

1 The procedure given here assumes the use of a Model 10BVS95 or 10BVS98 Video Signal Card. The procedure is slightly differently when the older 10BVS90 is present.
2 ALL TEXT AND DATA CHARACTERS ON A GIVEN LINE OF THE DISPLAY MUST BE OF THE SAME SIZE (HEIGHT x WIDTH). All the character sizes shown in Fig. 2.C.4 of the System 10 Guidebook are possible with the exception (for a Model 10BVS95) of "2 x 1," "3 x 1," and "4 x 1."
^3 For monochrome equivalents to color settings, see Section 2.C.5(d) of the System 10 Guidebook.

screen, pressing the Ctrl (CONTROL) key, and holding it down as you press the Insrt (INSERT) key. Similarly, to delete an entire line of display, move the cursor to the extreme left of the line to be deleted, press Ctrl, and hold it down as you press Dlete (DELETE).

1. Now set the line character size to "2x2" by

a. First pressing the Width key and then 2.
b. Then pressing the Hght (HEIGHT) key and then 2.

1. Set a color for the second line of your display—say, yellow on black:

[SHIFT], YELLOW, BACKGROUND, BLACK, [UNSHIFT]

1. Insert a whole line of black spaces at the cursor position, as described in Step 8, above, by pressing Insrt.
2. To enter the first portion of FIXED TEXT for the second line, type several spaces (via the SPACE BAR) and the word "BOOST:"
3. To start the DATA FIELD that immediately follows "BOOST:", press the Begin Data key.
4. Enter four spaces and then 001, which is the channel number that identifies this data field. Remember that the last digit of the channel-number entry must always occupy the last character space of the data field.
5. Press the End Data key. You have now established a seven-space data field. This field will normally appear as blue characters on a green background as long as you're in the TEXT EDITOR MODE. NOTE: If you should make an error in entering the data field, you will be alerted by a specific "prompting message" in the billboard (see Section 2.C.5(e) of the System 10 Guidebook for details).
6. Now enter the remaining FIXED TEXT for this line: one space, followed by the unit legend "IN HG." Since the whole line was inserted in Step 11 (with the foreground/background combination specified in Step 10), the letters will appear in the same color as the word "BOOST:" It is permissible, however, to specify a new color at any point within a given line's FIXED TEXT. (In fact, if you had not entered the whole line in Step 11, you would have to reset the desired color upon leaving the data field.)
7. Press CARRIAGE RETURN (Retrn) twice, and follow the same procedure to enter the second and third data lines (entering channel numbers of 002 and 003, respectively). NOTE: While you must reset the character size for each succeeding line, you need not reset the color, so long as you exit the original line by pressing CARRIAGE RETURN. Remember, too, to use the Insrt and Diete keys for horizontal positioning of each line, as in Steps 5 and 7, above.
8. When you're satisfied with the appearance of your display format, press the Exit key to leave TEXT EDITOR MODE and return to LIVE DISPLAY MODE.

As shown in Fig. 5.1.b, the channel numbers you entered in the display's data fields will now be replaced by "live" data readings for the respective channels, while the color of each data field will now change to the color determined by the "STATUS"-defining command currently in effect for the respective channel. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, each mainframe is shipped with an initial status setting of white on black for every data channel, for all limit conditions.

j. As soon as you press the Exit key, the billboard will announce that the page on display is "volatile"—that is, it is not yet stored in EEPROM memory. THEREFORE, IF THE MAINFRAME IS NOW TURNED OFF, THE NEWLY COMPOSED PAGE WILL BE IRRETRIEVABLY LOST.

If you want to take another look at the Page Directory at this point, to see what pages are as yet unused, simply type DIR [CR], as in Step c, above.

k. After examining the directory, you will have to "recall" to display the still volatile page you have just composed, by entering from the keyboard a command of

RCL [CR]

I. To permanently save this page, make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled (see Step a, above), and then type

SAV n [CR]

where "n" is a page number not presently being used.* The billboard will tell you when the page is safely in EEPROM storage. Press CARRIAGE RETURN once more to remove the billboard message.

m. To verify the saving of the new video page, call back the Page Directory by typing DIR [CR]. It should show the page just placed in EEPROM storage (as "Page No. n"), with its relative memory size.

n. Now call Page No. n to display once more by pressing the Page key and typing the number "n," followed by Retrn. While Page No. n is still on the screen, press the Page key (only), followed by Retrn. The appropriate response (PAG = n) should appear in the billboard.

o. Press Retrn once more and note the "logo" text presently in the display billboard. Change the "logo" to "ABC CORP." by typing

$$ \mathrm{LGO} = \text { ABC CORP. } [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

p. Now enter an LGO command to change the "logo" back to its original text, or to whatever other text you want. For a CRT display, the "logo" can take up to 27 alphanumeric characters, including spaces.

q. To designate a new "sign-on" page to be displayed automatically on system powerup, you can enter a command of

SOP = p [CR]

where "p" is the number of any video page currently in EEPROM storage.

Having gone through the above page composition and storage procedure—and, ideally, having gone back and tried to compose a few video page formats of your own design—you may want to consult Section 2.C of the System 10 Guidebook for instructions on additional video setup procedures, including

• CRT adjustment, including VIDEO MODE and refresh rate
• DELETION of display fields and video pages
  • line duplication and repeated character entry
• establishment of "ASSOCIATED" FIXED TEXT

* Note that "n" could also designate an existing page in storage which you wish to replace with the page now on display. In this case, the system will automatically display the currently stored "Page No. n," with the billboard question

PAGE ALREADY EXISTS AS SHOWN, DELETE?

See Section 2.C.7 of the System 10 Guidebook for further instructions.

• setup of BIT-STATE, MESSAGE, and VIDEO PLAYBACK FIELDS
• specification of VISUAL EFFECTS for data, bit-state, message, and video play-back fields

As mentioned earlier, some of these topics will be covered when we come to LIMIT SETUP in Section 13. Setting the REFRESH RATE is covered in Section 10. Optional VIDEO BARGRAPHS (requiring the Model 10VGM500) will be treated in Section 17, and optional VIDEO PLAYBACK FIELDS (requiring the Model 10BDR64), in Section 18.

SETUP OF ANALOG INPUTS: TRANSDUCER CABLING

If you ordered sensor cables with your System 10, these will be equipped with individual female 20- or 40-pin CONDITIONER CONNECTORS, all properly labelled and "keyed."

Fig. 6.1.a, below, shows the "standard" 20-pin connector for a Daytronic "10A" Conditioner Card, with internal solder terminals for up to eight separate transducer cables. "10A" Thermocouple Conditioners like the Models 10A9-8C and 10A10-4 require special screw-terminal connectors, similar to that shown in Section 1.E of the System 10 Guidebook.*

Fig. 6.a.b shows a typical 40-pin connector for a Daytronic "AA" Conditioner Card, with labelled screw terminals for direct connection of transducer cable leads.

If you're supplying your own sensor cables, you should carefully read Section 1.E of the System 10 Guidebook, along with the individual conditioner card subsection(s) of Section 1.E.2 that apply to your system. All necessary cabling instructions are given here.

Fig. 6.1.a Standard "10A" Conditioner Connector "10A"-Card I/O Connector (rear of mainframe) "10A" Conditioner Card Pin 1 Captive Screw (for mounting to mainframe) Pin A Cables to Transducers 20-Pin Conditioner Connector (No. 60322) Connector "Keys" (to match slots in card I/O Connector) Pin L Pin 10

* Several other "10A" cards require special I/O provisions. For example, the Model 10A68-2 Dual AC RMS Conditioner Card mates with a special connector board that has a separate screw-terminal block for each input channel, and the Model 10A74-4C Quad Strain Gage Track-Hold Conditioner Card will normally use a special Bridge Completion Connector in place of the standard connector. See the specific subsection of System 10 Guidebook Section 1.E.2 for complete details.

100K Shunt Calibration Resistors* Screw-Terminals (for connection of transducer cables) 40-Pin Connector (attaches to rear I/O Connector of AA Card) Ground Lug (for grounding cable shields via mainframe mounting screws) * Only present for strain gage conditioner cards. Fig. 6.1.b Typical "AA" Conditioner Connector Assembly (shown upside down)

To create your first "real-world" DATA CHANNEL, you should now connect at least one transducer to your mainframe. This should be a transducer that can be both zeroed and loaded with an arbitrary value of the measured parameter (NOT, in most cases, a Thermocouple, Thermistor, or RTD). A perfect example of such a transducer is a load cell.

You will use this channel for the procedures given in the following sections. For a listing of all preconfigured data channels in your particular system, see the print-out in Appendix A of your System 10 Guidebook.*

NOTE: While most CONDITIONER CARDS are ready to be calibrated as soon as they are properly cabled to their respective transducers, a few of them require special setup procedures under certain circumstances. Be sure to check the section entitled "SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS" in each card-specific subsection of System 10 Guidebook Section 1.E.2 that applies to your system.

7 DATA CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

In this section, we will consider the configuration of your system's REAL CHANNELS. A "real channel" is an analog input channel containing physical measurement data from the "real world." There are other types of data channels that must be configured before they can be used—including ANALOG OUTPUT CHANNELS, PSEUDOCHANNELS, and CONVERSION CHANNELS. You need not worry about these other types of channels right now.

NOTE: IN ALMOST ALL CASES, YOUR SYSTEM'S ANALOG-INPUT CHANNELS WILL HAVE BEEN FULLY CONFIGURED AT THE FACTORY, IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS GIVEN AT THE TIME OF ORDER. Therefore, you need not normally concern yourself (at least initially) with the configuration procedure, unless you need to reconfigure your system, through the addition or removal of one or more cards, the reassignment of transducer inputs, the physical interchange of cards within the mainframe, etc.

"Configuration" of a real channel ordinarily involves applying to that channel first a TYPE (TYP) command and then a LOCATE (LCT) command. In the following

* PLEASE NOTE: The System 10 Data Sheet will be included within the System 10 Guidebook itself (as Appendix A) only when a printed version of the Guidebook is supplied with a specific System 10. WHEN THE GUIDEBOOK IS PROVIDED ON CD OR OTHER ELECTRONIC MEDIUM, THE DATA SHEET WILL BE PROVIDED AS A SEPARATE DOCUMENT.

procedure, however, you will simply interrogate the system to confirm pre-entered TYP and LCT values for a few selected channels. YOU WILL NOT—AND SHOULD NOT—CHANGE THESE VALUES AT THIS TIME. If, in the future, you do need for some reason to reconfigure one or more real channels, refer to Appendix C of the System 10 Guidebook.

In this section you will also learn how to use the keyboard's Step and Back Space keys for rapid sequential interrogations.

a. Turn to Appendix A of your System 10 Guidebook.* There you will find a customized printout, which we will call the "System 10 Data Sheet." This is a complete listing of all data channels in your system as shipped, giving important setup information for each existing real channel, including

1. the MODEL NUMBER of the plug-in card that handles the channel
2. the "TYPE" designation for the channel
3. the "LOCATION" of the channel relative to the system's A SLOTS
4. the initial DIGITAL FILTER SETTING for the channel (0 through 9)
5. the initial SCALING FACTOR ("EMM") and ZERO OFFSET ("BEE") values for the channel
6. the initial LOW and HIGH LIMIT SETTINGS for the channel
7. the initial "LIMIT LOGIC" SETTINGS for the channel
8. other channel parameters that may apply (including Linearization Function, Conversion Channel assignment, Range value, and Sensitivity value)

The data sheet also shows which channels, if any, have been preassigned to CALCULATION and/or ANALOG OUTPUT functions. It lists all "EXECUTE," CONDITIONAL," and "COMMAND" statements that have been pre-entered for your system, as well as all "LOGIC SOURCE" and "BIT DESIGNATOR" assignments for system bits. Other miscellaneous system parameters are also listed. Finally, it gives all relevant SERIAL NUMBERS and SOFTWARE/HARDWARE "VERSION" NUMBERS, plus all initial mainframe A-SLOT ASSIGNMENTS.

For the purposes of this tutorial procedure, you need only refer to the "CHANNEL CONFIGURATION" section of the data sheet.

b. Since you will not be entering any setup values here, but only interrogating the system for existing values, the EEPROM Write Protect function need not be enabled. Turn OFF the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch by placing it in the downward position. If you enabled the EEPROM Write Protect function by commanding BIT 999 = 1 [CR] in Step a of Section 5, you should now disable it by entering a command of

$$ \text { BIT } 9 9 9 = 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

c. Enter from the keyboard a command of

TYP 1 [CR]

This is an INTERROGATION (or "READ") command. Unlike most SETUP (or "WRITE") commands, an interrogation command has no "equals" sign (=). It doesn't serve to enter (or "write") system configuration data into the Central Processor's EEPROM, but to retrieve (or "read") configuration data out of it.

The two-character (hexadecimal) "TYPE CODE" shown on the data sheet for Channel No. 1 should now appear in the billboard region of the mainframe or keyboard display. A channel's type code specifies one or more special pro-

cessing factors that may apply to that channel, including range, sensitivity, linearization table, calibration procedures, etc. For example, a type of 19 signifies a "Type J" thermocouple input, and a type of 6B signifies a ±200 V-DC voltage input. A complete list of all channel type codes may be found in Appendix C of the System 10 Guidebook.

d. Press the keyboard's Step key. This "steps" the last-entered interrogation command to the next channel in numerical sequence. Thus, the type code for Channel No. 2 should now appear on the billboard. Check the data sheet to verify that this is indeed the case.

e. Use the Step key to continue "stepping" through several more channels. (For rapidly stepping through a whole range of channels, press Step and hold it down.)

f. Now use the Back Space key to "step" backwards through the interrogation series.

g. Enter from the keyboard a command of

LCT 1 [CR]

The appropriate “LOCATION” number for Channel No. 1 should now be displayed.*

The first digit of the location number represents the channel's "A-CARD DECK" number. For mainframes with only one A-slot rack, it is always "1." It can be "1" through "4" for a 10KN6 or 10KN7 mainframe, which permits extension of A-slot capacity by up to three additional decks (in such mainframes, the bottom A-card deck will always be the highest numbered).

The second and third “location” digits represent the A-SLOT NUMBER within the given deck for the A CARD that handles the given channel. Each deck can have up to 24 optional A cards.

The fourth “location” digit is the SUBCHANNEL NUMBER corresponding to this channel (1 through 8).**

For example, the channel corresponding to the second subchannel of the card occupying "A SLOT No. 13" of the mainframe's DECK No. 4 will have a location number of "4132"; the channel corresponding to the seventh subchannel of the card occupying "A SLOT No. 6" of a mainframe's single A-card deck will have a location number of "1067."

h. Again, use the Step and Back Space keys to interrogate a continuous sequence of channels for their respective locations. Remember that this "stepping" procedure will work following any initial keyboard interrogation of the form

[MNEMONIC] n [CR]

where “n” is the number of the first argument of the desired series (Channel No., Bit No., Page No., “Execute” No., etc.).

* The default "location" number for all channels to which the "WRITE" form of the LCT command has not been applied is "1011." For a "nonlocated" channel—for example, a "pseudochannel" or "conversion channel"—the response to LCT x [CR] is "N/A."

** An A Slot will usually have as many "subchannels" as the number of individual analog inputs its card can handle (e.g., eight for a Model 10A9-8C, four for a Model 10A10-4, one for a Model 10A40, etc.).

Before you proceed to calibrate any of your system's data channels, you should define its default SCAN RANGE. In this section, you will learn to use the TERMINATOR (TER) command to do this.

a. Enable the EEPROM Write Protect function by turning ON the EEPROM Switch (placing it in the upward position) or commanding BIT 999 = 1 [CR].
b. A System 10's initial default scan range is normally preset at the factory. The typical range is from Channel No. 1 through the highest Channel Number called for by the system configuration specified at the time of order. Determine this initial range by entering from the keyboard an interrogation of

TER [CR]

The number of the current “TERMINATOR CHANNEL” will be displayed. We will call this number “ t_1 .”

c. Refer to the Locate (LCT) column in Section 2 of your System 10 Data Sheet. You should already be aware of the "location" of the real channel that uses the source transducer you hooked up in Section 6, above. For example, if you cabled your real-world transducer to the first subchannel of the conditioner card in A Slot No. 3 or the first A-card deck, the corresponding real channel would be the channel "located" at "1031." Find the location value of your "live" real channel in the LCT column. Note the corresponding CHANNEL NUMBER in the Channel (CHN) column. We will call this number "x."

d. Now enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{TER} = \mathrm{t} _ {2} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where “ t_2 ” is a number different from “ t_1 ” and higher than “x.” This command assigns Channel No. t_2 to be the new system Terminator Channel. On powerup, the Central Processor’s effective scan range will always be from Channel No. 1 to and including Channel No. t_2 .* As a general rule, you’ll want to maximize your system’s scan speed by making the Terminator Channel Number as low as possible.

SETTING SYSTEM TIME AND DATE

In this section, you'll learn to apply the TIME (TME) and DATE (DTE) commands.

a. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled.
b. Set your system's internal clock-time by entering from the keyboard a command of

TME = t [CR]

where "t" is a number of up to 6 digits expressing the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds. For example, if it were now exactly 3:07

* Unless a SCAN (SCN) command has been used to specify a low scan limit other than Channel No. 1 and/or a high scan limit other than Channel No. t₂ (see Section 1.F.1 of the System 10 Guidebook). Note too that for a B-sized mainframe, you cannot set a Terminator Channel higher than "997"; the special TIME and DATE channels (Nos. 998 and 999) are always scanned.

p.m., you would enter for "t" the number 150700 (for hour "15," minute "07," and second "00").¹

c. To verify this setting, ask for the current system time by commanding

TME [CR]

d. Now set your system's internal date by commanding

DTE = d [CR]

where “d” is a number of up to 6 digits expressing the current date in month, day, and year. For example, if today were June 9, 2001, you would enter for “d” the number 60901 (for month “06,” day “09,” and year “01”). ^2

e. To verify this setting, ask for the current system date by commanding

DTE [CR]

DATA CHANNEL CALIBRATION

The purpose of this section is to lead you step-by-step through a typical System 10 “real-channel” calibration. As explained in Section 1.G.2 of the System 10 Guidebook, a number of different calibration methods are available. The method chosen for a given analog input channel will depend on the type of source transducer, the characteristics of the transducer/cable/conditioner combination, the extent of your knowledge of these characteristics, and the possibility and/or convenience of producing actual or simulated transducer inputs of known value.

TO FIND OUT WHICH CALIBRATION METHOD OR METHODS MAY BE USED WITH A GIVEN CONDITIONER CARD, YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE RESPECTIVE SUBSECTION OF SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK SECTION 1.E.2.

In very general terms, you will calibrate a signal-conditioner channel by commanding the system's Central Processor to compute and store two constant values: a SCALING FACTOR ("m") and a ZERO OFFSET ("b"). Automatically and continuously applied to all subsequent readings of the given channel, these two calibration constants define the linear proportionality expressed by the equation "y = mx + b."³ In the following conventional "zero and span" technique, you will use the ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands to define a channel's "b" and "m" values, respectively. This is known as "Two-Point" or "Deadweight" calibration.

a. In Section 8, above, you determined the CHANNEL NUMBER of the "live" analog input channel you set up in Section 6. We will consistently refer to this channel as "Channel No. x." Thus, where "x" appears in the command syntax below, you should enter the actual Channel Number assigned to

1 Though not entered in the TME command, separating colons will be shown in every display of TIME.
^2 Though not entered in the DTE command, separating slashes will be shown in every display of DATE.
3 Where "y" is the measurement value reported for the channel and "x" is the ratio of the actual voltage of the analog input signal to the positive full-scale voltage of the channel's chosen input "type." As such, "x" is a unitless number operated upon by the "slope" coefficient "m" and the offset term "b" to yield a true analog measurement. Both "m" and "b" are expressed in the engineering units of the chosen input "type."

this channel. In Section 8, above, you ensured that Channel No. x is within the current system SCAN RANGE, as it must be if it is to be calibrated.

b. You should first arrange for a "live" display of Channel No. x. If this channel does not appear on any of your system's initial data-display pages, you will have to compose a new video page for its display, following the guidelines given in Section 5, above.

c. At this point, you should determine whether your display's current refresh rate is satisfactory. Every mainframe is normally preset to update displayed data approximately 10 times a second. You may increase or reduce this rate, if you wish, by enabling the EEPROM Write Protect function and commanding

REF = n [CR]

For the “refresh constant” (n), you should enter an integer from 1 through 60. This number is related to the actual screen “refresh rate” (R, in Hertz) by this equation: 60/n = R (Hz). The range of possible refresh rates is therefore 1 through 60 Hz.* For example, if you enter a refresh constant of “5,” data appearing on your screen will be updated approximately 12 times a second, while a value of 30 for “n” will yield a rate of only 2 times a second.

d. Establish a zero input for Channel No. x by removing all load from the source transducer.

e. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

ZRO x [CR]

The displayed value for Channel No. x should now be zero. If it is not, recheck the transducer connection, the channel number, and the channel TYPE and LOCATION assignments; also make sure that Channel No. x is in fact within the current scan range (see Sections 6, 7, and 8, above). This command sets the "BEE" value for Channel No. x—that is, the ZERO OFFSET to be applied to all subsequent channel readings.

f. Now apply an accurately known value of input loading to the source transducer—a value (positive or negative) from 80% to 100% of the nominal full-scale rating.

g. Enter a command of

FRC x = z [CR]

where “z” is the numerical value of the known input applied in Step e, in desired engineering units and with appropriate polarity. This command “forces” the data reading of Channel No. x to equal the value “z.” It thereby sets the “EMM” value for Channel No. x—that is, the SCALING FACTOR to be applied to all subsequent channel readings. Check the “live” display of Channel No. x to make sure that it reads the number “z.”

The FRC command also set the desired precision of Channel No. x. Suppose, for example, that you're measuring "pounds," and enter a "z" of "300." All subsequent readings of Channel No. x will be rounded to the nearest pound. If, however, the entry is "300.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a pound.

h. Remove all load from the source transducer. The "live" display of Channel No. x should return to zero. Check the accuracy of the calibration by applying various amounts of known loading to the transducer and noting the corresponding measurement readings on the channel's "live" display. (You may have to repeat Steps d through h to achieve final calibration.)
i. Do not disconnect the transducer. It will be used in some of the following procedures.

NOTE: Section 2.G of the System 10 Guidebook shows you how to set a data channel's SCALING FACTOR and ZERO OFFSET directly, using the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) and OFFSET (BEE) commands, respectively. Section 2.G also tells you how to set a channel's digital filter by means of the FILTER (FIL) command, and also, if desired, a "run-time" tare offset value, by means of the TARE (TAR) command.

SETUP OF CROSS-CHANNEL CALCULATIONS

In this section, you will apply the CALCULATE (CLC) command to define a system "CALCULATE" channel.

A CALCULATE channel is one form of System 10 “pseudochannel.” Its reported data does not represent a directly measured value, but rather a mathematical function of one or more other data channels (“real” or “pseudo”). In addition to standard algebraic operations, CALCULATE functions include square root, absolute value, maximum (most positive value), and minimum (least positive value). They permit real-time computation of such process variables as Efficiency, Horsepower, Specific Fuel Consumption, Power Factor, Lift-Drag Ratio, Spring Modulus, and many others.

The thirteen forms of the CLC "WRITE" command are listed in Section 2.J.1 of the System 10 Guidebook. Here, we will use only the first of these functions (multiplication of a single channel by a constant) to demonstrate the use of the CLC command. You will multiply the "live" data value for Channel No. x—the channel you calibrated in the previous section—by a given numerical constant. Examples of more complex cross-channel calculations are given in Section 2.J of the System 10 Guidebook.

a. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled.
b. Apply a value of stable input loading to the source transducer of Channel No. x. Observe the displayed data value for the channel.
c. Refer to your customized System 10 Data Sheet and choose a channel within the current scan range but not currently used by your system. Its present "TYPE" and "LOCATION" values are not important. We will call this "Channel No. y."
d. Arrange for a "live" display of the data reported by Channel No. y, preferably on the same video page that displays Channel No. x (see Section 10, Step b, above).
e. Enter from the keyboard a command of

$$ \mathbf {C L C} \mathbf {y} = 2 (\mathbf {C H N} \mathbf {x}) [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where "y" is the number of the unused channel selected in Step c and "x" is the number of the real channel calibrated in Section 10.

Channel No. y's display should now report a value exactly twice that of Channel No. x, and with the same precision as was specified for Channel No. x in Section 10, Step f, above.

f. Change the input to Channel No. x, and the reading of Channel No. y should change accordingly.

g. To change the calculation offset constant from "0" (assumed in the above command) to "1," type

$$ \mathrm{CLC} \mathbf {y} = 2. 0 (\mathrm{CHN} \mathbf {x}) + 1. 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

The reading of Channel No. y should now equal twice the reading of Channel No. x, plus one. Note that the offset (or "b") term of the CALCULATE expression is to be entered with the precision desired for the final "calculated data" reading. In this case, since this term was entered as "1.0," resolution will be to the nearest tenth of a unit.

Note also that we changed the decimal-point location of the “gain” (or “m”) coefficient of the CALCULATE expression from “2” to “2.0” in order to match the resolution of the offset term. It is always recommended that within a given CLC statement the gain coefficient and the offset term be expressed to the same resolution, as indicated by the decimal-point location. This will help prevent erroneous off-scale results. It is also recommended that you set up all of your CLC’s to the same decimal-place resolution. Mixing CLC resolutions will tend to slow down the system scan speed.

h. You may wish at this time to set up and display a second "real-world" data channel (call it "Channel No. z"), in order to try out some of the CLC functions that operate on two channels—for example,

$$ \mathrm{CLC} \mathbf {y} = 2. 0 (\mathrm{CHN} \mathbf {x} + \mathrm{CHN} \mathbf {z}) [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

or

$$ \mathrm{CLC} \mathbf {y} = (\mathrm{CHN} \mathbf {x}) (\mathrm{CHN} \mathbf {z}) / 2. 0 + 1. 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

12

SETUP OF LOGIC BITS AND LOGIC PORTS

12.a

"SOURCING" OF LOGIC BITS

Your system's 1000 internal LOGIC BITS are numbered from "Bit No. 0" through "Bit No. 999." Before it can be used, a given bit must be assigned a logic source. This source will continuously tell the bit what logic state it is to assume at any time: "1" or "0." The way a bit is "sourced" also determines whether or not it will latch on being set to "Logic 1." A "latched" bit must be released (as explained in Section 13) before it can again be set.

To show you how the LOGIC SOURCE (SRC) command works, we will have you assign a source of "LATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to a presently unused system bit. In Section 13, this bit will be used to observe the limit behavior of your "live" analog input Channel No. x as its transducer load is varied.

If your system has an optional Model 10BIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Card, you will use the SRC command in the following section to designate which of the 10BIO-16's I/O ports are to be Logic Input Ports and which are to be Logic Output Ports.

Before you set any logic sources, however, you must learn to use the SET BIT (BIT) command to set and read system logic-bit states.

1. You may disable the EEPROM Write Protect function if you want to, since it need not be enabled for the "WRITE" form of the BIT command to work.
2. First enter from the keyboard a "READ" command of

BIT 3 [CR]

The present logic state of Bit No. 3 will be displayed as either "3, 1" or "3, 0."

1. Use the Step key as you did in Section 7 to display a sequential range of existing bit states.
2. Now enter a "WRITE" command of

BIT 898 = 1 [CR]

(We are here assuming that Bit No. 898 is not presently involved in any of your system's preconfigured logic activities—channel "limit logic," "Execute" functions, etc. Just to be safe, however, you might want to check your "System 10 Data Sheet.")

1. Verify that Bit No. 898 has been properly "set" by commanding

BIT 898 [CR]

An answer of "898, 1" should be displayed.

1. "Reset" Bit No. 898 to "Logic 0" by commanding

BIT 898 = 0 [CR]

1. You will now assign a logic source of "LATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to Bit No. 898. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

SRC 898 = LIM, LAT [CR]

As with any SETUP (or "WRITE") command, you can always check to see that the command was effective by interrogating for the setup value you just specified. In this case, you would enter the corresponding "READ" command of

SRC 898 [CR]

If the above "WRITE" command was effective, you should get an answer of "LIM,LAT." If this is not the answer you get, you will need to re-enter the SETUP command.

NOTE: In Section 13, we will want Bit No. 899 to be controlled by "NONLATCHING LIMIT LOGIC." We do NOT have to apply an SRC command to this bit, however, as we just did to Bit No. 898. As we will see, the reference to any given bit by one of the three "LIMIT LOGIC" commands automatically sets the source of that bit to "NONLATCHING LIMIT LOGIC."

12.b

INITIALIZATION OF OPTIONAL MODEL 10BIO-16

IF YOU DON'T HAVE A MODEL 10BIO-16 UNIVERSAL LOGIC I/O CARD, YOU CAN SKIP THIS SECTION AND PROCEED DIRECTLY TO SECTION 13, BELOW.

Your system's 1000 logic bits are divided into "BIT GROUPS" of sixteen bits each. The first bit group consists of Logic Bit Nos. 0 through 15; the second, of Bit Nos. 16 through 31; the third, of Bit Nos. 32 through 47; etc. A complete table of bit groups is given in Section 2.H of the System 10 Guidebook.

Before you use the SRC command to specify which of the 10BIO-16's LOGIC I/O PORTS are to be INPUTS and which are to be OUTPUTS, you must first "initialize" the 10BIO-16 card. You will use the B SLOT (BSL) command to establish a one-to-one correspondence between the 10BIO-16's sixteen Logic I/O Ports and the sixteen members of a particular system bit group.

1. Remove the mainframe's upper front bezel, if it is not already off, and determine which B SLOT your 10BIO-16 card is in.
2. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

BSL s = 1, k [CR]

Here, "s" is the number of the B SLOT occupied by the 10BIO-16 and "k" is the number of a currently unused system BIT GROUP.*

For example, to assign the sixteen bits of Bit Group No. 3 (= Bit Nos. 32 through 47) to the Logic I/O Ports of the 10BIO-16 in B SLOT No. 4, you would command BSL 4 = 1, 3 [CR]. In this case, Bit No. 32 would now correspond to the 10BIO-16's Port No. 0, Bit No. 33 to Port No. 1, Bit No. 34 to Port No. 2, etc. (take a look at Fig. 3.B.2.2 in Section 3.B.2.c of the System 10 Guidebook).

Once you've assigned the 10BIO-16 to a specific system bit group, you must use the SRC command to indicate which of the card's sixteen ports are to be dedicated to LOGIC INPUTS. ANY LOGIC I/O PORT TO WHICH A SRC COMMAND HAS NOT BEEN APPLIED WILL BE AUTOMATICALLY DESIGNATED AS AN OUTPUT PORT. See Section 3.B.2 of the System 10 Guidebook for full details.

1. Select three bits from the bit group you specified in the above BSL command. Let's call them Bit Nos. b_1 , b_2 , and b_3 . If, for example, you specified Bit Group No. 3, then b_1 , b_2 , and b_3 could be any three numbers from 32 through 47.

2. Enter from the keyboard these three SRC commands:

$$ \mathbf {S R C} \mathbf {b} _ {1} = \text { INP }, \text { NON } [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ \mathbf {S R C} \mathbf {b} _ {2} = \text { INP }, \text { NON } [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ \mathbf {S R C} \mathbf {b} _ {3} = \text { INP }, \text { NON } [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

Since you have thus designated the three Logic I/O Ports corresponding to Bit Nos. b_1 , b_2 , and b_3 to be INPUT ports, the individual logic state of each of these three ports will now directly and continuously control the state of its corresponding system bit (in a NONLATCHING mode). All other ports are still automatically assumed to be OUTPUT ports. The individual logic state of each OUTPUT port will be directly and continuously controlled by the state of its corresponding system bit

13 LIMIT SETUP

In this section, you will learn how to

- define HIGH and LOW limit values for a given data channel, using the LOW LIMIT (LOL) and HIGH LIMIT (HIL) commands

- set the VISUAL EFFECTS to occur for the CRT display of a given data channel, depending on its current limit status, using the "LESS THAN" STATUS (VLT), "BETWEEN" STATUS (VBT), and "GREATER THAN" STATUS (VGT) commands

- create a BIT-STATE FIELD for CRT display of a given logic bit

- arrange for a data channel's HIGH-LIMIT violation to set a given system logic bit, using the "GREATER THAN" LOGIC (LGT) command

- arrange for a LOW-LIMIT violation of the same channel to set another logic bit, using the "LESS THAN" LOGIC (LLT) command

- r elease a "latched" bit, using the RELEASE (RLS) command

- cancel a channel's existing "GREATER THAN" and "LESS THAN" LOGIC, using the LGT and LLT commands

a. To set the LOW LIMIT value for Channel No. x (the channel you calibrated in Section 10, above), make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled, and enter from the keyboard a command of

$$ \text { LOL } x = L [ \text { CR } ] $$

where “x” is the channel number and “L” is the desired low-limit value expressed to the required precision. In this case, it should be about 20% of the channel’s full-scale reading. For example, if you’re using a 50-pound load cell as source transducer for Channel No. x, which was calibrated in Section 10 to read tenths of a pound, then enter an “L” value of “10.0.”

b. To set the HIGH LIMIT value for Channel No. x, enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{HIL} \mathbf {x} = \mathrm{H} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where “H” is the desired high-limit value expressed to the required precision. In this case, it should be about 80% of the channel’s full-scale reading. If, again, you were using a 50-pound load cell for readings precise to a tenth of a pound, then you would enter an “H” value of “40.0.”

c. You will now set the visual effects to be exhibited by the displayed data field of Channel No. x, when the channel's data reading is LESS THAN the low-limit value established in Step a. You will specify that "low violation" data for Channel No. x is to appear, on a color monitor, as blinking red characters on a yellow background. ^1 Enter a command of

VLT x = RYB [CR]

d. Verify the effectiveness of the above VLT command by removing all load from the channel's source transducer and observing the resultant display of Channel No. x.

e. To specify that when the data reading for Channel No. x lies BETWEEN (or is equal to one of) the two preset limit values, the channel's data should be displayed, on a color monitor, with green characters on a white background, ^2 enter a command of

VBT x = GW [CR]

f. Verify the effectiveness of the above VBT command by producing a transducer input between 20% and 80% of full scale and observing the resultant display of Channel No. x.

g. Finally, to specify that when the data reading for Channel No. x is GREATER THAN the high-limit value established in Step b, above, the channel's data should be displayed, on a color monitor, as a "flashing" alternation of blue characters on a red background with red characters on a blue background, ^3 enter a command of

VGT x = BRF [CR]

h. Verify the effectiveness of the above VGT command by producing an approximately full-scale transducer input and observing the resultant display of Channel No. x.

i. Before setting "limit logic" for Channel No. x, you should arrange for the CRT display of Logic Bit Nos. 898 and 899, in order to verify that Bit No. 898 is automatically set to "Logic 1" on occurrence of a high-limit violation for Channel No. x; and Bit No. 899, on occurrence of a low-limit violation. Proceed as follows:

1. Use the Page key as you did in Section 5, Step d, to call to display the prestored "blank" video page (No. 100).

2. Press the Video Formt (VIDEO FORMAT) key to enter TEXT EDITOR MODE. Move the cursor down to about the middle of the screen.

3. Type "BIT 898," and then press the Begin Data key.

4. Type three spaces, followed by

#898

1 If you have a monochrome monitor, command VLT x = 02B [CR] to specify blinking black characters on a white background for data in the "LESS THAN" zone.

2 If you have a monochrome monitor, command VBT x = 12 [CR] to specify half-intensity characters on a white background for data in the "BETWEEN" zone.

3 If you have a monochrome monitor, command VGT x = 20F [CR] to specify a "flashing" alternation of white characters on a black background with black characters on a white background for data in the "GREATER THAN" zone.

The “pound” symbol (#) is absolutely necessary to identify the field as a “bit-state field.”

1. Press the End Data key. The bit-state field you have just created consists of seven spaces in all, which is the maximum number of spaces allowed for such a field. In LIVE DISPLAY MODE, a bit-state field will display one of two predesignated words describing the two possible states of the bit.

2. Move the cursor down two lines, and type "BIT 899." Then press the Begin Data key.

3. Type three spaces, followed by

#899

1. Press the Exit key to leave TEXT EDITOR MODE and return to LIVE DISPLAY MODE. Since Bit Nos. 898 and 899 should each be at a "Logic 0" state, the word "LOW" should appear in each of the two bit-state fields you have just created, with red characters on a white background.* When either bit changes its state from "Logic 0" to "Logic 1," its field should read "HIGH" with white characters on a black background.

The word pair "HIGH/LOW" is the initially specified "BIT DESIGNATOR PAIR" for all system logic bits, with the abovementioned color combination for each word. You can easily change the words and colors used to display any bit, using the BIT STATE DISPLAY (BSD) and BIT DESIGNATOR PAIR (BDP) commands as explained in Section 2.C.12 of the System 10 Guidebook.

1. Save the page you have just formatted, as you did in Section 5, Step I.

In Section 12.a, above, you used the SRC command to assign a logic source of "LATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to Bit No. 898. Now you will cause this bit to be set and latched on the occurrence of a HIGH-LIMIT violation for Channel No. x.

j. To cause Bit No. 898 to be set and latched to a state of "Logic 1" when the data value for Channel No. x exceeds the high-limit value specified by the above HIL command, enter a command of

LGT x = 898 [CR]

Note that we could just as well have arranged for Bit No. 898 (or any other system bit) to "go high" when Channel No. x's data reading drops below the low-limit value specified by the LOL command, or when it re-enters the channel's "OK" ("BETWEEN") zone after either a high-limit or low-limit violation has occurred. See Section 2.F.4 of the System 10 Guidebook for a complete discussion of the three "LIMIT LOGIC" commands (LGT, LLT, and LBT).

k. Verify the effectiveness of the above LGT command by producing an approximately full-scale transducer input for Channel No. x and observing the resultant display of Bit No. 898 (it should now read "HIGH").

I. Decrease the transducer load until it is less than the high-limit value, but higher than the low-limit value. Since Bit No. 898 is latched, it should continue to display the word "HIGH."

m. To "release" the latched Bit No. 898 from its "Logic 1" state, enter a command of

RLS 898 [CR]

The display of Bit No. 898 should now read "LOW."

We also want a "LESS THAN" limit condition for Channel No. x to set Bit No. 899 to "Logic 1," but in a NONLATCHING fashion. That is, we want Bit No. 899 to revert automatically to a "Logic 0" state as soon as the low-limit violation of Channel No. x ceases to occur. The RLS command need not be applied to reset Bit No. 899, as it was to the latching Bit No. 898, above.

n. Enter from the keyboard a command of

LLT x = 899 [CR]

Bit No. 899 is now automatically assigned a "logic source" of "LIMIT, NON-LATCHING." NO PREVIOUS LOGIC SOURCE (SRC) COMMAND NEEDS TO HAVE BEEN APPLIED TO BIT NO. 899, AS IT WAS FOR THE "LIMIT, LATCHING" SOURCE OF BIT NO. 898 (Section 12.a, Step 7, above).

REMEMBER: The reference to any logic bit by one of the three "LIMIT LOGIC" commands (LGT, LLT, or LBT) automatically sets the source of that bit to "NONLATCHING LIMIT LOGIC."

o. Verify the effectiveness of the above LLT command by removing all load from Channel No. x's source transducer and observing the resultant display of Bit No. 899 (it should now read "HIGH").

p. Increase the transducer load until it is greater than the low-limit value, but less than the high-limit value. The display of Bit No. 899 should change from "HIGH" to "LOW" as soon as the data reading for Channel No. x rises above the low-limit value.

q. To cancel the "GREATER THAN" and "LESS THAN" LOGIC you have set up for Channel No. x, enter the following commands:

$$ \mathrm{LGT} \mathrm{x} = \mathrm{N/A} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

$$ \text { LLT } x = \text { N / A [CR] } $$

The presence of a “GREATER THAN” or “LESS THAN” limit condition for Channel No. x will now have no effect on the state of any system logic bit, including Bit No. 898 or 899.

14.a

SETUP OF EXECUTE FUNCTIONS

The extremely versatile EXECUTE (EXU) command lets you load one or a series of standard mnemonic commands in advance, to be executed automatically upon detection of a predefined logic event. It's as though the specified command(s) are received directly from the operator or computer the moment the triggering event occurs.*

In the following example, a given system logic bit will “go high”—i.e., will change its state from “Logic 0” to “Logic 1”—on detection of a HIGH-LIMIT violation of your calibrated Channel No. x. This “going high” transition will in turn trigger

• t he calling of a given video page to display, and
• t he loading of a constant numeric value into a special "DOWNLOAD PSEUDOCHANNEL" (which you will set up via the "WRITE" form of the CHN command).

NOTE: We are here assuming that your system's Channel No. 900 is presently unused. Just to be safe, however, you might want to check your "System 10 Data Sheet." If Channel No. 900 is not an unused channel, you will probably want to select another one for this procedure.

1. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled.
2. Arrange for a "live" display of the data reported by Channel No. 900 (see Section 10, Step b, above).
3. We want Channel No. 900 to be a "DOWNLOAD PSEUDOCHANNEL," so that we can load it with an arbitrary numeric constant.** You must therefore assign it a "TYPE CODE" of "D0" ("D zero") by entering a TYPE (TYP) command of

$$ \text { TYP } 9 0 0 = \text { D0 } [ \text { CR } ] $$

(for a full discussion of "Downloading of Numeric Data," see Section 2.D of the System 10 Guidebook).

1. To see how the downloading function works, enter a CHANNEL (CHN) command of

$$ \mathrm{CHN} 9 0 0 = 3 9 9 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

The displayed Channel No. 900 should read "399."

1. Now call the Page Directory to display by typing

DIR [CR]

* A u tomatic execution of commands occurs during the "housekeeping" period at the end of a complete scan cycle (i.e., after all channels and bits have been scanned and evaluated). Command execution will be in the same sequence in which the commands are specified in the EXECUTE (EXU) command statement, unless the number and nature of commands to be executed require their temporary placement in a "COMMAND QUEUE" until such time as they may be put into effect. Command queues and the means of monitoring their status are discussed in Section 2.K.2(d) of the System 10 Guidebook.

** Download pseudochannels need not be within the current scan range. In fact, you will generally want to keep them outside the scan in order to maximize system speed. There are actually two types of download pseudochannels: "volatile" (or RAM-resident) and "nonvolatile (or EEPROM-resident). The former have a type code of "D0"; the latter, of "D1."

1. Before you define your "EXECUTE" function, you should first set up its "trigger bit." For this purpose you should select a currently unused bit from among your system's first 32 bits.*

2. Enter a command of

$$ \text { LGT } x = r [ \text { CR } ] $$

where "x" is again the number of the channel you calibrated in Section 10, above, and "r" is the number of the selected trigger bit (it must be a number from 0 through 31).* As you learned in the previous section, this command automatically assigns a "logic source" of "NONLATCHING LIMIT LOGIC" to Bit No. r.

1. Now command

$$ E X U r = P A G n: C H N 9 0 0 = 0 [ C R ] $$

where "n" is the number of the video page that displays Channel No. 900.

The command string specified by an EXU command can take up to 31 ASCII characters, including spaces; individual commands are separated by colons.

1. Increase the load applied to Channel No. x's source transducer until it is greater than the high-limit value you entered in Section 13, Step b, above.

2. As soon as Channel No. x's high limit is violated, the video page containing Channel No. 900 should automatically appear, and the data field for this channel should report a value of "0."

3. Now enter a command of

$$ \text { BIT } 8 9 8 = 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

1. Call to display the video page you composed in Section 13, Step i, above, for the "live" display of Bit Nos. 898 and 899. Verify that the bit-state field for Bit No. 898 reads "LOW."

2. Keep the "high violation" load on the transducer, and enter a command of

$$ \text { EXU } / \mathrm{r} = \text { DIR:CHN900 } = 2 5: \text { BIT898 } = 1 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where "r" is again the number of the selected trigger bit. This command instructs the system to

• call the Page Directory
• load Channel No. 900 with the number "25," and
• set Logic Bit No. 898 to "Logic 1"

when Logic Bit No. r "goes low"—i.e., when the transition of Bit No. r from "Logic 1" to "Logic 0" is perceived.

1. Remove the transducer load. The Page Directory should automatically appear.

2. Call the video page containing Channel No. 900. That channel's data field should now read "25."

* This assumes that your mainframe has been initially set to employ the first two bit groups (Bits 0 through 31) for the purpose of triggering EXECUTE (EXU) command strings. It is possible to assign the system's EXU statements to the bits of any two bit groups (which need not be contiguous) by means of the EXECUTE BASE GROUP (XBG) command, as explained in Section 2.K.2 of the System 10 Guidebook.

1. Call the video page containing Bit No. 898. That bit's field should now read "HIGH."
2. You might now want to set up and verify an EXU or EXU/ function that increments the reading of Channel No. 900 by "1," and also "locks" (or "freezes") a given real channel (No. "y")*:

$$ E X U r = I N C 9 0 0: L O K y [ C R ] $$

Trigger this “bit going high” EXECUTE as you did in Step 9, above. Use an interrogation of CHN 900 [CR] to verify that the reading of Channel No. 150 has increased by “1.” Display Channel No. y—or use CHN y [CR]—to verify that the reading of this channel is “locked” at its current value, regardless of the behavior of the input signal.

1. To cancel the two "EXECUTE" functions that are now activated by the "going high" and "going low" of Bit No. r, enter the following commands:

$$ \begin{array}{l} \text {EXU r = N / A [CR]} \ \text {EXU /r = N / A [CR]} \end{array} $$

For more examples of the EXECUTE (EXU) command, see Section 2.K.2 of the System 10 Guidebook.

14.b SETUP OF CONDITIONAL AND COMMAND FUNCTIONS

The COMMAND (CMD) command is very similar to the EXECUTE (EXU) command, since it also permits one or more standard mnemonic commands to be instantly executed upon detection of a logic-state transition of a given "trigger" bit. The "trigger" bit for a COMMAND (CMD) function, however, will always be one of ten special system bits called "CONDITIONAL BITS."

The ten conditional bits are not to be confused with your system's 1000 LOGIC BITS, whose states are determined by various "logic sources," as explained in Section 12.a. The state of a CONDITIONAL BIT is determined solely by the "conditions" specified by a corresponding CONDITIONAL (CDL) command. These conditions can include

• t he logic state(s) of one or more logic bits
- t he limit conditions(s) of one or more data channels
- t he occurrence of one or more clock-time readings, each registering passage of a specified time interval

Each CONDITIONAL (CDL) command states a logical combination of system conditions in the form of a Boolean expression. As you can imagine, a CDL statement can be fairly complicated—if, for example, you wanted to execute a series of commands when and only when either (Bit No. 56 is "0" AND Bit No. 57 is "1") OR ((Channel No. 28 has a HIGH LIMIT violation AND Channel No. 34 has a LOW LIMIT violation) AND (a clock-time interval of 20 seconds has just elapsed))! In the following procedure, we will restrict ourselves to a relatively simple example: we will cause the system to

- d isplay the video page that contains "Download Pseudochannel" No. 900; and

- load Channel No. 900 with a constant numerical value

* The LOCK (LOK) command can be used to inhibit the automatic updating of all channels, one selected channel, or a selected range of channels. To "unlock" (resume normal updating) of Channel No. y, you must enter an UNLOCK (UNL) command of UNL y [CR].

when your "live" input Channel No. x exceeds its HIGH-LIMIT value AND when Bit 899 is "HIGH."

1. The first step is to define the combination of system conditions that will set a given conditional bit—here, Conditional Bit No. 5—to "Logic 1." Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled, and enter from the keyboard a CONDITIONAL (CDL) command of

$$ \mathrm{CDL} 5 = \text { H I L } x * \text { B I T } 8 9 9 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

This command can be interpreted as saying, "Set Conditional Bit 5 to 'Logic 1' when data for Channel No. x is in the 'GREATER THAN' limit zone AND when Bit No. 899 is at 'Logic 1.'" For a complete discussion of the Boolean syntax used by the CDL command, see Section 2.K.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

1. Next, we have to specify the commands to be automatically executed when Conditional Bit No. 5 is seen to change its state from "Logic 0" to "Logic 1." To do so, enter the following COMMAND (CMD) command:

$$ \text { CMD } 5 = \text { PAGn:CHN900 } = 1 0 0 [ \text { CR } ] $$

where "n" is the number of the video page that displays Channel No. 900.

1. Now we need to create the combination of conditions that will trigger the above CMD command. Call the video page containing Bit Nos. 898 and 899, if it is not already on display. If the bit-state field for Bit No. 899 does not already read "HIGH," enter a command of

$$ \text { BIT } 8 9 9 = 1 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

1. To obtain the second required condition for execution of the above CMD command, increase the load applied to Channel No. x's source transducer until it is greater than the high-limit value you entered in Section 13, above. As soon as Channel No. x's high limit is violated, the video page containing Channel No. 900 should automatically appear, and the data field for this channel should report a value of "100."

SETTING DATA-

TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS

Your system can be made to transmit different kinds of "data" from its COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT, including

• n umerical values contained in system DATA CHANNELS (whether these values represent actual measurements, calculations, downloaded constants, etc.), and
• "limit status" information pertaining to these values

We won't go into the various kinds of output your system can be commanded to transmit in response to a CHANNEL (CHN), DUMP (DMP), SNAPSHOT (SNP), STREAM (STR), HARD COPY (HCY), or LIMIT ZONE (LZN) command. All this is discussed in detail in Section 1.H of the System 10 Guidebook.

All you'll do here will be to interrogate your system for a few important transmission characteristics you should be aware of. To modify these and other transmission characteristics, refer to Section 1.H.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

a. Enter a command of

OPT [CR]

For a mainframe that has just been shipped, the normal response to this interrogation should be “[0D,0A]”—that is, “zero D, zero A.” The OUTPUT TERMINATOR (or “OPT”) is a string of one or two standard ASCII characters added at the end of every line of transmission. In almost all cases, it is initially set to CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED ([CR][LF]). In hexadecimal, this string is expressed as “[0D, 0A].”

b. Enter a command of

EOT [CR]

For a mainframe that has just been shipped, the normal response should again be “[0D,0A].” The END-OF-TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR (or “EOT”) is a string of up to four standard ASCII characters added at the end of every complete transmission. Like the “OPT,” it is almost always initially set to CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED ([CR][LF], or, in hexadecimal, [0D, 0A]).

c. Now enter a command of

CMT [CR]

For a mainframe that has just been shipped, the normal response should be “[0D].” What you’ve asked for here is the current COMMAND TERMINATOR (or “CMT”). Discussed in Section 2.B.5 of the System 10 Guidebook, the CMT is not really a “transmission characteristic.” It is the single ASCII character recognized by your system as the termination of any command received through the Computer Interface Port. It is always set initially to CARRIAGE RETURN ([CR], or, in hexadecimal, [0D]). All keyboard-entered commands are always terminated with [CR].

For other (in some cases optional) transmission characteristics—including channel number “echo,” limit-zone indication, “header” and “tailer” character strings, characters per channel, column format, and intertransmission delay period—see Section 1.H.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

16

COMMUNICATION WITH EXTERNAL DEVICES

16.a

INTRODUCTION: SYSTEM 10 COMMUNICATION MODES

Every B-sized System 10 mainframe has a main COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT on the rear of the Model 10BIP232 Interface Card. This port allows two-way communication with a connected computer, terminal, modem, buffered printer, recorder, operator console, or other external device capable of RS-232-C, IEEE-488, or RS-422 data interchanges.

Through the Computer Interface Port, the external device can

- issue to System 10 any MNEMONIC COMMAND in the standard command set for that system*; and

* With the exception of the SAVE (SAV) and DELETE (DEL) commands, which are strictly keyboard-entered commands.

- receive from System 10 any of the various kinds of formatted data transmissions discussed in Section 1.H of the System 10 Guidebook, plus any and all responses to interrogations that originate from the connected device.*

The optional Model 10BACIA Auxiliary Computer Interface Card supplies an independent “auxiliary” RS-232-C interface, operating with its own user-specified protocol, and functioning essentially identically to the main port. The use of one or more 10BACIA’s thus allows the mainframe to establish simultaneous high-speed communications with more than one external RS-232-C device.

The optional Model 10VFO132 Formatted Output Card provides a special RS-232-C PRINTER INTERFACE PORT for instant hard-copy reproduction of system video page formats (including all appropriate "live" data values, bit states, messages, etc., for each transmitted page). It also permits the printing of "live" data for one, all, or a selected range of system data channels, along with specified "header" and "tailer" texts, in a format specified by the user.

In addition to its main and optional RS-232-C Ports, a B-sized mainframe can accommodate optional LOGIC I/O PORTS for the transfer of logic and digital data (requires one or more Model 10BIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Cards—see Section 12.b, above).

As mentioned in Sections e and f, below, optional hardware allows conversion of the RS-232 output of the main Computer Interface Port to either IEEE-488 or RS-422 standards, if such communications are required by your application. Two special "10BACI" versions permit "auxiliary" IEEE-488 and RS-422 interfacing, respectively, independent of the main Computer Interface Port.

When equipped with a Model 10BD4 Satellite Interface Card, any B-sized mainframe can become a central "host" unit for a complete "Satellite Network." Any B-sized mainframe equipped with the Model 10BD1 Satellite Slave Card can represent an individual "node" within this network.** Setup and operation of both "host" and "satellite" B-sized mainframes are treated in Section 3.B.3 of the System 10 Guidebook.

For a complete discussion of "Interfacing of Computer, Terminal, Printer, etc." via a B-sized mainframe's Computer Interface Port, see Section 2.B of the System 10 Guidebook. For setup and operation of an optional "auxiliary" interface, see Section 3.B.5.

16.b

SETUP OF "MAIN" RS-232-C COMMUNICATIONS

We won't repeat here what is presented in detail in Section 2.B.2 of your System 10 Guidebook. When the time comes for you to establish RS-232-C data communications with an external device, you should study this manual section carefully. There you'll find recommended cabling for "full handshake," "incoming handshake," and "no handshake" interface situations.

For proper data interchange between a System 10 mainframe and a connected RS-232-C device to occur, the mainframe's Computer Interface Port must

be set to conform exactly with the protocol stipulated by the connected device. The “protocol” applying to an RS-232-C link normally involves four basic data-transfer characteristics: BAUD RATE (standard rates up to 153.6K), NUMBER OF DATA BITS (7 or 8), NUMBER OF STOP BITS (1 or 2), and PARITY (ODD, EVEN, or NONE).

For a B-sized mainframe, the easiest way to set these interface characteristics is to apply the BAUD RATE (BAU) command via the extended keyboard. ^1

To set or reset RS-232-C protocol for the main Computer Interface Port, simply command

$$ \mathbf {B A U} = \mathbf {b}, \mathbf {d}, \mathbf {s}, \mathbf {p} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where

• “b” is the BAUD-RATE selection code:
• “d” is the NUMBER OF DATA BITS (7 or 8)
• “s” is the NUMBER OF STOP BITS (1 or 2)
• “ p” is the PARITY selection code:

$$ 1 = 3 0 0 5 = 9 6 0 0 $$

$$ 2 = 1 2 0 0 6 = 1 9. 2 \mathrm{K} $$

$$ 3 = 2 4 0 0 7 = 1 5 3. 6 \mathrm{K} $$

$$ 4 = 4 8 0 0 $$

$$ 0 = \text { NONE } $$

$$ 1 = \text { O D D } $$

$$ 2 = \text { E V E N } $$

16.c

SETUP OF "AUXILIARY" RS-232-C COMMUNICATIONS

As seen by a connected external RS-232-C device, the "AUXILIARY" COMPUTER INTERFACE provided by a Model 10BACIA card behaves identically to the main Computer Interface Port. That is, a standard mnemonic command issued to an auxiliary port by an RS-232-C device connected to that port will invoke from that port a response identical in form to the response the main port would produce to the same command. ^2

If your mainframe has a Model 10BACIA, there are three “run-time” commands you should be aware of. ^3 Discussed in detail in Section 3.B.5 of the System 10 Guidebook, these commands are used for control of the Auxiliary Computer Interface (the “ACI”) either through the keyboard or through the main Computer Interface Port (the “CIP”).

1 Note that, while every B-sized mainframe has a set of PROTOCOL SWITCHES on its Interface Card, these switches are normally used only when you want to specify a default interface protocol that can not be modified by a subsequent BAUD RATE (BAU) command. In order for a BAU command to be effective, the internal protocol switches must be disabled by placing Switch No. 4 in the OFF position. See Section 2.B.2 of the System 10 Guidebook for full instructions.
2 The Model 10BACIA is to be regarded as a system "COPROCESSOR." In addition to an "auxiliary" RS-232-C interface, every 10BACIA also provides an on-board DATA RAM. Externally acquired numeric and logic data can thus be downloaded from the connected device to the 10BACIA itself. With each internal scan cycle, this data will be "locally" updated (at the 10BACIA), to be read from there by the system's Central Processor. Such local handling of downloaded data by the 10BACIA helps preserve a high scan speed when a large number of inputs is involved.
^3 These commands apply equally to the RS-422 and IEEE-488 versions of the 10BACIA (the Models 10BACI-422 and 10BACI-488, respectively).

- The ATTACH (ATT) command lets you establish a direct and exclusive "command route" between a given command source (keyboard or CIP) and the 10BACI occupying a given B slot. It is used primarily for setup of the ACI in question or for subsequent interrogation of the ACI for its own setup parameters. It is cancelled by a DETACH (DET) command.

- The VIA (VIA) command serves as a “one-line” ATTACH (ATT) command. By prefixing VIA to any standard mnemonic command, you can route that command directly and exclusively to the Model 10BACIA occupying a given B slot, without having first to “attach” that slot to the command source (keyboard or CIP).

- The COMMUNICATIONS (COM) command lets you designate a "DEFAULT COMMUNICATIONS PORT" for the mainframe. This is the single system RS-232-C interface port which will respond to any and all subsequent port-related commands received by the mainframe from the keyboard (or triggered by an EXECUTE (EXU) or COMMAND (CMD) function). Such "port-related" commands include commands like DUMP (DMP), STREAM (STR), and SEND (SND), all of which initiate output from the port. They also include commands for setup of a given port and its data transmissions, commands like BAUD RATE (BAU), DELAY (DLY), HEADER (HDR), and OUTPUT TERMINATOR (OPT). A full list of COM-affected commands is given in Section 3.B.5(d) of the System 10 Guide-book.

To set the protocol values for an ACI, you must issue a BAUD RATE (BAU) command to the 10BACIA that provides the interface, after "attaching" the 10BACIA to your command source by means of the ATT or VIA command. The form of the BAU command for the 10BACIA is the same as that for the main Computer Interface Port (see above). The only difference is in the baud-rate selection code "b," which, for the 10BACIA can be any number from 2 through 9:

$$ 2 = 1 2 0 0 6 = 1 9. 2 \mathrm{K} $$

$$ 3 = 2 4 0 0 7 = 1 5 3. 6 \mathrm{K} $$

$$ 4 = 4 8 0 0 8 = 3 8. 4 \mathrm{K} $$

$$ 5 = 9 6 0 0 9 = 7 6. 8 \mathrm{K} $$

Note that a baud rate of 300 is not available for the 10BACIA, but that the rates of 38.4K and 76.8K are available, which are not offered by the mainframe's CIP.

An ACI can have its own OUTPUT TERMINATOR, END-OF-LINE TERMINATOR, and COMMAND TERMINATOR, as specified by the corresponding command (OPT, EOT, or CMT) issued to the 10BACIA that provides the interface. Other (in some cases optional) transmission characteristics can be specified for 10BACIA outputs—including channel number “echo,” limit-zone indication, “header” and “tailer” character strings, characters per channel, column format, and intertransmission delay period—using the same commands that apply to transmissions from the CIP. See Section 15, above, for “Setting Data-Transmission Characteristics.”

16.d

SETUP OF RS-232-C COMMUNICATIONS FOR AN OPTIONAL PRINTER INTERFACE PORT

The Model 10VFO132 Formatted Output Card equips your B-sized mainframe with a special RS-232-C Printer Interface Port. For the rear-panel location of the 25-pin connector used by the 10VFO132, see Fig. 2.1 or 2.2 in

Section 2, above. This printer port is used for transmission of various kinds of formatted "hard-copy" output, including direct output of system video pages. Connections for the 10VFO132 port are discussed in Section 3.C.3(b) of the System 10 Guidebook.

There are three commands you can use to set up the interface provided by the 10VFO132, each of which is discussed in detail in Section 3.C.3(b) of the System 10 Guidebook:

• t h ePRINTER BAUD RATE (PBR) command specifies the interface protocol values. This command is very similar to the BAUD RATE (BAU) command described above, but offers a larger number of "low-end" baud rates to choose from
• t h ENTERCHARACTER DELAY (ICD) command specifies a time delay between successive character transmissions from the printer interface port (default is "no delay")
• t the PRINTER TYPE (PTY) command specifies whether or not the connected printer is an Epson or Epson-compatible printer*

Section 3.C.3 of the System 10 Guidebook also discusses the commands you will use both to format and to output various transmissions from the 10VFO132 port. These transmissions include

• t he Page Directory, the currently displayed video page, or any other selected video page or range of pages; and
• current data for one, all, or a selected range of system data channels, along with optional "header" and "tailer" texts which are actually separate precomposed video pages

The TEMPLATE (TMP) command lets you create a unique "template" for the presentation of transmitted channel data. This template is a combination of variable data fields and one or more portions of fixed text, in any desired order. See Section 3.C.3(f) of the System 10 Guidebook for complete details.

16.e

OPTIONAL IEEE-488 COMMUNICATIONS

When connected to the Computer Interface Port, the optional Model 10CIF488A IEEE Interface Adaptor enables any System 10 mainframe to be established as a "Talker/Listener" peripheral on a standard IEEE-488 bus, with a switch-selectable bus address from 0 through 30. See Section 2.B.4 of the System 10 Guidebook for a full discussion of RS-232 to IEEE-488 conversion.

The optional Model 10BACI-488 is equivalent to a Model 10BACIA with a 24-pin parallel port for standard Talker/Listener communications with an IEEE-488 bus (in place of the 10BACIA's standard RS-232-C interface). Setup and use of the 10BACI-488 are treated in Section 3.B.5(f) of the System 10 Guidebook.

16.f

OPTIONAL RS-422 COMMUNICATIONS

When connected to the Computer Interface Port, the optional Model 10E422 RS-232-C to RS-422 Converter enables any System 10 mainframe to be

* This is especially important when you want to use the 10VFO132 port to print video pages containing bargraphs.

linked to an external device with RS-422 I/O. Again, see Section 2.B.4 of the System 10 Guidebook for a full discussion of RS-232 to RS-422 conversion.

The optional Model 10BACI-422 is equivalent to a Model 10BACIA with an integral RS-422 hardware interface (in place of the 10BACIA's standard RS-232-C interface).* Setup and use of the 10BACI-422 are treated in Section 3.B.5(e) of the System 10 Guidebook.

OPTIONAL BARGRAPH SETUP

If your mainframe doesn't have a Model 10VGM500 Video Graphics Memory Card, you can skip this section.

The Model 10VGM500 lets you extend your total video memory to 661 "blocks" of 64 bytes each, but it also lets you incorporate high-speed horizontal bargraphs in your video format pages—up to 80 bargraphs per page. There are six basic bargraph types, each represented by a letter:

• upward pointer without scale (Type A)
  • solid bar without scale (Type B)
  • solid bar with scale (Type C)
• d o wnward pointer without scale (Type D)
• d o wnward pointer with scale (Type E)
• upward pointer with scale (Type F)

In the following procedure, you will create a video page that displays your "live" input channel as a SOLID BARGRAPH WITH SCALE. First, you will specify the bargraph's size, its position on the page, and the individual data channel it is to represent. Then, prompted by a screen menu, you will enter the bargraph's "type" and range ("data zero" and "data top"). Since you're selecting a bargraph with scale, you will further indicate the desired spacing of the graduation marks for that scale.

For full details on bargraph setup, see Section 3.C.4 of the System 10 Guidebook.

a. Make sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is still enabled.
b. Call your prestored "blank" page as you did in the Section 5 by pressing the Page key and then typing 100, followed by CARRIAGE RETURN (Retrn).
c. Press the Video Formt (VIDEO FORMAT) key to enter TEXT EDITOR MODE. A blinking cursor will appear at the upper left ("HOME") corner of the screen.
d. Press the “DOWN ARROW” key three times, and then set a CHARACTER SIZE of “2x2” for the display line (press, in sequence, Width, 2, Hght, 2).
e. Set a TEXT COLOR of white on red (hold down the Shift key and press, in sequence, Wht, Back Grnd, Red).

f. Type "Live Input:" This is the FIXED TEXT that is to precede the line's bargraph. ^1
g. Press the Caps Lock key. The key's red indicator light will go on when the keyboard is "locked" for CAPITAL LETTERS. Note that, while the Model 10BVS95 Graphics Video Signal Card supports lower-case letters, IT IS NECESSARY TO ENTER CAPITAL LETTERS WHEN DEFINING A BARGRAPH.
h. The screen cursor should now be one space to the left of "Live Input:" This is the "REFERENCE POINT" for your first bargraph—that is, it is the left-most space of the intended bargraph field (see Fig. 17.1).

Fig. 17.1 20-Space Bargraph, in TEXT EDITOR MODE

"Bargraph "Reference Point" G 003 "Space Characters" Data Channel Number

i. Press the Begin Data key.

j. Enter a CAPITAL letter "G."

k. Press the SPACE BAR sixteen times, in order to enter 16 spaces. We will want a 20-space field like the one shown in the figure. The first space takes the field determiner "G"; the last three spaces take the channel number. The total number of spaces for any bargraph field cannot be fewer than nine.
I. Now enter the number of your "live" input channel (Channel No. "x," the one you calibrated in Section 10). Enter this as a three-digit number, using one or two leading zeros if necessary. ^2 Remember that the last digit of the channel-number entry must always occupy the last character space of the bargraph field.
m. Press the End Data key. The first bargraph setup parameter ("DATA TOP") will now appear in the display billboard. "Data top" refers to the upper data value of the desired range—that is, the data reading you wish to correspond to the right edge of the bargraph field. ^3
n. Type in the approximate full-scale input value for Channel No. x, in the engineering units and to the precision to which it was calibrated in Section

1 Note that it is possible for one or more other kinds of data field to be in the same line as a bargraph.

^2 Actually, you can enter a one- or two-digit channel number if you wish. The three-digit number is more convenient, however, in this tutorial.

^3 The default data top, which will initially appear when End Data is pressed, will reflect a one-to-one correspondence with the present length of the bargraph. If, as in the present case, the bar is 20 characters (= 160 pixels) long, its default data top will be “160.”

1. The data top entry can take up to 6 digits plus decimal point and polarity sign (8 digits maximum if no decimal point or sign).

o. To enter the data-top value presently shown in the billboard, press CARRIAGE RETURN (Retrn). The second bargraph setup parameter ("DATA ZERO") will now appear in the billboard. "Data zero" refers to the lower data value of the desired range—that is, the data reading you wish to correspond to the left edge of the bargraph field.*
p. Type in the approximate “no load” input value for Channel No. x, in the engineering units and to the precision to which it was calibrated in Section 10.
q. To enter the data-zero value presently shown in the billboard, press Retrn. The third and final bargraph setup parameter ("TYPE") will now appear in the billboard.
r. To select a "Type C" bargraph (SOLID BARGRAPH WITH SCALE), and to specify that the bargraph is to have a graduation mark every second character, type in

C2

and press Retrn. The billboard will again display the first parameter ("DATA TOP").

s. To establish the bargraph you have just defined, press the End Data key. Like any channel data field, a bargraph will normally appear as blue characters on a green background as long as you are in TEXT EDITOR MODE.
t. Press the Exit key to exit TEXT EDITOR MODE and return to LIVE DISPLAY MODE. You may now save the video page if you wish (see Section 5, Step I).
u. The colors now exhibited by your "live" bargraph are continuously determined by the VISUAL EFFECTS you have already specified for Channel No. x by the "LESS THAN" STATUS (VLT), "BETWEEN" STATUS (VBT), and "GREATER THAN" STATUS (VGT) commands you entered in Section 13, Steps c, e, and g. Therefore—unless you have altered Channel No. x's limit-dependent VISUAL EFFECTS since you performed the procedure in Section 13—

• if the data for Channel No. x is in the "LESS THAN" limit zone, the bar-graph foreground (bar and scale) should be blinking red, while the background over which the bar moves should be yellow
• if the data for Channel No. x is in the "BETWEEN" limit zone, the bar-graph foreground should be green, while the background should be white
• if the data for Channel No. x is in the “GREATER THAN” limit zone, there should be a “flashing” alternation of blue bar and scale on a red background with red bar and scale on a blue background

Vary the transducer input for Channel No. x and observe the behavior of the bargraph. Verify the bargraph scaling (does the solid bar fill the entire

field when a full-scale load is applied?). Also verify that the appropriate bargraph color changes occur as Channel No. x's data reading violates the high- and low-limit values you set for it in Section 13.

v. You might want to re-enter TEXT EDITOR MODE and add other types of bargraphs to the video page, dedicated either to Channel No. x or to one or more other "live" system channels.

18 OPTIONAL HISTORY RECORDING

If your mainframe doesn't have a Model 10BDR64 History Card, you can skip this section.

The History Card lets you make, store, and output digital recordings of numerical and logic data acquired by a B-sized mainframe.

You can instruct any one of the History Card's four independent RAM recorders to automatically record a predefined list of randomly selected data channels and logic bits. Recording can be at preset time intervals, or can be triggered by a specific combination of system logic, limit, and/or time-interval conditions. Similar conditions can also be specified for halting and restarting each recorder.

Special output commands let you transmit to an external computer, printer, or CRT display—via the mainframe's Computer Interface Port—all or part of the data recordings made by one of the four recorders since it was last interrogated. You can also output an expandable “history window” consisting of a selected range of recordings made, if desired, both before and after occurrence of a halt-triggering condition. This lets you review the specific “data history” associated with, say, a critical limit violation or process shutdown. You can select variables to appear in a recorder’s output (such as time, date, serial number, etc.), and the order in which these variables are to be transmitted.

The History Card lets you play back as a live data channel the data last recorded for any given system channel or the data recorded for that channel at a specified time in the past.* Through a special “time search” function, it’s possible to quickly review the values recorded by a given recorder for one or a set of data channels over a period of time. You can also “replay” all data for a given recorder’s “ playback” channels, from the “oldest” to the “latest,” using a variable time scale. This permits “slow motion” playback of all data recorded during a fast event, or a fast review of all data recorded for a test or process of long duration. Playback of system bit groups is also possible, using specially configured BINARY “CONVERSION” CHANNELS.

For a general explanation of how the History Card works, you should read Section 3.B.4(a) of the System 10 Guidebook. Below, you will learn how to

- enter and exit History Card SETUP MODE, using the

SETUP MODE

(SMD) and RECORD MODE (RMD) commands, respectively

* When a Model 10BSPC384 High Density History SPC Option Card is present, you can also play back the lowest and highest values recorded for a given data channel since a given recording in the past, and the continuous average value for the data reported by the channel over the same time period. "Statistical" playback functions provided by the Model 10BSPC384 also include X-BAR and RANGE, automatically calculated over successive sampling periods for a given channel. See Section 3.B.4(d) of the System 10 Guidebook for complete details.

• enter a "list" of channels to be recorded by a given History Card recorder, using the LIST (LST) command
• set a recorder's "depth," using the DEPTH (DPT) command
• specify the condition(s) to cause a recorder to automatically begin recording data, using the STORE (STO) command
• specify the condition(s) to cause a recorder to automatically halt its recording of data, using the HLT (HLT) command
• set a recorder's "halt depth," using the HALT DEPTH (HDP) command
• set up "video playback" channels for display of historical data, using the PLAYBACK (PLA) command
• r estart a halted recorder, using the START FROM HALT (STH) command
• r a pidly review the values that have been reported by a set of data channels over an "historical" period of time, using the ZOOM (ZUM) command
• r eplay all historical data for a given recorder, using the REPLAY (RPL) command
• clear all recordings contained in a given recorder, using the HISTORY CLEAR (HCL) command

Be sure to study Section 3.B.4 of the System 10 Guidebook for full details on these and other History Card procedures.

WARNING: IF YOUR HISTORY CARD'S FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN PREDEFINED AT THE FACTORY IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS GIVEN AT THE TIME OF ORDER, YOU MAY NOT WANT (OR NEED) TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. IF YOU DO CHOOSE TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES, BE SURE TO "CLONE" THE CURRENT HISTORY CARD CONFIGURATION BEFORE PROCEEDING ANY FURTHER. YOU CAN THEN RESTORE THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION AFTER YOU HAVE GONE THROUGH THE TUTORIAL. CONTACT THE FACTORY FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON CLONING AND RESTORING A SYSTEM 10 CONFIGURATION.

a. To enter History Card SETUP MODE, enter from the keyboard a command of

SMD [CR]

The card's front-panel SMD indicator will light.

b. In this exercise, you will use the History Card's Recorder No. 1 to record data readings for only two channels: the "live" analog input channel you calibrated in Section 10 (Channel No. "x") and the "CALCULATE" channel you defined in Section 11 (Channel No. "y").* First, be sure the EEPROM Write Protect function is enabled. If the number "y" is greater than the number "x," enter a command of

$$ \text { LST } 1 = \text { CHN } x, y [ \text { CR } ] $$

If, however, "x" > "y," enter

$$ \text { LST } 1 = \text { CHN } y, x [ \text { CR } ] $$

Remember: the sequence of channel numbers entered in a LIST (LST) command must be in ascending order.

c. As explained in the Introduction to Section 3.B.4 of the System 10 Guidebook, the "depth" of a given History Card recorder refers to the total num-

* A LST command can also specify one or more system "bit groups" to be recorded by a given recorder (see section 3.B.4(d) of the System 10 Guidebook).

ber of "frames" of data which it can hold. A "frame" of data within a recorder consists of all data-channel and logic-bit readings recorded by that recorder at a given instant of time. The maximum depth to which a recorder can be set will depend on the "list" that has been entered for that recorder, and on the portion of total system "history memory" available to it (see Section 3.B.4(b) for "History Memory and Time Considerations").* To specify a depth of 100 (frames) for Recorder No. 1, enter a command of

$$ D P T 1 = 1 0 0 [ C R ] $$

d. We are now ready to tell Recorder No. 1 when to record data for the listed channels. You will use the STORE (STO) command to specify the condition or logical combination of conditions the occurrence of which will cause the recorder to instantly record and store a "frame" of data. These conditions can include

• t he logic state(s) of one or more logic bits
- t he limit conditions(s) of one or more data channels
- t he occurrence of logic-state transitions for one or more logic bits
- t he passage of a specific time interval, as registered by the system clock

Set Recorder No. 1 to record at regular 2-second intervals by entering a command of

STO 1 = INT 7 [CR]

"INT 7" is the mnemonic for a 2-second interval, as indicated in the table in Section 3.B.4(d) of the System 10 Guidebook. This is, of course, a relatively simple store condition. You are encouraged to study the full discussion of the STO command in Section 3.B.4(d), and to experiment with different conditions for automatic recording and storage of data—for example, when a given bit is perceived to go high, when a given channel reports or does not report a given limit violation, etc.

e. The HALT (HLT) command is identical in syntax to the STO command. It's used to specify the condition or logical combination of conditions the occurrence of which will cause a given recorder to stop recording data. To instruct Recorder No. 1 to halt recording when Logic Bit No. 899 is seen to change from a state of "Logic 0" to a state of "Logic 1," command

$$ \text { H L T } 1 = \text { B G H } 8 9 9 [ \text { C R } ] $$

f. To instruct Recorder No. 1 to record two additional frames of data after the occurrence of a halt-triggering event (in this case, Bit 899's going high), enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{HDP} 1 = 2 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

This command sets the "halt depth" of Recorder No. 1 to 2 (frames).

g. Let's arrange to display the data we're going to record. To do so, we'll define a series of "VIDEO PLAYBACK PSEUDOCHANNELS." In this case, we'll restrict ourselves to the "live" analog input channel (No. x), but remember that you could set up equivalent playbacks for any and all other recorded channels (up to a total of 300 for a given History Card).

We want to be able to view the data reading that existed for Channel No. x "one frame ago," "five frames ago," "ten frames ago," "fifteen frames ago,"

"twenty frames ago," and "twenty-five frames ago." Enter the following PLAYBACK (PLA) commands:

PLA 1000 = REC 1, CHN x (-1) [CR]

PLA 1001 = REC 1, CHN x (-5) [CR]

PLA 1002 = REC 1, CHN x (-10) [CR]

PLA 1003 = REC 1, CHN x (-15) [CR]

PLA 1004 = REC 1, CHN x (-20) [CR]

PLA 1005 = REC 1, CHN x (-25) [CR]

where “x” is once again the number of your “live” input channel. The (negative) number in parentheses is the playback “search depth”—a measure of the “pastness” in time of the frame within the recorder’s memory that contains the data reading of interest.

Note that Video Playback Pseudochannels are numbered from 1000 through 1299. Such channels are read only by the system's video cards. They are not included in the normal scanning of system channels, and therefore the system does not spend time in handling them.*

h. To arrange for CRT display of the above playback series, you should

1. Use the Page key as you did in Section 5, Step d, to call to display the prestored "blank" video page (no. 100).

2. Press the Video Formt (VIDEO FORMAT) key to enter TEXT EDITOR MODE. Move the cursor down a few spaces.

3. Type "01 Frames Ago:" and then press the Begin Data key.

4. Type two spaces, followed by *1000

The asterisk (*) is absolutely necessary to identify the field as a video playback field.

1. Press the End Data key, and then press the Retrn key.

2. Type "05 Frames Ago:" and then press the Begin Data key.

3. Type two spaces, followed by *1001

4. Press the End Data key, and then press the Retrn key.

5. Type "10 Frames Ago:" and then press the Begin Data key.

6. Type two spaces, followed by *1002

7. Press the End Data key, and then press the Retrn key.

8. Continue in this fashion to create display fields for the remaining video playbacks (Nos. 1003 through 1005).

* You can also set up "NORMAL PLAYBACK PSEUDOCHANNELS" (up to 29 per recorder), if you wish to interrogate the system for recorded data values by means of the CHANNEL (CHN) command, or to provide normal limit monitoring or analog output for playbacks.

1. Press the Exit key to leave TEXT EDITOR MODE and return to LIVE DISPLAY MODE.
2. Save the page you have just formatted, as you did in Section 5, Step I.

i. Make sure the "halt-triggering" bit is currently at "Logic 0" by commanding

$$ \text { BIT } 8 9 9 = 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

j. To exit History Card setup mode and allow Recorder No. 1 to begin automatic recording at 2-second intervals, command

RMD [CR]

The front-panel SMD indicator will go off. The REC 1 indicator will light as soon as Recorder No. 1 has made its first recording. It will remain on until recording is halted, to indicate that at least one recording has been made by that recorder.

k. Continuously vary the load on the source transducer for Channel No. x. As successive “frames” of data are recorded every two seconds, observe the displayed “playback” values to confirm that reliable history recording is in fact taking place. The first video playback field should always show the last recorded value of Channel No. x (= “1 frame ago”), while the last video playback field should show the value of Channel No. x that was recorded 25 frames “ago.”

I. Let Recorder No. 1 continue to record at 2-second intervals for a minute or so, and then command

$$ \text { BIT } 8 9 9 = 1 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

Since the recorder's current "halt depth" is "2," it should make two more recordings before halting the automatic recording of data. Verify that this is the case by watching your playback display as you continue to vary the load on the source transducer for Channel No. x.

m. Use the BIT command to reset Bit No. 899 to "Logic 0." Then restart Recorder No. 1's automatic recording of data by commanding

STH 1 [CR]

n. The ZOOM (ZUM) command lets you increase by the same number of frames the "search depth" of each playback pseudochannel assigned to a given recorder. To produce a depth offset of "2" for all playback for Recorder 1, enter a command of

$$ \text { ZUM } 1 = 2 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

As a result of this command, the “search depth” of Playback Channel No. 1000 will increase from its original “1” (frame ago) to “3” (frames ago); that of Playback Channel No. 1001, from its original “5” (frames ago) to “7” (frames ago); that of Playback Channel No. 1002, from its original “10” (frames ago) to “12” (frames ago).*

* You can also enter a ZOOM (ZUM) command of the general form ZUM n = s STEP z [CR]. Here, "s" is the search depth offset for all playbacks assigned to Recorder No. "n," while "z" is the magnitude of a depth increment (expressed, again, as a number of frames) for further keyboard-controlled alteration of the search depth, using the Back Space and/or Step key. The FREEZE (FRZ) command lets you specify a search depth offset and (optional) increment that will not be affected by continued recordings. See Section 3.B.4(e) of the System 10 Guidebook for full details.

o. Cancel the depth offset imposed by the above ZUM command by entering a command of

$$ Z U M 1 = N / A [ C R ] $$

p. Halt Recorder No. 1 once more by commanding

$$ \text { BIT } 8 9 9 = 1 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

q. After the two additional recordings have been made, initiate a single "history replay" at a one-second rate for all playback pseudochannels set up for Recorder No. 1 by commanding

$$ R P L 1 = I N T 6 [ C R ] $$

As explained in Section 3.B.4(e) of the System 10 Guidebook, the effect of this command is to make Recorder No. 1's initial "search frame" the oldest frame in memory, and then to successively decrease the current "search depth" one frame at a time, until the "newest" frame (the last to have been recorded) is reached. The time interval at which the replay is to step "forward" in time toward the latest recorded frame (as the search depth is continuously decreased) is here one second (= INT 6).

r. To clear all recordings now contained in Recorder No. 1, command

HCL 1 [CR]

You should study Section 3.B.4(e) of the System 10 Guidebook for instructions on “emptying,” “dumping,” and “reaccessing” history memory. Here we will only mention the pertinent commands:

- The EMPTY (EMP) command is normally used while recording is in process. It lets you learn what has happened since the last such interrogation. You can use this command to output from the Computer Interface Port all frames in a given recorder—or a selected number of frames—in sequence, that have been recorded since the EMP command was last applied to that recorder. The precise format of this output can be established through the OUTPUT IMAGE (IMA) command discussed in Section 3.B.4(d) of the System 10 Guidebook.

- By applying a REACCESS HISTORY MEMORY (RHM) command, you can restore access to all frames still in storage that have been previously "emptied" by means of an EMPTY (EMP) command. Restored frames can then be "re-emptied," if desired.

- The HISTORY DUMP (HDU) command is normally used after recording has stopped. It serves to define a flexible "history window" that lets you review a specified period of data history. All recorded frames "seen" through the window are "dumped" as output from the Computer Interface Port. Regions of a recorder's history record can be dumped at any time. Such dumping is not affected by any previously applied EMPTY (EMP) command(s). As with EMP, the output format for a "history dump" can be established through the OUTPUT IMAGE (IMA) command.

In this booklet we have taken you step-by-step through some important System 10 setup procedures that apply to "B-sized" mainframes. We have also briefly mentioned a number of other (essentially optional) procedures detailed in the System 10 Guidebook. To these we could add the following:

• setup of COUNTER/TIMER functions when the optional Model 10ACT01 Counter/Timer Card and/or Model 10ACC-4 Four-Channel Totalizer Card is present (Section 3.A.1 of the System 10 Guidebook)
• setup of ANALOG OUTPUT CHANNELS via the ANALOG OUTPUT (ANO) command when the optional Model 10AAO-8 Voltage Output Card is present, (Section 3.A.2)
• setup of ANALOG PEAK CAPTURE, "MAX MINUS MIN," and/or TRACK AND HOLD functions when the optional Model 10A79-4 Four-Channel Analog Peak Capture Card is present (Sections 3.A.4-6)
• setup of ANALOG BUFFERING functions when the optional Model 10A79-4 Four-Channel Analog Peak Capture Card or Model 10AAO-4 Analog Buffer Card is present (Section 3.A.7)
• setup of PID LOOP CONTROL functions when the optional Model 10APID Loop Control Card is present (Section 3.A.9)
• setup of DIGITAL I/O functions when the optional Model 10BIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Card is present (Section 3.B.2)
• setup of SATELLITE NETWORK SYSTEMS when the optional Model 10BD4 Satellite Interface Card or Model 10BD1 Satellite Slave Card is present (Section 3.B.3)
• extension of system "HISTORY MEMORY" when the optional Model 10BHDM384 High Density History Memory Card or Model 10BSPC384 High Density History SPC Option Card is present (Section 3.B.4)
• extension of system "VIDEO MEMORY" when the optional Model 10VGM500 Video Graphics Memory Card is present (Section 3.C.2)
• setup and use of optional DIAGNOSTIC CARDS: Model 10AST Analog Slot Test Card and Models 10AHM and 10BDHM Health Monitor Cards (Section 5.C)

To minimize the danger of losing critical setup information in the event of a power interruption, be sure to turn the EEPROM Switch OFF as soon as System 10 setup is complete.

Model Slots	Slots	Analog I/O		1	Logic I/O2	Video Capabilities3	Options*
10KN3 0		8	4	1000 / 0	1000 / 128	5	VGA input and output6;external monitor requiredfor data display, 2 availableV-Card slots
10KN6 24	8		4	1000 / 192	1000 / 128	5	VGA input and output6;external monitor requiredfor data display, 2 availableV-Card slots
10KN6-2	48	8	4	1000 / 384	1000 / 128	5
10KN6-3	72	8	4	1000 / 576	1000 / 128	5
10KN6-4	96	8	4	1000 / 768	1000 / 128	5
10KN7	24		8	1000 / 192	1000 / 128		Internal CRT (B/W, 5" x 9");RS-170 and "RGB" (CGA)output (only); 2 availableV-Card slots
10KN7-2	48		8	1000 / 384	1000 / 128
10KN7-3	72	8		1000 / 576	1000 / 128
10KN7-4	96	8		1000 / 768	1000 / 128
10KN8A	8		2	1000 / 64	1000 / 32		Internal CRT (COLOR, 12" multi-sync (CGA/EGA/VGA));VGA input and output6;2 available V-Card slots

* Options:
E = B-Rack Expansion

1 Assumes all A SLOTS dedicated to analog I/O only (with eight channels per slot).

^2 Assumes all A SLOTS dedicated to logic I/O only; requires one optional Model 10BIO-16 Universal Logic I/O Card for every group of 16 bits to serve as logic I/O.

^3 NOTE: THE MODEL 10P80A EXTENDED KEYBOARD IS SUPPLIED WITH ALL B-SIZED MAINFRAMES (MODEL 10P25A OPERATOR'S KEYBOARD IS OPTIONAL).

^4 Expandable to 19 with “E” Option.

^5 Expandable to 304 with “E” Option.

^6 Fully compatible with 640 x 480 VGA format, with a horizontal refresh rate of 31.5 kHz. Will accept CGA/EGA/VGA input only from a VGA ANALOG CARD; will not accept digital video signals from CGA/EGA cards. See Section 2.N of the System 10 Guidebook for complete details regarding video I/O connections for B-sized mainframes.

DAYTRONIC

Daytronic Corporation

2211 Arbor Blvd. • Dayton, OH 45439-1521 • [phone]

Tel [phone] · Fax [phone] · www.daytronic.com

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

SECTION 1

REQUIRED SYSTEM SETUP PROCEDURES

SECTION 1.A GETTING STARTED
SECTION 1.B CARD INSERTION AND REMOVAL
SECTION 1.C ENTRY OF MNEMONIC COMMANDS
SECTION 1.D SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS
SECTION 1.E TRANSDUCER CABLING AND CONDITIONER CARD SETUP
SECTION 1.F SCAN AND TIME SETUP
SECTION 1.G CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS
SECTION 1.H FORMATTING AND MANAGEMENT OF STANDARD DATA TRANSMISSIONS

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.A GETTING STARTED

1.A.1 USING THE "ON THE AIR" TUTORIAL

If you are unfamiliar with the Daytronic "System 10," your first step should be to study the tutorial booklet entitled Getting Your System 10 On the Air, which is included in this Guidebook. There is a booklet for each of the two basic types of System 10 mainframes ("A-sized" and "B-sized").

The “On the Air” book will walk you step-by-step through the basic system setup procedure. As it does so, it will refer you to appropriate sections of this Guide-book for complete details.

The rest of the present section will offer some additional PRELIMINARY INFORMATION you ought to have before you set up and operate your System 10.

SO, UNTIL YOU HAVE STUDIED THE APPROPRIATE "ON THE AIR" BOOK—ALONG WITH THE PRESENT GUIDEBOOK SECTION—

DO NOT POWER UP YOUR SYSTEM 10 MAINFRAME.

1.A.2 BASIC PRECAUTIONS

a. EEPROM MEMORY PROTECTION

The mainframe's EEPROM WRITE PROTECT SWITCH should be ON only for the duration of relevant system SETUP procedures. As soon as system setup (including data channel calibration) is complete, be sure to TURN THE EEPROM SWITCH OFF.

During normal operation, following initial system setup, the EEPROM may be re-enabled at any time for purposes of reconfiguration, recalibration, page editing, etc. THE EEPROM SWITCH SHOULD BE LEFT ON, HOWEVER, FOR AS SHORT A TIME AS POSSIBLE, TO MINIMIZE THE DANGER OF LOSING CRITICAL SETUP INFORMATION IN THE EVENT OF A POWER INTERRUPTION.

NEVER TURN THE MAINFRAME ON OR OFF WHEN THE EEPROM SWITCH IS ON (as indicated by the RED "E2P" indicator). FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN THE ALTERATION OR ERASURE OF EEPROM CONTENTS.

b. CHECKING LINE-VOLTAGE SETTING

Before turning your mainframe ON for the first time, MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SET FOR THE PROPER LINE-VOLTAGE LEVEL. See Section 1.A.3, below. Operating the equipment on the voltage level to which it is not set can result in severe damage.

c. CIRCUIT-CARD INSERTION AND REMOVAL

All of the new Daytronic "AA" Conditioner Cards are "hot-pluggable"—as are all of the standard "10A" Conditioner Cards whose model number ends in "C." This means that you need NOT turn off mainframe power before inserting or removing the card.

FOR ALL OTHER CONDITIONER CARDS, HOWEVER, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT MAINFRAME POWER IS OFF BEFORE CHANGING THE POSITION OF THE ACTUATING LEVER OF THE CARD'S SLOT.

For complete instructions on "Card Insertion and Removal," see Section 1.B.

d. HANDLING CARDS WITH INTERNAL BATTERY

NEVER LAY DOWN A CIRCUIT BOARD CONTAINING A LITHIUM BATTERY ON ANY METAL OR OTHER CONDUCTIVE SURFACE, UNLESS THE BOARD HAS PROTECTIVE, VELCRO-ATTACHED MYLAR SHEETS (WHICH SHOULD NEVER BE REMOVED). Short-circuiting of the battery could occur, with possible severe damage to the instrument.

e. AIR COOLING REQUIREMENTS

ALL MAINFRAMES REQUIRE COOLING. The cooling air intake is at the bottom of each unit. When rack-mounting a System 10 mainframe, you should provide at least 1.75 inches of clearance below the unit, to ensure proper air flow. When the mainframe is used as a bench-top instrument, the installed 0.5-inch rubber feet will allow sufficient air flow.

ALSO, TO MAINTAIN PROPER AIR COOLING, THE MAINFRAME SHOULD NEVER BE OPERATED FOR ANY LENGTH OF TIME WITH ITS FRONT BEZEL(S) OFF.

f. Dust COVERS

Be sure to keep a protective "T" insert in every unused SLOT CONNECTOR, to prevent the accumulation of dust in the connector (see Section 1.B).

1.A.3 MAINFRAME POWERUP

a. AC OPERATION (ALL MODELS)

CHECK LINE-VOLTAGE SETTING

IMPORTANT: Before powering up your System 10 mainframe for the first time, make sure that it is set to the proper NOMINAL AC LINE VOLTAGE (110/120 OR 220 V-AC).

A-SIZED MAINFRAMES

For all A-SIZED mainframes (all "10KU," "10K1," "10K2," and "10K4T" versions), the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH is located on the rear panel (see the corresponding diagram in the "Physical Layout" section of the "On the Air" book for A-sized mainframes).* The switch can be easily repositioned by means of a small slotted screwdriver.

If you change the voltage-level setting, YOU MUST ALSO CHANGE THE MAINFRAME'S BUSS FUSE BEFORE POWERING UP THE MAINFRAME, as follows:

Mainframe Power Required Family Level Fuse

“10KU” 110 V-AC 1 A “SLOW BLOW”
	220 V-AC	0.5 A “SLOW BLOW”
“10K1/10K2”	110 V-AC	2 A, 250 V “SLOW BLOW”
	220 V-AC	1 A, 250 V “SLOW BLOW”
“10K4T”	110 V-AC	2 A, 250 V “SLOW BLOW”
	220 V-AC	1 A, 250 V “SLOW BLOW”

For instructions, see "Changing the Fuse," below.

B-Sized Mainframes

For all B-SIZED mainframes except the Model 10KN8A, ^** the POWER SELECTOR BOARD is located under the fuse (see Fig. 2.1.b in the “Physical Layout” section of the “On the Air” book for B-sized mainframes).

1. DISCONNECT THE AC POWER CORD.
2. Slide to the left the clear plastic door covering the rear-panel FUSE box.

* Older mainframe versions may not have a rear-panel VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH. To convert the power level on these mainframes, it is necessary to remove the internal POWER BOARD to access the switch. Contact the Daytronic Customer Service Department for full instructions. Also, some older A-sized models are equipped with a circuit breaker instead of a fuse. The breaker need not be changed when changing from one power level to the other, since the breaker amperage automatically adjusts to the voltage setting.

** The Model 10KN8A operates ONLY from an external supply of 90 to 130 V-AC (47-63 Hz), and therefore has no Power Selector Board. Older "10K8" models have a rear-panel POWER CONVERTER SWITCH that slides up and down to select the desired voltage level.

1.A GETTING STARTED

1. Locate the POWER SELECTOR BOARD under the fuse. Note the number visible on this board, indicating the present nominal voltage setting (120 or 220).
2. With one finger, slightly raise up the level labelled "FUSE PULL," and then, with a needle-nosed pliers held in the other hand, pull out the POWER SELECTOR BOARD.
3. Turn over the board and reinsert it so that the value of the desired nominal voltage is visible (“100” and “240,” if present, are NOT to be used).

If you change the voltage-level setting, YOU MUST ALSO CHANGE THE MAINFRAME'S BUSS FUSE BEFORE POWERING UP THE MAINFRAME, as follows:

Power Level Fuse

R

e

q

u

i

r

e

d

120 V-AC 4 A 220 V-AC 2 A

For instructions, see "Changing the Fuse," below.

CHECK EEPROM SWITCH

When mainframe power is turned ON or OFF, the EEPROM Write Protect Switch should be OFF (in the downward position).

CONNECT POWER CORD

Plug the six-foot power cord supplied with your mainframe into the AC power connector on the rear of the unit. Plug the other end into your primary power source. The offset pin on the power connector is ground; to safely operate the mainframe from a two-contact outlet, use a 3-prong-to-2-prong adaptor and connect the green pigtail on the adaptor to earth ground.

NOTE: Since the presence of electrical noise can affect the ultimate integrity of your data, the noise level should be suppressed as much as possible. In particular, care should be taken to avoid utility-line problems that can interfere with or possibly even damage sensitive microprocessor-based equipment. Such noise can also be generated by electrical motors, relays, and motor control devices.

While your System 10 mainframe has internal circuitry to protect it from overvoltage transients and mild EMI, a clean line is still very desirable. No protection is provided against a dropout longer than 8 milliseconds or brownout below 95 volts. Depending on your line conditions, a number of protective devices are available (isolators, regulators, uninterruptible power supplies, etc.). Contact the Daytronic factory for more information.

TURN ON THE MAINFRAME

Refer to the respective diagram in the "Physical Layout" section of the appropriate "On the Air" book for the location of your mainframe's POWER ON/OFF switch or button.*

IMPORTANT: In the event that your mainframe's fuse blows or circuit breaker trips when the unit is powered up, refer directly to Section 5.B.1 of this Guidebook ("Powerup Problems") before attempting to reset the system.

POWERUP VERIFICATION

Each time a System 10 mainframe is turned on, the four SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS labelled ERR, CHR, MNE, and RET should all light for about one second, and then go off. This verified proper system powerup.

Whenever an A-sized mainframe with LCD/VFD video capability is turned on for the first time, there will normally appear a display of its DATA DISPLAY PAGE FORMAT No. 1. This page will contain a company name or other prespecified LOGO in the "billboard" region of the display, plus "live" data readings for Channel Nos. 1 through 12, with a unit legend of "MVV" for each channel. As explained in Section 5 of the "On the Air" book for A-sized mainframes, you can subsequently designate any other 12 channels for display on "Page No. 1," with any desired four-character legend for each channel. On powerup, the mainframe will always display this page ("No. 1").

Whenever a B-sized mainframe with CRT video capability is turned on, the words RAM TEST PASSED should appear for about two seconds in the "billboard" region of the display, to be immediately replaced by a company name or other prespecified LOGO. When the mainframe is powered up for the first time, there will normally appear a display of its VIDEO PAGE FORMAT No. 1.* As explained in Section 5 of the "On the Air" book for B-sized mainframes, you can subsequently redesign the format of this video page (if desired) and designate any other video page to be the mainframe's "SIGN-ON PAGE"—i.e., the page to appear automatically upon system powerup.

CHANGING THE FUSE

IN THE EVENT OF AN APPARENT POWER-SUPPLY FAILURE, FIRST CHECK THE MAINFRAME'S BUSS FUSE.** WHEN REPLACING A "BLOWN" FUSE, ALWAYS INVESTIGATE THE CAUSE OF OVERLOAD BEFORE REACTIVATING THE MAINFRAME. See Section 5.B.1 ("POWERUP PROBLEMS").

AS MENTIONED ABOVE, AFTER CHANGING THE MAINFRAME'S VOLTAGE-LEVEL SETTING, THE FUSE MUST ALWAYS BE CHANGED ACCORDINGLY.

To change the fuse of an A-SIZED mainframe, first TURN OFF THE MAINFRAME and DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD. Then use a screwdriver to turn the rear-panel FUSE slot counterclockwise, and the fuse holder will spring out.

To change the fuse of a B-SIZED mainframe other than the Model 10KN8A, first TURN OFF THE MAINFRAME and DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD. Slide to the left the clear plastic door covering the rear-panel fuse box. Then pull out on the "FUSE PULL" lever to disengage one end of the presently installed fuse from its spring clip.

* The contents of this initial “sign-on” page will depend on the application for which the system has been preconfigured at the factory. Often, for example, it will contain—in addition to TIME and DATE—a “live” display of all or some of the data channels that have been dedicated to a particular Analog Conditioner Card.

** Note that the Model 10KN8A (only) has no fuse; its rear-panel POWER ON-OFF button has a built-in CIRCUIT BREAKER.

The System 10 "V" (VEHICLE) Option applies to all "10KU" and "10K4T" mainframes with the exception of the Model 10K4T-DA. A mainframe employing the "V" Option may NOT also be used for AC operation.

The “V” Option allows operation from nominal 12 or 28 V-DC (50 W maximum). The actual tolerance ranges are 11-16 V-DC or 23-29 V-DC, respectively. This permits universal “on-board” vehicle operation (12 V-DC for cars, 24 V-DC for trucks, and 28 V-DC for aircraft).

“V”-version mainframes are equipped with a special 3-wire DC CONNECTOR in the rear of the unit. Placement of the connector varies with mainframe model. Be sure to connect the positive, negative, and ground lines from your external DC source to the proper connector pins. These are clearly marked on the mainframe’s rear label. Although all “V” units are protected against accidental polarity reversal, they naturally will not work under that condition.

IMPORTANT: IN ALL CASES, THE "GROUND" PIN OF THE MAINFRAME'S REAR DC CONNECTOR SHOULD BE CONNECTED EITHER TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE VEHICLE BATTERY OR DIRECTLY TO THE VEHICLE CHASSIS. IT SHOULD NEVER BE LEFT UNCONNECTED. ALSO, TO MINIMIZE NOISE PICKUP, THE GROUND LEAD SHOULD BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE.

The configuration shown in Fig. 1.1(a), below, is normally recommended. Under conditions of high electrical noise, however, you should make the connections shown in Fig. 1.1(b).

Fig. 1.1(a) Normal DC Power Connections

Mainframe DC POWER CONNECTOR Vehicle Battery

Fig. 1.1(b) DC Power Connections for High Electrical Noise

Mainframe DC POWER CONNECTOR Vehicle Battery

1.A.4 DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD INITIALIZATION

The creation of multichannel LCD/VFD DATA DISPLAY PAGES is described in Section 5 of the "On the Air" book for A-SIZED mainframes.

The creation of large-scale multichannel CRT VIDEO PAGES is described in Section 5 of the "On the Air" book for B-SIZED mainframes, and is treated in much greater detail in Section 2.C of this Guidebook.

As you compose LCD/VFD or CRT page formats for local or remote display of measured, stored, and/or calculated data values, you should keep the following in mind:

a. DISPLAY SETTINGS FOR A-SIZED MAINFRAMES

If your A-sized mainframe has only a two-line "billboard" display (local or remote), the following DISPLAY (DIS) command must be in effect for the display to function properly ^1 :

$$ \mathbf {D I S} = 1 [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {2} $$

If your A-sized mainframe has a multichannel LCD or VFD data display (local or remote), a command of

$$ D I S = 2 [ C R ] $$

must be in effect. ^3

For a summary of both standard and optional Data Display and Keyboard/Keypad features available for A-sized mainframes, see Appendix A of the "On the Air" book.

b. DISPLAY SETTINGS FOR B-SIZED MAINFRAMES

The following commands are used for initial (general) setup of a B-sized mainframe's CRT video display (local or remote). Each command is discussed in detail in Section 2.C.1 of this Guidebook:

• B VIDEO SIGNAL (BVS)—tells the system which version of the Video Signal Card is present
• VIDEO DISPLAY UNIT (VDU)—specifies the video format and frame rate for all system CRT's, internal and external

1 A DIS value of "1" must therefore be in effect for a Model 10KU-KD or 10K4T-KD mainframe, or when, for example, a Model 10KU is used with a Model 10DISU Display Option or with a Model 10P80D Extended Keyboard. This command must also be in effect for an A-sized mainframe with NO DISPLAY at all (i.e., for a 10KU, 10K1C, or 10K4TA with no optional display capabilities).

2 For the entry of System 10 MNEMONIC COMMANDS, see Section 1.C of this Guidebook.

3 A DIS value of "2" must therefore be in effect for a Model 10K2D or 10K4T-DA mainframe, or when, for example, a Model 10KU, 10K1C, or 10K4TA is used with a Model 10VFD-2 Display Option.

1.A GETTING STARTED

• VIDEO MODE (VID)—tells a mainframe's internal CRT whether it is to display video pages currently in EEPROM storage or an external video input from a computer or other external video-signal source
• REFRESH (REF)—selects the desired refresh rate for the CRT display
• VIDEO SCAN SYMBOL (VSS)—adds an ampersand (&) flag to the display of any and all data channels outside the current system scan range

Section 2.C.1 also explains the adjustment of a mainframe's INTERNAL CRT CONTROLS.

NOTE: The Model 10BVS98 VGA Video Signal Card in a Model 10KN3, 10KN6, or 10KN8A mainframe is preset at the factory for "normal" VGA mode with inverted vertical and horizontal sync. If you need to change either or both sync signals to noninverted form, see the instructions given in Section 2.N.2 of this Guidebook ("Standard VGA Input / Output").

C. INITIALIZATION OF OPTIONAL 10P80D KEYBOARD WITH CERTAIN A-SIZED MAINFRAMES

When a Model 10P80D Extended Keyboard is connected to a Model 10KU, 10K1C, or 10K4TA Mainframe, you must press the keyboard's Home key every time power is cycled, to initialize the keyboard's 2-line LCD "billboard" display. ^9

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.B CARD INSERTION AND REMOVAL

Your System 10 mainframe has been shipped with all purchaser-specified A, B, and V CARDS securely installed in their respective mainframe slots. INITIALLY, AT LEAST, THERE IS USUALLY NO NEED TO REMOVE OR REINSERT ANY PLUG-IN CARDS, unless for purposes of modifying the initial system configuration or of setting certain conditioner-card parameters per the instructions given in Section 1.E.2 of this Guidebook.*

In the normal course of system setup, troubleshooting, or general reconfiguration, however, you will probably be called upon at some point to remove an A CARD or a B CARD from the mainframe, and then to reinsert it or replace it with another card.

Fig. 1.2 shows details of System 10 SLOT CONNECTOR hardware. Note that when a mainframe is shipped, any unused slot connector will contain a protective "T" insert. This you can easily remove, if you later want to install a card in that slot. HOWEVER, BE SURE TO KEEP AN INSERT IN EVERY UNUSED SLOT CONNECTOR, TO PREVENT THE ENTRY OF DUST INTO THAT CONNECTOR.

To install an A CARD or B CARD in a mainframe slot, ^**

a. Remove the appropriate FRONT BEZEL (the one that is directly in front of the card slot in question). For an A-sized mainframe, you will remove the bezel either by unscrewing it or by gently prying it off its "Snap-On Posts" (see the respective "front element" figure in Section 2 of the "On the Air" book for A-sized mainframes). For a B-sized mainframe, you will remove the bezel by pulling down the bezel's two "swell-latch" levers and then pulling it forward (see Section 2 of the "On the Air" book for B-sized mainframes).
b. IMPORTANT: UNLESS THE CARD BEING INSTALLED OR REMOVED IS AN "AA" CONDITIONER CARD OR A "10A" CONDITIONER CARD WHOSE MODEL NUMBER ENDS IN "C," ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT MAINFRAME POWER IS OFF BEFORE CHANGING THE POSITION OF THE SLOT'S ACTUATING LEVER.
c. Make sure that any blank CONNECTOR COVER covering the rear of the slot has been removed.
d. If a "keyed" I/O CONNECTOR is presently mounted to the mainframe at the rear of an "A SLOT," make sure that the connector matches the "key" of the conditioner card you want to insert in the slot. Otherwise, the card will not go

1.B CARD INSERTION AND REMOVAL

Fig. 1.2 Mainframe Slot Connector Hardware

"T" Insert (Remove before inserting card) A or B Card Card "Notch" Slot Connectors Locating Key Actuating Levers CLOSED OPEN

fully into the slot. Conditioner-card "keying" is discussed in Section 1.E of this Guidebook.

e. Remove the slot's "T" insert, if present, and then open the SLOT CONNECTOR by pulling the ACTUATING LEVER forward and turning it 90° clockwise until its front bar is vertical (pointing downward).

f. Gently slide the card into the open slot connector. The card must be vertical, in order for its top edge to engage in the sheet-metal groove directly above the slot connector. The NOTCH on the card should be downward and toward the front of the mainframe. If the card refuses at some point to slide further into the slot, remove the card and examine the slot for any foreign object that may be impeding the insertion (also check the card itself for any component(s) that may be catching on an adjacent card).

g. Align the LOCATING KEY of the slot with the notch on the lower side of the card.

h. Close the slot connector by turning the actuating level counterclockwise, thus engaging the locating key in the card's notch.

IMPORTANT: NEVER FORCE THE ACTUATING LEVER. THE CARD MUST BE FULLY INSERTED BEFORE THE SLOT CAN BE CLOSED.

i. Push the actuating lever back in and reactivate the mainframe.

When removing an A or B CARD from a mainframe slot,

j. Again, MAKE SURE MAINFRAME POWER IS OFF BEFORE CHANGING THE POSITION OF THE SLOT'S ACTUATING LEVER (unless it is an "AA" or "C"-version Conditioner Card).

k. If the card has an I/O CONNECTOR attached at its rear, make sure the connector is securely screwed to the mainframe before you pull the card out of the slot. Otherwise, the connector—and its cable—will simply fall off the rear of the unit, as soon as it disengages from the card.

IMPORTANT: After completing all system setup procedures that involve the installation and removal of plug-in cards, be sure to put all front bezels back on the mainframe. FRONT BEZEL(S) SHOULD NOT BE OFF DURING NORMAL MAINFRAME OPERATION.

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.C ENTRY OF MNEMONIC COMMANDS

1.C.1 INTRODUCTION

Every System 10 is preprogrammed to perform most of its standard functions in response to the manual or automatic entry of specific ASCII MNEMONIC COMMANDS.

In very general terms, there are four main types of commands:

1. SETUP (or "WRITE") COMMANDS

These commands serve to enter system configuration data into the CENTRAL PROCESSOR'S nonvolatile EEPROM memory—or into that of a system COPROCESSOR. As explained in Section 1.C.4, below, a "WRITE" command will be effective only when the mainframe's EEPROM WRITE PROTECT SWITCH is ON.

2. INTERROGATION (or "READ") COMMANDS

As explained in Section 1.C.4, these commands serve to ask the system for configuration data currently stored in the EEPROM memory.

3. DATA INTERROGATION COMMANDS

Discussed primarily in Section 1.H of this Guidebook, these commands serve to retrieve measured or calculated data values from the system's continuously updated DATA RAM, either for "live" display or for transmission from a system SERIAL INTERFACE PORT.

4. IMPERATIVE COMMANDS

As a rule, these command do not actually enter or request information, but rather instruct the system to do something—e.g., to release a latched bit, close a shunt-calibration switch, increment a counter channel by one, “lock” a range of data channels, output a predefined interrupt character, etc.

Note that "READ" COMMANDS, DATA INTERROGATION COMMANDS, and IMPERATIVE COMMANDS are all "RUN-TIME" COMMANDS, since they can be applied at any time during normal system operation and do not require that the EEPROM be enabled.

Section 4 of this Guidebook is a complete Alphabetical Directory of System Mnemonic Commands. This is a useful reference section, giving all forms of every standard MNEMONIC COMMAND, with a brief description of the command's specific function(s) and a reference to the Guidebook section(s) in which it is discussed.

There are two basic means of DIRECT command entry:

• locally, via plug-in KEYBOARD
• remotely, via RS-232-C SERIAL INTERFACE

There are two types of keyboard:

• EXTENDED KEYBOARD, with or without 2-line LCD "billboard" display (Model 10P80D or 10P80A, respectively). This keyboard is normally used for initial setup procedures—including composition and storage of VIDEO PAGE FORMATS for a B-sized mainframe—and for subsequent "run-time" operations (e.g., calling pages for display, interrogating the system for setup and data values, initiating data transmissions and recordings, etc.).
• OPERATOR'S KEYBOARD, with or without 2-line LCT "billboard" display (Model 10P25D or 10P25A, respectively). This is a smaller, optional keyboard, which may be used to perform a limited number of operations, including channel interrogation, limit setup, page selection, etc.*

The SERIAL INTERFACE for command entry can be any of several provided by System 10 (depending on the mainframe type and card set), including

• t he mainCOMPUTER INTERFACE PORT (ALL mainframes, both A-sized and B-sized)
• t heAUXILIARY COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT provided by an optional Model 10BACI or other "10BACI" Card (B-sized mainframe only)
• t h SATELLITE INTERFACE PORT provided by an optional Model 10BD4 or 10BD1 Card (B-sized mainframe only)
• t heFIFO COMPUTER PORT provided by an optional Model 10AFIFO Card (A-sized mainframe only)

Mnemonic commands may also be issued to System 10 INDIRECTLY (and AUTOMATICALLY) upon occurrence of predefined system conditions and events. Use of EXECUTE (EXU) and COMMAND (CMD) statements for automatic application of commands is discussed in Section 2.K of this Guidebook.

1.C.2

CONVENTIONS USED IN COMMAND EXPRESSIONS

1. All ASCII “mnemonics” will be shown in CAPITAL LETTERS. The commands that employ them, however, are not normally case-sensitive and may be entered, if desired, with all letters in lower case.
2. Variable numeric values or code words will be represented by lower-case letters or letter groups, which will be explained, where necessary, in the accompanying Guidebook text. A single capital letter will sometimes be used to represent a variable alphanumeric text string or expression to be entered within a command (e.g., "L" will stand for a "legend"; "B" for a "Boolean algebraic expression"; "T" for a "format template"; etc.). A dollar sign (\$) will be used to represent an ASCII character string to be specified by the operator or computer.
3. Unless otherwise noted, letters or letter groups enclosed in square brackets (e.g., [CR], [LF]) represent ASCII control characters and are not literals ([CR] = CARRIAGE RETURN; [LF] = LINE FEED; etc.).

* Use of the OPERATOR'S KEYBOARD is treated in detail in Section 2.S of this Guidebook. It allows you to designate special "PROMPT" key sequences for rapid entry of up to five selected mnemonics. The FRONT-PANEL KEYPAD of the Model 10KU-KD and 10K4T-KD mainframes—and of the Model 10DISU and 10DIS4T Display Options—provides similar functions, along with basic key-controlled "Channel," "Logic," and "Port" configuration sequences (see Section 2.R).

1. SPACES are shown in mnemonic commands and response formats throughout the Guidebook, but only for the sake of clarity. With only a few exceptions, they do not count as "command characters" and need not be included in any command entry unless they are part of an actual "text" string. Nor are they issued by the system in response to an interrogation, unless, again, they are part of a "text" string.
2. All commands are shown with a terminating CARRIAGE RETURN ([CR]). As explained in Section 2.B.5, you may set your System 10 to recognize a COMMAND TERMINATOR (or "CMT") other than the standard [CR] for commands entered via SERIAL INTERFACE PORT. All keyboard-entered commands are terminated by the Retrn key (= [CR]).

3. For all "WRITE" commands, an asterisk (*) is shown following the terminating [CR]. This symbol is not part of the actual command, and is not to be entered. It is there to remind you that the command will be effective only when the mainframe's EEPROM WRITE PROTECT SWITCH is ON—a condition which exists either

4. when the mainframe's physical EEPROM Switch is in the upward position, or

5. when the system's Bit No. 999 is "high" (= Logic 1).

The red Status Indicator labelled E2P will light when the EEPROM Write Protect function has been enabled.

1. For the sake of simplicity, commands for setting or reading the attributes of DATA CHANNELS are usually shown only in single-channel form. In most cases, such commands can also take a multiple-channel (or "range") form, where a continuous range of channels (entered as "x TO y") replaces the single channel ("x") in the command expression. The "range" form of a "READ" COMMAND is useful only when entered via SERIAL INTERFACE PORT, because of the keyboard's ability to step through sequential interrogations (see Section 1.C.4, below).

Commands of a similar “range” form can also apply to LOGIC BITS, BIT GROUPS, History Card RECORDERS, and other system entities.

Even if not mentioned in the main Guidebook text, every valid "range" command form is indicated in the Directory of Mnemonic Commands (Section 4 of this Guidebook), under the appropriate mnemonic.

1. Regardless of its source of entry, a command not conforming to standard syntax will be ignored by the system. Also, in many cases, a command that attempts to enter an unacceptable setup value will be ignored—if, for example, you attempt to enter a numerical LOCATION value for system PSEUDO-CHANNEL, or attempt to enter a LIMIT VALUE that exceeds the system's standard 16-bit range (±32700).

1.C.3

COMMAND ENTRY AND DISPLAY

a. VIA KEYBOARD

As mentioned above, every keyboard-entered command is terminated by pressing the Retrn key (= CARRIAGE RETURN). The command will not be effective until [CR] is transmitted to System 10.

All characters typed on a properly connected keyboard will appear on the main-frame's "BILLBOARD" display as they are typed, in place of the currently specified LOGO string.* This lets you review each command entry, and to revise it, if necessary, before putting it into effect by pressing Retrn.

Thus, while typing in a command, you may at any delete the last-entered keystroke by pushing the Back Space key. If you want to completely clear the command you are in the process of entered (thus returning the LOGO to display), press the Clear key.

The billboard will continue to display any keyboard-entered command statement—or the answer or prompting message invoked by that command—until Retrn, Clear, or Exit is subsequently pressed, whereupon the system's current LOGO will reappear in the billboard.

Unless you are in the process of entering a command and have not yet entered the terminating CARRIAGE RETURN, pressing the Space Bar at any time will completely erase the contents of the billboard. To return the LOGO to display, press Retrn, Clear, or Exit.

If you make an error in entering a command, or if a condition exists which for some reason prevents proper execution of an entered command, the system will in many cases bring the matter to your attention by displaying a "prompting message" on the billboard. If, for example, you enter a command containing a typographical error, the billboard may announce

INVALID SYNTAX, PLEASE REENTER COMMAND

Other corrective “prompts” you may encounter in the course of normal operations will be mentioned where appropriate in the following sections.

b. VIA COMPUTER INTERFACE

PLEASE NOTE: In the following discussion (and throughout this Guidebook), we will make reference to your mainframe's COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT as the means of entering mnemonic commands that originate from a computer, terminal, or other "remote" command source. Be aware that—as we pointed out above—there may be other serial ports within the system that can also receive remotely issued commands.

If you have an A-sized mainframe WITHOUT KEYBOARD, you will need to set up the mainframe's Computer Interface Port before any other procedures are performed.

IF SUCH IS THE CASE, TURN IMMEDIATELY TOSECTION 2.B OF THIS GUIDE-BOOK AND FOLLOW THE INTERFACE SETUP INSTRUCTIONS GIVEN THERE.**

Having set up your mainframe's Computer Interface Port, you are ready to use an external computer or terminal to communicate to System 10 all of the mnemonic

* The "billboard" can be part of the mainframe's multichannel LCD/VFD or CRT data display, or it can be a separate 2-line LCD display that is provided by an external 10P80D or 10P25D keyboard or which accompanies a "KD" A-sized mainframe's front-panel keypad.
** These include instructions for setting an appropriate COMMAND TERMINATOR for commands entered via the Computer Interface Port, in the event that your computer normally terminates its transmissions with a character other than CARRIAGE RETURN ([CR]).

commands required by the procedures described in this Guidebook. As noted above, a command not conforming to standard syntax will be ignored by System 10. If a command entered via the Computer Interface Port contains a character not in the standard System 10 character set, the red ERR indicator will light.

1.C.4

INTERROGATING FOR SETUP VALUES

a. "READ" COMMANDS AND RESPONSES

In almost all cases, a given "WRITE" command for the entry of setup data in non-volatile EEPROM has a corresponding "READ" command. By applying a "READ" command, the operator or computer can interrogate System 10 for the currently effective value of a particular setup parameter (e.g., a given channel's current "type" designation, "location," digital filter setting, limit values, scaling factor, etc.).

The general form of a "WRITE" command is

[MNEMONIC] n = [NUMERICAL VALUE(S)] [CR]\*

where "n" is the assigned number of the data channel, logic bit, message, etc., being "set up"; [CR] is the standard COMMAND TERMINATOR; and the asterisk (*) signifies that the EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the command to be effective.

graph TD
    A["EEPROM WRITE PROTECT SWITCH MUST BE ON"] --> B["EEPROM MEMORY"]
    B --> C["WRITES SETUP DATA INTO MAINFRAME'S NONVOLATILE EEPROM MEMORY"]
    C --> D["EEPROM MEMORY"]
    D --> E["READS SETUP DATA FROM MEMORY"]
    F["SETUP ("WRITE") COMMAND"] --> G["FIL 72 = 4"]
    H["INTERROGATION ("READ") COMMAND"] --> I["FIL 72"]
    J["READS SETUP DATA FROM MEMORY"] --> K["FIL 72 = 4"]

The corresponding "READ" command will have the form

[MNEMONIC] n [CR]

Remember that, unlike the "WRITE" command, the "READ" command does not require that the mainframe's EEPROM be enabled (and the command expression is therefore not marked with "*." Interrogation via a "READ" command is strictly a "run-time" operation; it can be done at any time during normal running of the system.

How System 10 answers a "READ" command will depend on how that command has been entered. Thus, if you apply a "READ" command through the keyboard (as in Fig. 1.3, above), the response will appear on the BILLBOARD:

[MNEMONIC] n = [NUMERICAL VALUE(S)]

If, however, the "READ" command has been entered via the Computer Interface Port (or some other serial port), then the system will respond by issuing from that port a serial-ASCII transmission with a general format of

[NUMERICAL VALUE(S)] [END-OF-TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR]

Unless otherwise specified at the time of order, every System 10 is factory-set for an END-OF-TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR (or "EOT") of CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED ([CR][LF]). As explained in Section 1.H.3, you can at any time specify a different EOT of one to four ASCII control characters. All RESPONSE FORMATS shown in this Guidebook will be shown with the standard transmission termination of [CR][LF].

REMEMBER, A KEYBOARD-ENTERED "READ" COMMAND WILL PRODUCE ONLY A BILLBOARD DISPLAY OF THE SYSTEM'S RESPONSE; A "READ" COMMAND ENTERED VIA THE COMPUTER INTERFACE (OR OTHER) PORT WILL PRODUCE ONLY A RESPONSE OUTPUT FROM THAT PORT.

For the sake of simplicity, respective "READ" command forms will in most cases not be presented when SETUP ("WRITE") commands are discussed in this and the following Guidebook sections. You should always bear in mind, however, that such commands can be applied at any time, in order to verify setup procedures, to recall forgotten setup values, to inform the computer of vital configuration data, etc.

For example, suppose that the following SETUP command has been entered to specify a digital filter setting of "4" for Channel No. 72:

FIL 72 = 4 [CR]\*

When entered via the keyboard (as in Fig. 1.3, above), a subsequent "READ" command of

FIL 72 [CR]

will invoke a BILLBOARD response of

FIL 72 = 4

When entered via the Computer Interface Port, the same "READ" command will yield a transmission from that port of

4 [CR][LF]

(assuming again that the standard "EOT" is in effect).

By entering the "range" form of a "READ" command via the Computer Interface Port, you will cause the system to output a sequence of answers, one for each channel, bit, recorder, etc., in the specified "range." If, for example, you enter via the Computer Interface Port a command of

FIL 72 TO 89 [CR]

the system will respond by issuing from that port the current filter constants, in sequence, for all channels from Channel No. 72 to and including Channel No. 89. (If the above “range” command is entered via the keyboard, however, the system will respond by displaying on the BILLBOARD the filter constant of Channel No. 72 only, until the Step key is pressed—see the following section).

All valid "READ" command forms can be found in the Directory of Mnemonic Commands (Section 4 of this Guidebook), under the appropriate mnemonics.

NOTE ALSO: If you interrogate System 10 for a nonexistent setup value—that is, for a value that has not yet been specified by an appropriate "WRITE" command and that has no initial "default" state—then the system will respond with a billboard display of the general form

$$ [ \text { MNEMONIC } ] n = N / A $$

or an output of

N/A [CR][LF]

from the Computer Interface Port.

b. SEQUENTIAL KEYBOARD INTERROGATIONS

You can use the keyboard's Step key for fast sequential interrogations following an initial keyboard-entered "READ" command of the form

[MNEMONIC] n [CR]

where “n” is the number of the first argument of the desired series (Channel Number, Logic Bit Number, Video Page Number, Message Number, “EXECUTE” Number, Conditional Bit Number, etc.)

Thus, you need only press Step to read data for the next argument in numerical sequence (i.e., for “n + 1”). By holding down the Step key, you can “step” rapidly through a long sequence of interrogations.

The Back Space key may be similarly used to “step” backwards through the interrogation series.

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.D SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS

Your mainframe's front-panel SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS let you continuously monitor the validity of various system communication links.* The top four lights (or the first four from the left) are RED, to indicate "ERROR" or "ALERT" conditions. The remaining lights are GREEN.

For "10KU" and "10K4T" mainframe versions, the status indicators are located under the A-CARD SLOTS; for all other mainframes, they are located on the front edge of the RS-232-C Interface Card, as shown in Fig. 1.4.**

DTR RTS E2P ERR CHR MNE RET XMT RCV KBD

Fig. 1.4 System Status Indicators

DTR When this light is ON, it means that System 10 is not asserting DATA TERMINAL READY. The system input buffer is full, and it is therefore not ready to receive data from the connected device. This light should be on only during rapid, continuous computer outputs to System 10.

RTS When this light is ON, it means that System 10 has issued a REQUEST TO SEND to the connected device, but has not yet received an answering CLEAR TO SEND. This could indicate that the computer is currently too busy to accept more data, or that some other factor is preventing transmission (for instance, a disconnected cable). This light may blink during normal operation, but in any event should be ON only during continuous outputting by System 10.

* These links relate to the EEPROM memory, an external KEYBOARD (if present), and the system's MAIN COMPUTER INTERFACE PORT. All "AUXILIARY" (10BACI-supplied) and "SATELLITE" (10BD4- or 10BD1-supplied) interfaces have their own respective status indicators, for an explanation of which see the respective subsection of Section 3 of this Guidebook.

** For a "10K1/10K2" mainframe, this is the combined Central Processor/Interface Card.

1.D SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS

E2P When this light is ON, it means that the System 10 EEPROM is enabled. The EEPROM Write Protect Switch is ON—or Bit 999 is “high”—and the EEPROM memory is therefore ready to be written into.

ERR When this light is ON, it means that an ERROR has been detected in the transmission to System 10. That is, the system has received at its Computer Interface Port an invalid character (not in the standard System 10 ASCII character set).

CHR When this light is ON, it means that System 10 has received a valid ASCII CHARACTER through its Computer Interface Port (only). Usually, this light will indicate that System 10 and the connected device are “talking” at the same baud rate.

MNE When this light is ON, it means that System 10 has received through its Computer Interface Port (only) a valid MNEMONIC COMMAND belonging to the Central Processor command set; it will not light on receipt of a command relating to the VIDEO CARD SET, HISTORY CARD, etc.

RET When this light is ON, it means that the last character received by System 10 was the current COMMAND TERMINATOR ("CMT"), which is normally (but not always) set at CARRIAGE RETURN ([CR])—see Section 2.B.5. This indicator may be used during system troubleshooting to confirm that data communication of some kind is occurring.

XMT When this light is ON, it means that System 10 is currently TRANSMIT-TING through its Computer Interface Port.

RCV When this light is ON, it means that System 10 is currently RECEIVING through its Computer Interface Port. Whenever there is activity on the "RECEIVED DATA" line, this light will flicker.

KBD When this light is ON, it means that System 10 is currently receiving a character transmitted by a Daytronic plug-in KEYBOARD. During continuous keyboard line activity, this light will flicker.

For use of SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS in the diagnosis of system COMMUNICATIONS PROBLEMS, see Section 5.B.5 of this Guidebook.

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.E TRANSDUCER CABLING AND CONDITIONER CARD SETUP

1.E.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

If you ordered one or more sensor cables with your System 10, each supplied cable will be equipped with an individual female CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. The type of connector will depend on the conditioner card with which it is to mate.

There are two basic types of Daytronic conditioner cards (for complete descriptions and specifications, see the latest Daytronic Conditioner Cards Catalog or Section 1.E.2, below):

a. "10A" CARDS

Many of these cards—originally designed for Daytronic's System 10—may now be used in the SPS6000 and SPS8000 Systems as well. Sensor cables for most 10A cards use the female 20-pin CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (Daytronic Part No. 60322), shown in Fig. 1.5.* This connector allows direct solder-terminal attachment of up to eight separate transducer cables. The connector's internal solder terminals are labelled 1 through 10 and A through L. These designations corre-

Fig. 1.5 Standard "10A" Conditioner Connector (No. 60322) "10A"-Card I/O Connector (rear of mainframe) Captive Screw (for mounting to mainframe) Pin A Pin 1 "10A" Conditioner Card Pin 10 Cables to Transducers Cable Clamp-Bar Screws 20-Pin Conditioner Connector (No. 60322) Connector "Keys" (to match slots in card I/O Connector) Pin L

* Note that the Model 10A68-2 Dual AC RMS Conditioner Card mates with a special conditioner connector board that has a separate screw-terminal block for each of the two inputs, while the Model 10A73-4 Quad 1/2 & 1/4 Bridge Strain Gage Conditioner Card usually mates with a special 1/4-bridge, 1/2-bridge, or full-bridge COMPLETION CONNECTOR (see the respective cabling diagrams in Section 1.E.2).

1.E TRANSDUCER CABLING AND CONDITIONER CARD SETUP

Technical line drawing of a square metal plate with four holes and two screws inserted upward (no text or symbols)

Fig. 1.6 Screw-Terminal Connector for TC Cables

Technical line drawing of an electronic component with multiple pins and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

spond one-to-one with the "I/O CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS" listed in the A-card pin/terminal-assignment tables in Section 1.E.2.

Thermocouple Conditioners require special screw-terminal connectors, like that shown in Fig. 1.6. Each such connector can accommodate a maximum of either four or eight separate TC sensors. Positive and negative TC leads must be connected directly to screw terminals of corresponding polarity; they cannot be soldered.

Each "10A" connector is properly labelled and "keyed." Connector "keys" are small plastic inserts embedded between specific terminal pairs. The position of each key matches that of a slot in the rear I/O CONNECTOR of the conditioner card with which it is to mate, as shown in Fig. 1.5. The purpose of the keys is to guarantee that the conditioner connector is attached right-side-up, and that a given conditioner card is not inadvertently connected to the wrong transducer. The "10A" connector housing provides mounting screws to secure the connector to the rear of the System 10 mainframe and to provide a solid ground connection for cable shields.

b. "AA" CARDS

While functionally similar to the corresponding "10A" models, these "Advanced Analog" conditioner cards offer a number of significant enhancements, including programmable low-pass active filtering and enhanced linearity correction (where appropriate). AA-card I/O connections are established via card-specific screw-terminal connector assemblies, an example of which is shown in Fig. 1.7. Mounted on the internal board of the assembly is a block of clearly labelled screw terminals for each of the AA card's available input channels. These terminals are tied to a 40-pin female connector that mates with the rear I/O CONNECTOR of the AA card.*

TRANSDUCER CABLING

AND CONDITIONER CARD SETUP

1.E

Fig. 1.7 Typical "AA" Conditioner Connector (with top half of connector housing removed)

Conditioner of oved) Shield "Drain" Wire 40-Pin Connector (attaches to rear I/O" Connector of "AA" Card) Ground Lug Mounting Screw CHN 3 CHN 1 SHIELD +SIGNAL +SIGNAL A +SIGNAL B -SIGNAL +5V POWER COM -5V NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION Individual Transducer Lead Wires SHIELD +SIGNAL +SIGNAL A +SIGNAL B -SIGNAL +5V POWER COM -5V NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION CHN 4 CHN 2 Connector Housing Cable Clamp Cable to Transducers

As with all "10A" connectors, every "AA" connector provides mounting screws to secure the connector and provide a solid ground connection for cable shields. While "AA" connectors do not use the plastic "key" inserts of the "10A" connectors, an offset in the mounting holes does ensure that an "AA" connector cannot be attached upside down.

To set up your System 10's ANALOG CONDITIONER CARDS, you should

a. Make sure the mainframe is OFF.

b. Connect each transducer cable to its respective "real-world" sensor, according to the appropriate cabling diagram (plus any special instructions) given in Section 1.E.2, below.

c. Attach each transducer-plus-cable system to the rear I/O CONNECTOR of the respective conditioner card.

Even if you're supplying your own sensor cables, you will be furnished with a full set of labelled CONDITIONER CONNECTORS, one for every conditioner card ordered with your system. Attach each of your transducer cables to the

1.E

TRANSDUCER CABLING

AND CONDITIONER CARD SETUP

appropriate connector, being sure to secure each cable within its conditioner connector by means of one of the connector's two internal clamp bars.*

d. Mount each CONDITIONER CONNECTOR to the rear of the System 10 main-frame by means of the two captive screws attached to the connector housing. THIS IS REQUIRED FOR PROPER ESTABLISHMENT OF THE CABLE "SHIELD" CONNECTION (see "Connection of Cable Shield," below).

e. Refer to the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2 for every type of conditioner card in your system, to see whether there are any special "Setup and/or Operating Considerations" you should be aware of with respect to that card.

If special procedures are required for any conditioner card(s) in your system, you should now perform those procedures, carefully following the instructions given in the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2.

In Section 1.E.2 you will also find all necessary instructions for the connection and operation of any conditioner-related “Options and Accessories” that may be included in your system.

f. If no special conditioner setup procedures are called for, you may proceed with the system setup procedures explained in Sections 1.F through 1.H of this Guidebook.

c. CONNECTION OF CABLE SHIELD

IMPORTANT: Cable signal wires or twisted wire pairs should always be properly shielded, as indicated in the respective cabling diagram in Section 1.E.2. This will minimize the production of unwanted electrical noise from capacitive and inductive effects.

In almost all of the cabling diagrams given in Section 1.E.2, only the “connector end” of each cable shield is shown, as represented by a gray circle surrounding either a single wire or a TWISTED PAIR of wires within the cable. The “transducer end” of each shield is not normally shown. Unless otherwise stated, every shield should be grounded only at the connector end. That is, every cable shield should make electrical contact only with the GROUND LUG OF A STANDARD “10A” CONDITIONER CONNECTOR or with a “SHIELD” TERMINAL OF AN “AA” CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. The drain wire tying the connector end of the shield to the connector’s ground lug or “SHIELD” terminal should be as short as possible (as shown in Fig. 1.7), and the conditioner connector MUST be mounted securely to the rear of the System 10 mainframe.

If you're using the standard 20-pin "10A"-card connector shown in Fig. 1.5, open the connector housing and locate the L-shaped ground lug under the head of one of the two captive mounting screws. The shield wire of each attached cable should be soldered to the exposed terminal of this lug. When reassembling the connector, be sure that the shield lug is positioned between the head of the screw and the connector's plastic base. A SLIDING LUG MAY RESULT IN NOISY, INACCURATE READINGS.

If you're using a 40-pin "AA"-card connector like that shown in Fig. 1.7, make sure the shield wire of each attached cable is securely connected to the respective SHIELD terminal (which is internally connected to one of the connector housing's two ground lugs).

d. USE OF THE MODEL 10AX-2 AUXILIARY EXCITATION CARD

The Model 10AX-2 supplies two channels of regulated, sensed ± 12 V-DC ± 2% power (up to 20mA ) to external transducers. Though most often used to power high-output DC-to-DC LVDT's, this card may also be used with other transducers within the above voltage and current range.

The Model 10AX-2's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5, above. Standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector are given in the table below.

2-wire cabling is to be used for each 10AX-2 channel when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the channel's +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. The EXCITATION lines should be paired for shielding.

4-wire cabling is to be used for each 10AX-2 channel when the cable is 20 feet or longer. In this case, the channel's +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the transducer. The EXCITATION and SENSE lines should be separately paired for shielding.

In either wiring configuration, +SIGNAL and -SIGNAL lines from the transducer are connected to the associated SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD, as shown in the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2, below.

Table 1.1 Model 10AX-2 Pin Assignments

I/O ConnectorPin Channel LineNumber Number Function
1	1	+EXCITATION
A	1	-EXCITATION
2	1	+SENSE
B	1	-SENSE
6	2	+EXCITATION
F	2	-EXCITATION
7	2	+SENSE
H	2	-SENSE
4, D, 5 — POWER COMMON

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

CONNECTION AND SETUP OF ANALOG INPUT CARDS AND ACCESSORIES

The following System 10-compatible Conditioner Cards are treated in this section:

• Model 10A9-8C Eight-Channel Thermocouple Conditioner
• Model 10A10-4 Quad Isolated Thermocouple Conditioner
• Model 10A15-8 Eight-Channel Thermistor Conditioner
  • Model 10A16-4C Quad Platinum RTD Conditioner
• Model 10A17-2 Dual High-Voltage Isolation RTD Conditioner
• Model 10A18-4C Quad 100-Ohm Platinum Linear RTD Conditioner
  • Model 10A30-2C Dual LVDT Conditioner
  • Model 10A31-4 Quad LVDT Conditioner
  • Model 10A35 Encoder Conditioner
  • Model 10A40 Frequency Input Conditioner
• Model 10A41-2C Dual Frequency Input Conditioner
  • Model 10A43 Dwell Angle Conditioner
• Model 10A45 Simmonds Shaft Torque Sensor Conditioner
• Model 10A48 Modulated Carrier Flow Conditioner
  • Model 10A60-4 Quad Voltage Conditioner
  • Model 10A61-2 Dual 4-20 mA Input Conditioner
• Model 10A62-8C Eight-Channel 4-20 mA Conditioner
  • Model 10A63-2 Dual Voltage Conditioner
• Model 10A64-8C Eight-Channel Voltage Conditioner
• Model 10A65-8 Eight-Channel Low-Level Voltage Conditioner
• Model 10A68-2 Dual AC RMS Conditioner
  • Model 10A69-4 Quad AC RMS Conditioner
• Model 10A70-2 Dual Strain Gage Conditioner
• Model 10A72-2C Enhanced Dual Strain Gage Conditioner
• Model 10A73-4 Quad 1/2 & 1/4 Bridge Strain Gage Conditioner
• Model 10A74-4C Quad Strain Gage Track-Hold Conditioner

(cont'd)

1.E.2 SYSTEM 10 ANALOG INPUT CARDS

• Model 10A76 Vibration Conditioner
• Model 10A78 AC Strain Gage Conditioner
- Model 10A96 Amplified Accelerometer Vibration Conditioner
- Model AA14-4F010 Thermocouple Conditioner
• Model AA30-4 LVDT Conditioner
- Model AA41-2 / AA41-4 Frequency Input Conditioner
- Model AA72-2 / AA72-4 Strain Gage Conditioner

PLEASE NOTE

In each individual Analog Input Card section, references will be made both to "Sections" and to "Manual Sections."

Unless otherwise indicated, a “Section” reference—e.g., “see Section 3.a”—will always refer to a subsection of the card-specific section of the System 10 Guidebook which you are presently reading.

Unless otherwise indicated, a “Manual Section” reference—e.g., “see Manual Section 1.G.5”—will always refer to a section of the main body of the System 10 Guidebook itself.

MODEL 10A9-8C

EIGHT-CHANNEL THERMOCOUPLE CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A9-8C is a general-purpose conditioner with built-in reference-junction compensation. It accepts up to eight independent temperature signals from Types B, E, J, K, R, S, and T Thermocouples. Any desired mixture of these thermocouple types is permitted. Sensors may be grounded or ungrounded, in any desired mix. An amplifier-per-channel design with chopper stabilization and active low-pass filtering allows high-speed scan switching of high-level, stabilized signals, at exceptionally low cost per channel.

During operation, appropriate reference-junction compensation, real-time digital linearization, and engineering-unit scaling are automatically applied by the System 10 Central Processor for each type of thermocouple used.

The Model 10A9-8C includes a rear-panel connector block with screw terminals for direct attachment of TC leads (which cannot be soldered). The same connector accommodates all TC types. Since the connector assembly also contains a dual-bead precision thermistor for measurement of the reference-junction temperature, no external cold junction is required—although the user may supply his own Controlled Ambient Temperature Zone for reference-junction compensation, if desired.

NOTE: When the 10A9-8C is used in System 10, the reference-junction-corrected temperature is made available to the Central Processor through the Model 10A11 Thermocouple Output Processor Card. The purpose of the 10A11 is to proportion and sum the cold-junction reference signal and the amplified TC signal of each channel for presentation to the system's Analog Signal Bus. One 10A11 must therefore be installed in every System 10 A-card rack containing one or more Model 10A9-8C's.

In the event of a broken thermocouple wire or other “open TC” condition, the 10A9-8C will automatically report an indeterminate off-scale reading for the TC channel in question, with positive or negative polarity selectable on a per-channel basis (as explained in Section 3.a).

You can use an optional Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box with a Model 10A9-8C to move the temperature-compensated reference junction to the actual site of up to eight remote thermocouple sensors. As explained in Section 4, below, TC leads connect directly to the 10CTJB-8's internal screw terminals, in any desired type mixture. The Junction Box then sends their signals to the 10A9-8C Conditioner via copper conductors (only).*

ADDITIONAL 10A9-8C SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement Range and Resolution: See Table 1, below; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A9-8C data channels, see Table 1

Linearization: Internal digital look-up via system processor; maximum error: ±0.05°C

Reference-Junction Compensation: At connector block, using a built-in precision thermistor, or at remote TC site, using the Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box*

Thermocouple Break Detection (per channel): Off-scale positive or negative indication, selectable by internal programming jumpers

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±80 mV operating; ±100 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±50 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -116 dB; at 60 Hz: -120 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 10 MΩ; Common-Mode: 0.5 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±5 μV; vs. Temperature: ±0.1 μV/°C; vs. Time: ±1 μV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.05% of absolute mV input range of -10 to +80 mV

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 2-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 1 Hz; 60 dB down at 50 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 0.75 sec

To 0.1% of final value: 4 sec

To 0.02% of final value: 8 sec

Total System Accuracy (typical, including Model 10A9-8C, Model 10A11 Thermo-couple Output Processor, and system data collection and processing): see Table 1, below

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

Table 1 Thermocouple Ranges for the Model 10A9-8C

TC Display System Expected Type			Typical Maximum Channel
Type Range Resolution Accuracy**			Code
E	-130°C to +1000°C	0.1°C	±0.6°C	±0.8°C	20
J	-130°C to +750°C	0.1°C	±0.8°C	±1.3°C	21
K	-75°C to +1350°C	0.1°C	±1.1°C	±1.5°C	22
R	-20°C to +1750°C	0.1°C	±1.3°C	±2.6°C	23
S	-20°C to +1750°C	0.1°C	±1.3°C	±2.6°C	24
T	-130°C to +400°C	0.1°C	±0.7°C	±1.1°C	25
B	+480°C to +1820°C	0.1°C	±1.3°C	±2.6°C	26
E	-200°F to +1800°F	0.2°F	±1.0°F	±1.4°F	28
J	-200°F to +1400°F	0.2°F	±1.4°F	±2.2°F	29
K	-100°F to +2500°F	0.2°F	±1.8°F	±2.6°F	2A
R	0°F to +3200°F	0.2°F	±2.2°F	±4.6°F	2B
S	0°F to +3200°F	0.2°F	±2.2°F	±4.6°F	2C
T	-200°F to +750°F	0.2°F	±1.2°F	±1.8°F	2D
B	+900°F to +3300°F	0.2°F	±2.2°F	±4.6°F	2E
				(cont'd)

* The 10CTJB-8 can only be used in environments with an ambient temperature between 0^ and +140^ .

** Including ± one count of least significant digit displayed. Can be readily improved by control of instrument temperature, calibrating at known temperatures, etc.

Typical Maximum Channel
TC Display System Expected Type
Type Range Resolution Accuracy* Error* Code

E	-	130°C to +1000°C	1°C ±1°C ±2°C 10
J	-	130°C to +750°C	1°C ±1°C ±2°C 11
K	-75°C to +1350°C	1°C ±1°C ±2°C 12
R	-20°C to +1750°C	1°C ±2°C ±3°C 13
S	-20°C to +1750°C	1°C ±2°C ±3°C 14
T	-130°C to +400°C	1°C ±1°C ±2°C 15
B	+480°C to +1820°C	1°C ±2°C ±3°C 16
E	-200°F to +1800°F	1°F	±1°F	±2°F	18
J	-200°F to +1400°F	1°F	±2°F	±3°F	19
K	-100°F to +2500°F	1°F	±2°F	±3°F	1A
R	0°F to +3200°F	1°F	±3°F	±5°F	1B
S	0°F to +3200°F	1°F	±3°F	±5°F	1C
T	-200°F to +750°F	1°F	±1°F	±2°F	1D
B	+900°F to +3300°F	1°F	±3°F	±5°F	1E

2

TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A9-8C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60324, similar to the one shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). This connector contains eight “±” screw-terminal pairs, one for each TC sensor. Each TC lead should be directly attached to its corresponding screw terminal (it should never be soldered). As shown in Fig. 1, each screw terminal connects internally to a specific pin on the 10A9-8C's rear 20-pin I/O CONNECTOR. Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O connector. For connection of an optional Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box, see Section 4, below.

Since reference-junction compensation is provided by the dual-bead thermistor embedded in the Conditioner Connector, no external cold junction is required.

IMPORTANT: UNUSED THERMOCOUPLE INPUT CHANNELS should be shorted together as shown in Fig. 2, to prevent possible crosstalk from the "OPEN TC" detection circuit into working TC channels.

Table 2 Model 10A9-8C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Pin Number	Screw Terminal	Conditioner Conditioner Channel Number	Line Function
1	1(+)	1	+SIGNAL
A	1(-)	1	-SIGNAL
2	2(+)	2	+SIGNAL
B	2(-)	2	-SIGNAL
3	3(+)	3	+SIGNAL
C	3(-)	3	-SIGNAL
4	4(+)	4	+SIGNAL
D	4(-)	4	-SIGNAL
5	5(+)	5	+SIGNAL
E	5(-)	5	-SIGNAL
6	6(+)	6	+SIGNAL
F	6(-)	6	-SIGNAL
			(cont'd)

* Including ± one count of least significant digit displayed. Can be readily improved by control of instrument temperature, calibrating at known temperatures, etc.

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Screw Channel Line Number Terminal Number Function

7 7(+) 7H	+SIGNAL7(-)	7	-SIGNAL
8 8(+) 8J	+SIGNAL8(-)	8	-SIGNAL
9K,L10	INTERNALUSEONLY		THERMISTOR: T1THERMISTOR: GROUND (COMMON)THERMISTOR: T2

Fig. 1 Model 10A9-8C Transducer Cabling Thermocouple Sensors Channel 1 + SIGNAL - SIGNAL + SIGNAL Channel 2 - - - SIGNAL SHIELD CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60324) Etc. 5 6 7 8 Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 Ground Lug

Thermocouple Conditioner I/O Connector +SIG (Chn. n) -SIG (Chn. n) GROUND LUG Fig. 2 Jumpering of an Unused TC Input

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a PROGRAMMING "OPEN TC" DETECTION

In the event of a broken thermocouple wire or other “open TC” condition, the Model 10A9-8C will automatically report an indeterminate off-scale reading for the TC channel in question. The conditioner is normally preset at the factory for positive off-scale “open TC” indication for each channel. However, you may easily reset any channel for negative off-scale “open TC” indication, as follows:

1. Remove the 10A9-8C card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the 10A9-8C is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 3, below, and locate the eight sets of "OPEN TC" PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS, one for each TC channel, on the top (component) side of the card. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel, for interconnecting any two adjacent jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each active channel as shown in Fig. 3 to set the desired polarity of the "OPEN TC" reading for that channel.
4. Reinsert the 10A9-8C card into its mainframe slot.

3.b CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A9-8C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A9-8C channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

REMEMBER: In System 10 (only), one Model 10A11 Thermocouple Output Processor Card must be installed in every A-card deck that contains one or more Model 10A9-8C cards. Note that Model 10A9-8C and Model 10A10-4 cards can share a single 10A11.

When used in System 10, the Model 10A9-8C normally employs CPU-BASED ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION (described in Manual Section 1.G.3.a). This means that NO calibration need be performed by the user, once each 10A9-8C-based input chan-

Fig. 3 10A9-8C "OPEN TC" Programming Jumper Pins

Connect these pins for NEGATIVE off-scale "Open TC" reading OPEN TC" ning pins Connect these pins for POSITIVE off-scale "Open TC" reading Rear I/O Connector Channel 1 Channel 5 Channel 2 Channel 6 Channel 3 Channel 7 Channel 4 Channel 8 Side 2

nel has been properly configured. Note, however, that the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands can be used to perform TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION in applications where it is desirable to force multiple TC readings to the same exactly known temperature.* The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for these commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique.

4 OPTIONAL "REMOTE" TC CONNECTIONS: MODEL 10CTJB-8 THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION BOX

4.a PURPOSE

You can use the Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box with a Model 10A9-8C to move the temperature-compensated reference junction to the actual site of up to eight remote thermocouple sensors.

NOTE: The 10CTJB-8 can only be used in environments with an ambient temperature between 0^ F and +140^ F.

4.b CONNECTIONS

The label on the top side of the 10CTJB-8 box shows the numbering and polarity of the unit's eight internal screw-terminal pairs, which match those of the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR that attaches to the 10A9-8C's rear I/O CONNECTOR (see Fig. 1 and the Pin-Assignment Table, above).

Introduced through the cutout on the left-hand side of the box, TC leads connect directly to these screw terminals, in any desired type mixture. The 10CJTB-8 then sends their signals to the Model 10A9-8C Conditioner Card via copper conductors (only).

The user must furnish his or her own pin-to-pin cable for connecting the 10CTJB-8 Junction Box to the rear I/O CONNECTOR of the Model 10A9-8C. Daytronic will supply appropriate solder-terminal connectors for this cable. The cable should be shielded, and should consist of stranded copper wires. While no maximum cable length is actually specified, the wire size and length combination should be such that the total per-wire resistance does not exceed 25 ohms.

MODEL 10A10-4

QUAD ISOLATED THERMOCOUPLE CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A10-4 is a precision conditioner designed for TC-based temperature measurements requiring high input isolation. With built-in reference-junction compensation, it accepts up to four independent temperature signals from Types B, E, J, K, R, S, and T Thermocouples. Any desired mixture of these thermocouple types is permitted. Sensors may be grounded or ungrounded, in any desired mix. An amplifier-per-channel design with chopper stabilization and active low-pass filtering allows high-speed scan switching of high-level, stabilized signals, at exceptionally low cost per channel.

All four 10A10-4 inputs are transformer-isolated, so that sensor-to-chassis and/or sensor-to-sensor common-mode voltages as high as 1500 V-DC can be accommodated at DC or low frequencies without damaging the instrument or perceptibly affecting measurement accuracy (at 60 Hz, the common-mode voltage can be as high as 1000 V-AC (rms)).

During operation, appropriate reference-junction compensation, real-time digital linearization, and engineering-unit scaling are automatically applied by the System 10 Central Processor for each type of thermocouple used. Detection of “open” thermocouples is also provided, as explained in Section 3.a.

The Model 10A10-4 includes a rear-panel connector block with screw terminals for direct attachment of TC leads (which cannot be soldered). The same connector accommodates all TC types. Since the connector assembly also contains a dual-bead precision thermistor for measurement of the reference-junction temperature, no external cold junction is required—although the user may supply his own Controlled Ambient Temperature Zone for reference-junction compensation, if desired.

The reference-junction-corrected temperature is made available to the Central Processor through the Model 10A11 Thermocouple Output Processor Card. The purpose of the 10A11 is to proportion and sum the cold-junction reference signal and the amplified TC signal of each channel for presentation to the system's Analog Signal Bus. One 10A11 must therefore be installed in every System 10 A-card rack containing one or more Model 10A10-4's.

You can use an optional Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box with a Model 10A10-4 to move the temperature-compensated reference junction to the actual site of up to eight remote thermocouple sensors. As explained in Section 4, below, TC leads connect directly to the 10CTJB-8's internal screw terminals, in any desired type mixture. The Junction Box then sends their signals to the 10A10-4 Conditioner via copper conductors (only).*

ADDITIONAL 10A10-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement Range and Resolution: See Table 1, below; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A10-4 data channels, see Table 1

Linearization: Internal digital look-up via system processor; maximum error: ±0.05°C

Reference-Junction Compensation: At connector block, using a built-in precision thermistor, or at remote TC site, using the Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box*

Thermocouple Break Detection (per channel): Off-scale negative indication

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: At DC, ±1500 V-DC operating and without instrument damage; at 60 Hz, ±1000 V-AC (rms) without damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -154 dB; at 60 Hz: -160 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 10 MΩ; Common-Mode: infinite

Offset: Initial: ±5 μV; vs. Temperature: ±0.1 μV/°C; vs. Time: ±1 μV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of absolute mV input range of -10 to +80 mV

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 1 Hz; 60 dB down at 60 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 0.3 sec

To 0.1% of final value: 0.6 sec

To 0.02% of final value: 1.5 sec

Total System Accuracy (typical, including Model 10A10-4, Model 10A11 Thermocouple Output Processor, and system data collection and processing): see Table 1, below

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

Table 1 Thermocouple Ranges for the Model 10A10-4

TC Display System Expected Type			Typical Maximum Channel
Type Range Resolution Accuracy**			Code
E	-130°C to +1000°C	0.1°C	±0.4°C	±0.6°C	20
J	-130°C to +750°C	0.1°C	±0.5°C	±0.7°C	21
K	-75°C to +1350°C	0.1°C	±0.7°C	±1.1°C	22
R	-20°C to +1750°C	0.1°C	±1.1°C	±2.1°C	23
S	-20°C to +1750°C	0.1°C	±1.1°C	±2.1°C	24
T	-130°C to +400°C	0.1°C	±0.5°C	±0.8°C	25
B	+480°C to +1820°C	0.1°C	±1.1°C	±2.1°C	26
E	-200°F to +1800°F	0.2°F	±0.8°F	±1.2°F	28
J	-200°F to +1400°F	0.2°F	±0.8°F	±1.2°F	29
K	-100°F to +2500°F	0.2°F	±1.2°F	±2.0°F	2A
R	0°F to +3200°F	0.2°F	±2.0°F	±3.8°F	2B
S	0°F to +3200°F	0.2°F	±2.0°F	±3.8°F	2C
T	-200°F to +750°F	0.2°F	±0.8°F	±1.2°F	2D
B	+900°F to +3300°F	0.2°F	±2.0°F	±3.8°F	2E
				(cont'd)

* The 10CTJB-8 can only be used in environments with an ambient temperature between 0^ and +140^ .

** Including ± one count of least significant digit displayed. Can be readily improved by control of instrument temperature, calibrating at known temperatures, etc.

Typical Maximum Channel
TC Display System Expected Type
Type Range Resolution Accuracy* Error* Code

E	-	130°C to +1000°C	1°C ±1°C ±2°C 10
J	-	130°C to +750°C	1°C ±1°C ±2°C 11
K -75°C to +1350°C			1°C ±1°C ±2°C 12
R -20°C to +1750°C			1°C ±2°C ±3°C 13
S -20°C to +1750°C			1°C ±2°C ±3°C 14
T	-130°C to +400°C		1°C ±1°C ±2°C 15
B +480°C to +1820°C			1°C ±2°C ±3°C 16
E	-200°F to +1800°F		1°F	±1°F	±2°F	18
J	-200°F to +1400°F		1°F	±1°F	±2°F	19
K	-100°F to +2500°F		1°F	±2°F	±3°F	1A
R	0°F to +3200°F		1°F	±2°F	±4°F	1B
S	0°F to +3200°F		1°F	±2°F	±4°F	1C
T	-200°F to +750°F		1°F	±1°F	±2°F	1D
B	+900°F to +3300°F		1°F	±2°F	±4°F	1E

2

TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A10-4's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60324, similar to the one shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). This connector contains four “±” screw-terminal pairs, one for each TC sensor. Each TC lead should be directly attached to its corresponding screw terminal (it should never be soldered). As shown in Fig. 1, each screw terminal connects internally to a specific pin on the 10A10-4's rear 20-pin I/O CONNECTOR. Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O connector. For connection of an optional Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box, see Section 4, below.

Since reference-junction compensation is provided by the dual-bead thermistor embedded in the Conditioner Connector, no external cold junction is required.

IMPORTANT: UNUSED THERMOCOUPLE INPUT CHANNELS should be shorted together as shown in Fig. 2, to prevent possible crosstalk from the "OPEN TC" detection circuit into working TC channels.

Table 2 Model 10A10-4 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Pin Number	Screw Terminal	Conditioner Conditioner Channel Number	Line Function
1	1(+)	1	+SIGNAL
A	1(-)	1	-SIGNAL
2			Not Committed
B			Not Committed
3	3(+)	2	+SIGNAL
C	3(-)	2	-SIGNAL
4			Not Committed
D			Not Committed
5	5(+)	3	+SIGNAL
E	5(-)	3	-SIGNAL
6			Not Committed
F			Not Committed

(cont'd)
* Including ± one count of least significant digit displayed. Can be readily improved by control of instrument temperature, calibrating at known temperatures, etc.

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Screw Channel Line

Number Terminal Number		Function
7	7(+)	4	+SIGNAL
H	7(-)	4	-SIGNAL
8			Not Committed
J			Not Committed
9	INTERNAL		THERMISTOR: T1
K,L	USE		THERMISTOR: GROUND (COMMON)
10	ONLY		THERMISTOR: T2

Fig. 1 Model 10A10-4 Transducer Cabling Thermocouple Sensors Channel 1 Channel 2 + - + SIGNAL - + SIGNAL - + SIGNAL - SHIELD CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60323) Etc. 3 4 Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug

Thermocouple Conditioner I/O Connector +SIG (Chn. n) -SIG (Chn. n) GROUND LUG Fig. 2 Jumpering of an Unused TC Input

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a "OPEN TC" DETECTION

In the event of a broken thermocouple wire or other “open TC” condition, the Model 10A10-4 will automatically report an indeterminate negative off-scale reading for the TC channel in question.

3.b CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A10-4 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A10-4 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

REMEMBER: One Model 10A11 Thermocouple Output Processor Card must be installed in every A-card deck that contains one or more Model 10A10-4 cards. Note that Model 10A10-4 and Model 10A9-8C cards can share a single 10A11.

The Model 10A10-4 normally employs CPU-BASED ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION (described in Manual Section 1.G.3.a). This means that NO calibration need be performed by the user, once each 10A10-4-based input channel has been properly configured. Note, however, that the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands can be used to perform TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION in applications where it is desirable to force multiple TC readings to the same exactly known temperature.* The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for these commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique.

4 OPTIONAL "REMOTE" TC CONNECTIONS: MODEL 10CTJB-8 THERMOCOUPLE JUNCTION BOX

4.a PURPOSE

You can use the Model 10CTJB-8 Thermocouple Junction Box with a Model 10A10-4 to move the temperature-compensated reference junction to the actual site of up to four remote thermocouple sensors.**

NOTE: The 10CTJB-8 can only be used in environments with an ambient temperature between 0^ F and +140^ F.

4.b CONNECTIONS

The label on the top side of the 10CTJB-8 box shows the numbering and polarity of the unit's eight internal screw-terminal pairs, which match those of the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR that attaches to the 10A10-4's rear I/O CONNECTOR (see Fig. 1 and the Pin-Assignment Table, above).

Introduced through the cutout on the left-hand side of the box, TC leads connect directly to these screw terminals, in any desired type mixture. The 10CJTB-8 then sends their signals to the Model 10A10-4 Conditioner Card via copper conductors (only).

The user must furnish his or her own pin-to-pin cable for connecting the 10CTJB-8 Junction Box to the rear I/O CONNECTOR of the Model 10A10-4. Daytronic will supply appropriate solder-terminal connectors for this cable. The cable should be shielded, and should consist of stranded copper wires. While no maximum cable length is actually specified, the wire size and length combination should be such that the total per-wire resistance does not exceed 25 ohms.

MODEL 10A15-8

EIGHT-CHANNEL THERMISTOR CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Providing regulated excitation current, the Model 10A15-8 can condition up to eight independent temperature signals from many 3-wire, dual-thermistor-bead probes, in any desired mix (within designated ranges, thermistor probes offer higher accuracy and greater long-term dependability than thermocouples).

All analog input channels derived from a Model 10A15-8 must be given a channel "type" code of 55 ("raw" millivolt signal), via the procedure described in Section 3.a, below.

ADDITIONAL 10A15-8 SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement Range and Resolution: See Table 1, below; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; all 10A15-8 data channels are to be “typed” as “55” (see Section 3.a)

Excitation (per channel): As required for thermolinear transducer

Amplifier (per channel):

Input Impedance: As required for thermolinear transducer

Offset: Initial: ±0.02% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale (absolute maximum input voltage range without damage is ±9 V)

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 1-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 30 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 kHz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 30 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 60 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 250 msec

Total System Accuracy (typical, including Model 10A15-8, probe interchangeability, and system data collection and processing): see Table 1, below

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

Table 1 Thermistor Ranges for the Model 10A15-8

Typical Maximum

Display System Expected

Range Resolution Accuracy* Error*

0^ C to +100^ C 0.1^ C ± 0.2^ C ± 0.3^ C
+32°F to +212°F 0.1°F ±0.3°F ±0.5°F
0^ C to +100^ C 0.01^ C ± 0.2^ C ± 0.3^ C
+32°F to +212°F 0.02°F ±0.3°F ±0.5°F

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A15-8's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard cabling is shown in Fig. 1, below; standard pin assignments for the I/O connector are given in Table 2.

Channel 1 T1 T2 Channel 2 T1 T2 Etc. CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SIGNAL COMMON (GROUND) SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug Fig. 1 Model 10A15-8 Transducer Cabling

Table 2 Model 10A15-8 Pin Assignments
I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function

1	1	T2
A	1	T1
2	2		T
B	2	T1
3	3	T2
C	3	T1
4	4	T2
D	4	T1
5	5	T2
E	5	T1
6	6	T2
F	6	T1
7	7	T2
H	7	T1
8	8	T2
J	8	T1

9,K Not Committed
10,L SIGNAL COMMON (GROUND)

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A15-8 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook.

Note, however, that you should use the following special "typing" and scaling procedure when setting up any data channel (No. "x") dedicated to the Model 10A15-8:

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and apply a RESET (RST) command to the channel:

RST x [CR]

The channel will be retyped as "55" (i.e., a direct millivolt reading from the system's internal Called Signal Bus). Its SCALING FACTOR ("m") will be changed to "5000," and its ZERO OFFSET ("b") to "0." Its current "location" (LCT) assignment will not be affected.

1. If the channel's source thermistor's range is 0^ to +100^ , and its resolution is 0.1^ , enter the following commands:

$$ \text { EMM } x = 1 0 0. 0 [ \text { CR } ] \quad \text { and } \quad \text { BEE } x = 0. 0 [ \text { CR } ] $$

-or, if the resolution is 0.01^ , enter

$$ \text { EMM } x = 1 0 0. 0 0 [ \text { CR } ] \quad \text { and } \quad \text { BEE } x = 0. 0 0 [ \text { CR } ] $$

1. If the channel's source thermistor's range is +32^ to +212^ , and its resolution is 0.1^ , enter the following commands:

$$ \text { EMM } x = 1 8 0. 0 [ \text { CR } ] \quad \text { and } \quad \text { BEE } x = 3 2. 0 [ \text { CR } ] $$

-or, if the resolution is 0.02^ , enter

EMM x = 180.00 [CR] and BEE x = 32.00 [CR]

1. Turn OFF the system EEPROM SWITCH.

The Model 10A15-8 normally employs CPU-BASED ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION (described in Manual Section 1.G.3.a). This means that NO calibration need be performed by the user, once each 10A15-8-based input channel has been properly configured. This includes the range/resolution-dependent EMM and BEE scaling described above.

Note, however, that the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands can be used to perform TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION in applications where independently and accurately known temperature references are available—preferably the high and low extremes to which the sensor will be subjected. In such a case, the two-point method can be used to improve the “absolute” calibration provided by the System 10 Central Processor. The mainframe’s EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional “zero and span” calibration technique.

MODEL 10A16-4C

QUAD PLATINUM RTD CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A16-4C is designed for high-accuracy temperature measurement using platinum Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD's). Precision constant-current excitation is provided for four independent sensor channels, which may be intermixed as required. RTD inputs are normally set for four-wire cabling, with maximum excitation of one milliampere and input impedance of 10 MΩ, to eliminate common self-heating and cable-loading errors. However, for an RTD channel with shared current return and sense signals, three-wire mode is available, if desired, via an internal jumper setting (as explained in Section 3.a, below).

ADDITIONAL 10A16-4C SPECIFICATIONS

RTD Types: Platinum; DIN (European) standard with "ice-point" resistance of 50, 100, or 200 ohms, or American standard with "ice-point" of 100 ohms

Range and Resolution: See Table 1, below; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A16-4C data channels, see Table 1; for high RTD resolution, using a specially modified 10A16-4C card, see Section 3.c, below

Linearization: Internal digital linearization; maximum error: ±0.1° C (±0.2° F)

Excitation (per channel): Nominal 5 V-DC; 1 mA, maximum

Amplifier (per channel):

Input Impedance (Differential): 10 megohms

Offset: Initial: ±0.1 mV; vs. Temperature: ±0.5 μV/°C; vs. Time: ±5 μV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 2 Hz; 60 dB down at 25 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 0.6 sec

To 0.1% of final value: 0.8 sec

To 0.02% of final value: 1.5 sec

Total System Accuracy (typical, including Model 10A16-4C and system data collection and processing): see Table 1, below

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 RTD Ranges for the Model 10A16-4C

Platinum Typical Maximum Channel
RTD Standard	R tance	esis- Display System Expected Type Range Resolution	^3	Accuracy ^4	Error ^4	Code
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	1.0°C	± 1°C	± 1.3°C	A9
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	AA
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	1.0°F	± 1°F	± 1.5°F	AB
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	AC
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	1.0°C	± 1°C	± 1.3°C	A1
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	A2
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	1.0°F	± 1°F	± 1.5°F	A3
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	A4
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	1.0°C	± 1°C	± 1.3°C	A5
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	A6
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	1.0°F	± 1°F	± 1.5°F	A7
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	A8
American ^2	100 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	AD
American ^2	100 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	AE

^1 α = 0.00385.
^2 α = 0.00392.
^3 Note that a specially modified version of the 10A16-4C yields resolution of 0.01^ C ( 0.02^ F) when used with System 10 “custom linearization.” See Section 3.c for details.
4 Including ± one count of least significant digit displayed.

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A16-4C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard four-wire RTD cabling is shown in Fig. 1(a), below. With separate excitation and sense lines, this mode of cabling normally yields the highest measurement accuracy. However, any 10A16-4C input channel can be set to accommodate the alternative three-wire cabling shown in Fig. 1(b). THE APPROPRIATE JUMPER SETTING MUST BE MADE FOR EACH 10A16-4C CHANNEL, DEPENDING ON WHETHER 4-WIRE OR 3-WIRE CABLING IS BEING USED FOR THAT CHANNEL (see the instructions in Section 3.a, below). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

IMPORTANT: When cabling the 10A16-4C, you can ensure static protection by connecting the SHIELD wire to Pin 10 as well as to the connector ground lug, as shown in Fig. 1.

Table 2 Model 10A16-4C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Pin Number	Conditioner Channel Number	Conditioner Line Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	1	+CURRENT
B	1	-CURRENT
3	2	+SIGNAL
C	2	-SIGNAL
4	2	+CURRENT
D	2	-CURRENT
5	3	+SIGNAL
E	3	-SIGNAL
6	3	+CURRENT
F	3	-CURRENT

(cont'd)

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function

7	4	+SIGNAL
H	4	-SIGNAL
8	4	+CURRENT
J	4	-CURRENT
10 SHIELD
9,K,L Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A16-4C Transducer Cabling

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + CURRENT + SIGNAL Channel 1 - SIGNAL - CURRENT Channel 2: _SIGNAL - CURRENT Channel 3: _SIGNAL - CURRENT Channel 4: _SIGNAL - CURRENT SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 + SIGNAL + CURRENT + SIGNAL + CURRENT + SIGNAL + CURRENT SHIELD

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + SIGNAL & + CURRENT Channel 1 -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 2: -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 3: -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 4: -SIGNAL -CURRENT SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 + SIGNAL & + CURRENT + SIGNAL & + CURRENT + SIGNAL & + CURRENT SHIELD

Fig. 2 10A16-4C "RTD CABLING" Programming Jumper Pins

Connect these pins for FOUR-WIRE RTD CABLING Connect these pins for THREE-WIRE RTD CABLING Rear I/O Connector Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Side 2

3 | SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SETTING A 10A16-4C CHANNEL FOR FOUR-WIRE OR THREE-WIRE RTD CABLING

When the Model 10A16-4C is shipped, all four channels are normally set for the four-wire RTD cabling shown in Fig. 1(a), above, since this mode of cabling normally yields the highest accuracy. If you wish to use the three-wire cabling shown in Fig. 1(b) for a given 10A16-4C channel, you should

1. Remove the 10A16-4C card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the 10A16-4C is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 2, above, and locate the four sets of "RTD CABLING" PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS, one for each channel, on the top (component) side of the card. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel, for interconnecting any two adjacent jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each active channel as shown in Fig. 2 to set the desired wiring mode for that channel.
4. Reinsert the 10A16-4C card into its mainframe slot.

3.b CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A16-4C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A16-4C channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

When used in System 10, the Model 10A16-4C normally employs CPU-BASED ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION (described in Manual Section 1.G.3.a). This means that NO calibration need be performed by the user, once each 10A16-4C-based input channel has been properly configured. Note, however, that you may subsequently improve the “absolute” calibration provided by the system processor by using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands to perform TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION on a real-time basis—but only when independently

and accurately known temperature references are available (preferably the high and low extremes to which the sensor will be subjected). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for these commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique.

3.c HIGH RTD RESOLUTION WITH SPECIALLY MODIFIED 10A16-4C

To implement a resolution of 0.01^ C (0.02^ F) for Channel No. "x" of a specially modified 10A16-4C card, when used in System 10 (only), you need only enter the following LINEARIZE (LIN) command, having first turned ON the system EEPROM SWITCH:

$$ \mathrm{LIN} \mathbf {x} = \mathrm{F1} (\mathrm{CHN} \mathbf {x}) [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

The effect of this command is to apply to all readings of Channel No. x a prestored "Linearization Table No. 1." It also automatically assigns to the "linearized" Channel No. x a new "type" designation of "EA."

For a full discussion of System 10 "custom linearization," see Manual Section 2.L.

MODEL 10A17-2

DUAL HIGH-VOLTAGE ISOLATION RTD CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A17-2 is designed for high-accuracy temperature measurement using platinum Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD's) and requiring high input isolation. Precision constant-current excitation is provided for two independent sensor channels, which may be intermixed as required. Each input is transformer-isolated, so that sensor-to-sensor common-mode voltages as high as 1500 V-DC can be accommodated without damaging the instrument or perceptibly affecting measurement accuracy. Four-wire cabling, with maximum excitation of one milliampere and 0.004% per ohm leadwire resistance rejection, eliminates common self-heating and cable-loading errors. This conditioner is particularly useful in the utilities industry.

ADDITIONAL 10A17-2 SPECIFICATIONS

RTD Types: Platinum; DIN (European) standard with "ice-point" resistance of 50, 100, or 200 ohms, or American standard with "ice-point" of 100 ohms

Range and Resolution: See Table 1, below; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A17-2 data channels, see Table 1; for high RTD resolution, using a specially modified 10A17-2 card, see Section 3.b, below

Linearization: Internal digital linearization; maximum error: ±0.1° C (±0.2° F)

Excitation (per channel): Nominal 5 V-DC; 1 mA, maximum

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ± 1500 V operating and without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ration: DC: -150 dB; at 60 Hz: -160 dB; at 1 kHz and 3 kHz; infinite

Leadwire Resistance Rejection (4-wire only): 0.004% per ohm

Offset: Initial: ±0.01% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±10 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±10 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 2 Hz; 60 dB down at 30 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 260 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 500 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

Total System Accuracy (typical, including Model 10A17-2 and system data collection and processing): see Table 1, below

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 RTD Ranges for the Model 10A17-2

Platinum Typical Maximum Channel
RTD Standard	R tance	esis- Display System Expected Type Range Resolution	^3	Accuracy ^4	Error ^4	Code
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	1.0°C	± 1°C	± 1.3°C	A9
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	AA
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	1.0°F	± 1°F	± 1.5°F	AB
DIN ^1	50 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	AC
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	1.0°C	± 1°C	± 1.3°C	A1
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	A2
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	1.0°F	± 1°F	± 1.5°F	A3
DIN ^1	100 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	A4
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	1.0°C	± 1°C	± 1.3°C	A5
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	A6
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	1.0°F	± 1°F	± 1.5°F	A7
DIN ^1	200 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	A8
American ^2	100 Ω	-150°C to +600°C	0.1°C	± 0.2°C	± 0.4°C	AD
American ^2	100 Ω	-238°F to +1112°F	0.2°F	± 0.3°F	± 0.6°F	AE

^1 α = 0.00385.
^2 α = 0.00392.
^3 Note that a specially modified version of the 10A17-2 yields resolution of 0.01^ C ( 0.02^ F) when used with System 10 “custom linearization.” See Section 3.b for details.
4 Including ± one count of least significant digit displayed.

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A17-2's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard four-wire RTD cabling is shown in Fig. 1, below. Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Table 2 Model 10A17-2 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Pin Number	Conditioner Channel Number	Conditioner Line Function
1	1	+CURRENT
A	1	-CURRENT
3	1	+SIGNAL
C	1	-SIGNAL
6	2	+CURRENT
F	2	-CURRENT
8	2	+SIGNAL
J	2	-SIGNAL
2,B,4,D,5,E,7,H9,K,L,10		Not CommittedNot Committed

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + CURRENT + SIGNAL Channel 1 -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 2: -CURRENT -SIGNAL SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector + CURRENT + SIGNAL Ground Lug Model 10A17-2 ducer Cabling

Fig. 1 Model 10A17-2 Transducer Cabling

3 | SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A17-2 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A17-2 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

The Model 10A17-2 normally employs CPU-BASED ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION (described in Manual Section 1.G.3.a). This means that NO calibration need be performed by the user, once each 10A17-2-based input channel has been properly configured. Note, however, that you may subsequently improve the "absolute" calibration provided by the system processor by using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands to perform TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION on a real-time basis—but only when independently and accurately known temperature references are available (preferably the high and low extremes to which the sensor will be subjected). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for these commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique.

3.b HIGH RTD RESOLUTION WITH SPECIALLY MODIFIED 10A17-2

To implement a resolution of 0.01^ C (0.02^ F) for Channel No. "x" of a specially modified 10A17-2 card, you need only enter the following LINEARIZE (LIN) command, having first turned ON the system EEPROM SWITCH:

$$ \mathrm{LIN} \mathbf {x} = \mathrm{F1} (\mathrm{CHN} \mathbf {x}) [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

The effect of this command is to apply to all readings of Channel No. x a prestored "Linearization Table No. 1." It also automatically assigns to the "linearized" Channel No. x a new "type" designation of "EA."

For a full discussion of System 10 "custom linearization," see Manual Section 2.L.

MODEL 10A18-4C

The Model 10A18-4C is a high-bandwidth conditioner card designed for temperature measurement using 100- platinumResistance Temperature Detectors (RTD's) of either DIN (European) or American design.* It produces an output voltage that is linearly related to actual temperature instead of resistance—with selectable accuracy (depending on the operating measurement range) of up to ±0.2^ C (see Fig. 1). Since the 10A18-4C provides its own per-channel temperature curve fitting, no further system-level linearization is required.

Precision constant-current excitation is provided for four independent sensor channels, which may be intermixed as required. RTD inputs are normally set for four-wire cabling, with nominal excitation of one milliampere and input impedance exceeding 10 MΩ, to eliminate common self-heating and cable-loading errors. However, for an RTD channel with a shared “+SIGNAL” and “+CURRENT” line, three-wire mode is available, if desired, via an internal jumper setting (as explained in Section 3.a, below).

ADDITIONAL 10A18-4C SPECIFICATIONS

RTD Types: Platinum; DIN (European) or American standard with "ice-point" of 100 ohms(ONLY)

Linear Range and Accuracy: -200.0°C to +600.0°C full-scale for each RTD standard (DIN and American); accuracy of linearization will depend on the selected RTD standard and the selected operating range (see Fig. 1, which shows worst-case error that could occur for a 10A18-4C card operating at an ambient temperature of 25^ ± 10^ C, six months after calibration)**; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A18-4C data channels are given in Table 2, Section 3.b, below

Excitation (per channel): Nominal 1 mA

Amplifier (per channel): Low-drift, linearized by current feedback

Normal-Mode Range: ±350 mV operating; ±5 V without instrument damage

(cont'd)

* F or the 10A18-4C, "American" standard conforms to NIST "Reference Function."

** With proper calibration, each operating range can be expressed, if desired, in degrees Fahrenheit (see Section 3.b). Note that the expected linearity deviation for most temperature measurements within the 10A18-4C's full -200^ to +600^ range are substantially less than the maximum error values given in Fig. 1. More detailed information is available on request from the Daytronic factory, if error reduction below the limits shown in Fig. 1 is desired. Note also that, while measurement accuracy is independent of the system using the 10A18-4C card, final measurement resolution will, in general, depend on the system. In System 10, the resolution is limited by the readout to a maximum resolution of approximately one part in 30,000 (e.g., ± 0.01^ for measurements up to 300^ ).

Common-Mode Range (expressed as lead-wire resistance rejection, 100 Ω maximum) 0.004%/Ω (4-wire)

Input Impedance (Differential): Greater than 10 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±5 μV; vs. Temperature: ±0.2 μV/°C; vs. Time: ±1 μV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 190 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 65 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 85 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 100 msec

Fig. 1 Range-Dependent Accuracy of the Model 10A18-4C

Fig. 1(a) For DIN Standard Platinum RTD's (α=0.00385)

Fig. 1(b) For American Standard Platinum RTD's ( _0=0.00392 )

Outputs: 10.000 mV/°C for DIN-standard transducers; 10.218 mV/°C for American-standard transducers

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A18-4C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard four-wire RTD cabling is shown in Fig. 2(a), below. With separate excitation and sense lines, this mode of cabling normally yields the highest measurement accuracy. However, any 10A18-4C input channel can be set to accommodate the alternative three-wire cabling shown in Fig. 2(b). THE APPROPRIATE JUMPER SETTING MUST BE MADE FOR EACH 10A18-4C CHANNEL, DEPENDING ON WHETHER 4-WIRE OR 3-WIRE Cabling IS BEING USED FOR THAT CHANNEL (see the instructions in Section 3.a, below). Table 1 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

IMPORTANT: When cabling the 10A18-4C, you can ensure static protection by connecting the SHIELD wire to Pin 10 as well as to the connector ground lug, as shown in Fig. 2.

Fig. 2 Model 10A18-4C Transducer Cabling

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + CURRENT + SIGNAL Channel 1 -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 2: -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 3: -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 4: -SIGNAL -CURRENT SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug 2(a) Four-Wire Cabling

Channel 1 + SIGNAL & + CURRENT - SIGNAL - CURRENT CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) Channel 2: -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 3: -SIGNAL -CURRENT Channel 4: -SIGNAL -CURRENT SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Ground Lug Figure 2(b) Three-Wire RTD Cabling

Table 1 Model 10A18-4C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	1	+CURRENT
B	1	-CURRENT
3	2	+SIGNAL
C	2	-SIGNAL
4	2	+CURRENT
D	2	-CURRENT
5	3	+SIGNAL
E	3	-SIGNAL
6	3	+CURRENT
F	3	-CURRENT
7	4	+SIGNAL
H	4	-SIGNAL
8	4	+CURRENT
J	4	-CURRENT
10 SHIELD9,K,L Not Committed

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SETTING A 10A18-4C CHANNEL FOR FOUR-WIRE OR THREE-WIRE RTD CABLING

When the Model 10A18-4C is shipped, all four channels are normally set for the four-wire RTD cabling shown in Fig. 1(a), above, since this mode of cabling normally yields the highest accuracy. If you wish to use the three-wire cabling shown in Fig. 1(b) for a given 10A18-4C channel, you should

1. Remove the 10A18-4C card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the 10A18-4C is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 3, below, and locate the four sets of "RTD CABLING" PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS, one for each channel, on the top (component) side of the card. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel, for interconnecting any two adjacent jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each active channel as shown in Fig. 3 to set the desired wiring mode for that channel.
4. Reinsert the 10A18-4C card into its mainframe slot.

3.b CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A18-4C card when used in System 10, see the following section, along with the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook.

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

In System 10, the initial configuration and CALCULATED CALIBRATION of a 10A18-4C channel (No. "x") involve direct entry of the channel's TYPE CODE, SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), and ZERO OFFSET ("b" term) via the corresponding mnemonic commands. The values of these parameters that are entered will depend on the RTD type, range, and desired engineering units (°C or °F), as given in Table 2, below. For

Fig. 3 10A18-4C "RTD CABLING" Programming Jumper Pins

Connect these pins for FOUR-WIRE RTD CABLING Connect these pins for THREE-WIRE RTD CABLING Rear I/O Connector Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Side 2

increased accuracy, you may perform a subsequent TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) calibration of a 10A18-4C channel in System 10, as explained below.*

In the following procedure, Channel No. "x" is a System 10 "REAL CHANNEL" sourced by a 10A18-4C card. Note that, with the exception of the LOCATE (LCT) command (Step 2), each of the commands can be applied to a continuous range of channels by entering the command in "range" form, where the single channel-number argument "x" is replaced by "x TO y" (indicating all channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y).

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH.
2. Make sure that Channel No. x has been assigned the proper A-SLOT / SUBCHANNEL "location." See Manual Section 1.G.2 for details on the LOCATE (LCT) command.
3. Apply a RESET (RST) command to Channel No. x:

RST x [CR]

The channel will be retyped as "55" (i.e., a direct millivolt reading from the system's internal Called Signal Bus). Its SCALING FACTOR ("m") will be changed to "5000" and its ZERO OFFSET ("b") to "0." Its current "location" (LCT) assignment will not be affected.

1. Apply the following commands to Channel No. x, using the values of "v," "m," and "b" given in Table 2 for the channel's specific TC type and range:

$$ \text { TYP } x = v [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ \text { BEE } x = b [ \text { CR } ] $$

Be sure to enter the "m" value as shown (with a "0" or "00" after the decimal point), if you want your measurement readout to be in tenths or hundredths of a degree, respectively.

Table 2 Calibration Values for a 10A18-4C Channel

RTD Standard Range & Resolution ("v") ("m") ("b")				ype Code Scaling Factor Zer
DIN -200.0°C to +600.0°C 72	500.0	0.0
DIN -200.00°C to +300.00°C	71	250.00	0.00
DIN -328.0°F to +1112.0°F	72	900.0	32.0
DIN -250.00°F to +250.00°F	70	225.00	32.00
American -200.0°C to +600.0°C	72	489.4	0.0
American -200.00°C to +300.00°C	71	244.88	0.00
American -328.0°F to +1112.0°F	72	880.8	32.0
American -250.00°F to +250.00°F	70	220.39	32.00

1. Use the FILTER (FIL) command to apply to Channel No. x a level of digital smoothing that is appropriate to your application:

FIL x = f [CR]

where "f" is an integer from 0 through 9 (0 = no smoothing; 9 = highest amount of smoothing). An "f" value of 1, 2, or 3 is suggested for an RTD range with tenth-of-a-degree resolution, and a value from 4 through 9 for a range with hundredth-of-a-degree resolution (see Manual Section 2.G.2 for a complete explanation of the FIL command).

1. Turn OFF the system EEPROM SWITCH.

TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION

If the above procedure does not yield sufficient accuracy, additional TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) calibration may be performed on a real-time basis via the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands—but only when independently and accurately known temperature references are available (preferably the high and low extremes to which the sensor will be subjected). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for these commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique.

MODEL 10A30-2C

DUAL LVDT

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A30-2C is for measurement of displacement, force, pressure, and other parameters obtained with a variable reluctance transducer or linear variable differential transformer (LVDT). Based on the synchronous carrier-demodulator principle, it supplies regulated, remotely sensed AC excitation for two independent transducer channels—thus allowing direct measurement of thickness (when the two inputs are summed) or of taper (when their difference is calculated). It then demodulates, filters, and amplifies the resulting signals to produce system outputs precisely proportional to LVDT core displacement. The 10A30-2C automatically adjusts to the signal phase shift of the transducer in use, thereby insuring optimum sensitivity and linearity. Special input provisions exist for “long-stroke” LVDT's (full-scale range of ±1 inch or greater).

ADDITIONAL 10A30-2C SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 5- or 7-wire LVDT's capable of 3280-Hz operation and having primary impedance of 80 ohms or greater (all Daytronic LVDT transducers are suitable); 3- or 5-wire variable reluctance transducers

Sensitivity Range: Accommodates full-scale ranges from ±0.010 in. ( ±0.25 mm) to ±6.0 in. ( ±15.24 cm), when used with Daytronic or equivalent transducers; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A30-2C data channels, see Table 1, below

Standard Input (rms, full-scale): 78, 156, or 312 mV/V

Long-Stroke Input (rms, full-scale): 525 mV/V, 1.05 V/V, or 2.10 V/V

Excitation (per channel): Nominal 3.0 V-AC (rms) at 3280 Hz; 40 mA (rms), maximum

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ±5 V operating; ±12 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC and at 60 Hz: infinite; at 3 kHz: -60 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 400 kΩ; Common-Mode: 100 kΩ

Offset: Initial: ±3% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±0.01% f.s./month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 6 Hz; 60 dB down at 60 Hz

(cont'd)

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 250 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 400 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 500 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A30-2C "Type" Codes
Full-Scale Channel Input (RMS) Type Code

78 mV/V 64

156 mV/V 63

312 mV/V 65*

525 mV/V 64

1.05 V/V 63

2.10 V/V 65*

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A30-2C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector. With regard to 10A30-2C cabling, please note the following:

a. 5-wire LVDT cabling (Fig. 1(a)) or 3-wire variable reluctance transducer cabling (Fig. 1(c)) is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR.

7-wire LVDT cabling (Fig. 1(b)) or 5-wire variable reluctance transducer cabling (Fig. 1(d)) is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the transducer.

b. For each LVDT transducer connected to the 10A30-2C, you may either

• connect the “center wire” that joins both series-opposed secondary coils to the conditioner connector’s SIGNAL COMMON (Pin 4 or 9), as shown in Figs. 1(a) and 1(b); or, alternatively (to simplify the overall cabling),
• connect the transducer center wire to the CABLE SHIELD at the transducer end, instead of bringing this line through a cable shield to the conditioner connector's SIGNAL COMMON pin or screw terminal.

c. Note that there are special +SIGNAL and -SIGNAL connections for use with LONG-STROKE LVDT's (full-scale range of ±1 inch or greater). These connections are shown in Fig. 2. Thus, to allow for the larger input voltages produced by such a sensor, you would connect its +SIGNAL line to Pin 5 (for Channel 1) or to Pin 10 (for Channel 2), instead of to Pin 3 or 8, respectively. Similarly, you would connect the -SIGNAL line to Pin E (for Channel 1) or to Pin L (for Channel 2), instead of to Pin C or J, respectively.

d. When wiring a variable reluctance transducer to the 10A30-2C, you must install a 10-kilohm "half-bridge completion" resistor between the -SIGNAL pin (C or J) and each of the two EXCITATION lines, as shown in Figs. 1(c) and 1(d).

IMPORTANT: The ±EXCITATION, ±SENSE, and ±SIGNAL pins or terminals for an UNUSED LVDT INPUT CHANNEL should be jumpered as shown in Fig. 3. If an input is left open, high-frequency oscillation can result, which can in turn produce significant interchannel crosstalk, and possibly inaccurate data readings.

Fig. 1 Model 10A30-2C Transducer Cabling

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + EXCITATION -EXCITATION Channel 1 + SIGNAL - SIGNAL SEC. 1 SECONDARY COILS SEC. 2 Channel 2: - EXCITATION + SIGNAL - SIGNAL SIGNAL COMMON SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug See Fig. 2 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 See Fig. 2 + EXCITATION + SENSE-SENSE

CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) +SENSE -SENSE +EXCITATION -EXCITATION Channel 1 PRIMARY COIL + SIGNAL - SIGNAL SEC. 1 SECONDARY COILS SIGNAL COMMON Channel 2: -EXCITATION -SENSE + SIGNAL -SIGNAL SIGNAL COMMON SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug See Fig. 2 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 See Fig. 2 Fig. 1(b) 7-Wire LVDT Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) +EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 1 A 1 -SENSE + SENSE 2 10K C 3 -10K -SIGNAL D 4 E 5 F 6 +EXCITATION + EXCITATION -EXCITATION -SENSE + SENSE 7 + SIGNAL 10K J K L 8 9 10 -10K -SIGNAL SHIELD B-Wire Variable ce Transducer under 20 ft. in length)

Fig. 1(c) 3-Wire Variable Reluctance Transducer Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)
Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector
Ground Lug

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) +SENSE +EXCITATION +SIGNAL -EXCITATION -SENSE Channel 1 A 1 B 2 10K C 3 -SIGNAL D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 +EXCITATION +SENSE-SENSE +SIGNAL K 9 -L 10 SHIELD Channel 2: -EXCITATION +SIGNAL 10K 10K 8 -SIGNAL -SIGNAL

Fig. 1(d) 5-Wire Variable Reluctance Transducer Cabling (20 ft. or longer)
Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector
Ground Lug

Fig. 2 Long-Stroke LVDT Connections

+SIGNAL (L.S.) -SIGNAL (L.S.) C (Chn. 1) or J (Chn. 2 [ Normal -SIGNAL ] 3 (Chn. 1) or 8 (Chn. 2 [ Normal +SIGNAL ] E & 5 (Chn. 1) or L & 10 (Chn. 2)

Fig. 3 Jumpering of an Unused 10A30-2C LVDT Input

Model 10A30-2C I/O Connector + EX (Chn. n) + SEN (Chn. n) - EX (Chn. n) - SEN (Chn. n) + SIG (Chn. n) -SIG (Chn. n) SIG COM (Chn. n)

Table 2 Model 10A30-2C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner ConditionerPin Channel LineNumber Number Function
1	1	+EXCITATION (3 V-AC)
A	1	-EXCITATION (3 V-AC)
2	1	+SENSE
B	1	-SENSE
3	1	+SIGNAL
C	1	-SIGNAL
4	1	SIGNAL COMMON
D Not Committed
5	1	+SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
E	1	-SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
6	2	+EXCITATION (3 V-AC)
F	2	-EXCITATION (3 V-AC)
7	2	+SENSE
H	2	-SENSE
8	2	+SIGNAL
J	2	-SIGNAL
9	2	SIGNAL COMMON
K Not Committed
10 2	+SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
L	2	-SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A30-2C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A30-2C channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, a relatively linear Model 10A30-2C channel normally employs TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION.* See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique. Note, however, the following special procedure that applies to an LVDT-based Channel No. "x":

1. Make sure the channel has been properly "typed" and "located" (see Manual Section 1.G.1).
2. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and enter a command of

$$ \text { BEE } x = 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

This command sets an initial ZERO OFFSET ("b" term) of zero for Channel No. x.

1. Observing a "live" reading of the channel, mechanically adjust the fixture and physical position of the LVDT until the lowest reading occurs. This is the LVDT's "electrical null" point.

2. With the transducer still in "null" position, enter a command of

$$ \mathsf {Z R O} \times [ \mathsf {C R} ] $$

1. Displace the LVDT probe by a precisely known distance, preferably between 80% and 100% of the transducer's nominal full-scale rating.

2. Command

$$ F R C x = z [ C R ] $$

where “z” is the exact value of the displacement produced in Step 5, expressed in appropriate engineering units (the precision of the final measurement will match that of the entered “z” value).

1. Repeat Steps 4, 5, and 6, if necessary, until the LVDT's zero and span points coincide with the calibration block or micrometer reference being used.

MODEL 10A31-4

QUAD LVDT

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A31-4 is for measurement of displacement, force, pressure, and other parameters obtained with a variable reluctance transducer or linear variable differential transformer (LVDT). Based on the synchronous carrier-demodulator principle, it supplies regulated, remotely sensed AC excitation for four independent transducer channels. It then demodulates, filters, and amplifies the resulting signals to produce system outputs precisely proportional to LVDT core displacement. The 10A31-4 automatically adjusts to the signal phase shift of the transducer in use, thereby insuring optimum sensitivity and linearity. Special input provisions exist for “long-stroke” LVDT's (full-scale range of ±1 inch or greater).

For each of its four analog inputs, the 10A31-4 produces two displayable outputs: one with "normal" analog filtering and one with high bandwidth characteristics (see Specifications and Table 1, below). All four channels share a common sensed excitation of 100 mA (rms), maximum. As explained in Section 2, for cables over 25 feet in length, this limits the distance from the sense point to the transducer to about 20 feet of 18-gage wire.

The 10A31-4's eight SUBCHANNELS are assigned as follows:

Table 1 Model 10A31-4 Subchannels
Subchannel No. Function

1	Input No. 1, low-bandwidth filter
2	Input No. 2, low-bandwidth filter
3	Input No. 3, low-bandwidth filter
4	Input No. 4, low-bandwidth filter
5	Input No. 1, high-bandwidth filter
6	Input No. 2, high-bandwidth filter
7	Input No. 3, high-bandwidth filter
8	Input No. 4, high-bandwidth filter

ADDITIONAL 10A31-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 5- or 7-wire LVDT's capable of 3280-Hz operation and having primary impedance of 80 ohms or greater (all Daytronic LVDT transducers are suitable); 3- or 5-wire variable reluctance transducers

Sensitivity Range: Accommodates full-scale ranges from ±0.010 in. ( ±0.25 mm) to ±6.0 in. ( ±15.24 cm), when used with Daytronic or equivalent transducers; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A31-4 data channels, see Table 2, below

Standard Input (rms, full-scale): 78, 156, or 312 mV/V

Long-Stroke Input (rms, full-scale): 525 mV/V, 1.05 V/V, or 2.10 V/V

(cont'd)

Excitation (per channel): Nominal 3.0 V-AC (rms) at 3280 Hz; 40 mA (rms), maximum

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ±5 V operating; ±12 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC and at 60 Hz: infinite; at 3 kHz: -60 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 400 kΩ; Common-Mode: 100 kΩ

Offset: Initial: ±3% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±0.01% f.s./month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel):

NORMAL: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 6 Hz; 60 dB down at 60 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 250 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 400 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 500 msec

HIGH BANDWIDTH: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 200 Hz; 60 dB down at 2750 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 5 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 8 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 13 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 2 10A31-4 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Channel Input (RMS) Type Code

78 mV/V 64

156 mV/V 63

312 mV/V 65**

525 mV/V 64

1.05 V/V 63

2.10 V/V 65**

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A31-4's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 3 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector. With regard to 10A31-4 cabling, please note the following:

a. All four 10A31-4 input channels use a single, sensed excitation supply.
b. 5-wire LVDT cabling (Fig. 1(a)) or 3-wire variable reluctance transducer cabling (Fig. 1(c)) is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR.

7-wire LVDT cabling (Fig. 1(b)) or 5-wire variable reluctance transducer cabling (Fig. 1(d)) is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the transducer. NOTE: It is important that the distance "D" from each transducer to its sensing points be as short as possible (at least under 20 feet when 18-gage wire is used).

c. For each LVDT transducer connected to the 10A31-4, you should connect the "center wire" that joins both series-opposed secondary coils to the CABLE SHIELD at the transducer end, instead of bringing this line through a cable shield to the conditioner connector (as shown in Figs. 1(a) and 1(b)).
d. Note that there are special +SIGNAL and -SIGNAL connections for use with LONG-STROKE LVDT's (full-scale range of ±1 inch or greater). Thus, to allow for the larger input voltages produced by such a sensor, you would connect its +SIGNAL line to Pin 2, 4, 6, or 8 (instead of to Pin 1, 3, 5, or 7, respectively). Similarly, you would connect the -SIGNAL line to Pin B, D, F, or J (instead of to Pin A, C, E, or H, respectively).
e. When wiring a variable reluctance transducer to the 10A31-4, you must install a 10-kilohm "half-bridge completion" resistor between the -SIGNAL pin (A, C, E, or H) and each of the two SENSE lines, as shown in Figs. 1(c) and 1(d).

Table 3 Model 10A31-4 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	1	+SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
B	1	-SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
3	2	+SIGNAL
C	2	-SIGNAL
4	2	+SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
D	2	-SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
5	3	+SIGNAL
E	3	-SIGNAL
6	3	+SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
F	3	-SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
7	4	+SIGNAL
H	4	-SIGNAL
8	4	+SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
J	4	-SIGNAL (LONG-STROKE)
9	*	+EXCITATION
K	*	-EXCITATION
10	*	+SENSE
L	*	-SENSE

* This function is common to all four channels.

Fig. 1 Model 10A31-4 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Channel 1"] --> B["+ EXCITATION"]
    B --> C["Channel 2"]
    C --> D["+ EXCITATION"]
    D --> E["Channel 3"]
    E --> F["+ EXCITATION"]
    F --> G["Channel 4"]
    G --> H["SHIELD"]
    H --> I[""Long-Stroke" LVDT Input"]

    subgraph Channel 1
        J["PRi"] --> K["SEC 1"]
        L["SEC 2"] --> M["SIGNAL COMMON"]
        N["SEC 2"] --> O["SIGNAL"]
    end

    subgraph Channel 2
        P["PRi"] --> Q["SEC 1"]
        R["SEC 2"] --> S["SIGNAL COMMON"]
        T["SEC 2"] --> U["SIGNAL"]
    end

    subgraph Channel 3
        V["PRi"] --> W["SEC 1"]
        X["SEC 2"] --> Y["SIGNAL COMMON"]
        Z["SEC 2"] --> AA["SIGNAL"]
    end

    subgraph Channel 4
        AB["PRi"] --> AC["SEC 1"]
        AD["SEC 2"] --> AE["SIGNAL COMMON"]
        AF["SEC 2"] --> AG["SIGNAL"]
    end

    subgraph Conditioner Connector (No. 60322)
        AH["SHIELD"] --> AI["L-S Inp* 1"]
        AI --> AJ["B 2"]
        AJ --> AK["L-S Inp* 3"]
        AK --> AL["C 3"]
        AL --> AM["D 4"]
        AM --> AN["E 5"]
        AN --> AO["F 6"]
        AO --> AP["H 7"]
        AP --> AQ["J 8"]
        AQ --> AR["K 9"]
        AR --> AS["L 10 +SENSE"]
        AS --> AT["-SENSE"]
    end

    subgraph Figure_1(a) 5-Wire LVDT Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)
        AU["Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable), side of connector"] --> AV["Ground Lug"]
        AW["*Long-Stroke" LVDT Input"] --> AX["SHIELD"]
    end

graph TD
    A["Channel 1"] --> B["+ Excitation"]
    B --> C["Channel 2"]
    C --> D["+ Excitation"]
    D --> E["Channel 3"]
    E --> F["+ Excitation"]
    F --> G["Channel 4"]
    G --> H["Sensing Points"]
    H --> I["Controller Connector (No. 80322)"]

    subgraph Channel 1
        J["PRi"] --> K["SEC 1"]
        L["SEC 2"] --> M["SEC 1"]
        N["SEC 2"] --> O["SEC 2"]
        P["PRi"] --> Q["SEC 1"]
        R["SEC 2"] --> S["SEC 2"]
        T["PRi"] --> U["SEC 1"]
        V["SEC 2"] --> W["SEC 2"]
    end

    subgraph Channel 2
        X["PRi"] --> Y["SEC 1"]
        Z["SEC 2"] --> AA["SEC 2"]
        AB["SEC 2"] --> AC["SEC 2"]
        AD["PRi"] --> AE["SEC 1"]
        AF["SEC 2"] --> AG["SEC 2"]
        AH["PRi"] --> AI["SEC 1"]
        AJ["SEC 2"] --> AK["SEC 2"]
    end

    subgraph Channel 3
        AL["PRi"] --> AM["SEC 1"]
        AN["SEC 2"] --> AO["SEC 2"]
        AP["SEC 2"] --> AQ["SEC 2"]
        AR["PRi"] --> AS["SEC 1"]
        AT["SEC 2"] --> AU["SEC 2"]
        AV["SEC 2"] --> AW["SEC 2"]
    end

    subgraph Channel 4
        AX["PRi"] --> AY["SEC 1"]
        AZ["SEC 2"] --> BA["SEC 2"]
        BB["SEC 2"] --> BC["SEC 2"]
    end

    style Channel 1 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel 2 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel 3 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel 4 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

    note right of H: Sensing Points
    note left of H: -SENSE + SENSE
    note right of H: *Long-Stroke* LVDT Input
    note right of H: SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector
    note right of H: Ground Lug

10A31-4 QUAD LVDT CARD

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 1 + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 2 + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 3 + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 4 SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug + SENSE - SENSE Figure 1(c) 3-Wire Variable Reluctance Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

D + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 1 + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 2 + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 3 + EXCITATION + SIGNAL -EXCITATION Channel 4 Sensing Points -SENSE + SENSE SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) 10K A 1 10K B 2 C 3 10K D 4 E 5 10K F 6 H 7 10K J 8 K 9 L 10 Ground Lug Fig. 1(d) 5-Wire Variable Reluctance Transducer Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A31-4 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A31-4 channel "type" codes, see Table 2, above.

In System 10, a relatively linear Model 10A31-4 channel normally employs TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION.* See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique. Note, however, the following special procedure that applies to an LVDT-based Channel No. "x":

1. Make sure the channel has been properly "typed" and "located" (see Manual Section 1.G.1).
2. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and enter a command of

$$ \text { BEE } x = 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

This command sets an initial ZERO OFFSET ("b" term) of zero for Channel No. x.

1. Observing a "live" reading of the channel, mechanically adjust the fixture and physical position of the LVDT until the lowest reading occurs. This is the LVDT's "electrical null" point.

2. With the transducer still in "null" position, enter a command of

$$ Z R O \times [ C R ] $$

1. Displace the LVDT probe by a precisely known distance, preferably between 80% and 100% of the transducer's nominal full-scale rating.

2. Command

$$ F R C x = z [ C R ] $$

where “z” is the exact value of the displacement produced in Step 5, expressed in appropriate engineering units (the precision of the final measurement will match that of the entered “z” value).

1. Repeat Steps 4, 5, and 6, if necessary, until the LVDT's zero and span points coincide with the calibration block or micrometer reference being used.

MODEL 10A35

ENCODER

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

This single-channel, phase-encoded conditioner may be used with incremental encoder sensors whose outputs are quadratured to indicate “travel” and “direction of travel,” for measurement of relative linear or angular displacements over a very wide range of distances and precisions.

The 10A35 generates a count per 90° phase shift, with a maximum allowable count of ±32700 and a speed limitation of 50 kHz, maximum. To accommodate the largest number of transducers, this count may be predivided by any integer from 1 to 256, as explained in Section 3.a. The 10A35 allows run-time “zero indexing” (resetting) and restarting of a channel’s count reading by the operator or host computer. There are also input provisions for a user-supplied auxiliary external power supply from 9 to 15 V-DC, which would allow you to keep the count “alive” during system power shut-down.

NOTE: A System 10 data channel derived from a Model 10A35 always takes a channel "type" code of CA, and does not require calibration.

ADDITIONAL 10A35 SPECIFICATIONS

Input Signals: ZERO INDEX (RESET), PHASE 1 (SINE), and PHASE 2 (COSINE); each input is available as a "TTL INPUT" or a "LOW-LEVEL INPUT"

Excitation: Nominal 5 V-DC; 50 mA maximum

Accuracy: Based on transducer, ± 1 digit

Auxiliary Power Supply: 9 to 15 V-DC

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A35's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard cable connections—including connection of an optional "keep-alive" power supply—are given in Fig. 1, below. Table 1 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

The 10A35 takes three input signals: ZERO INDEX (RESET), PHASE 1 (SINE), and PHASE 2 (COSINE). Each input is available as a "TTL INPUT" or a "LOW-LEVEL INPUT." With internal pull-up less than 1 LSTTL load, TTL INPUTS (Pins 3, C, and 5) are for use with transducers with high output levels greater than 2.4 V-DC. With 15-kΩ impedance, LOW-LEVEL INPUTS (Pins 4, D, and E) are 200 mV minimum and 9 V maximum without damage, and are for use with transducers with high output levels of 200 mV-DC to 2.4 V-DC. Low transducer output is less than 0.8 V-DC for TTL, and less than 50 mV for LOW-LEVEL.

An excitation of +5 V-DC is provided by the 10A35, as shown in Fig. 1. If a higher excitation level is required, the user must provide his or her own external supply, in which case the 10A35's EXCITATION OUTPUT (Pin1) should NOT be connected to the sensor.

The 10A35 has input provisions for a user-supplied external power supply from 9 to 15 V-DC. This external ("Auxiliary") supply would allow you to keep the count "alive" during system power shut-down. The optional "keep-alive" supply should be connected to Pins A and 2, as shown in the figure.

ALSO NOTE: When Pin 5 (ZERO INDEX TTL INPUT) is not used, it must be tied to COMMON (Pin 2).

Table 1 Model 10A35 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector ConditionerPin LineNumber Function
1 EXCITATION OUTPUT (+5 V-DC)A AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY INPUT
2	C	O
B Not Committed
3	S	INE TTL INPUT
C COSINE TTL INPUT
4 SINE LOW-LEVEL INPUT
D COSINE LOW-LEVEL INPUT
5	ZERO INDEX TTL INPUT
E ZERO INDEX LOW-LEVEL INPUT
6-10	Not Committed
F-L Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A35 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["9 - 15 V-DC Auxiliary Power Supply"] --> B["EXCITATION (+5 V)"]
    B --> C["COSINE"]
    B --> D["SINE"]
    B --> E["ZERO INDEX"]
    B --> F["COMMON"]
    G["CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322)"] --> H["See Note on Pin 5"]
    H --> I["A 1"]
    H --> J["B 2"]
    H --> K["C 3"]
    H --> L["D 4"]
    H --> M["E 5"]
    H --> N["F 6"]
    H --> O["H 7"]
    H --> P["J 8"]
    H --> Q["K 9"]
    H --> R["L 10"]
    S["SHIELD"] --> T["Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector"]
    U["Ground Lug"] --> V["Common"]
    W["SINETTL"] --> X["SINE TIL"]
    W --> Y["SINE LOW-LEVEL"]

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

For initial configuration of the ANALOG INPUT CHANNEL dedicated to a specific Model 10A35 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. A 10A35 channel will always take a "type" code of CA.

COUNT PREDIVISION

To predivide the count represented by a 10A35-based Channel No. "x" by any integer from 1 through 256, you should apply the following RANGE (RNG) command:

$$ \mathrm{RNG} \times = 0 0 \mathrm{h} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

The term to the right of the equals sign consists of two zeros, followed by a two-character hexadecimal number ("h") from 00 through FF. The decimal equivalent of the hexadecimal number "h" is to be one less than the value of the integral divisor by which the count is to be predivided. Note that the system EEPROM SWITCH does NOT need to be ON for the above RNG command to work.

Thus, for example, a “full count” of ±32700 would call for a hexadecimal value of “00” for “h,” which will enter a divisor of (decimal) “1.” A divisor of, say, “100” would yield a full count of ±327, and would be entered by a value for “h” of hexadecimal “63” (equivalent to decimal “99”). See also the example under “Returning the 10A35 to 'RUN MODE'," below.

IMPORTANT: Unless an external power supply has been connected, you must use the RANGE (RNG) command following every system powerup, to reset the 10A35 and to return it to "RUN MODE," as explained in the following sections.

ZERO-INDEXING (RESETTING) THE 10A35

You will use the following form of the RANGE (RNG) command to "zero-index" a 10A35-based Channel No. "x" (that is, to reset its count to zero):

$$ R N G x = 8 0 h [ C R ] $$

Here, the term to the right of the equals sign consists of the numbers "8" and "0," followed by the desired divisor code "h" (explained above). Again, the system EEPROM SWITCH does NOT need to be ON for this command to work.

RETURNING THE 10A35 TO "RUN MODE"

The effect of the RNG x = 80h [CR] command (above) is to place the 10A35 in "RESET MODE." IT WILL REMAIN IN RESET MODE UNTIL APPLICATION OF A RANGE (RNG) COMMAND OF THE FORM

$$ R N G x = 0 0 h [ C R ] $$

Suppose, for example, that your Model 10A35 uses Channel No. 101, and that you have set it for a full count of ±3270 by a command of

$$ R N G 1 0 1 = 0 0 0 9 [ C R ] $$

(here, since your desired count divisor is "10," you will enter for "h" the hexadecimal equivalent of "10 minus 1," or "9"). To zero-index the 10A35 at any subsequent time, you need only command

RNG 101 = 8009 [CR]

To then restart the 10A35's count (from zero), you would again command

RNG 101 = 0009 [CR]

MODEL 10A40

FREQUENCY INPUT

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

This single-channel conditioner is for measurement of flow, rpm, and other phenomena that can be sensed by pulse transformer transducers with two-wire isolated windings (tachometer pickups, turbine flowmeters, etc.), transistor or logic-circuit drivers, "zero-velocity" (true digital output) sensors, and similar frequency-generating transducers.

The 10A40 accepts a wide range of wave shapes and voltage levels, either grounded or floating—though it is not recommended for measuring frequencies under 25 Hz without special modification. The “Smart Schmitt” input threshold automatically adjusts to accommodate signals from 10 mV to 200 V. Nominal ±5 V-DC excitation is supplied for use with a “zero-velocity” sensor.

Capacitive coupling of 0.1 or 10 F is provided for low-frequency inputs, to eliminate false triggering by signal noise and/or any positive or negative DC offset that exists for the frequency signal. A special trigger-level control guarantees reliable triggering when the input is at the low end of the voltage range.

The System 10 Central Processor controls frequency-range selection and applies an appropriately calculated scaling factor to each measurement, if desired, following initial entry of a special FREQUENCY CALIBRATION (FRQ) command (see Section 3.a, below). This convenient “calculated” calibration technique can be used when the manufacturer-supplied full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured) is known. A precise 2.097152-MHz crystal frequency reference ensures accuracy of all calibrations, whether “absolute,” “calculated” (via the FRQ command), or “two-point” (“dead-weight”).

ADDITIONAL 10A40 SPECIFICATIONS

Input:

Type: Any AC or unipolar pulse signal, grounded or floating, irrespective of waveform

Threshold Level: Accommodates signals from 100 mV to 200 V

Frequency Ranges: From 10% to 100% of 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000, or 32000 Hz; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” code assigned to a 10A40 data channel, see Table 1, below

Excitation: Nominal 10 (i.e., ±5) V-DC; ±50 mA, maximum

Measurement Characteristics (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±200 V operating and without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±50 V operating; ±100 V, without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: At 60 Hz: -120 dB; at 1 kHz: -60 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 400 kΩ; Common-Mode: 100 kΩ

(cont'd)

Offset: Initial: ±0.05% of full scale; vs.Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs.Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Ripple and Noise: Readings are within the stated accuracy from 10% to 100% of the frequency range in use

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 2 Hz; 60 dB down at 25 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 600 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 750 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 1 sec

Auxiliary Output: Filtered output available on mainframe wire-wrap pin

Table 1 10A40 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Channel Range Type Code

250 Hz 40

500 Hz 41

1000 Hz 42

2000 Hz 43

4000 Hz 44

8000 Hz 45

16000 Hz 46

32000 Hz 47

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

2.a STANDARD CABLING

The Model 10A40's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Fig. 1(a) shows recommended cabling for an intrinsically grounded transistor or logic-circuit driver; Fig. 1(b) for a pulse transformer transducer with two-wire isolated windings (tachometer, turbine flowmeter, etc.); and Fig. 1(c) for a "zero-velocity" (true digital output) sensor requiring 10-V excitation. Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Table 2 Model 10A40 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Pin Line
Number	Function
1	+EXCITATION (+5 V-DC)
A	-EXCITATION (-5 V-DC)
2	POWER COMMON
B	Not Committed
3	+SIGNAL
C	-SIGNAL
4,D	Not Committed
5	POWER COMMON
E	0.1-μF COUPLING
6	Not Committed
F	10-μF COUPLING
7-10	Not Committed
H-L	Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A40 Transducer Cabling

+SIGNAL Frequency Source - -SIGNAL 10K Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) See Note on Pull-Up Resistor See Fig. 2 Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug

Fig. 1(a) Cabling to Grounded Frequency Sources

+SIGNAL Frequency Source - -SIGNAL See Note on Pull-Up Resistor 10K CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) POWER COMMON A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 See Fig. 2 Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug ling to

Fig. 1(b) Cabling to Ungrounded Frequency Sources

Zero- Velocity Sensor -EXCITATION* + SIGNAL + EXCITATION See Note on Pull-Up Resistor 10K CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) POWER COMMON A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug ing to Sensors

Fig. 1(c) Cabling to Zero-Velocity Sensors

2.b SPECIAL CABLING

Fig. 2 summarizes three kinds of special 10A40 connections you might need to establish:

UNGROUNDED FREQUENCY SOURCE

For a floating-source input and input from a zero-velocity sensor, where the -SIGNAL is not grounded at the frequency source, the -SIGNAL pin (Pin C) should be tied directly to POWER COMMON (Pin 2 or 5). This connection is also shown in Figs. 1(b) and 1(c), above.

ELIMINATION OF DC OFFSET

The 10A40's input channel is supplied with two capacitive-coupled inputs (Pins E and F of the rear I/O Connector provide 0.1- and 10-microfarad capacitance, respectively). These special inputs may be used with either floating or grounded configurations; they would not normally be used with zero-velocity sensors requiring 10-V excitation (see Fig. 1(c)).

Fig. 2 shows how the larger (10- F) capacitive coupling can be used to eliminate any positive or negative DC offset that exists for a 10A40 channel's frequency signal. Simply connect the +SIGNAL line from the frequency source to the 10- F pin (Pin F), instead of to the normal +SIGNAL pin (3). The capacitor is here in series with the +SIGNAL input and allows only AC to pass.

SUPPRESSION OF HIGH-FREQUENCY NOISE IN LOW-FREQUENCY INPUT

False triggering can sometimes occur, especially at the low-frequency input range, because of stray pickup of frequencies outside the common-mode range. Capacitive coupling of the frequency input to ground can in such cases serve to suppress unwanted signal noise. This noise suppression is always recommended when using a MAGNETIC PICKUP as the frequency source.

Thus, if you find your frequency reading to be unacceptably unstable or "noisy," you should tie the 0.1- F pin (Pin E) to -SIGNAL (Pin C), while maintaining the normal +SIGNAL connection to Pin 3.

2.c Pull-Up RESISTOR

When used with an open-collector type sensor, the 10A40 requires a pull-up resistor (typically 10 k ) between the +SIGNAL and the +5 V-DC EXCITATION (Pin 1).

Tie Pin C to Pin E for suppression of high-frequency noise (if source is a magnetic pickup) + SIGNAL -SIGNAL C 3 D 4 [ 0.1 µF ] E 5 [ 10 µF ] F 6 H 7 Tie Pin C to Pin 5 if -SIGNAL is not grounded at the frequency source Connect + SIGNAL to Pin F to eliminate DC offset Fig. 2 Special 10A40 I/O Connections

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of the ANALOG INPUT CHANNEL dedicated to a specific Model 10A40 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A40 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

You can use three calibration methods with the Model 10A40:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A40 is being used to measure frequency itself (in Hz). In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A40-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A40-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 1, above. If, for example, a frequency-measuring 10A40 channel is “typed” as “43” (corresponding to a full scale of 2000 Hz) and you want the channel to read tenths of a hertz, you would enter an “m” value of “2000.0.”

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A40-based channel is limited to ±0.05% of full scale.

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

This is generally the most convenient means of calibrating a 10A40 channel, when the full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured) is accurately known.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A40-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following FREQUENCY CALIBRATION (FRQ) command:

$$ \text { FRQ } x = i, u [ \text { CR } ] $$

For “i,” enter the manufacturer-supplied full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured), in hertz. For “u,” enter the corresponding value of the measured phenomenon, expressed in the desired engineering units. You need not zero the channel in this case. The FRO command will only work if Channel No. x has been assigned the proper “type” code (see Table 1).

Note that a channel calibrated by the FRQ command will report measurement data to a precision matching that of the entered "u" value. If, for example, you're measuring "liters per minute," and enter a "u" of "750," then all subsequent channel readings will be rounded to the nearest liter per minute. If the entry is "750.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a liter per minute.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A40 channel if the full-scale rating of the frequency source is unknown, and if the channel's received frequency input is an analog of another parameter—such as Gallons Per Minute—which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures frequency itself (beyond the 10A40 card's inherent limit of ± 0.05% of full scale). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

3.b TRIGGER-LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Regardless of the method chosen, full calibration of a Model 10A40 data channel requires the following procedure, which ensures reliable triggering when the input is at the low end of the frequency range.

IMPORTANT: IF YOU ARE USING TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION, this adjustment must precede calibration of the 10A40 channel. If ABSOLUTE or CALCULATED CALIBRATION is used, it should follow application of the EMM or FRQ command (respectively).

1. Provide "live" display of the 10A40 channel's data reading.
2. Remove the front bezel for the A-card rack containing the 10A40 card.
3. Without removing the 10A40 card from its slot, locate the TRIGGER-LEVEL CONTROL, which is accessible from the front of the card (see Fig. 3).
4. Using a small insulated screwdriver, turn the screw of the TRIGGER-LEVEL CONTROL fully clockwise.

Fig. 3 10A40 Trigger-Level Control

Trigger-Level Control Control

1. Using a connected transducer as frequency source, apply an input of approximately 10% of the full-scale range for which the 10A40 has been configured.
2. Turn the TRIGGER-LEVEL CONTROL counterclockwise until the 10A40's data reading drops to zero.
3. Turn the TRIGGER-LEVEL CONTROL clockwise two full turns.

10A40 FREQUENCY CARD

MODEL 10A41-2C

DUAL FREQUENCY INPUT CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Employing a 1-MHz crystal reference, the two-channel Model 10A41-2C is for measurement of flow, rpm, and other phenomena that can be sensed by pulse transformer transducers with two-wire isolated windings (tachometer pickups, turbine flowmeters, etc.), transistor or logic-circuit drivers, "zero-velocity" (true digital output) sensors, and similar frequency-generating transducers.

The 10A41-2C accepts a wide range of wave shapes and voltage levels, either grounded or floating—though it is not recommended for measuring frequencies under 25 Hz without special modification. The “Smart Schmitt” threshold level for each input channel may be individually selected via internal jumper connections, depending on the expected peak voltage input. This ensures reliable triggering when the input is at the low end of the voltage range. All ranges are protected against an overload of up to 200 V. Nominal ±5 V-DC excitation is supplied for use with a “zero-velocity” sensor.

Capacitive coupling of 0.1 or 22 F is provided for low-frequency inputs, to eliminate false triggering by signal noise and/or any positive or negative DC offset that exists for the frequency signal.

One of four separate filter bandwidths is available for each input channel: 1.25 Hz; 2.5 Hz; 5 Hz; or 12.8 Hz. Per-channel bandwidth is selectable via internal jumpers. Each channel is normally preset for the 1.25-Hz bandwidth, which, while yielding the slowest response, also provides the widest dynamic range for high-frequency inputs (2% to 100% of full scale for the 1-kHz and 2-kHz ranges; 1% to 100% of full scale for ranges above 2 kHz). For faster response, you may select one of the higher filter bandwidths (see Table 1, below).

The System 10 Central Processor controls frequency-range selection and applies an appropriately calculated scaling factor to each measurement, if desired, following initial entry of a special FREQUENCY CALIBRATION (FRQ) command (see Section 3.c, below). This convenient “calculated” calibration technique can be used for a 10A41-2C data channel when the manufacturer-supplied full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured) is known. The 1-MHz crystal frequency reference ensures accuracy of all calibrations, whether “absolute,” “calculated” (via the FRQ command), or “two-point” (“dead-weight”).

ADDITIONAL 10A41-2C SPECIFICATIONS

Input:

Type: Any AC or unipolar pulse signal, grounded or floating, irrespective of waveform

Threshold Level: Accommodates signals from 100 mV to 200 V

(cont'd)

Frequency Ranges: From 10% to 100% of 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000, or 32000 Hz; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A41-2C data channels, see Table 2, below

Excitation: Nominal 10 (i.e., ±5) V-DC; ±50 mA, maximum

Measurement Characteristics (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±200 V operating and without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±50 V operating; ±100 V, without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: At 60 Hz and 1 kHz: -60 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 400 kΩ; Common-Mode: 100 kΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.05% of full scale; vs.Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs.Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Ripple and Noise: Readings are within the stated accuracy from 10% to 100% of the frequency range in use

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; see Table 1, below

Auxiliary Output: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 Model 10A41-2C Analog Filter Characteristics
Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output)...
10A41-2C Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of Bandwidth at -3 dB at -52 dB final value final value

No. 1 1.25 Hz 12.5 Hz 770 msec 1100 msec
No. 2 2.5 Hz	25 Hz	375 msec	580 msec
No. 3	5 Hz 50 Hz	172 msec	275 msec
No. 4 12.8 Hz	128 Hz	55 msec	100 msec

Table 2 10A41-2C "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Channel
Range	Type Code
250 Hz	40
500 Hz	41
1000 Hz	42
2000 Hz	43
4000 Hz	44
8000 Hz	45
16000 Hz	46
32000 Hz	47

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

2.a STANDARD CABLING

The Model 10A41-2C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Fig. 1(a) shows recommended cabling for an intrinsically grounded transistor or logic-circuit driver; Fig. 1(b) for a pulse transformer transducer with two-wire isolated windings (tachometer, turbine flowmeter, etc.); and Fig. 1(c) for a "zero-velocity" (true digital output) sensor requiring 10-V excitation. Table 3 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Fig. 1 Model 10A41-2C Transducer Cabling

+SIGNAL Channel 1 Frequency Source - -SIGNAL +SIGNAL Frequency Source - -SIGNAL CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) 10K See Note on Pull-Up Resistor 10K See Note on Pull-Up Resistor A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 See Fig. 2 See Fig. 2 Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug

Fig. 1(a) Cabling to Grounded Frequency Sources

+SIGNAL Channel 1 Frequency Source - -SIGNAL +SIGNAL Channel 2 Frequency Source - -SIGNAL CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) 10K See Note on Pull-Up Resistor 10K See Note on Pull-Up Resistor PWR. COMMON A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 PWR. COMMON Ground Lug Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD

Fig. 1(b) Cabling to Ungrounded Frequency Sources

ConditionER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) -EXCITATION* + SIGNAL + EXCITATION Channel 1 See Note on Pull-Up Resistor 10K A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 PWR. COMMON -EXCITATION* + SIGNAL + EXCITATION Channel 2 See Note on Pull-Up Resistor 10K E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 PWR. COMMON * This is the sensor's "COMMON" line. Cabling to oocity Sensors SHIELD Ground Lug

Fig. 1(c) Cabling to Zero-Velocity Sensors

Table 3 Model 10A41-2C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Pin Number	Conditioner Channel Number	Conditioner Line Function
1	1	+EXCITATION (+5 V-DC)
A	1	-EXCITATION (-5 V-DC)
2	1	0.1-μF COUPLING
B	1	22-μF COUPLING
3	1	+SIGNAL
C	1	-SIGNAL
4,D	1	Not Committed
5	1	POWER COMMON
E	1	Not Committed
6	2	+EXCITATION (+5 V-DC)
F	2	-EXCITATION (-5 V-DC)
7	2	0.1-μF COUPLING
H	2	22-μF COUPLING
8	1	+SIGNAL
J	1	-SIGNAL
9,K	1	Not Committed
10	1	POWER COMMON
L	1	Not Committed

2.b SPECIAL CABLING

Fig. 2 summarizes three kinds of special 10A41-2C connections you might need to establish:

UNGROUNDED FREQUENCY SOURCE

For floating-source inputs and inputs from zero-velocity sensors, where the -SIGNAL is not grounded at the frequency source, the -SIGNAL pin (Pin C for Chn. 1; Pin J for Chn. 2) should be tied directly to POWER COMMON (Pin 5 or 10). This connection is also shown in Figs. 1(b) and 1(c), above.

ELIMINATION OF DC OFFSET

Each 10A41-2C input channel is supplied with two capacitive-coupled inputs (Pins B and H of the rear I/O Connector provide 22-microfarad capacitance for Channels 1 and 2, respectively; Pins 2 and 7 provide 0.1-microfarad capacitance). These special inputs may be used with either floating or grounded configurations; they would not normally be used with zero-velocity sensors requiring 10-V excitation (see Fig. 1(c)).

Fig. 2 shows how the larger (22- F) capacitive coupling can be used to eliminate any positive or negative DC offset that exists for a 10A41-2C channel's frequency signal. Simply connect the +SIGNAL line from the frequency source to the corresponding 22- F pin (Pin B or H), instead of to the normal +SIGNAL pin (3 or 8). The capacitor is here in series with the +SIGNAL input and allows only AC to pass.

SUPPRESSION OF HIGH-FREQUENCY NOISE IN LOW-FREQUENCY INPUT

False triggering can sometimes occur, especially at the low-frequency input range, because of stray pickup of frequencies outside the common-mode range. Capacitive coupling of the frequency input to ground can in such cases serve to suppress unwanted signal noise. This noise suppression is always recommended when using a MAGNETIC PICKUP as the frequency source.

Thus, if you find a channel's frequency reading to be unacceptably unstable or "noisy," you should tie that channel's -SIGNAL (Pin C or J) to the corresponding 0.1-μF pin (Pin 2 or 7), while maintaining the normal +SIGNAL connection (Pin 3 or 8).

2.c Pull-Up RESISTOR

When used with an open-collector type sensor, a 10A41-2C channel requires a pull-up resistor (typically 10 kΩ) between the +SIGNAL and the corresponding +5 V-DC EXCI-TATION (Pin 1 or 6).

Connect + SIGNAL to Pin B II (or H) to eliminate DC offset Tie Pin C (or J) to Pin 2 (or 7) for suppression of high-frequency noise (if source is a magnetic pickup) + SIGNAL B (Chn. 1) or H (Chn. 2) [22 µF] 2 (Chn. 1) or 7 (Chn. 2) [0.1 µF] -SIGNAL Tie Pin C (or J) to Pin 5 (or 10) if -SIGNAL is not grounded at the frequency source 5 (Chn. 1) or 10 (Chn. 2) [PWR. COM.] Fig. 2 Special 10A41-2C I/O Connections

Fig. 3 Model 10A41-2C Input Voltage Jumper Pins
Input Voltage Range:

10-200 V 2.5-50 V 0.5-10 V 0.1-2 V 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Rear I/O Connector Channel 1 Channel 2 Side 2

3 | SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SELECTING INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE

Perform the following steps to select the proper peak voltage input range for each 10A41-2C channel. At the same time, you will be setting the trigger level for that channel, thereby ensuring reliable triggering when the input is at the low end of the voltage range. EACH 10A41-2C CHANNEL IS PRESET AT THE FACTORY FOR AN INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE OF 2.5 - 50 V. If you require a different range, you should

1. Remove the 10A41-2C card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the 10A41-2C is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Locate the INPUT VOLTAGE JUMPER PINS shown in Fig. 3, above. One "mini-jumper" is provided for each 10A41-2C channel, for interconnecting any two adjacent jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 3 to set the desired voltage range for that channel. NOTE THAT ALL RANGES ARE PROTECTED AGAINST AN OVERLOAD OF UP TO 200 V.
4. Keep out the 10A41-2C card for the filter selection procedure, below.

3.b SELECTING FILTER BANDWIDTH

Every 10A41-2C card is preset, at the factory, for the lowest filter bandwidth (1.25 Hz). While yielding the slowest response, this setting also provides the widest dynamic range. If a faster response is more important than dynamic range, you may select one of three higher bandwidth values (2.5 Hz, 5 Hz, or 12.8 Hz) for a 10A41-2C's Channel No. "x," as follows:

1. Make sure Channel No. x has been properly "typed" and "located" (see Manual Section 1.G.1).

2. Locate the FILTER BANDWIDTH JUMPER PINS on the 10A41-2C board (see Fig. 4, below). One "minijumper" is provided for each channel, for interconnecting any two adjacent jumper pins.

3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 4 to set the desired filter bandwidth for that channel.

4. Reinsert the 10A41-2C in its mainframe slot.
5. TURN OFF THE SYSTEM MAINFRAME. Short both the +SIGNAL and -SIGNAL pins for Channel No. x to POWER COMMON (Pin 5 or 10).
6. Reactivate mainframe power.
7. You must now "zero" the channel. Turn ON the EEPROM SWITCH and enter a command of

ZRO x [CR]

1. Turn OFF the system mainframe once more, reconnect the +SIGNAL and -SIGNAL pins to the channel's normal frequency source (see cabling, above), and reactivate mainframe power.

IMPORTANT: WHENEVER YOU CHANGE THE FILTER BANDWIDTH FOR A 10A41-2C CHANNEL, YOU MUST PERFORM STEPS 5 THROUGH 8, ABOVE.

Filter Bandwidth: 2.5 Hz 1.25 Hz 5 Hz 12.8 Hz Fig. 4 Model 10A41-2C Filter Bandwidth Jumper Pins 1 2 3 4 5 Side 2 Channel 1 Channel 2

3.c CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A41-2C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A41-2C channel "type" codes, see Table 2, above.

You can use three calibration methods with the Model 10A41-2C:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A41-2C is being used to measure frequency itself (in Hz). In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A41-2C-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A41-2C-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

EMM x = m [CR]

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 2, above. If, for example, a frequency-measuring 10A41-2C channel is “typed” as “43” (corresponding to a full scale of 2000 Hz) and you want the channel to read tenths of a hertz, you would enter an “m” value of “2000.0.”

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A41-2C-based channel is limited to ±0.05% of full scale.

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

This is generally the most convenient means of calibrating a 10A41-2C channel, when the full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured) is accurately known.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A41-2C-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following FREQUENCY CALIBRATION (FRQ) command:

FRQ x = i, u [CR]

For “i,” enter the manufacturer-supplied full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured), in hertz. For “u,” enter the corresponding value of the measured phenomenon, expressed in the desired engineering units. You need not zero the channel in this case. The FRO command will only work if Channel No. x has been assigned the proper “type” code (see Table 2).

Note that a channel calibrated by the FRQ command will report measurement data to a precision matching that of the entered "u" value. If, for example, you're measuring "liters per minute," and enter a "u" of "750," then all subsequent channel readings will be rounded to the nearest liter per minute. If the entry is "750.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a liter per minute.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A41-2C channel if the full-scale rating of the frequency source is unknown, and if the channel's received frequency input is an analog of another parameter—such as Gallons Per Minute—which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures frequency itself (beyond the 10A41-2C card's inherent limit of ± 0.05% of full scale). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

MODEL 10A43

DWELL ANGLE

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

This signal conditioner is dedicated to the monitoring of internal combustion engines. Specifically, it measures dwell angle and RPM for any engine employing an ignition system with distributor points. The engine can contain any standard number of cylinders, operating at any standard number of cycles. The 10A43's single true-differential input is connected across the distributor points, as shown in Fig. 1.

From the measured frequency of point closure, the 10A43 derives two linearized data "Subchannels," with corresponding analog outputs to wire-wrap pins:

• Subchannel No. 1: Dwell angle of the distributor cam shaft—i.e., the fraction of the total rotational time during which points are closed, expressed as degrees of angle
  • Subchannel No. 2: Engine RPM

As explained in Section 3.a, each subchannel is calibrated by entering an appropriate System 10 SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command. For the “type” codes assigned to 10A43 subchannels, see Table 1, below.*

ADDITIONAL 10A43 SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement Characteristics (applying to both channels, unless otherwise indicated):

Normal-Mode Range: ±15 V operating; ±1000 V spike or ±30 V continuous without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±15 V operating; ±1000 V spike or ±30 V continuous without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -40 dB; at 60 Hz: -40 dB; at 1 kHz: -30 dB; at 3 kHz: -20 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 20 kΩ; Common-Mode: 7.5 kΩ

Offset (Dwell Angle Channel): Initial: ±0.15% of full scale; vs.Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs.Time: ±20 ppm/month

Offset (RPM Channel): Initial: ±0.05% of full scale; vs.Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs.Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy (Dwell Angle Channel): ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration**

Gain Accuracy (RPM Channel): ±0.02% of full scale

(cont'd)

* As shown in Table 1, the "type" code assigned to the RPM Subchannel (No. 2) will depend on the maximum expected RPM as a function of the engine's Number of Cycles divided by its Number of Cylinders.
** Initial (uncalibrated) inaccuracy may be as great as ±0.15% of full scale. Maximum error that could occur upon replacement of a Model 10A43 not followed by calibration is ±0.3% of full scale.

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 1.5 Hz; 60 dB down at 60 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 600 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 900 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 1 sec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A43 "Type" Codes

Channel Type Code

Dwell Angle Channel 40

Engine RPM Channel:

Maximum Expected RPM* = K x 7500 40

Maximum Expected RPM* = K x 15000 41

Maximum Expected RPM* = K x 30000 42

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A43's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Fig. 1 shows how the +SIGNAL and -SIGNAL pins are to be wired to the engine. Connect the +SIGNAL line (from Pin 3) directly to the "most negative" terminal of the engine's coil (i.e., the terminal which is connected to the condenser, not to the battery). Connect the -SIGNAL line (from Pin C) either to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery or directly to the vehicle chassis (GROUND).

To DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR IGNITION SWITCH COIL CONDENSER POINTS BATTERY CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + SIGNAL -SIGNAL A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Connector pins shown as signee from rear (cable) Ground Lug

Fig. 1 Model 10A43 Transducer Cabling

* With allowable overrange of 20% of full scale. Here, K = (No. of Cycles) / (No. of Cylinders).

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A43 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A43 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

Each 10A43 subchannel is calibrated by entering an appropriate SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command, after first turning ON the system EEPROM SWITCH:

1. For the DWELL ANGLE SUBCHANNEL, enter a command of

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where “x” is the number of the system data channel that has been “located” to the 10A43's Subchannel No. 1, and “m” is a numeric value determined solely by the characteristics of the engine, as follows:

$$ m = (9 0. 0 \times \text { No. of Cycles }) / (\text { No. of Cylinders }) $$

1. For the RPM SUBCHANNEL, enter the same EMM command, where "x" is now the number of the channel that has been "located" to the 10A43's Subchannel No. 2, and where the value "m" is at least 80% of the maximum expected RPM to be measured.

MODEL 10A45

SIMMONDS SHAFT TORQUE SENSOR CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A45 has been specially designed to receive, condition, and process the TORQUE, REFERENCE TORQUE, and THERMISTOR signals generated by a Simmonds Precision Model T6 Shaft Torque Sensor operating from 30 to 32000 Hz.* Using a phase displacement technique, this sensor has proven very successful in the accurate measurement of shaft torque, speed, and temperature developed by jet and other high-power engines—even in the presence of phase modulation produced by differential radial displacement of the shaft assembly and of high torsional vibration caused by radial runout, erratic loading, etc.

Connected to the Simmonds Shaft Torque Sensor via 6- or 8-wire shielded cable, the 10A45 provides three linearized "Subchannels," with corresponding analog outputs to wire-wrap pins:

• Subchannel No. 1: SHAFT TORQUE
• Subchannel No. 2: SHAFT SPEED in RPM
• Subchannel No. 3: SHAFT TEMPERATURE—this data is necessary for accurate compensation of the torsional modulus of the shaft material.

By application of a simple System 10 CALCULATE (CLC) command on the torque and RPM channels, horsepower indication is also easily obtained (see Section 3.b, below).

ADDITIONAL 10A45 SPECIFICATIONS

Input Signals: TORQUE SIGNAL, TORQUE REFERENCE, and THERMISTOR SIGNAL from Simmonds Precision Model T6 Shaft Torque Sensor, operating from 30 to 32000 Hz ^* ; all analog input channels derived from a Model 10A45 are to be “typed” as “55” (see Section 3.a)

Thermistor Excitation: 0.5 V-DC

Measurement Characteristics (Torque and RPM Channels):

Normal-Mode Range: ±1.4 V operating; ±150 V without instrument damage

Input Impedance: 100 kΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.04% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration**

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

(cont'd)

* Under special conditions, it may also be used with certain similar transducers. Contact the factory for more information.

** Initial (uncalibrated) inaccuracy may be as great as ±0.05% of full scale. Maximum error that could occur upon replacement of a Model 10A45 not followed by calibration is ±0.1% of full scale.

Measurement Characteristics (Temperature Channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±0.5 V operating; ±15 V without instrument damage

Input Impedance: 1 kΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.05% of full scale; vs.Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs.Time: ±50 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±100 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±100 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 60 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 200 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 250 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A45's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 1 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector. With regard to 10A45 cabling, please note the following:

a. The 6-wire cabling shown in Fig. 1(a) is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the THERMISTOR EXCITATION and THERMISTOR SIGNAL lines (Pin A and Pin 2, respectively) are tied to the corresponding SENSE lines at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (Pin B and Pin 1, respectively).

b. The 8-wire cabling shown in Fig. 1(b) is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer. In this case, the THERMISTOR EXCITATION and THERMISTOR SIGNAL lines are tied to the corresponding SENSE lines at the transducer.

Table 1 Model 10A45 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector ConditionerPin LineNumber Function
1	T	H	ERMISTOR SIGNAL SENSE
A	T	H	ERMISTOR EXCITATION (+0.5 V-DC)
2	T		ERMISTOR SIGNA
B	THERMISTOR EXCITATION SENSE
3	TORQUE SIGNAL
C	TORQUE REFERENCE SIGNAL
4,D,5	Not Committed
E	SIGNAL COMMON
6-10, F-J	Not Committed
K	SIGNAL COMMON
L	Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A45 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["TORQUE GEAR"] --> B["TORQUE REFERENCE GEAR"]
    B --> C["TORQUE REFERENCE SIGNAL"]
    C --> D["THERMISTOR SENSAL"]
    D --> E["THERMISTOR EXCITATION"]
    E --> F["TORQUE SIGNAL"]
    F --> G["SIGNAL COMMON"]
    G --> H["CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322)"]
    H --> I["THERMISTOR EXCITATION SENSE"]
    I --> J["SHIELD"]
    J --> K["Connector pins shown as viewed for each cable"]
    J --> L["Ground Lug"]
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Fig. 1(a) 6-Wire Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

graph TD
    A["TORQUE GEAR"] --> B["TORQUE REFERENCE GEAR"]
    B --> C["TORQUE REFERENCE SIGNAL"]
    C --> D["THERMISTOR SIGNAL"]
    D --> E["THERM. SIGNAL SENSE"]
    E --> F["THERMISTOR EXCITATION"]
    F --> G["THERM. EXCITATION SENSE"]
    G --> H["TORQUE SIGNAL"]
    H --> I["SIGNAL COMMON"]
    I --> J["CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322)"]
    J --> K["SHIELD"]
    K --> L["Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector"]
    L --> M["Ground Lug"]
    style K fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Fig. 1(b) 8-Wire Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A45 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. All analog input channels derived from a Model 10A45 must be given a channel "type" code of 55 ("raw" millivolt signal).

The 10A45's SHAFT TORQUE SUBCHANNEL (No. 1) and SHAFT SPEED SUBCHANNEL (No. 2) both employ TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) calibration, using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for these commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for general instructions on this conventional "zero and span" technique.

The 10A45's SHAFT TEMPERATURE SUBCHANNEL (No. 3) employs CPU-BASED ABSOLUTE calibration (described in Manual Section 1.G.3.a), which means that normally NO calibration need be performed by the user, once the channel has been properly configured.

3.b HORSEPOWER CALCULATION

If system Channel No. "y" has been "located" to the 10A45's SHAFT TORQUE SUBCHANNEL (No. 1), and Channel No. "z" to the SHAFT SPEED SUBCHANNEL (No. 2), then a system "CALCULATE PSEUDOCHANNEL No. x" can be easily set up to monitor and/or display the resultant horsepower. Assuming that Channel No. y is currently reading footpounds, you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and command

$$ \mathrm{CLC} \mathrm{x} = (\mathrm{CHN} \mathrm{y}) (\mathrm{CHN} \mathrm{z}) / 5 2 5 2 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

If torque is being measured in newton-meters, the divisor would be "7121."

MODEL 10A48

MODULATED CARRIER FLOW CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Supplying a 36-kHz modulated carrier signal for excitation, the single-channel Model 10A48 is designed to condition the output of a reluctance-pickup turbine flow-meter operating in the range of 15 to 2200 Hz.* The use of AC excitation eliminates drag on the flowmeter impeller, which at low flow rates can cause significant error.

The 10A48 yields two linearized “subchannels,” with corresponding analog outputs to wire-wrap pins:

• Subchannel No. 1: VOLUMETRIC RATE OF FLOW
• Subchannel No. 2: a special TRANSDUCER ALIGNMENT VALUE which will be used to match the conditioner to a particular type of flowmeter (see Section 3.a, below).

Through appropriate scaling, you can express the flow-rate data in terms of any desired unit (e.g., cubic feet per minute, gallons per hour, grams per second, etc.).

In addition, the 10A48 issues a conditioned pulse-train TOTALIZER OUTPUT both from its rear I/O Connector and from a wire-wrap pin. This output ( ±8.5 V at 0 to 1800 Hz) is precisely proportional to the measured rate of flow. By connecting this pulse signal as input to a Model 10ACT01 Counter/Timer Card or Model 10ACC-4 Four-Channel Totalizer Card, you can thereby count (or “totalize”) the number of flowmeter revolutions that have occurred over a given period of time. From this data, along with the calibration data supplied with the flowmeter itself and the System 10 CALCULATE (CLC) command, you can obtain a temperature-corrected mass-flow reading for that period. Use of the totalizer output is discussed in Section 3.c, below.

Calibration of the 10A48 involves application of the System 10 SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command, following adjustment of an internal phase-correction potentiometer based on the special “transducer alignment” subchannel (see Sections 3.a and 3.b).

ADDITIONAL 10A48 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types and Ranges: Any reluctance-pickup turbine flowmeter producing from 15 to 2200 pulses per second, irrespective of waveform; for the System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to 10A48 data channels, see Table 1, below

Excitation: Varies with flowmeter; approximately 1 V-AC, typically, at 36 kHz

Measurement Characteristics:

Normal-Mode Range: ±2.5 V operating; ±12 V without instrument damage Input Impedance: 820 kΩ

(cont'd)

Offset: Initial: ±0.02% of full scale; vs.Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs.Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 2 Hz; 60 dB down at 25 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 600 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 750 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 1 sec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A48 "Type" Codes

Channel

Type Code

Flow Channel 40

Alignment Channel 55

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A48's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard cabling is shown in Fig. 1, below; standard pin assignments for the I/O connector are given in Table 2.

Fig. 1 Model 10A48 Transducer Cabling

EXCITATION SIGNAL COMMON CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug TOTALIZER OUTPUT* To Model 10ACT01 or Model 10ACC-4 Input * Also available on SLOT CONNECTOR Pin No. 42

Table 2 Model 10A48 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner

Pin Line

Number Function

1 EXCITATION (approx. 1 V-AC)

2,5 SIGNAL COMMON

[Non-Text]

T

OTALIZER OUTPUT

3, 6-10 Not Committed

A-L Not Committed

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a TRANSDUCER ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

1. With the proper transducer connections in place, select an unused system Channel No. "x" to read the 10A48's "ALIGNMENT" subchannel (No. 2). Turn ON the system EEPROM Switch and configure Channel No. x as follows:
   a. Assign a "TYPE" code of "55" to Channel No. x by commanding
   b. "Locate" Channel No. x to the 10A48 card's Subchannel No. 2, via the LOCATE (LCT) command (see Manual Section 1.G.1).
   c. Assign a SCALING FACTOR code of "10000" to Channel No. x by commanding
   d. Assign a ZERO OFFSET of "0" to Channel No. x by commanding
   e. Assign a digital FILTER constant of "3" to Channel No. x by commanding
2. Provide a "live" display of Channel No. x.
3. Remove the front bezel for the A-card rack containing the 10A48 card.
4. Without removing the 10A48 card from its slot, locate the two TRANSDUCER ALIGNMENT POTENTIOMETER CONTROLS, which are accessible from the front of the card.
5. Using a small insulated screwdriver, turn the screw of the upper control fully clockwise.
6. Then adjust the lower control until the displayed reading of Channel No. x attains a maximum positive value.
7. Now turn the upper control counterclockwise until you obtain a reading of 120 ± 5 .
8. Readjust the lower control to again obtain a maximum positive reading.
9. Readjust the upper control to obtain a reading of 120.
10. Continue to readjust the lower and upper controls in this fashion until a maximum reading of 120 ± 5 is obtained.

$$ \text { TYP } x = 5 5 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

$$ \mathrm{EMM} \times = 1 0 0 0 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

$$ \mathbf {B E E} \mathbf {x} = 0 [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ F I L x = 3 [ C R ] $$

After this initial setting, there is no further need to adjust the potentiometer controls unless a different type of flowmeter or a different cable length is to be used with the 10A48.

3.b CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of the ANALOG INPUT CHANNEL dedicated to a Model 10A48 card's RATE-OF-FLOW subchannel (No. 1), see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. This channel must be assigned a "type" code of 40.

To calibrate the Model 10A48's RATE-OF-FLOW subchannel (No. 1), you should turn ON the system EEPROM Switch and apply a SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command of

$$ E M M x = i [ C R ] $$

where “x” is the number of the system data channel assigned to the 10A48's Sub-channel No. 1 and “i” is the actual flow rate at 2000 Hz, expressed in the desired engineering units. Note that the FREQUENCY CALIBRATION (FRQ) command will NOT produce correct calibration for the 10A48.

3.c USE OF TOTALIZER OUTPUT TO OBTAIN A TOTAL VOLUME OR TOTAL MASS READING

As mentioned in Section 1, above, the 10A48's pulse-train TOTALIZER OUTPUT is precisely proportional to the measured rate of flow, and is issued both from the 10A48's rear I/O Connector (Pin 4) and from a wire-wrap pin on the mainframe's Analog Motherboard that connects to Pin 42 of the 10A48's Slot Connector.

By connecting this signal to a Model 10ACT01 Counter/Timer Card or to a Model 10ACC-4 Totalizer Card, you can count the number of flowmeter "pulses" that have occurred over a given period of time. From this data, along with the calibration data supplied with the flowmeter itself, you can obtain a total volume or total mass reading for that period, in any desired engineering units.

1. Make sure the system EEPROM Switch is OFF, and turn OFF the System 10 mainframe.
2. Remove the 10A48 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B.
3. Locate the solder pads labelled "TOTAL" on the bottom (non-component) side of the 10A48 board.
4. To make the TOTALIZER OUTPUT available both at Pin 4 of the rear I/O Connector and at Pin 42 of the Slot Connector, apply a drop of solder to bridge the two pads.
5. Reinsert the 10A48 card in its mainframe slot.
6. Connect the TOTALIZER OUTPUT to the Model 10ACT01 or 10ACC-4 (for pin connections, see the respective section of the System 10 Guidebook).

7. The 10ACT01 or 10ACC-4 Channel No. "y" which is to read the TOTALIZER OUTPUT must be set to a "TYPE" code of "C2" and a count increment (1, 10, or 100) that satisfies your total volume or mass requirements (again, see the 10ACT01 or 10ACC-4 manual section for details).

8. You must now determine a SCALING FACTOR "m" according to the equation

$$ \mathbf {m} = \mathbf {V} \times \mathbf {E} \times \mathbf {R} $$

where

• “V” is the VOLUME (or MASS) EQUIVALENT for one pulse of the flowmeter, as given in the calibration data supplied with the flowmeter

• “ E” is the conversion factor for changing the volume or mass units given in the flowmeter datasheet to the units desired for the final volume or mass measurement; e.g., if the calibration data supplied with the flowmeter uses cubic feet and you want the final measurement to be in cubic meters, E = 0.028 (m³/ft³)
  — “R” is the “range factor”—in this case, the count increment—to which Channel No. y has been set in Step 7, above (R = 1, 10, or 100).

• Now set up a CALCULATE PSEUDOCHANNEL No. "z" to represent total volume or mass. Turn ON the system EEPROM Switch and enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{CLC} \mathrm{z} = \mathrm{m} (\mathrm{CHN} \mathrm{y}) + 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where "m" is the SCALING FACTOR calculated in Step 8. NOTE: Additional CALCULATE PSEUDOCHANNELS can easily be set up to produce temperature-corrected mass flow (see Manual Section 2.J, and contact the factory for detailed instructions).

MODEL 10A60-4

QUAD VOLTAGE

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A60-4 is a general-purpose conditioner allowing input of up to four external voltage signals. Mixed as desired, these may originate from DC-to-DC LVDT's, potentiometer-type sensors, and other 2-wire analog signal sources that provide their own power supply. Or they may represent the outputs of other instrument systems having various voltage levels and grounding configurations.

Inputs can be either floating (differential) or grounded (single-ended). With differential inputs, generous common-mode range and excellent common-mode rejection eliminate ground-coupling errors and other problems normally associated with off-ground signal sources. Chopper-stabilized DC amplification with active low-pass filtering yields smooth and stable measurement of the true average value of the input variable, even in the face of substantial dynamic content.

ADDITIONAL 10A60-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 2-wire DC voltage sources, grounded or floating

Input Voltage Ranges: ±0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10, or 20 V-DC; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to 10A60-4 data channels, see Table 1, below

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±200 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±50 V operating; ±300 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -60 dB; at 60 Hz: -70 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 2 MΩ; Common-Mode: 0.5 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.5 mV; vs. Temperature: ±0.005 mV/°C; vs. Time: ±0.05 mV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 200 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 250 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A60-4 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Channel Range Type Code

±0.5 V-DC 5A

±1.0 V-DC 5B

±2.0 V-DC 5C

±5.0 V-DC 5D

±10.0 V-DC 5E

±20.0 V-DC 5F

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A60-4's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Cabling for floating inputs is given in Fig. 1(a). NOTE: To minimize signal noise, it is recommended that for a floating (ungrounded) input with high common-mode impedance, the COMMON pin be tied to the -SIGNAL line at the connector. Cabling for grounded inputs is shown in Fig. 1(b).

Table 2 Model 10A60-4 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	1	COMMON
B		Not Committed
3	2	+SIGNAL
C	2	-SIGNAL
4	2	COMMON
D		Not Committed
5	3	+SIGNAL
E	3	-SIGNAL
6	3	COMMON
F		Not Committed
7	4	+SIGNAL
H	4	-SIGNAL
8	4	COMMON
J		Not Committed
9,K,10,L		Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A60-4 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Reg. Power Supply (if required)"] --> B["Analog Signal Source"]
    B --> C["+ SIGNAL"]
    B --> D["- SIGNAL"]
    C --> E["CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322)"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["SHIELD"]
    F --> G["Ground Lug"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Reg. Power Supply (if required) Analog Signal Source + SIGNAL - SIGNAL CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) Channel 1 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 Channel 2: -SIGNAL + SIGNAL Channel 3: -SIGNAL + SIGNAL Channel 4: -SIGNAL + SIGNAL SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug Fig. 1(b) 2-Wire Single-Ended (rounded) Voltage Input

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A60-4 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A60-4 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A60-4:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A60-4 is being used to measure voltage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A60-4-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A60-4-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

$$ \mathrm{EMM} \mathrm{x} = (1. 2 5) \mathrm{m} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 1, above.

Note that for the Model 10A60-4 (ONLY), the entered "m" value must be 1.25 times the stated full-scale range for the respective channel "type."

If, for example, a voltage-measuring 10A60-4 channel is "typed" as "5D" (corresponding to a full scale of ±5 V-DC) and you want the channel to read hundredths of a volt, you would enter an "m" value of "6.25" (= 1.25 x 5.00).

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A60-4-based channel is limited to ±1.5% of full scale.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A60-4 channel if the received voltage input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures voltage itself (beyond the 10A60-4 card's inherent limit of ± 1.5% of full scale). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

MODEL 10A61-2

DUAL 4-20 MA

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A61-2 accepts one or two independent current signals within the ISA standard range of 4-20 mA. Both unipolar and bipolar (“zero-center”) inputs are allowed. Since the 10A61-2 does not provide excitation, the current source must supply its own power supply, if required.

Chopper-stabilized amplification with active low-pass filtering yields excellent voltage compliance and make the 10A61-2 suitable for virtually any standard Process Industry current input.

ADDITIONAL 10A61-2 SPECIFICATIONS

Input Current: 4 to 20 mA (unipolar) or 4 to 12 to 20 mA (bipolar or “zero-center”); automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A61-2 data channels, see Table 1, below

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ±50 V operating; ±90 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -60 dB; at 60 Hz: -75 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 100 Ω; Common-Mode: 125 kΩ

Burden: 2 V-DC at full scale

Offset: Initial: ±0.05% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 200 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 250 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A61-2 "Type" Codes
Full-Scale Channel Range Type Code

4-20 mA 6C

4-12-20 mA 6D

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A61-2's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard cabling is shown in Fig. 1. Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Table 2 Model 10A61-2 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+TEST*
A	1	-TEST*
2	1	+SIGNAL
B	1	-SIGNAL
3	1	+SIGNAL
C	1	-SIGNAL
5	1	COMMON
4,D,E		Not Committed
6	2	+TEST*
F	2	-TEST*
7	2	+SIGNAL
H	2	-SIGNAL
8	2	+SIGNAL
J	2	-SIGNAL
10	2	COMMON
9,K,L		Not Committed

* For factory use only.

graph TD
    A["Reg. Power Supply (if required)"] --> B["4-20 mA Source"]
    B --> C["+ SIGNAL"]
    B --> D["-SIGNAL"]
    C --> E["CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322)"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["SHIELD"]
    F --> G["Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector"]
    G --> H["SHIELD"]
    H --> I["Ground Lug"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A61-2 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A61-2 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A61-2:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A61-2 is being used to measure milliamperage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A61-2-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A61-2-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where “m” equals the channel’s full-scale range in milliamperes—which is 20 mA, regardless of whether the channel is set to “unipolar” or “bipolar” mode. This number should be expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. If, for example, you want the channel to read tenths of a mA, you would enter an “m” value of “20.0.”

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A61-2-based channel is limited to ±0.05% of full scale.

TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A61-2 channel if the received 4-20 mA input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures milliamperage itself (beyond the 10A61-2 card's inherent limit of ± 0.05% of full scale). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect

Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

10A61-2 DUAL 4-20 MA CARD

MODEL 10A62-8C

EIGHT-CHANNEL 4-20 MA CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

This high-accuracy conditioner accepts up to eight independent current signals within the ISA standard range of 4-20 mA. Both unipolar and bipolar (“zero-center”) inputs are allowed. Since the 10A62-8C does not provide excitation, the current source must supply its own power supply, if required.

Chopper-stabilized amplification with active low-pass filtering yields excellent voltage compliance and make the 10A62-8C suitable for virtually any standard Process Industry current input.

ADDITIONAL 10A62-8C SPECIFICATIONS

Input Current: 4 to 20 mA (unipolar) or 4 to 12 to 20 mA (bipolar or “zero-center”); automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A62-8C data channels, see Table 1, below

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±50 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -100 dB; at 60 Hz, 1 kHz, and 3 kHz: -150 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 100 Ω; Common-Mode: 500 kΩ

Burden: 2 V-DC at full scale

Offset: Initial: ±0.02% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 5 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 170 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 240 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 270 msec

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

Table 1 10A62-8C "Type" Codes
Full-Scale Channel Range Type Code

4-20 mA 6C

4-12-20 mA 6D

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A62-8C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Standard cabling is shown in Fig. 1. Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Table 2 Model 10A62-8C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	2	+SIGNAL
B	2	-SIGNAL
3	3	+SIGNAL
C	3	-SIGNAL
4	4	+SIGNAL
D	4	-SIGNAL
5	5	+SIGNAL
E	5	-SIGNAL
6	6	+SIGNAL
F	6	-SIGNAL
7	7	+SIGNAL
H	7	-SIGNAL
8	8	+SIGNAL
J	8	-SIGNAL
9,K,10,L Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A62-8C Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Reg. Power Supply (if required)"] --> B["4 - 20 mA Source"]
    B --> C["+ SIGNAL"]
    B --> D["- SIGNAL"]
    C --> E["CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322)"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["SHIELD"]
    F --> G["Ground Lug"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A62-8C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A62-8C channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A62-8C: "absolute" and "two-point (deadweight)." The procedure used for absolute calibration will depend on the selected "polarity" of the channel being calibrated. For a general discussion of absolute calibration, see Manual Section 1.G.3.b. Absolute calibration of a 10A68-2C-based channel yields an accuracy of ± 0.02% of full scale.

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION FOR A 4-20 MA CHANNEL

After you have set a 10A62-8C-based input Channel No. "x" for UNIPOLAR (4 to 20 mA) MEASUREMENT by giving it a "type" code of "6C" (see Table 1), you can calibrate it "absolutely" for readout in percentage of transducer full-scale range to a precision of 0.01% , as follows:

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH.
2. Apply a SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command of

$$ E M M x = 3 1 2. 5 0 [ C R ] $$

1. Apply a ZERO OFFSET (BEE) command of

$$ \text { BEE } x = - 2 5. 0 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

In general, if “F” is the desired engineering-units reading corresponding to a unipolar input of 20 mA, and if the reading corresponding to a unipolar input of 0 mA is “0,” then the required EMM and BEE settings* for the channel are

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = (3. 1 2 5) \mathbf {F} \text { and } \quad \mathbf {B E E} \mathbf {x} = (- 0. 2 5) \mathbf {F} $$

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION FOR A 4-12-20 MA CHANNEL

After you have set a 10A62-8C-based input Channel No. "x" for BIPOLAR ("zero-center" 4 to 12 to 20 mA) MEASUREMENT by giving it a "type" code of "6D" (see Table 1), you can calibrate it "absolutely" for readout in percentage of transducer full-scale range to a precision of 0.1%, as follows:

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH.
2. Apply a SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command of

$$ \text { EMM } x = 6 2 5. 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

1. Apply a ZERO OFFSET (BEE) command of

$$ \text { BEE } x = - 1 5 0. 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

In general, if “F” is the desired engineering-units reading corresponding to a bipolar input of 20 mA, and if the reading corresponding to a bipolar input of 12 mA is “0,” then the required EMM and BEE settings* for the channel are

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = (6. 2 5) \mathbf {F} \text { and } \quad \mathbf {B E E} \mathbf {x} = (- 1. 5) \mathbf {F} $$

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A62-8C channel if the received 4-20 mA input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

MODEL 10A63-2

DUAL VOLTAGE

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A63-2 is a high-accuracy conditioner allowing input of one or two external voltage signals. Mixed as desired, these may originate from DC-to-DC LVDT's, potentiometer-type sensors, and other 2-, 3-, or 4-wire analog signal sources, either grounded or floating—or they may represent the outputs of other instrument systems having various voltage levels and grounding configurations.

The 10A63-2 offers a wide range of input voltages. Its differential inputs, generous common-mode range, and excellent common-mode rejection eliminate ground-coupling errors and other problems normally associated with off-ground signal sources. Nominal 5 V-DC excitation is provided for external sources that require it. "1/2 Bridge Completion" terminals allow "zero-center" operation of potentiometers with resistance from 1 to 10k .

ADDITIONAL 10A63-2 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 2-, 3-, or 4-wire DC voltage sources, grounded or floating

Input Voltage Ranges: ±0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, or 200 V-DC; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A63-2 data channels, see Table 1, below

Excitation (per channel): Nominal 5 V-DC; 50 mA, maximum

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±200 V operating; ±500 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±200 V operating; ±300 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -120 dB; at 60 Hz: -60 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 1 MΩ; Common-Mode: 0.5 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.02% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

(cont'd)

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 5 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 200 msec
To 0.1% of final value: 300 msec
To 0.02% of final value: 400 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A63-2 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Channel Range Type Code

±50 mV-DC 61

±100 mV-DC 60

±200 mV-DC 62

±500 mV-DC 64

±1 V-DC 63

±2 V-DC 65

±5 V-DC 67

±10 V-DC 66

±20 V-DC 68

±50 V-DC 6A

±100 V-DC 69

±200 V-DC 6B

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A63-2's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

2-wire cabling for analog sources with no excitation from the 10A63-2 is given in Fig. 1(a); 3-wire zero-to-full-scale potentiometer cabling is given in Fig. 1(b); 3-wire zero-center potentiometer cabling is given in Fig. 1(c); and 4-wire DC-to-DC LVDT cabling is given in Fig. 1(d).

Note that floating (ungrounded) inputs are to be grounded at the site of the signal source, and not at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. Note also that the Model 10A63-2 has "1/2 BRIDGE COMPLETION" terminals to allow bipolar ("Zero Center") operation of potentiometers. As shown in Fig. 1(c), the 1/2 BRIDGE is powered by the potentiometer excitation. Although this excitation is normally supplied by the 10A63-2—as shown in the figure—the user may replace it with his own precision source, if desired. In this case, Pins 1 and A (for Channel 1) or Pins 6 and F (for Channel 2) would not be used. The 1/2 BRIDGE terminals would tie into the user's excitation lines (Pin 2 or 7 to +EXCITATION; Pin B or H to -EXCITATION).

Fig. 1 Model 10A63-2 Transducer Cabling

(a) 2-Wire Cabling: excitation from 10A63-2 Reg. Power Supply (if required) Analog Signal Source + SIGNAL - -SIGNAL Add ground for floating inputs CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 Channel 2: + SIGNAL -SIGNAL Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug

Fig. 1(a) 2-Wire Cabling: No Excitation from 10A63-2

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + EXCITATION Channel 1 1K to 10K ohms + SIGNAL - EXCITATION - SIGNAL Channel 2: + EXCITATION - EXCITATION - SIGNAL + SIGNAL Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug -Wire Cabling: otentiometer, II Scale

Fig. 1(b) 3-Wire Cabling: External Potentiometer, Zero to Full Scale

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + EXCITATION Channel 1 1K to 10K ohms + SIGNAL - EXCITATION Channel 2: - EXCITATION 1/2 BRIDGE1/2 BRIDGE + EXCITATION 1/2 BRIDGE + SIGNAL Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector SHIELD Ground Lug Wire Cabling: otentiometer, er

Fig. 1(c) 3-Wire Cabling: External Potentiometer, Zero Center

graph TD
    A["DC-to-DC LVDT"] -->|+EXCITATION| B["Conditioner Connector (No. 60322)"]
    A -->|+SIGNAL| B
    A -->|-SIGNAL| B
    A -->|-EXCITATION| B
    B --> C["SHIELD"]
    C --> D["Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector"]
    D --> E["Ground Lug"]

Fig. 1(d) 4-Wire Cabling: DC-to-DC LVDT Input

Table 2 Model 10A63-2 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+EXCITATION (+5 V-DC)
A	1	-EXCITATION (-5 V-DC)
2	1	1/2 BRIDGE (TO +EXC)
B	1	1/2 BRIDGE (TO -EXC)
3	1	+SIGNAL
C	1	-SIGNAL
4,D,5,E 1 Not Committed
6	2	+EXCITATION (+5 V-DC)
F	2	-EXCITATION (-5 V-DC)
7	2	1/2 BRIDGE (TO +EXC)
H	2	1/2 BRIDGE (TO -EXC)
8	2	+SIGNAL
J	2	-SIGNAL
9,K,10,L 2 Not Committed

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A63-2 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A63-2 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A63-2:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A63-2 is being used to measure voltage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A63-2-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A63-2-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

EMM x = m [CR]

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 1, above. If, for example, a voltage-measuring 10A63-2 channel is “typed” as “6A” (corresponding to a full scale of ±50 V-DC) and you want the channel to read tenths of a volt, you would enter an “m” value of “50.0.”

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A63-2-based channel is limited to ±1.5% of full scale.

TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A63-2 channel if the received voltage input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures voltage itself (beyond the 10A63-2 card's inherent limit of ± 1.5% of full scale). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

10A63-2 DUAL DC VOLTAGE CARD

MODEL 10A64-8C

EIGHT-CHANNEL VOLTAGE CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A64-8C is a high-accuracy conditioner allowing input of up to eight external voltage signals. Mixed as desired, these may originate from DC-to-DC LVDT's, potentiometer-type sensors, and other 2-wire analog signal sources that provide their own power supply. Or they may represent the outputs of other instrument systems having various voltage levels and grounding configurations.

Inputs can be either floating (differential) or grounded (single-ended). Chopper-stabilized DC amplification with active low-pass filtering yields smooth and stable measurement of the true average value of the input variable, even in the face of substantial dynamic content.

ADDITIONAL 10A64-8C SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 2-wire DC voltage sources, grounded or floating

Input Voltage Ranges: ±5, 10, or 20 V-DC; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to 10A64-8C data channels, see Table 1, below

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±50 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±50 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -100 dB; at 60 Hz, 1 kHz, and 3 kHz: -150 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 2 MΩ; Common-Mode: 0.5 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.01% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±10 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±10 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 7.5 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 190 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 200 msec

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

Table 1 10A64-8C "Type" Codes
Full-Scale Channel Range Type Code

±5 V-DC 67

±10 V-DC 66

±20 V-DC 68

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A64-8C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Note that floating (ungrounded) inputs are to be grounded at the site of the signal source, and not at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR.

Table 2 Model 10A64-8C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	2	+SIGNAL
B	2	-SIGNAL
3	3	+SIGNAL
C	3	-SIGNAL
4	4	+SIGNAL
D	4	-SIGNAL
5	5	+SIGNAL
E	5	-SIGNAL
6	6	+SIGNAL
F	6	-SIGNAL
7	7	+SIGNAL
H	7	-SIGNAL
8	8	+SIGNAL
J	8	-SIGNAL
9,K,10,L		Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A64-8C Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Reg. Power Supply (if required)"] --> B["Analog Signal Source"]
    B --> C["+ SIGNAL"]
    B --> D["- SIGNAL"]
    C --> E["SHIELD"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["Conditioner Connector (No. 60322)"]
    F --> G["SHIELD"]
    F --> H["Ground Lug"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A64-8C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A64-8C channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A64-8C:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A64-8C is being used to measure voltage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A64-8C-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A64-8C-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings.

Channel "type" codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 1, above. If, for example, a voltage-measuring 10A64-8C channel is "typed" as "68" (corresponding to a full scale of ±20 V-DC) and you want the channel to read tenths of a volt, you would enter an "m" value of "20.0."

Note that “absolute” calibration of a 10A64-8C-based channel yields an accuracy of ±0.02% of full scale.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A64-8C channel if the received voltage input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

MODEL 10A65-8

EIGHT-CHANNEL LOW-LEVEL VOLTAGE CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A65-8 is a high-accuracy conditioner allowing input of up to eight low-level external voltage signals (allowable input ranges are ± 50 , ± 100 , and ± 200 millivolts). Mixed as desired, these may originate from DC-to-DC LVDT's, potentiometer-type sensors, and other 2-wire analog signal sources that provide their own power supply. Or they may represent the outputs of other instrument systems having various voltage levels and grounding configurations.

Inputs can be either floating (differential) or grounded (single-ended). Chopper-stabilized DC amplification with active low-pass filtering yields smooth and stable measurement of the true average value of the input variable, even in the face of substantial dynamic content.

ADDITIONAL 10A65-8 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: Low-level 2-wire DC voltage sources, grounded or floating

Input Voltage Ranges: ±50, 100, or 200 mV-DC; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to 10A60-4 data channels, see Table 1, below

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±0.2 V operating; ±10 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±50 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -97 dB; at 60 Hz, 1 kHz, and 3 kHz: infinite

Input Impedance: Differential: 2 MΩ; Common-Mode: 0.5 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.04% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±10 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 4 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 190 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 265 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 325 msec

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

Table 1 10A65-8 "Type" Codes
Full-Scale Channel Range Type Code

±50 mV-DC 61

±100 mV-DC 60

±200 mV-DC 62

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A65-8's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Note that floating (ungrounded) inputs are to be grounded at the site of the signal source, and not at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR.

Table 2 Model 10A65-8 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	2	+SIGNAL
B	2	-SIGNAL
3	3	+SIGNAL
C	3	-SIGNAL
4	4	+SIGNAL
D	4	-SIGNAL
5	5	+SIGNAL
E	5	-SIGNAL
6	6	+SIGNAL
F	6	-SIGNAL
7	7	+SIGNAL
H	7	-SIGNAL
8	8	+SIGNAL
J	8	-SIGNAL
9,K		COMMON
10,L		Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A65-8 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Reg. Power Supply (if required)"] --> B["Analog Signal Source"]
    B --> C["+ SIGNAL"]
    B --> D["- SIGNAL"]
    C --> E["SHIELD"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["Conditioner Connector (No. 60322)"]
    F --> G["Ground Lug"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A65-8 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A65-8 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

You can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A65-8:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A65-8 is being used to measure millivoltage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A65-8-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A65-8-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

EMM x = m [CR]

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 1, above. If, for example, a voltage-measuring 10A65-8 channel is “typed” as “62” (corresponding to a full scale of ±200 mV-DC) and you want the channel to read tenths of a millivolt, you would enter an “m” value of “200.0.”

Note: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A65-8-based channel is limited to ±0.05% of full scale.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A65-8 channel if the received millivoltage input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures millivoltage itself (beyond the 10A65-8 card's inherent limit of ± 0.05% of full scale). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

MODEL 10A68-2

DUAL AC RMS

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Using the special screw-terminal connector board described in Section 2, the Model 10A68-2 accurately measures the true RMS amplitude of one or two independent external analog AC signals, mixed as desired, from a wide range of voltage or current sources—including engineering parameters conditioned by other Daytronic cards.

Since the 10A68-2 does not provide excitation, the analog source must supply its own power supply, if required (as is the case with many accelerometers, when used to measure the noise level or vibration factor of a dynamic process). The card is particularly useful in evaluating the efficiency of AC electrical power systems.

ADDITIONAL 10A68-2 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: AC signal sources (voltage or current)

Input Voltage and Current Ranges: See Table 1, below, for allowable full-scale input ranges (given for each range are the corresponding normal-mode input impedance ( z_i ), maximum normal-mode input voltage or current with no instrument damage ( V_max or I_max ), and bandwidth flat to 0.1%, 1%, and 3 dB, respectively); automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A68-2 data channels, see Table 2, below

Amplifier (per channel): Floating, with RMS Converter (see Table 1 for bandwidths)

Common-Mode Range: ±1500 V operating and without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC and at 60 Hz: infinite; at 1 kHz: -60 dB

Input Impedance (Common-Mode): Essentially infinite for all input ranges

Offset: Initial: ±0.04% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.05% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability (all ranges except 5 A): vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Gain Stability (5-A range only): vs. Temperature: ±500 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

(cont'd)

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 5 Hz; 60 dB down at 30 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 150 msec
To 0.1% of final value: 200 msec
To 0.02% of final value: 250 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 Model 10A68-2 Input Characteristics

Range Z	I	V_max or I_max	BW (to 0.1%)	BW (to 1%)	BW (to 3 dB)
50 mV-AC	2 KΩ	40 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
100 mV-AC	2 KΩ	40 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
200 mV-AC	2 KΩ	40 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
500 mV-AC	2 KΩ	40 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
1 V-AC 2 KΩ	40 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
2 V-AC 2 KΩ	40 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
5 V-AC	200 KΩ	140 V-AC	50 Hz to 4 kHz	20 Hz to 10 kHz	10 Hz to 20 kHz
10 V-AC	200 KΩ	140 V-AC	50 Hz to 4 kHz	20 Hz to 10 kHz	10 Hz to 20 kHz
20 V-AC	200 KΩ	140 V-AC	50 Hz to 4 kHz	20 Hz to 10 kHz	10 Hz to 20 kHz
50 V-AC	1 MΩ	630 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
100 V-AC	1 MΩ	630 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
200 V-AC	1 MΩ	630 V-AC	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
500 V-AC	1 MΩ	630 V-AC	50 Hz to 4 kHz	20 Hz to 10 kHz	10 Hz to 20 kHz
50 mA	1 Ω	700 mA	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
100 mA	1 Ω	700 mA	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
200 mA	1 Ω	700 mA	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz
500 mA	1 Ω	700 mA	50 Hz to 4 kHz	20 Hz to 10 kHz	10 Hz to 20 kHz
5 A	0.01 Ω	7 A	40 Hz to 400 Hz	20 Hz to 2 kHz	10 Hz to 4 kHz

Note: Transformers are available for current inputs greater than 5 A.

Table 2 10A68-2 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Range	Channel Type Code
50 mV-AC	61
100 mV-AC	60
200 mV-AC	62
500 mV-AC	64
1 V-AC	63
2 V-AC	65
5 V-AC	67
10 V-AC	66
20 V-AC	68
50 V-AC	6A
100 V-AC	69
200 V-AC	6B
500 V-AC	67
50 mA	61
100 mA	60
200 mA	62
500 mA	67
5 A	64

Connects to Conditioner Card I/O Connector Channel 1 COMMON 5 amps 0.05, 0.1, or 0.2 amps 0.05, 0.1, or 0.2 volts 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, or 20 volts 50, 100, 200, or 500 volts Channel 2 COMMON 5 amps 0.05, 0.1, or 0.2 amps 0.05, 0.1, or 0.2 volts 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, or 20 volts 50, 100, 200, or 500 volts CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 65368) AC Signal Source Reg. Power Supply (if required) Fig. 1 Model 10A68-2 Transducer Cabling

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A68-2 mates with a special CONDITIONER CONNECTOR BOARD, shown in Fig. 1. This board has a separate screw-terminal block for each of the 10A68-2's two channels. As shown in the figure, the screw terminal to which you connect an AC signal source will depend on the input range that has been set for that channel and whether the input represents voltage or current.

NOTE: TO MINIMIZE THE EFFECTS OF STRAY CAPACITIVE PICKUP, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT ALL UNUSED INPUT TERMINALS BE TIED TO THEIR RESPECTIVE "COMMON" TERMINAL.

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A68-2 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A68-2 channel "type" codes, see Table 2, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A68-2:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A68-2 is being used to measure voltage or amperage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A68-2-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A68-2-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

EMM x = m [CR]

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 2, above. If, for example, a voltage-measuring 10A68-2 channel is “typed” as “65” (corresponding to a full scale of 2 V-AC) and you want the channel to read tenths of a volt, you would enter an “m” value of “2.0.”

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A68-2-based channel is limited to ±0.1% of full scale for all input ranges except 5 A, for which it is limited to ±0.5%.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A68-2 channel if the received voltage or current input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures voltage or amperage itself (beyond the 10A68-2 card's inherent limit of ± 0.1% or ± 0.5% of full scale).* The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

MODEL 10A69-4

QUAD AC RMS

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A69-4 accurately measures the true RMS amplitude up to four independent external analog AC signals, mixed as desired, from a wide range of voltage sources.

Since the 10A69-4 does not provide excitation, the voltage source must supply its own power supply, if required (as is the case with many accelerometers, when used to measure the noise level or vibration factor of a dynamic process). The three millivolt ranges (50, 100, and 200 mV-AC) are intended primarily for current measurement by means of an external shunt.

ADDITIONAL 10A69-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: AC signal sources (voltage only)

Input Voltage and Current Ranges: See Table 1, below, for allowable full-scale input ranges (given for each range are the corresponding normal-mode input impedance ( z_i ), maximum normal-mode input voltage with no instrument damage ( V_max ), and bandwidth flat to 0.2%, 1%, and 3 dB, respectively); automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A69-4 data channels, see Table 2, below

Amplifier (per channel): Selectable gain, followed by high-pass filter with RMS Converter (see Table 1 for bandwidths)

Common-Mode Range: ±1000 V operating and without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: infinite; at 60 Hz: -60 dB

Input Impedance (Common-Mode): Infinite at DC shunted by 100 pF

Offset: Initial: ±0.02% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration*

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 50 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 100 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

Auxiliary Outputs to Mainframe Wire-Wrap Pins: None

* Initial (uncalibrated) inaccuracy may be as great as ±0.2% of full scale. Maximum error that could occur upon replacement of a Model 10A69-4 not followed by calibration is ±0.4% of full scale.

Table 1 Model 10A69-4 Input Characteristics

Range Z	i	Vmax	BW (to 0.2%) BW (to 1%) BW (to 3 dB)
50 mV-AC	1 KΩ	10 V-AC	45 Hz to 1 kHz	12 Hz to 3.2 kHz	10 Hz to 22 kHz
100 mV-AC	1 KΩ	10 V-AC	45 Hz to 1 kHz	12 Hz to 3.2 kHz	10 Hz to 16 kHz
200 mV-AC	1 KΩ	10 V-AC	45 Hz to 1 kHz	12 Hz to 3.2 kHz	10 Hz to 9 kHz
5 V-AC	100 KΩ	100 V-AC	45 Hz to 4 kHz	12 Hz to 20 kHz	10 Hz to 40 kHz
10 V-AC	100 KΩ	100 V-AC	45 Hz to 4 kHz	12 Hz to 10 kHz	10 Hz to 20 kHz
20 V-AC	100 KΩ	100 V-AC	45 Hz to 4 kHz	12 Hz to 5 kHz	10 Hz to 9 kHz
50 V-AC	1 MΩ	250 V-AC	45 Hz to 2 kHz	15 Hz to 9 kHz	10 Hz to 40 kHz
100 V-AC	1 MΩ	250 V-AC	45 Hz to 2 kHz	15 Hz to 9 kHz	10 Hz to 21 kHz
200 V-AC	1 MΩ	250 V-AC	45 Hz to 2 kHz	15 Hz to 9 kHz	10 Hz to 10 kHz

Table 2 10A69-4 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Range	Channel Type Code
50 mV-AC	61
100 mV-AC	60
200 mV-AC	62
5 V-AC	67
10 V-AC	66
20 V-AC	68
50 V-AC	6A
100 V-AC	69
200 V-AC	6B

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A69-4's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 3 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

The wiring of each input will depend on the range selected for that input. Cabling for inputs in the 50-, 100-, and 200-mV ranges is shown in Fig. 1(a); for inputs in the 5-, 10-, and 20-V ranges, in Fig. 1(b); and for inputs in the 50-, 100-, and 200-V ranges, in Fig. 1(c).

NOTE: TO MINIMIZE THE EFFECTS OF STRAY CAPACITIVE PICKUP, IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT ALL UNUSED "+SIGNAL" PINS BE TIED TO THEIR RESPECTIVE "-SIGNAL" PINS. For example, if the 50-200 mV "+SIGNAL" pin (Pin 4) is being used for Channel 2, then the unused Pins 3 and D should both be jumpered to Pin C (Channel 2's "-SIGNAL"). And if, for example, Channel 4 is not being used at all, then Pins 7, 8, and J should all be jumpered to Pin H.

Fig. 1 Model 10A63-2 Transducer Cabling

insducer Cabling Reg. Power Supply (If required) Channel 1 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + SIGNAL -SIGNAL A 1 B 2 Channel 2: -SIGNAL + SIGNAL C 3 D 4 Channel 3: -SIGNAL + SIGNAL E 5 F 6 Channel 4: -SIGNAL + SIGNAL H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug 1(a) Cabling for High- sitivity Input Ranges to 200 mV)

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + SIGNAL - SIGNAL A 1 B 2 Channel 2: -SIGNAL C 3 + SIGNAL D 4 Channel 3: -SIGNAL E 5 + SIGNAL F 6 Channel 4: -SIGNAL H 7 + SIGNAL J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Ground Lug 1(b) Cabling for Medium- sensitivity Input Ranges to 20 V)

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + SIGNAL - SIGNAL A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Ground Lug Reg. Power Supply (if required) 1(c) Cabling for Low- sitivity Input Ranges to 200 V)

Fig. 1(c) Cabling for Low-Sensitivity Input Ranges (50 to 200 V)

Table 3 Model 10A69-4 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL (5-20 V)
A	1	-SIGNAL (CHANNEL 1)
2	1	+SIGNAL (50-200 mV)
B	1	+SIGNAL (50-200 V)
3	2	+SIGNAL (5-20 V)
C	2	-SIGNAL (CHANNEL 2)
4	2	+SIGNAL (50-200 mV)
D	2	+SIGNAL (50-200 V)
5	3	+SIGNAL (5-20 V)
E	3	-SIGNAL (CHANNEL 3)
6	3	+SIGNAL (50-200 mV)
F	3	+SIGNAL (50-200 V)
7	4	+SIGNAL (5-20 V)
H	4	-SIGNAL (CHANNEL 4)
8	4	+SIGNAL (50-200 mV)
J	4	+SIGNAL (50-200 V)

9,K,10,L Not Committed

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A69-4 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A69-4 channel "type" codes, see Table 2, above.

You can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A69-4:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the 10A69-4 is being used to measure voltage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10A69-4-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A69-4-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

$$ E M M x = m [ C R ] $$

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 2, above. If, for example, a voltage-measuring 10A69-4 channel is “typed” as “67” (corresponding to a full scale of 5 V-AC) and you want the channel to read tenths of a volt, you would enter an “m” value of “5.0.”

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10A69-4-based channel is limited to ±0.2% of full scale.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A69-4 channel if the received voltage or current input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures voltage or amperage itself (beyond the 10A69-4 card's inherent limit of ± 0.2% ). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

10A69-4 QUAD AC RMS CARD

MODEL 10A70-2

DUAL STRAIN GAGE CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A70-2 is a general-purpose two-channel conditioner for use with DC-excited load cells, pressure sensors, and any other conventional strain gage transducer employing a 4-arm bridge of nominal 350 Ω or higher, with a full-scale range of 0.75, 1.50, or 3.00 mV/V.

The 10A70-2's advanced design techniques overcome errors that traditionally plague the strain-gage conditioning process. Separate excitation for each channel uses remote sensing of bridge voltage and is slaved to a common System Reference Voltage. The result is consistently stable ratiometric measurement, unaffected by possible power-supply drift. Input impedances in excess of 10,000 MΩ are presented to signal leads to eliminate cable resistance as a source of error. Allowable cable length has virtually no practical limits.

ADDITIONAL 10A70-2 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: Conventional 4-arm strain gage bridges, nominal 350 ohms (or higher)

Input Ranges (Full-Scale): ±0.75, 1.50, or 3.00 mV/V; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to 10A70-2 data channels, see Table 1, below. Since channel zeroing is by digital techniques, no input balance control is provided. The allowable input range, therefore, must include any initial unbalance (which, in commercially produced strain gage transducers, is usually negligible). Other transducers may have to be externally trimmed to be used with the Model 10A70-2, if zero unbalance exceeds 20% of full scale.

Excitation (per channel): Nominal 10 (i.e., ±5) V-DC; ±50 mA, maximum

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ±1 V operating; ±9 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -100 dB; at 60 Hz: -120 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: greater than 10,000 MΩ; Common-Mode: greater than 10,000 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.3 mV; vs. Temperature: ±0.05 μV/°C; vs. Time: ±5 μV/month

Gain Accuracy*: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±50 ppm/month

(cont'd)

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 100 msec
To 0.1% of final value: 150 msec
To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

Auxiliary Output: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A70-2 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale ChannelInput Type Code

0.75 mV/V 70 1.50 mV/V 71 3.00 mV/V 72

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A70-2's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector. With regard to 10A70-2 cabling, please note the following:

a. 4-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 1(a), and is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. It is recommended that the resistance of the conductors not exceed 0.0001 of the bridge resistance.
b. 6-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 1(b), and is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer, or when fine wire is used. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the transducer.

IMPORTANT: The ±EXCITATION, ±SENSE, and ±SIGNAL pins for an UNUSED STRAIN GAGE INPUT CHANNEL should be jumpered as shown in Fig. 2, below. If an input is left open, high-frequency oscillation can result, which can in turn produce significant interchannel crosstalk, and possibly inaccurate data readings.

Table 2 Model 10A70-2 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner
Pin Channel Number	Line Number	Function
1	1	+EXCITATION (+5 V-DC)
A	1	-EXCITATION (-5 V-DC)
2	1	+SENSE
B	1	-SENSE
3	1	+SIGNAL
C	1	-SIGNAL
4,D,5,E	1	Not Committed
6	2	+EXCITATION (+5 V-DC)
F	2	-EXCITATION (-5 V-DC)
7	2	+SENSE
H	2	-SENSE
8	2	+SIGNAL
J	2	-SIGNAL
9,K,10,L	2	Not Committed

Fig. 1 Model 10A70-2 Transducer Cabling

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + EXCITATION Channel 1 + SIGNAL-SIGNAL - EXCITATION - SENSE + SENSE Channel 2: - EXCITATION + SIGNAL - SIGNAL SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector + EXCITATION + SENSE-SENSE Ground Lug 4-Wire Strain Gage (under 20 ft. in length)

Fig. 1(a) 4-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

(b) 6-Wire Strain Gage (20 ft. or longer) +SENSE +EXCITATION Channel 1 +SIGNAL-SIGNAL -EXCITATION -SENSE CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 +EXCITATION -SENSE +SIGNAL J 8 -SIGNAL K 9 L 10 SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug

Fig. 1(b) 6-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

Model 10A70-2 I/O Connector +EX (Chn. n) +SEN (Chn. n) -EX (Chn. n) -SEN (Chn. n) +SIG (Chn. n) -SIG (Chn. n) GROUND LUG

Fig. 2 Jumpering of an Unused 10A70-2 Strain Gage Input

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A70-2 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A70-2 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A70-2 (note that this conditioner cannot be calibrated by the "SHUNT" CALIBRATION technique that may be applied to other Strain Gage Conditioner Cards):

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

This is generally the most convenient means of calibrating a 10A70-2 channel, when the transducer's full-scale "mV/V" sensitivity rating is accurately known.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A70-2-based Channel No. "x," you need only

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command:

$$ \mathbf {M V V} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {i}, \mathbf {u} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

For “i,” enter the manufacturer-supplied transducer sensitivity rating in “mV/V, full scale.” For a “Type 70” channel (0.75 mV/V, full scale), you should enter an “i” value greater than 0.02 and less than or equal to 1.00 (mV/V). For a “Type 71” channel (1.50 mV/V, full scale), you should enter a value greater than 0.04 and less than or equal to 2.00 (mV/V). For a “Type 72” channel (3.00 mV/V, full scale), you should enter a value greater than 0.80 and less than or equal to 4.00 (mV/V).

For “u,” enter the transducer’s nominal full-scale rating in whatever engineering units are desired for the channel’s data reading.

The MVV command will only work if Channel No. x has been assigned the proper "type" code ("70," "71," or "72").

1. Zero the channel by commanding

ZRO x [CR]

Note that a channel calibrated by the MVV command will report measurement data to a precision matching that of the entered "u" value. If, for example, you're measuring "psi," and enter a "u" of "500," then all subsequent channel readings will be rounded to the nearest psi. If the entry is "500.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a psi.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A70-2 channel if the full-scale "mV/V" rating of the channel's strain gage transducer is unknown, or if the final measurement accuracy provided by CALCULATED CALIBRATION does not meet the requirements of the measurement application. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

10A70-2 DUAL DC STRAIN GAGE CARD

MODEL 10A72-2C

ENHANCED DUAL STRAIN GAGE CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A72-2C is a general-purpose two-channel conditioner for use with DC-excited load cells, pressure sensors, and any other conventional strain gage transducer employing a 4-arm bridge of nominal 350 Ω or higher, with a full-scale range of 0.75, 1.50, or 3.00 mV/V.

The 10A72-2C's advanced design techniques overcome errors that traditionally plague the strain-gage conditioning process. Separate excitation for each channel uses remote sensing of bridge voltage and is slaved to a common System Reference Voltage. The result is consistently stable ratiometric measurement, unaffected by possible power-supply drift. Input impedances in excess of 10,000M are presented to signal leads to eliminate cable resistance as a source of error. Allowable cable length has virtually no practical limits.

The 10A72-2C features selectable per-channel excitation (1, 5, or 10 V-DC). Using low excitation helps reduce gage heating effects in stress analysis of materials with low thermal conductivity. Table 1 gives the full-scale mV/V ranges that correspond to each excitation level.

In addition, the 10A72-2C lets the user select either 10-Hz or 100-Hz analog filtering for each input channel. The wideband (100-Hz) filter is specially designed for measurement of a highly dynamic input signal.

A convenient shunt calibration technique is provided. Each channel's shunt resistor may be switched in and out by software command or by means of logic-level inputs through the rear I/O CONNECTOR.

When connected to an optional Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card (or equivalent circuitry supplied by the user*), the 10A72-2C can accept input from a two-wire 1/4-bridge, three-wire 1/4-bridge, 1/2-bridge, or full-bridge strain gage configuration. See Section 4 for details.

ADDITIONAL 10A72-2C SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: Conventional 4-arm strain gage bridges, nominal 350 ohms (or higher); 1/4- and 1/2-bridge gage configurations can be accommodated by means of the Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card described in Section 4 (or equivalent external bridge-completion circuitry supplied by the user)*

(cont'd)

Input Ranges (Full-Scale): Excitation-dependent (see Table 1, below); automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to 10A72-2C data channels, see Table 1. Since channel zeroing is by digital techniques, no input balance control is provided. The allowable input range, therefore, must include any initial unbalance (which, in commercially produced strain gage transducers, is usually negligible). Other transducers may have to be externally trimmed to be used with the Model 10A72-2C, if zero unbalance exceeds 20% of full scale.

Excitation (per channel): Selectable 1, 5, or 10 V-DC (i.e., ±0.5, ±2.5, or ±5 V-DC, respectively), nominal; ±50 mA, maximum, for each voltage

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ±1 V operating; ±8 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -140 dB; at 60 Hz: -120 dB; at 1 kHz: -80 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: greater than 10,000 MΩ; Common-Mode: greater than 10,000 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.01 mV; vs. Temperature: ±0.2 μV/°C; vs. Time: ±5 μV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth

Standard Filter: 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 100 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

Wideband Filter: 3 dB down at 100 Hz; 60 dB down at 1.2 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 10 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 15 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 65 msec

Auxiliary Output: Filtered outputs (1-kHz bandwidth) available on mainframe wire-wrap pins.

Table 1 Model 10A72-2C Ranges and "Type" Codes

Channel 1-V Excitation 5V Excitation 10-V Excitation "Type" Code

7.5 mV/V 1.5 mV/V 0.75 mV/V 70

15.0 mV/V 3.0 mV/V 1.50 mV/V 71

30.0 mV/V 6.0 mV/V 3.00 mV/V 72

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A72-2C's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector. With regard to 10A72-2C cabling, please note the following:

a. 4-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 1(a), and is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines (and also the CALIBRATION SENSE line to the +SIGNAL line) at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. It is recommended that the resistance of the conductors not exceed 0.0001 of the bridge resistance.
b. 8-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 1(b), and is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer, or when fine wire is used. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines (and also the CALIBRATION SENSE line to the +SIGNAL line) at the transducer. Note also the extra wire connected to the -SIGNAL line at the transducer, but left unconnected at the 10A72-2C. This wire is to be paired with the CAL SENSE line to establish proper shielding and to avoid asymmetrical dynamic loading.

IMPORTANT: The ±EXCITATION, ±SENSE, and ±SIGNAL pins for an UNUSED STRAIN GAGE INPUT CHANNEL should be jumpered as shown in Fig. 2, below. If an input is left open, high-frequency oscillation can result, which can in turn produce significant interchannel crosstalk, and possibly inaccurate data readings.

ALSO NOTE: Logic connections for remote control of shunt calibration (using the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR'S "NOT ±CALIBRATE" pins) are discussed in Section 3.d, below, and shown in Fig. 5. For connection of an optional Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card to the 10A72-2C, see Section 4.b.

Table 2 Model 10A72-2C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+EXCITATION
A	1	-EXCITATION
2	1	+SENSE
B	1	-SENSE
3	1	+SIGNAL
C	1	-SIGNAL
4	1	CAL SENSE
D	1	NOT +CALIBRATE
5	1	SIGNAL COMMON
E	1	NOT -CALIBRATE
6	2	+EXCITATION
F	2	-EXCITATION
7	2	+SENSE
H	2	-SENSE
8	2	+SIGNAL
J	2	-SIGNAL
9	2	CAL SENSE
K	2	NOT +CALIBRATE
10	2	SIGNAL COMMON
L	2	NOT -CALIBRATE

Fig. 1 Model 10A72-2C Transducer Cabling

Conditioner Connector (No. 60322) +EXCITATION Channel 1 + SIGNAL-SIGNAL -EXCITATION -SENSE +SENSE CAL SENSE Channel 2: -EXCITATION + SIGNAL -SIGNAL CAL SENSE H J K L 10 See Fig. 5 +EXCITATION +SENSE-SENSE SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug Figure 1(a) 4-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

Conditioner Connector (No. 60322) +SENSE +EXCITATION Channel 1 +SIGNAL-SIGNAL CAL SENSE -EXCITATION -SENSE EXTRA WIRE (paired with "CAL SENSE," UNCONNECTED at Conditioner Connector) Channel 2: -EXCITATION -SENSE +SIGNAL -SIGNAL CAL SENSE UNCONNECTED WIRE SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector See Fig. 5 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 See Fig. 5 Ground Lug (b) 8-Wire Strain Gage (20 ft or longer)

Fig. 1(b) 8-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

Model 10A72-2C I/O Connector +EX (Chn. n) +SEN (Chn. n) -EX (Chn. n) -SEN (Chn. n) +SIG (Chn. n) -SIG (Chn. n) GROUND LUG Fig 10A

Fig. 2 Jumpering of an Unused 10A72-2C Strain Gage Input

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SELECTION OF CONDITIONER MODES

When receiving input from a conventional 4-arm strain gage bridge, a 10A72-2C channel should remain in the factory-set "TRANSDUCER" mode. When conditioning input from a 1/4-bridge (1-arm) or 1/2-bridge (2-arm) strain gage configuration, however, the channel should be set to "GAGE" mode, as follows:*

1. Remove the 10A72-2C card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the 10A72-2C is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 3 and locate the CONDITIONER MODE PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS for Channels 1 and 2. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel, for interconnecting adjacent jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 3 to set the desired mode for that channel.
4. Keep out the 10A72-2C card for the excitation selection procedure, below.

3.b SELECTION OF EXCITATION LEVELS

To set the DC excitation for each 10A72-2C channel, you should

1. Refer to Fig. 3 and locate the EXCITATION VOLTAGE PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS for Channels 1 and 2. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel, for interconnecting adjacent jumper pins.

2. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 3 to set the desired excitation for that channel (1, 5, or 10 V).

3. Keep out the 10A72-2C card for the filter selection procedure, below.

* In "GAGE" mode, the 10A72-2C requires the connection of a Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card, or equivalent circuitry provided by the user (see Section 4). The purpose of the "GAGE" setting is to ensure compatibility with special applications of the older Model 10A72-2 where it was not required that the "CAL SENSE" line be tied to the "+ SIGNAL" line.

graph TD
    A["Excitation Voltage Programming Jumper Pins"] --> B["Channel 1"]
    A --> C["Channel 2"]
    D["Analog Filter Programming Jumper Pins"] --> E["Channel 1"]
    D --> F["Channel 2"]
    G["Conditioner Mode Programming Jumper Pins"] --> H["TRANSDUCER"]
    G --> I["GAGE"]
    B -.-> J["10V 5V 1V"]
    E -.-> K["STANDARD FILTER (10-Hz) 100-Hz FILTER"]
    F -.-> L["Side 2"]
    H -.-> M["Side 2"]
    I -.-> N["Side 2"]

3.c SELECTION OF ANALOG FILTERS

To set the analog filter for each 10A72-2C channel, you should

1. Refer to Fig. 3 and locate the ANALOG FILTER PROGRAMMING JUMPERS PINS for Channels 1 and 2. One multi-connection "minijumper" is provided for each channel.
2. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 3 to set the filter for that channel. For the "standard" (10-Hz) filter setting, the jumper should be placed on the left vertical row of pins, with its left edge overhanging the pin block, as shown. For the 100-Hz filter setting, the jumper should be placed directly on all six pins, in order to interconnect each of the three pairs.
3. Reinsert the 10A72-2C card in its mainframe slot.

3.d CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A72-2C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A72-2C channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use three calibration methods with the Model 10A72-2C, unless it is being used with a Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card (in which case a special calibration procedure is required, as explained in Section 4.c, below):

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

This is generally the most convenient means of calibrating a 10A72-2C channel, when the transducer's full-scale "mV/V" sensitivity rating is accurately known.

Thus, to calibrate a 10A72-2C-based Channel No. "x," you need only

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command:

MVV x = i, u [CR]

For “i,” enter the manufacturer-supplied transducer sensitivity rating in “mV/V, full scale.” For a “Type 70” channel (7.5/1.5/0.75 mV/V, full scale), you should enter an “i” value greater than 0.02 and less than or equal to 1.00 (mV/V). For a “Type 71” channel (15.0/3.0/1.50 mV/V, full scale), you should enter a value greater than 0.04 and less than or equal to 2.00 (mV/V). For a “Type 72” channel (30.0/6.0/3.00 mV/V, full scale), you should enter a value greater than 0.80 and less than or equal to 4.00 (mV/V).

For “u,” enter the transducer’s nominal full-scale rating in whatever engineering units are desired for the channel’s data reading—but only if the channel is set for 10-volt excitation (Section 3.b). NOTE: If the channel being calibrated is set for 1-volt excitation, the “u” value to be entered should be 10 times the actual value of the nominal full-scale rating. If it is set for 5-volt excitation, “u” should be 2 times the actual value.

The MVV command will only work if Channel No. x has been assigned the proper "type" code ("70," "71," or "72").

2. Zero the channel by commanding

ZRO x [CR]

Note that a channel calibrated by the MVV command will report measurement data to a precision matching that of the entered "u" value. If, for example, you're measuring "psi," and enter a "u" of "500," then all subsequent channel readings will be rounded to the nearest psi. If the entry is "500.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a psi.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10A72-2C channel if the full-scale "mV/V" rating of the channel's strain gage transducer is unknown, or if the final measurement accuracy provided by CALCULATED CALIBRATION does not meet the requirements of the measurement application. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION

Suitable for all 10A72-2C excitation levels, this method is similar to the conventional TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) procedure. The difference is that the second ("span") input is not produced by loading the source transducer, but by "simulating" a particular up-scale value of mechanical input. This known EQUIVALENT INPUT then serves to determine the SCALING FACTOR for the channel.

For a 10A72-2C data channel, the equivalent input is produced by shunting a resistor of known magnitude across one arm of the strain gage bridge, thereby simulating a known value of input for either a positive or negative up-scale reading. If the transducer manufacturer has supplied the exact value of the transducer's equivalent input, it can be used as a reference point for calibrating the channel.

Equivalent input can be approximated from a knowledge of the Shunt Calibration Resistance (R), the transducer's Bridge Resistance (B), and the transducer's Full-Scale Sensitivity (K, in mV/V full scale). To determine the EQUIVALENT INPUT (X) as an approximate percentage of full-scale output, you may use the following equation:

$$ \mathbf {X} = 25000 \mathbf {B} / \mathbf {K} (\mathbf {R} + 0.5 \mathbf {B}) $$

Fig. 4 Model 10A72-2C Shunt Calibration Resistors Terminal post for connection of resistor Rear I/O Connector Shunt Resistor for Channel 1 (# R103) Shunt Resistor for Channel 2 (# R104) Side 2

Since the equivalent input is here expressed as a percentage of full-scale output, you must multiply it by the rated full-scale capacity of the transducer, in order to determine the actual input simulated by the shunt.

Shunt calibration is an easier though generally less accurate technique than two-point (deadweight) calibration. It is useful, however, when overall “deadweighting” is impossible or inconvenient, and is good for an accuracy of about 0.2% (depending, of course, on the accuracy of the specified equivalent input, and on the resistor/bridge tolerance and temperature).

The 10A72-2C is equipped with a 100-kΩ, 0.1% calibration resistor for each active channel. These resistors are located on turret terminals at the rear of the card (see Fig. 4). You may, if you wish, replace each channel's installed 100K shunt resistor with a resistor of another value (strain-gage transducer manufacturers often supply such resistors with their instruments).

In System 10, a strain gage channel's shunt resistor may be switched in and out by means of the SHUNT CALIBRATE-POSITIVE (SHP) or SHUNT CALIBRATE-NEGATIVE (SHN) command. A RESUME (RSM) command should then be applied to remove the shunt and resume normal channel measurement. Since these are "runtime" commands, the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.6 for general instructions regarding the "SHUNT CALIBRATION" technique in System 10.

NOTE: Per-channel shunt calibration for the 10A72-2C can be "remotely" controlled, if desired, as an alternative to using the software "SHUNT CALIBRATE" commands provided by the system. This remote calibration control is accomplished by means of logic-level inputs to the 10A72-2C card. The relevant connections are given in Fig. 5.

Fig. 5(a) shows how the "CALIBRATE POSITIVE" and "CALIBRATE NEGATIVE" commands can be independently applied to either active 10A72-2C channel, without the need of an external logic reference supply.

Closing the switch in Fig. 5(a) to contact point "A" will produce a Logic 0 level at Pin D ("NOT + CALIBRATE"). Since this is a negative-true logic line, the Logic 0 input will activate the "+CALIBRATE" condition of the channel. That is, it will switch in the channel's shunt resistor for a positive up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT + CALIBRATE" line from SIGNAL COMMON will then return the channel to the "NO + CALIBRATE" condition.

Similarly, closing the switch to contact point "B" will produce a Logic 0 level at Pin E ("NOT -CALIBRATE"), thereby switching in the channel's shunt resistor for a negative up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT -CALIBRATE" line from SIGNAL COMMON will then return the channel to the "NO -CALIBRATE" condition.

You may also use active TTL logic, as illustrated in Fig. 5(b), to produce the "+CALIBRATE" or "-CALIBRATE" condition for either 10A72-2C channel.

Fig. 5 Logic Inputs for 10A72-2C Remote Shunt Calibration

4 OPTIONAL BRIDGE COMPLETION: MODEL 10CJB-2 DUAL BRIDGE COMPLETION CARD

4.a PURPOSE

The optional Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card lets you connect each of your Model 10A72-2C's inputs to a 2-wire 1/4-bridge, 3-wire 1/4-bridge, 1/2-bridge, or full-bridge strain gage configuration. Each 1/4-bridge configuration may use either 120 or 350 ohms nominal gage resistance. The function of the Model 10CJB-2 is to "complete" the connected bridge—that is, to allow it to be "seen" by the Model 10A72-2C as a full (4-arm) Wheatstone bridge.

For calibration of 10A72-2C channels originating from the Model 10CJB-2, see Section 4.c, below.

4.b 10CJB-2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

Remove the top plate of the Model 10CJB-2 box (4 screws in corners). Inside the box are two sets of labelled screw terminals, one for each of the 10A72-2C's input channels ("A" and "B"). You will connect your gage wires directly to these terminals, as shown in Fig. 6, and, if necessary, interconnect certain terminal pairs by means of jumper wires. Gage leads should enter the 10CJB-2 through the cutout on the right-hand side of the box.

NOTE: You must furnish your own pin-to-pin shielded cable for connecting the 10CJB-2 to the 10A72-2C's rear I/O CONNECTOR (see Table 2 for pin assignments)—or you may use a special cable furnished by Daytronic. In either case, Daytronic will supply terminal connectors for the cable.

Fig. 6 Model 10CJB-2 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Signal"] --> B["Excitation"]
    B --> C["-SIG"]
    B --> D["1/2 BR"]
    B --> E["-EX"]
    B --> F["120"]
    B --> G["350"]
    B --> H["+SIG"]
    B --> I["+EX"]
    J["Model 10CJ B-2 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1 or 2)"]

graph TD
    A["Model 10CJ B-2 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1 or 2)"] --> B["Signal"]
    B --> C["Excitation"]
    C --> D["-SIG"]
    C --> E["1/2 BR"]
    C --> F["-EX"]
    C --> G["120"]
    C --> H["350"]
    C --> I["+SIG"]
    C --> J["+EX"]

graph TD
    A["Signal"] --> B["+ Excitation"]
    C["-Excitation"] --> D["Switch"]
    E["Sig"] --> F["+ Excitation"]
    G["1/2 BR"] --> H["-SIG"]
    I["-EX"] --> J["-SIG"]
    K["120"] --> L["+SIG"]
    M["350"] --> N["+SIG"]
    O["+EX"] --> P["+SIG"]
    Q["Model 10CJ B-2 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1 or 2)"]

Fig. 6(d) Full-Bridge Connection Model 10CJ B-2 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1 or 2) -Signal -Excitation +Signal +Excitation -SIG 1/2 BR -EX 120 350 +SIG +EX

Fig. 6(a) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a 2-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (represented by the single gage resistor). Here, you must install a jumper wire between the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals, and between the +SIG terminal and either the 120 terminal or the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.
Fig. 6(b) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a 3-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (again represented by the single gage resistor). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied. The gage's third (self-compensating) lead is connected either to the 120 terminal or to the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.
Fig. 6(c) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a 1/2-bridge gage configuration (represented by the two connected gage resistors). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied.
Fig. 6(d) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a full-bridge gage configuration (represented by the four connected gage resistors).

4.c CALIBRATION

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

You can calibrate a 10A72-2C channel receiving strain-gage input from a Model 10CJB-2 Bridge Completion Card by applying the MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command as described in Section 3.d, above. Note however that, in this case,

• for "i" (the transducer sensitivity rating), you should enter one of the following full-scale "mV/V" values, whichever corresponds to the channel's "type" setting (see Table 1): 0.75 (for "Type 70"), 1.50 (for "Type 71"), or 3.00 (for "Type 72").
• for "u" (the nominal full-scale rating), you should enter the full-scale microstrain range that corresponds to the selected transducer sensitivity rating, as given in the following table:

Table 3 Strain Gage Microstrain Ranges (10A72-2C)
Full-Scale Full-Scale Output (mV/V) Microstrain Range

0.75 u = 3000 / (N · G)

1.50 u = 6000 / (N · G)

3.00 u = 12000 / (N · G)

Here, “N” is the number of active strain-gage arms in the gage configuration. Thus, for a 1/4-bridge gage, N = 1; for a half-bridge gage, N = 2; and for a full-bridge gage, N = 4. “G” is the gage factor of the strain gage, and is normally provided by the manufacturer.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

See Section 3.d, above, for the general procedure. Your first calibration point (entered via the ZERO (ZRO) command) should be zero. Your second calibration point (entered via the FORCE (FRC) command) should be expressed in microstrain (microinches/inch).

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION

See Section 3.d, above, for the general procedure. Your EQUIVALENT INPUT value, which is entered via the FORCE (FRC) command—following zeroing of the channel and switching in of the shunt resistor)—should be expressed in microstrain (microinches/inch).

COARSE ZERO OFFSET

In the event that, during “Two-Point” or “Simulated” calibration of the 10CJB-2 channel, you are unable to set the desired span via the FORCE (FRC) command, you can apply a positive or negative zero offset of approximately 1 mV/V for balance correction, as follows:

1. Remove the top plate of the 10CJB-2 box and locate the three programming jumper pads for the channel in question. Labelled "A" for Channel 1 and "B" for Channel 2, the pads are near the left edge of the 10CJB-2 circuit board.
2. Place a solder drop between the center pad and either the “+” or “-” pad, depending on the desired offset polarity.
3. Re-enter your ZRO and FRC values (with or without calibration "shunt").

MODEL 10A73-4

1/2 & 1/4 BRIDGE STRAIN GAGE CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Intended primarily for stress analysis applications, the Model 10A73-4 receives and conditions up to four independent inputs from one-arm (1/4-bridge), two-arm (1/2-bridge), and four-arm (full-bridge) strain gage configurations attached directly to the stressed material.

If you are measuring strain by means of a one-arm (1/4-bridge) strain gage configuration, BE SURE TO STUDY SECTION 4 FOR A DISCUSSION OF "LEAD WIRE AND NONLINEARITY EFFECTS WITH QUARTER-BRIDGE STRAIN GAGE CONFIGURATION."

Unless all four inputs originate from full-bridge transducers, the 10A73-4 requires external completion of each strain gage input to full bridge, by means of one of the following:

- a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector—one of the following models:

— 10QBC-4-120 for 2- or 3-wire 120-Ω quarter-bridge connections
— 10QBC-4-350 for 2- or 3-wire 350-Ω quarter-bridge connections
— 10QBC-4-1K for 2- or 3-wire1000-Ω quarter-bridge connections
— 10HBC-4 for 4- or 6-wire half-bridge connections
— 10FBC-4 for 5-wire full-bridge connections

• a Daytronic Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card (described in Section 2.b) ^1 ;
  • equivalent circuitry supplied by the user ^2

When the 10A73-4 is used with one of the System 10 Bridge Completion Connectors listed above, the excitation level is fixed at 5 V-DC. In the absence of a Bridge Completion Connector—whether or not the Model 10CJB-4 is used—the 10A73-4 provides selectable low-level excitation (1, 2, or 5 V-DC) to help reduce gage heating effects in materials with low thermal conductivity. ^3 However, the selection of excitation level for the 10A73-4 is not “per channel”; the same level applies to all four 10A73-4 channels. See Section 3.a for details.

As explained in Section 3.b, the 10A73-4 can be quickly calibrated either through "calculated" calibration—involving application of the MVV command—or through a convenient shunt technique. Unless a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector is being used with the 10A73-4, all four shunt resistors may be switched in and out simultaneously by means of logic-level inputs through the rear I/O CONNECTOR.

ADDITIONAL 10A73-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 1-arm (1/4-bridge), 2-arm (1/2-bridge), or 4-arm (full-bridge) strain-gage configurations. 2-wire or 3-wire 1/4-bridge configurations may use either 120 Ω, 350 Ω, or 1 kΩ nominal gage resistance; full-bridge configurations should use 350-Ω gages (or higher) or should use 120-Ω gages with either 1-V or 2-V excitation. Unless all four inputs originate from full-bridge transducers, the Model 10A73-4 requires either an appropriate System 10 Bridge Completion Connector; a Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card; or equivalent bridge-completion circuitry supplied by the user.

Transducer Ranges: ±0.750, 1.500, or 3.000 mV/V; for System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to 10A73-4 data channels, see Table 1

Excitation (for all four channels): Sensed excitation selectable 1, 2, or 5 V-DC (i.e., ±0.5, ±1, or ±2.5 V-DC, respectively), nominal

Amplifier (per channel):

Common-Mode Range: ±0.4 V operating; ±5 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -90 dB; at 60 Hz, 1 kHz, and 3 kHz: -120 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: greater than 100 MΩ; Common-Mode: greater than 100 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.04% of full scale; vs. temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. time: ±10 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy*: ±0.02% of full scale with 5-V excitation; ±0.02% of full scale with 1-V or 2-V excitation typical, following calibration

Gain Stability: vs. temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 100 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

Auxiliary Output: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins

Table 1 10A73-4 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale ChannelInput Type Code

0.750 mV/V 70

1.500 mV/V 71

3.000 mV/V 72

2 GAGE / TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

Table 2, below, gives pin assignments for the 10A73-4's rear I/O CONNECTOR, to which appropriate BRIDGE COMPLETION CIRCUITRY must be attached, unless all four inputs originate from full-bridge transducers.

Section 2.a describes the cabling to be used with System 10 Bridge Completion Connectors.

Section 2.b describes the cabling to be used with the Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card.

Section 2.c describes the cabling to be used in the absence of bridge-completion circuitry (i.e., connection to four full-bridge transducers).

IMPORTANT: The ±EXCITATION, ±SENSE, and ±SIGNAL pins for an UNUSED STRAIN GAGE INPUT CHANNEL should be jumpered at the I/O CONNECTOR or in the BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR as shown in Fig. 1, below. If an input is left open, high-frequency oscillation can result, which can in turn produce significant interchannel crosstalk, and possibly inaccurate data readings.

ALSO NOTE: Logic connections for remote control of shunt calibration (using the I/O CONNECTOR'S "NOT ±CALIBRATE" pins) are discussed in Section 3.b and shown in Fig. 8. Note that these logic-level inputs are not available for use when a Bridge Completion Card is attached to the 10A73-4.

Table 2 Model 10A73-4 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	1	C	AL SENSE
B	*	+EXCITATION
3	2	+SIGNAL
C	2	-SIGNAL
4	2	CAL SENSE
D	*		+SENSE
5	3	+SIGNAL
E	3	-SIGNAL
6	3	C	AL SENSE
F	*	-SENSE
7	4	+SIGNAL
H	4	-SIGNAL
8	4	CAL SENSE
J	*	-EXCITATION
9	*	NOT +CALIBRATE
K	*	EXC PROGRAMMING
10	*	NOT -CALIBRATE
L	*	POWER COMMON

graph TD
    A["Model 10A73-4 I/O Connector or Bridge Completion Card"] --> B["+ EX (All Chns.)"]
    A --> C["+ SEN (All Chns.)"]
    A --> D["-EX (All Chns.)"]
    A --> E["-SEN (All Chns.)"]
    A --> F["+ SIG (Chn. n)"]
    A --> G["-SIG (Chn. n)"]
    A --> H["PWR COM or SHIELD (All Chns.)"]
    B --> I["THESE JUMPERS ARE NEEDED IF AND ONLY IF III THE ENTIRE 10A73-4 CARD II IS INSTALLED BUT UNUSED."]
    C --> I
    D --> I
    E --> I
    F --> I
    G --> I
    H --> I

* This function is common to all four channels.

2.a 1/4-, 1/2-, OR FULL-BRIDGE GAGE CONNECTIONS USING A SYSTEM 10 BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR

Each System 10 Bridge Completion Connector attaches directly to the rear I/O CONNECTOR of the Model 10A73-4.

Remove the top plate of the connector. Inside are four sets of labelled screw terminals, corresponding to the 10A73-4's four input channels. You will connect your gage wires directly to these terminals and, if necessary, interconnect certain terminal pairs by means of jumper wires. All gage leads should be securely clamped by means of the two cable clamps.

Fig. 2 shows per-channel connections between external strain-gage configurations and the respective System 10 Bridge Completion Connectors.

NOTE: Unlike the Model 10CJB-4, the Bridge Completion Connectors DO NOT PERMIT MIXING OF CONNECTED GAGE CONFIGURATION TYPES. That is, all gage configurations connected to the same Bridge Completion Connector must be of the same appropriate type (e.g., 120-Ω 1/4-bridge, 1/2-bridge, etc.).

When input connections involve pairs of EXCITATION, SENSE, and/or SIGNAL lines, these should be twisted pairs within the input cable. While it is desirable to shield such pairs individually (as shown in Fig. 2), this is not necessary; an overall cable shield is acceptable.

Note too that the full-bridge input connections given in Fig. 2(e) are to be used if one or more of the 10A73-4's other inputs derives from a less than full-bridge configuration. If all four inputs originate from full-bridge configurations, no completion circuitry is required (see Section 2.c and Fig. 4).

Fig. 2 Model 10A73-4 Strain Gage Cabling Using System 10 Bridge Completion Connectors
Fig. 2(a) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10QBC-4* for 2-Wire 1/4-Bridge Completion

Per-Channel ons to Model for 2-Wire e Completion Model 10QBC-4 +EXC CAL SEN +SIGNAL -EXC SHIELD Signal Excitation

Fig. 2(b) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10QBC-4* for 3-Wire 1/4-Bridge Completion

Model 10QBC-4 +EXC CAL SEN +SIGNAL -EXC SHIELD Signal Excitation

* I.e., Model QBC-4-120, QBC-4-350, or QBC-4-1K.

Fig. 2(c) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10HBC-4 for 4-Wire 1/2-Bridge Completion

graph LR
    A["Signal"] -->|+Excitation| B["+EXC"]
    A -->|-Excitation| C["-SENSE"]
    B --> D["+SENSE"]
    C --> E["+SIGNAL"]
    D --> F["Model 10HBC-4"]
    E --> G["-SENSE"]
    F --> H["-EXC"]
    G --> I["SHIELD"]
    H --> J["Twisted Pair"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Fig. 2(d) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10HBC-4 for 6-Wire 1/2-Bridge Completion

graph TD
    A["+Excitation"] --> B["Swisted Pair"]
    C["Signal"] --> D["Swisted Pair"]
    E["-Excitation"] --> F["Swisted Pair"]
    B --> G["Model 10HBC-4"]
    D --> G
    F --> G
    G --> H["+EXC"]
    G --> I["+SENSE"]
    G --> J["CAL SEN"]
    G --> K["+SIGNAL"]
    G --> L["-SENSE"]
    G --> M["-EXC"]
    G --> N["SHIELD"]

Fig. 2(e) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10FBC-4 for Full-Bridge Connection

graph TD
    A["Resistors"] --> B["+Excitation"]
    B --> C["+Signal"]
    C --> D["-Excitation"]
    D --> E["-Signal"]
    F["Twisted Pair"] --> G["Model 10FBC-4"]
    G --> H["EXC"]
    G --> I["CAL SEN"]
    G --> J["+SIGNAL"]
    G --> K["-SENSE"]
    G --> L["-EXC"]
    G --> M["SHIELD"]
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

2.b 1/4-, 1/2-, OR FULL-BRIDGE GAGE CONNECTIONS USING THE MODEL 10CJB-4

Remove the top plate of the Model 10CJB-4 box (4 screws in corners). Inside the box are four sets of labelled screw terminals, one for each of the 10A73-4's input channels ("A," "B," "C," and "D"). You will connect your gage wires directly to these terminals, as shown in Fig. 3, and, if necessary, interconnect certain terminal pairs by means of jumper wires. Gage leads should enter the 10CJB-4 through the cutout on the right-hand side of the box.

NOTE: You must furnish your own pin-to-pin shielded cable for connecting the 10CJB-4 to the 10A73-4's rear I/O CONNECTOR (see Table 2 for pin assignments)—or you may use a special cable furnished by Daytronic. In either case, Daytronic will supply terminal connectors for the cable.

Fig. 3(a) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a 2-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (represented by the single gage resistor). Here, you must install a jumper wire between the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals, and between the +SIG terminal and either the 120 terminal or the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.

Fig. 3 Model 10CJB-4 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Signal"] --> B["Excitation"]
    B --> C["-SIG"]
    B --> D["1/2 BR"]
    B --> E["-EX"]
    B --> F["120"]
    B --> G["350"]
    B --> H["+SIG"]
    B --> I["+EX"]
    J["Model 10CJ B-4 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1, 2, 3, or 4)"]

graph TD
    A["Excitation"] --> B["Signal"]
    B --> C["-SIG"]
    B --> D["1/2 BR"]
    B --> E["-EX"]
    B --> F["120"]
    B --> G["350"]
    B --> H["+SIG"]
    B --> I["+EX"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

graph TD
    A["Signal"] --> B["+ Excitation"]
    C["-Excitation"] --> D["1/2 BR"]
    D --> E["−SIG"]
    D --> F["−EX"]
    F --> G["120"]
    G --> H["350"]
    H --> I["+SIG"]
    H --> J["+EX"]

Fig. 3(d) Full-Bridge Connection Model 10CJ B-4 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1, 2, 3, or 4) -Signal -Excitation +Signal + Excitation -SIG 1/2 BR -EX 120 350 +SIG +EX

graph TD
    subgraph_Channel_1["Channel 1"]
        direction TB
        A1["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 1)"]
        A2["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 1)"]
        A3["-SIGNAL (CHN. 1)"]
    end
    subgraph_Channel_2["Channel 2"]
        direction TB
        A4["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 2)"]
        A5["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 2)"]
        A6["-SIGNAL (CHN. 2)"]
    end
    subgraph_Channel_3["Channel 3"]
        direction TB
        A7["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 3)"]
        A8["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 3)"]
        A9["-Excitation"]
        direction TB
        A10["-SIGNAL (CHN. 3)"]
    end
    subgraph_Channel_4["Channel 4"]
        direction TB
        A11["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 4)"]
        A12["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 4)"]
        A13["-SIGNAL (CHN. 4)"]
    end
    D --> D1["D"]
    D --> D2["D"]
    D --> D3["D"]
    D --> D4["D"]
    D --> D5["D"]
    D --> D6["D"]
    D --> D7["D"]
    D --> D8["D"]
    D --> D9["D"]
    D --> D10["D"]
    D --> D11["D"]
    D --> D12["D"]
    D --> D13["D"]
    D --> D14["D"]
    D --> D15["D"]
    D --> D16["D"]
    D --> D17["D"]
    D --> D18["D"]
    D --> D19["D"]
    D --> D20["D"]
    D --> D21["D"]
    D --> D22["D"]
    D --> D23["D"]
    D --> D24["D"]
    D --> D25["D"]
    D --> D26["D"]
    D --> D27["D"]
    D --> D28["D"]
    D --> D29["D"]
    D --> D30["D"]
    D --> D31["D"]
    D --> D32["D"]
    D --> D33["D"]
    D --> D34["D"]
    D --> D35["D"]
    D --> D36["D"]
    D --> D37["D"]
    D --> D38["D"]
    D --> D39["D"]
    D --> D40["D"]
    D --> D41["D"]
    D --> D42["D"]
    D --> D43["D"]
    D --> D44["D"]
    D --> D45["D"]
    D --> D46["D"]
    D --> D47["D"]
    D --> D48["D"]
    D --> D49["D"]
    D --> D50["D"]
    D --> D51["D"]
    D --> D52["D"]
    D --> D53["D"]
    D --> D54["D"]
    D --> D55["D"]
    D --> D56["D"]
    D --> D57["D"]
    D --> D58["D"]
    D --> D59["D"]
    D --> D60["D"]
    D --> D61["D"]
    D --> D62["D"]
    D --> D63["D"]
    D --> D64["D"]
    D --> D65["D"]
    D --> D66["D"]
    D --> D67["D"]
    D --> D68["D"]
    D --> D69["D"]
    D --> D70["D"]
    style Channel_1 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_2 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_3 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_4 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_5 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_6 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_7 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_8 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_9 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_10 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_11 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_12 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_13 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_14 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_15 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_16 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_17 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_18 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_19 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_20 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_21 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_22 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_23 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_24 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_25 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_26 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_27 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_28 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_29 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_30 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_31 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_32 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_33 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_34 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_35 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_36 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_37 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_38 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_39 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_40 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_41 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_42 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_43 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_44 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_45 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_46 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_47 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_48 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_49 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_50 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_51 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_52 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_53 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_54 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_55 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_56 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_57 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_58 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_59 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Channel_60 fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Fig. 4 10A73-4 Cabling to Four Full-Bridge Transducers

Fig. 3(b) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a 3-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (again represented by the single gage resistor). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied. The gage's third (self-compensating) lead is connected either to the 120 terminal or to the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.

Fig. 3(c) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a 1/2-bridge gage configuration (represented by the two connected gage resistors). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied.

Fig. 3(d) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a full-bridge gage configuration (represented by the four connected gage resistors).

2.c FULL-BRIDGE TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS (WITHOUT BRIDGE COMPLETION)

In the absence of bridge-completion circuitry, the 10A73-4's I/O CONNECTOR will mate with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Pinout for the I/O CONNECTOR is given in Table 2, above. The required cabling is shown in Fig. 4, above.

Note that the main 16-wire shielded cable should contain 20- to 24-gage wires. The length of the main cable—i.e., the distance from the 10A73-4's rear I/O CONNECTOR to the two "sensing points"—may be up to 500 feet. At the sensing points, the + SENSE

and -SENSE lines join the corresponding EXCITATION lines, and the main cable divides into four separately shielded 5-wire cables (one to each full-bridge transducer). These secondary cables should contain 16- to 20-gage wires. It is important that the distance "D" from the sensing points to each transducer be as short as possible; a maximum error of 0.02% could arise for every 3.5 ft. of 20-gage wire over the distance "D," and for every 9 ft. of 16-gage wire.

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

When a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector (Model 10QBC-4-120, 10QBC-4-350, 10QBC-4-1K, 10HBC-4, or 10FBC-4) is used with the Model 10A73-4, the excitation level for all four channels is fixed at 5 volts, and cannot be changed without a special modification to the 10A73-4 card.

When the Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card is used with the Model 10A73-4, you will use the three-position switch on the 10CJB-4 board to set the excitation level for all four 10A73-4 channels to 1, 2, or 5 volts. The switch is shown in Fig. 5, below.

When a Bridge Completion Card or 10CJB-4 is absent, you may use Pin K of the 10A73-4's rear I/O CONNECTOR to select the desired excitation for all four channels, as indicated in Fig. 6. Leaving Pin K open selects an excitation of 5 volts; tying Pin K to Pin L selects 2 volts; and tying Pin K to Pin J selects 1 volt.

Fig. 5 Model 10CJB-4 Offset Jumpers and Excitation Selection Switch CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) Tie K to J for 1-V excitation Leave OPEN for 5-V excitation Tie K to L for 2-V excitation Fig. 6 Model 10A73-4 Excitation Selection Without Bridge Completion

3.b CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A73-4 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A73-4 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, when a Model 10A73-4 is connected to quarter-bridge or half-bridge gage configurations for purposes of stress analysis, you can perform both "CALCULATED" and "SIMULATED (SHUNT)" calibration of any of its input channels, regardless of the type of bridge completion being used for that channel. In general, the conventional "TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT)" method does not apply in such cases.

When a 10A73-4 is connected to full-bridge strain gage transducers, "TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT)" calibration may be applied, in addition to or as an alternative to "CAL-CULATED" and "SIMULATED (SHUNT)" calibration.

NOTE: If you are using a Model 10CJB-4 for bridge completion of a 10A73-4 channel and, prior to initial calibration, observe a significantly nonzero reading when no load is placed on the gage(s), you may impose a nominal ±1 mV/V offset by means of solder pads in the 10CJB-4 box. See Section 3.c for complete instructions.

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

To calibrate a 10A73-4-based Channel No. "x,"

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command:

$$ \mathbf {M V V} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {i}, \mathbf {u} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

For “i” (the transducer sensitivity rating), you should enter one of the following full-scale “mV/V” values, whichever corresponds to the channel’s “type” setting (see Table 1): 0.750 (for “Type 70”), 1.500 (for “Type 71”), or 3.000 (for “Type 72”).

For “u” (the nominal full-scale rating), you should enter the full-scale microstrain range that corresponds to the selected transducer sensitivity rating, as given in the following table:

Table 3 Strain Gage Microstrain Ranges (10A73-4)

Full-Scale Full-ScaleOutput (mV/V) Microstrain Range

0.750 u = 3000 / (N · G)

1.500 u = 6000 / (N · G)

3.000 u = 12000 / (N · G)

Here, “N” is the number of active strain-gage arms in the gage configuration. Thus, for a 1/4-bridge gage, N = 1; for a half-bridge gage, N = 2; and for a full-bridge gage, N = 4. “G” is the gage factor of the strain gage, and is normally provided by the manufacturer.

The MVV command will only work if Channel No. x has been assigned the proper "type" code ("70," "71," or "72"). Note that a channel calibrated by the MVV command will report measurement data to a precision matching that of the entered "u" value.

1. Zero the channel by commanding

ZRO x [CR]

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

PLEASE NOTE: AS MENTIONED ABOVE, THIS CALIBRATION TECHNIQUE GENERALLY APPLIES TO A MODEL 10A73-4 CHANNEL ONLY WHEN THAT CHANNEL IS CONNECTED TO A FULL-BRIDGE STRAIN GAGE TRANSDUCER, AS ARE THE FOUR CHANNELS SHOWN IN FIG. 4.

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a "full-bridge" 10A73-4 channel if the full-scale "mV/V" rating of the channel's strain gage transducer is unknown, or if the final measurement accuracy provided by CALCULATED CALIBRATION does not meet the requirements of the measurement application. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION

This is a convenient “shunt resistor” method, where the second (“span”) input is not produced by loading the source transducer, but by “simulating” a particular up-scale value of mechanical input. This known EQUIVALENT INPUT then serves to determine the SCALING FACTOR for the channel.*

For a 10A73-4 data channel, the equivalent input is produced by shunting a resistor of known magnitude across one arm of the strain gage bridge, thereby simulating a known value of input for either a positive or negative up-scale reading. If the transducer manufacturer has supplied the exact value of the transducer's equivalent input, it can be used as a reference point for calibrating the channel.

Equivalent input can be approximated from a knowledge of the Shunt Calibration Resistance (R), the transducer's Bridge Resistance (B), and the transducer's Full-Scale Sensitivity (K, in mV/V full scale). To determine the EQUIVALENT INPUT (X) as an approximate percentage of full-scale output, you may use the following equation:

$$ \mathbf {X} = 25000 \mathbf {B} / \mathbf {K} (\mathbf {R} + 0.5 \mathbf {B}) $$

Since the equivalent input is here expressed as a percentage of full-scale output, you must multiply it by the rated full-scale capacity of the transducer, in order to determine the actual input simulated by the shunt.

IMPORTANT: FOR A 10A73-4 CHANNEL WITH BRIDGE COMPLETION—BY MEANS EITHER OF A SYSTEM BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR OR THE MODEL 10CJB-4—THE EQUIVALENT INPUT SHOULD BE EXPRESSED IN MICROSTRAIN (MICROINCHES/INCH).

Fig. 7 Model 10A73-4 Shunt Calibration Resistors

Terminal post for connection of shunt resistor Rear I/O Connector Side 2

* Shunt calibration is easier though generally less accurate than two-point (deadweight) calibration. It is good for an accuracy of about 0.2% (depending, of course, on the accuracy of the specified equivalent input, and on the resistor/bridge tolerance and temperature).

Fig. 8 Logic Inputs for 10A73-4 Remote Shunt Calibration (Without Bridge Completion)

CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 + CALIBRATE PWR COMMON -CALIBRATE A OPEN = Logic 1 (NO ±Calibration) CLOSED = Logic 0 (±Calibration) B

Fig. 8(a) Switch Closure, No External Supply

DITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 + CALIBRATE PWR COMMON - CALIBRATE +5 V TTL +5 V TTL

Fig. 8(b) Active TTL Logic

The 10A73-4 is equipped with a 100-kΩ, 0.1% calibration resistor for each active channel. These resistors are located on turret terminals at the rear of the card (see Fig. 7). You may, if you wish, replace each channel's installed 100K shunt resistor with a resistor of another value (strain-gage transducer manufacturers often supply such resistors with their instruments).

In System 10, a strain gage channel's shunt resistor may be switched in and out by means of the SHUNT CALIBRATE-POSITIVE (SHP) or SHUNT CALIBRATE-NEGATIVE (SHN) command. A RESUME (RSM) command should then be applied to remove the shunt and resume normal channel measurement. Since these are "runtime" commands, the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.6 for general instructions regarding the "SHUNT CALIBRATION" technique in System 10.

NOTE: All four channels' calibration shunts can be simultaneously and "remotely" controlled, if desired, as an alternative to using the software "SHUNT CALIBRATE" commands provided by the system, provided that a System 10 BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR is not attached to the card.* This remote calibration control is accomplished by means of logic-level inputs to the 10A73-4 card. The relevant connections are given in Fig. 8.

Fig. 8(a) shows how the "CALIBRATE POSITIVE" and "CALIBRATE NEGATIVE" commands can be independently applied to all four 10A73-4 channels simultaneously, without the need of an external logic reference supply.

Closing the switch in Fig. 8(a) to contact point "A" will produce a Logic 0 level at Pin 9 ("NOT + CALIBRATE"). Since this is a negative-true logic line, the Logic 0 input will activate the "+CALIBRATE" condition for all four channels. That is, it will switch in each channel's shunt resistor for a positive up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT + CALIBRATE" line from POWER COMMON will then return all channels to the "NO + CALIBRATE" condition.

Similarly, closing the switch to contact point "B" will produce a Logic 0 level at Pin 10 ("NOT -CALIBRATE"), thereby switching in each channel's shunt resistor for a negative up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT -CALIBRATE" line from POWER COMMON will then return all channels to the "NO -CALIBRATE" condition.

You may also use active TTL logic, as illustrated in Fig. 8(b), to produce the “+CALIBRATE” or “-CALIBRATE” condition for all four 10A73-4 channels.

3.c SETTING AN INITIAL ZERO OFFSET WITH THE MODEL 10CJB-4

Often the very process of mounting strain gages to the stressed material can introduce a significant residual strain, which will become apparent as a large nonzero offset in the data reading prior to initial calibration. When you are using the Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card with the Model 10A73-4, you can remove at least a portion of this initial strain component for a given 10A73-4 channel by applying an approximate 1 mV/V positive or negative offset, as follows:

1. Remove the top plate of the 10CJB-4 box (4 screws in corners).
2. Refer to Fig. 5 and locate the set of three "1 MV/V OFFSET" jumper pads corresponding to the channel in question (like the 10CJB-4's terminal blocks, the pad sets are labelled "A," "B," "C," and "D"—corresponding to 10A73-4 Subchannel Nos 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively).
3. Remove all load from the source gage(s).
4. Observe the data reading of the channel. If it is a positive nonzero value, apply a negative 1 mV/V offset by carefully placing a solder drop between the center pad and the “−” pad. If it is a negative nonzero value, place a solder drop between the center pad and the “+” pad.
5. Now calibrate the channel to remove any remaining offset.

4 LEAD-WIRE AND NONLINEARITY EFFECTS WITH QUARTER-BRIDGE STRAIN GAGE CONFIGURATION

In stress analysis applications, it often happens that the completion resistors for a quarter-bridge strain gage are located some distance from the gage. If the resistance of the wires connecting the gage to the completion circuitry is considerable, it can "desensitize" the bridge, producing less output voltage from the bridge for a given amount of strain as the wire resistance increases.

A second cause of possible inaccuracy is the slight nonlinearity inherent in all bridge configurations. This nonlinearity is proportional to the amount of "upset" of the bridge. For small amounts of strain (below about 5000 microstrain, with a gage factor of 2), the output is nearly linear. However, as the change in gage resistance increases due to increasing strain, the nonlinearity effect becomes measurable.

4.a PREVENTING THE EFFECTS OF LEAD-WIRE RESISTANCE

When connecting a Model 10A73-4 to a quarter-bridge strain gage configuration, you can eliminate all effects of reasonable lead wire resistance by using a Model 10CJB-4

graph TD
    A["+S"] --> B["Gage & Cable"]
    B --> C["Rb"]
    C --> D["Rb"]
    D --> E["+Exc"]
    E --> F["+Sense"]
    F --> G["To +Exc Circuit"]
    H["Rb"] --> I["Gage & Cable"]
    I --> J["Rb"]
    J --> K["-S"]
    K --> L["+Signal"]
    L --> M["Cal Sense"]
    M --> N["Rs (100K .1% provided)"]
    N --> O["A"]
    O --> P["Negative"]
    P --> Q["Positive Resume"]
    Q --> R["To First Amp"]
    S["-S"] --> T["Rb"]
    T --> U["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    V["-S"] --> W["-Exc"]
    W --> X["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    Y["S"] --> Z["-Signal"]
    Z --> AA["Cal Sense"]
    AB["S"] --> AC["-Sense"]
    AC --> AD["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AE["S"] --> AF["-Exc"]
    AF --> AG["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AH["S"] --> AI["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AJ["S"] --> AK["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AL["S"] --> AM["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AN["S"] --> AO["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AP["S"] --> AQ["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AR["S"] --> AS["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AT["S"] --> AU["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AV["S"] --> AW["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AX["S"] --> AY["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    AZ["S"] --> BA["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BB["S"] --> BC["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BD["S"] --> BE["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BF["S"] --> BG["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BH["S"] --> BI["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BJ["S"] --> BK["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BL["S"] --> BM["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BN["S"] --> BO["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BP["S"] --> BQ["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BR["S"] --> BS["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BT["S"] --> BU["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BV["S"] --> BW["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BX["S"] --> BY["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    BZ["S"] --> CA["Bridge Completion Circuit"]
    CA --> CB["+Exc"]
    CA --> CC["+Sense"]
    CA --> DD["Cal Sense"]
    DD --> DE["+Signal"]
    DE --> DF["Cal Sense"]
    DF --> DG["+Signal"]
    DG --> DH["Cal Sense"]
    DH --> DI["Cal Sense"]
    DI --> DJ["+Signal"]
    DJ --> DK["Cal Sense"]
    DK --> DL["+Signal"]
    DL --> DV["Cal Sense"]
    DV --> DW["Cal Sense"]
    DX["S"] --> DXA["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXA --> DXB["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXB --> DXC["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXC --> DXD["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXF["S"] --> DXG["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXG --> DXH["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXH --> DXI["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXJ["S"] --> DXK["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXK --> DXL["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]
    DXL --> DXM["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"]

Fig. 9 Shunt Calibration with a 3-Wire, Single-Active Strain Gage

Four-Channel Bridge Completion Card in the vicinity of the gages, since the 10CJB-4 has inherent bridge-voltage sensing. WHERE THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE, YOU SHOULD USE A SHUNT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE with a three-wire run to the gage (see Fig. 9).*

Use the shunt ONLY ON THE INACTIVE COMPLETION ARM, AS SHOWN, INSTEAD OF ON THE GAGE ARM. To find the EQUIVALENT STRAIN (S) for a given GAGE FACTOR (G), BRIDGE RESISTANCE ( R_b ), and SHUNT RESISTANCE ( R_s ), use this expression:

$$ \mathbf {S} = \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{b}} / \mathbf {G} (\mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{b}} + \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{s}}) $$

To determine the shunt resistance required to simulate a given amount of strain, you can solve for R_s :

$$ \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{s}} = \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{b}} (1 - \mathbf {G S}) / \mathbf {G S} $$

If shunt calibration is not possible, you can alternatively compensate for the effects of lead wire resistance by applying a CORRECTED SCALING FACTOR of

$$ \mathbf {m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = \mathbf {m} (1 + R _ {\mathrm{L}} / R _ {\mathrm{b}}) $$

where "m" is the "normal" SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), which is determined for the strain gage conditioner during calibration (see Section 3.b, above); "R L " is the lead wire resistance; and "R b " is the resistance of each of the three bridge-completion resistors (see Fig. 9).

Suppose, for example, that you are using a Model 10A73-4 channel for quarter-bridge strain measurement, with bridge completion provided by the Model 10QBC-4. Assume a gage factor ("G") of 2, a lead wire resistance R_L of 2.5 Ω, and a bridge resistance R_b of 350 Ω. If the 10A73-4 channel is configured for full-scale ±30,000 μS (= 0.03 S), its normal "m" factor is determined by the equation

$$ \mathrm{m} = 6 0, 0 0 0 / (\mathrm{N} \times \mathrm{G}) $$

as explained in Section 3.b. Since the number of gages (N) = 1,

$$ \mathrm{m} = 6 0, 0 0 0 / \mathrm{G} = 3 0, 0 0 0 $$

* Buffered by a low-offset, low-drift, high-impedance, unity-gain amplifier (A), the solid-state shunt-calibration switch prevents the shunt current from flowing in the excitation sense lines. The switch itself is controlled by the software SHUNT CALIBRATE-POSITIVE (SHP), SHUNT CALIBRATE-NEGATIVE (SHN), and RESUME (RSM) commands.

—and the corrected SCALING FACTOR in units of STRAIN is therefore

$$ \mathrm{m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = (3 0, 0 0 0) \left(1 + \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{L}} / \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{b}}\right) = (3 0, 0 0 0) (1. 0 0 7) = 3 0, 2 1 0 $$

This corrected factor can then be applied to the strain gage channel in question by means of the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command.

4.b PREVENTING THE EFFECTS OF BRIDGE NONLINEARITY

The effects of this nonlinearity can be minimized by SHUNT CALIBRATION at 80% of the expected full-scale strain, thus distributing it more uniformly over the range. WHERE THE GAGE IS TO BE USED IN EITHER TENSION OR COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS—BUT NOT BOTH—an additional compensating term can be employed to determine the fully corrected SCALING FACTOR:

$$ \mathbf {m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = \mathbf {m} (1 + \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{L}} / \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{b}} \pm (\mathbf {G S}) / 2) $$

Choose the STRAIN (S) to equal 80% of the expected maximum strain. IF THE GAGE IS USED IN TENSION MEASUREMENT, THE TERM "(GS)/2" IS TO BE ADDED; IF IT IS USED IN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENT, THE TERM IS TO BE SUBTRACTED. Note too that the lead wire correction term " R_L/R_b " can be discarded if its contribution is negligible.

Using the same example as above, where "S" = 0.03, and now assuming that the gage is intended to measure TENSION only, we have

$$ \mathrm{m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = (3 0, 0 0 0) \left(1 + \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{L}} / \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{b}} + (\mathrm{GS}) / 2\right) = (3 0, 0 0 0) (1. 0 3 7) = 3 1, 1 1 0 $$

MODEL 10A74-4C

QUAD STRAIN GAGE TRACK-HOLD CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Intended primarily for stress analysis applications, the Model 10A74-4C receives and conditions up to four independent inputs from one-arm (1/4-bridge), two-arm (1/2-bridge), and four-arm (full-bridge) strain gage configurations attached directly to the stressed material.

If you are measuring strain by means of a one-arm (1/4-bridge) strain gage configuration, BE SURE TO STUDY SECTION 4 FOR A DISCUSSION OF "LEAD WIRE AND NONLINEARITY EFFECTS WITH QUARTER-BRIDGE STRAIN GAGE CONFIGURATION."

To minimize “time-skew” effects, each 10A74-4C input has a separate TRACK/HOLD circuit. Upon application of a “HOLD” command, the channel will instantly freeze its present value in analog memory until application of a “TRACK” command, whereupon normal tracking of the input signal is resumed. By applying a “HOLD” command simultaneously to all four channels, the user can be assured of a set of readings coherent to within a few microseconds.

As explained in Section 3.e, the TRACK/HOLD function is normally controlled through an external logic signal to the 10A74-4C's rear I/O connector, when a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector or the optional Model 10VAC is not being used. When the conditioner is used in a "B-sized" System 10 mainframe (only), the TRACK/HOLD function may be alternatively controlled through an optional Model 10A1 Control Signal Card mounted in the same "A-card" rack.* Setup of the 10A1 for use with the 10A74-4C is discussed in Section 3.b.

Unless all four inputs originate from full-bridge transducers, the 10A74-4C requires external completion of each strain gage input to full bridge, by means of one of the following:

- a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector—one of the following models:

— 10QBC-4-120 for 2- or 3-wire 120-Ω quarter-bridge connections
— 10QBC-4-350 for 2- or 3-wire 350-Ω quarter-bridge connections
— 10QBC-4-1K for 2- or 3-wire1000-Ω quarter-bridge connections
— 10HBC-4 for 4- or 6-wire half-bridge connections
— 10FBC-4 for 5-wire full-bridge connections

- a Daytronic Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card (described in Section 2.b);

- equivalent circuitry supplied by the user**

* In System 10, the Model 10A1 uses the same system bus as the Model 10A11 Thermocouple Processor Card; therefore, a "10A" THERMOCOUPLE CONDITIONER such as the Model 10A9-8C or 10A10-4 cannot be used in the same System 10 "A-card" rack as a Model 10A1.

** If you wish to provide your own bridge-completion circuitry, you should contact the factory for instructions on connections and calibration.

The 10A74-4C provides selectable low-level excitation (1, 2, 5, or 10 V-DC). Using low excitation helps reduce gage heating effects in stress analysis of materials with low thermal conductivity. Note, however, that with the 10A74-4C, the selection of excitation level is not "per channel"; the same level applies simultaneously to all four 10A74-4C channels. As explained in Section 3.a, selection of the common excitation is accomplished by on-board programming jumpers only (even when a Model 10CJB-4 is connected). ^1

Any 10A74-4C strain gage channel with external bridge completion can be calibrated by either CALCULATED or SIMULATED (SHUNT) calibration; the standard "TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT)" method does not apply to such channels. In this case, "calculated" calibration uses the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command instead of the MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command. For shunt calibration, all four shunt resistors may be switched in and out simultaneously by software command or—when a System 10 Bridge Completion Connector or the Model 10VAC is not being used with the 10A74-4C—by means of logic-level inputs through the rear I/O CONNECTOR.

The Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor is a special screw-terminal connector assembly which allows the 10A74-4C to receive up to four independent external analog signals in place of its normal strain gage inputs, when it is desired to apply the special TRACK/HOLD function of the 10A74-4C to these analog voltage signals. The analog signal source must provide its own power supply; the Model 10A74-4C's standard excitation lines cannot be used. ^2 For instructions on connection and use of the Model 10VAC, see Section 5, below.

ADDITIONAL 10A74-4C SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 1-arm (1/4-bridge), 2-arm (1/2-bridge), or 4-arm (full-bridge) strain-gage configurations; minimum allowable gage resistance will depend on bridge excitation and gage configuration, as shown in Table 1, below. Unless all four inputs originate from full-bridge transducers, the Model 10A74-4C requires either an appropriate System 10 Bridge Completion Connector; a Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card; or equivalent bridge-completion circuitry supplied by the user. With the optional Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor, the Model 10A74-4C can receive up to four external analog signals in place of its normal strain gage inputs (see Section 5).

Table 1 Model 10A74-4C Minimum Gage Resistances
Bridge Gage Minimum Excitation Configuration Gage Resistance

10 V-DC 1/4 & 1/2 Bridge 350 Ω
10 V-DC Full Bridge 350 Ω	3
5 V-DC 1/4 & 1/2 Bridge 120 Ω
5 V-DC Full Bridge	350 Ω
2 V-DC 1/4 & 1/2 Bridge 120 Ω
2 V-DC Full Bridge	60 Ω
1 V-DC 1/4 & 1/2 Bridge	60 Ω
1 V-DC Full Bridge	60 Ω

1 The 10CJB-4's internal excitation selection switch does not apply to the Model 10A74-4C.

2 When the 10VAC is used with the 10A74-4C, the card's excitation level must be set to ±5 V-DC.

NOTE: When the 10A74-4C is used with four 350- full-bridge transducers at 10 V-DC excitation, a special modification of the card is required to provide proper current for excitation of each bridge. Also, no more than 16 Model 10A74-4C cards using this excitation/configuration combination for all four channels can be installed in any one System 10 "A-card" rack.

Transducer Ranges: ±7500, 15000, or 30000 microstrain; with the optional Model

10VAC: ±5, 10, or 20 V-DC (mixed as desired); automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to 10A74-4C data channels, see Table 2

Excitation (for all four channels): Sensed excitation jumper-selectable 1, 2, 5, or 10 V-DC (i.e., ±0.5, ±1, ±2.5, or ±5.0 V-DC, respectively), nominal; excitation not used with optional Model 10VAC

Amplifier (per channel)—without optional Model 10VAC:

Common-Mode Range: ±0.4 V operating; ±5 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -90 dB; at 60 Hz, 1 kHz, and 3 kHz: -120 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: greater than 100 MΩ; Common-Mode: greater than 100 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±12 μS; vs. Temperature: ±0.6 μS/°C; vs. Time: ±0.3 μS/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale with 5-V excitation; ±0.15% of full scale for all other excitation levels

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Analog Memory Decay Rate: Less than ±1 mV/sec*

Amplifier (per channel)—with optional Model 10VAC:

Normal-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±50 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±20 V operating; ±50 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -100 dB; at 60 Hz, 1 kHz, and 3 kHz: -150 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 2 MΩ; Common-Mode: 0.5 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.05% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±10 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.04% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 100 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered outputs available on mainframe wire-wrap pins**

Table 2 10A74-4C "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Input Full-Scale Input Channel (without 10VAC) (with 10VAC) Type Code

±7500 microstrain ±5 V-DC 70

±15000 microstrain ±10 V-DC 71

±30000 microstrain ±20 V-DC 72

* Allows essentially perfect capture of data when used in conjunction with the Model 10A1 Control Signal Card and appropriate computer communication commands (see Section 3.b).

** Unfiltered outputs are available on special versions. Contact the factory for details.

2 GAGE / TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

Table 3, below, gives pin assignments for the 10A74-4C's rear I/O CONNECTOR, to which appropriate BRIDGE COMPLETION CIRCUITRY must be attached, unless all four inputs originate from full-bridge transducers. For connection of voltage signals to an optional Model 10VAC attached to this connector, see Section 5.

Section 2.a describes the cabling to be used with System 10 Bridge Completion Connectors.

Section 2.b describes the cabling to be used with the Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card.

Section 2.c describes the cabling to be used in the absence of bridge-completion circuitry (i.e., connection to four full-bridge transducers).

IMPORTANT: The ±EXCITATION, ±SENSE, and ±SIGNAL pins for an UNUSED STRAIN GAGE INPUT CHANNEL should be jumpered at the I/O CONNECTOR or in the BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR as shown in Fig. 1, below. If an input is left open, high-frequency oscillation can result, which can in turn produce significant interchannel crosstalk, and possibly inaccurate data readings.

ALSO NOTE: Logic connections for remote control of shunt calibration (using the I/O CONNECTOR'S "NOT ±CALIBRATE" pins) are discussed in Section 3.c and shown in Fig. 6. Logic connections for remote control of Track/Hold operation (using the I/O CONNECTOR'S "TRACK/NOT HOLD" pin) are discussed in Section 3.e and shown in Fig. 6. Note that these logic-level inputs are not available for use when a Bridge Completion Card or Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor is attached to the 10A74-4C.

Table 3 Model 10A74-4C Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Channel Line Number Number Function
1	1	+SIGNAL
A	1	-SIGNAL
2	1	C	AL SENSE
B	*	+EXCITATION
3	2	+SIGNAL
C	2	-SIGNAL
4	2	CAL SENSE
D	*	+SENSE
5	3	+SIGNAL
E	3	-SIGNAL
6	3	C	AL SENSE
F	*	-SENSE
7	4	+SIGNAL
H	4	-SIGNAL
8	4	CAL SENSE
J	*	-EXCITATION
9	*	NOT +CALIBRATE
K	*	ALTERNATE T/H INPUT
10	*	NOT -CALIBRATE
L	*	POWER COMMON

* This function is common to all four channels.

graph TD
    A["Model 10A74-4C I/O Connector or Bridge Completion Card"] --> B["+ EX (All Chns.)"]
    A --> C["+ SEN (All Chns.)"]
    A --> D["- EX (All Chns.)"]
    A --> E["- SEN (All Chns.)"]
    A --> F["+ SIG (Chn. n)"]
    A --> G["-SIG (Chn. n)"]
    H["PWR COM or SHIELD (All Chns.)"] --> G
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

2.a 1/4-, 1/2-, OR FULL-BRIDGE GAGE CONNECTIONS USING A SYSTEM 10 BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR

Each System 10 Bridge Completion Connector attaches directly to the rear I/O CONNECTOR of the Model 10A74-4C.

Remove the top plate of the connector. Inside are four sets of labelled screw terminals, corresponding to the 10A74-4C's four input channels. You will connect your gage wires directly to these terminals and, if necessary, interconnect certain terminal pairs by means of jumper wires. All gage leads should be securely clamped by means of the two cable clamps.

Fig. 2 shows per-channel connections between external strain-gage configurations and the respective System 10 Bridge Completion Connectors.

NOTE: Unlike the Model 10CJB-4, the Bridge Completion Connectors DO NOT PERMIT MIXING OF CONNECTED GAGE CONFIGURATION TYPES. That is, all gage configurations connected to the same Bridge Completion Connector must be of the same appropriate type (e.g., 120-Ω 1/4-bridge, 1/2-bridge, etc.).

When input connections involve pairs of EXCITATION, SENSE, and/or SIGNAL lines, these should be twisted pairs within the input cable. While it is desirable to shield such pairs individually (as shown in Fig. 2), this is not necessary; an overall cable shield is acceptable.

Note too that the full-bridge input connections given in Fig. 2(e) are to be used if one or more of the 10A74-4C's other inputs derives from a less than full-bridge configuration. If all four inputs originate from full-bridge configurations, no completion circuitry is required (see Section 2.c and Fig. 4).

Fig. 2 Model 10A74-4C Strain Gage Cabling Using System 10 Bridge Completion Connectors
Fig. 2(a) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10QBC-4* for 2-Wire 1/4-Bridge Completion

Per-Channel ons to Model for 2-Wire e Completion Model 10QBC-4 +EXC CAL SEN +SIGNAL -EXC SHIELD Signal Excitation

Fig. 2(b) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10QBC-4* for 3-Wire 1/4-Bridge Completion

Model 10QBC-4 +EXC CAL SEN +SIGNAL -EXC SHIELD

Fig. 2(c) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10HBC-4 for 4-Wire 1/2-Bridge Completion

graph TD
    A["Signal"] -->|+Excitation| B["+Excitation"]
    A -->|-Excitation| C["+Excitation"]
    D["Twisted Pair"] --> E["Model 10HBC-4"]
    E --> F["+EXC"]
    E --> G["+SENSE"]
    E --> H["CAL SEN"]
    E --> I["+SIGNAL"]
    E --> J["-SENSE"]
    E --> K["-EXC"]
    E --> L["SHIELD"]

Fig. 2(d) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10HBC-4 for 6-Wire 1/2-Bridge Completion

graph LR
    A["Signal"] --> B["+Excitation"]
    C["-Excitation"] --> D["Twisted Pair"]
    B --> E["Model 10HBC-4"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["+EXC"]
    E --> G["+SENSE"]
    E --> H["CAL SEN"]
    E --> I["+SIGNAL"]
    E --> J["-SENSE"]
    E --> K["-EXC"]
    E --> L["SHIELD"]

* I.e., Model QBC-4-120, QBC-4-350, or QBC-4-1K.

Fig. 2(e) Per-Channel Connections to Model 10FBC-4 for Full-Bridge Connection

graph TD
    A["Resistors"] --> B["+ Excitation"]
    B --> C["Swisted Pair"]
    C --> D["+ Signal"]
    D --> E["Swisted Pair"]
    E --> F["Model 10FBC-4"]
    G["Resistors"] --> H["+ Excitation"]
    H --> I["Swisted Pair"]
    I --> J["+ Signal"]
    J --> K["Swisted Pair"]
    K --> L["+ EXC"]
    K --> M["CAL SEN"]
    K --> N["+ SIGNAL"]
    K --> O["- SIGNAL"]
    K --> P["- EXC"]
    K --> Q["SHIELD"]

2.b 1/4-, 1/2-, OR FULL-BRIDGE GAGE CONNECTIONS USING THE MODEL 10CJB-4

Remove the top plate of the Model 10CJB-4 box (4 screws in corners). Inside the box are four sets of labelled screw terminals, one for each of the 10A74-4C's input channels ("A," "B," "C," and "D"). You will connect your gage wires directly to these terminals, as shown in Fig. 3, and, if necessary, interconnect certain terminal pairs by means of jumper wires. Gage leads should enter the 10CJB-4 through the cutout on the right-hand side of the box.

NOTE: You must furnish your own pin-to-pin shielded cable for connecting the 10CJB-4 to the 10A74-4C's rear I/O CONNECTOR (see Table 3 for pin assignments)—or you may use a special cable furnished by Daytronic. In either case, Daytronic will supply terminal connectors for the cable.

Fig. 3(a) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a 2-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (represented by the single gage resistor). Here, you must install a jumper wire between the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals, and between the +SIG terminal and either the 120 terminal or the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.

Fig. 3(b) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a 3-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (again represented by the single gage resistor). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied. The gage's third (self-compensating) lead is connected either to the 120 terminal or to the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.

Fig. 3(c) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a 1/2-bridge gage configuration (represented by the two connected gage resistors). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied.

Fig. 3(d) shows connections between the 10CJB-4 and a full-bridge gage configuration (represented by the four connected gage resistors).

Fig. 3 Model 10CJB-4 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Signal"] --> B["Excitation"]
    B --> C["Model 10CJ B-4 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1, 2, 3, or 4)"]
    C --> D["-SIG"]
    C --> E["1/2 BR"]
    C --> F["-EX"]
    C --> G["120"]
    C --> H["350"]
    C --> I["+SIG"]
    C --> J["+EX"]

Fig. 3(b) 3-Wire 1/4-Bridge Completion Model 10CJ B-4 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1, 2, 3, or 4) -SIG 1/2 BR -EX 120 350 +SIG +EX Signal Excitation

graph TD
    A["Signal"] --> B["+ Excitation"]
    C["-Excitation"] --> D["Switch"]
    E["Sig"] --> F["1/2 BR"]
    G["EX"] --> H["-SIG"]
    I["120"] --> J["350"]
    K["+SIG"] --> L["+EX"]
    M["+EX"] --> N["End"]

Fig. 3(d) Full-Bridge Connection Model 10CJ B-4 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1, 2, 3, or 4) -Signal -Excitation +Signal + Excitation -SIG 1/2 BR -EX 120 350 +SIG +EX

2.c FULL-BRIDGE TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS (WITHOUT BRIDGE COMPLETION)

In the absence of bridge-completion circuitry, the 10A74-4C's I/O CONNECTOR will mate with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Pinout for the I/O CONNECTOR is given in Table 3, above. The required cabling is shown in Fig. 4.

Note that the main 16-wire shielded cable should contain 20- to 24-gage wires. The length of the main cable—i.e., the distance from the 10A74-4C's rear I/O CONNECTOR to the two "sensing points"—may be up to 500 feet. At the sensing points, the + SENSE and -SENSE lines join the corresponding EXCITATION lines, and the main cable divides into four separately shielded 5-wire cables (one to each full-bridge transducer). These secondary cables should contain 16- to 20-gage wires. It is important that the distance "D" from the sensing points to each transducer be as short as possible; a maximum error of 0.02% could arise for every 3.5 ft. of 20-gage wire over the distance "D," and for every 9 ft. of 16-gage wire.

graph TD
    subgraph_Channel_1["Channel 1"]
        direction LR
        A1["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 1)"]
        A2["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 1)"]
        A3["-SIGNAL (CHN. 1)"]
    end
    subgraph_Channel_2["Channel 2"]
        direction LR
        A4["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 2)"]
        A5["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 2)"]
        A6["-SIGNAL (CHN. 2)"]
    end
    subgraph_Channel_3["Channel 3"]
        direction LR
        A7["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 3)"]
        A8["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 3)"]
        A9["-SIGNAL (CHN. 3)"]
        A10["-Excitation"]
    end
    subgraph_Channel_4["Channel 4"]
        direction LR
        A11["+ SIGNAL (CHN. 4)"]
        A12["CAL. SENSE (CHN. 4)"]
        A13["-SIGNAL (CHN. 4)"]
    end
    D --> S["SHIELD"]
    S --> T["Conditioner Connector (No. 60322)"]
    T --> U["A"]
    T --> V["B"]
    T --> W["C"]
    T --> X["D"]
    T --> Y["E"]
    T --> Z["F"]
    T --> AA["H"]
    T --> AB["J"]
    T --> AC["K"]
    T --> AD["L"]
    U --> AE["See Fig. 6"]
    V --> AF["Ground Lug"]
    W --> AG["Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector."]
    X --> AG
    Y --> AG
    Z --> AG
    AA --> AG
    AB --> AG
    AC --> AG
    AD --> AG
    AE --> AH["SHIELD"]
    AF --> AH
    AG --> AH

Fig. 4 10A74-4C Cabling to Four Full-Bridge Transducers

3 | SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SELECTION OF COMMON EXCITATION LEVEL

As shown in Fig. 5, the 10A74-4C's four pairs of EXCITATION PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS are located at the front edge of the card. Place the single jumper connector across the pair of pins labelled with the desired excitation level: 1, 2, 5, or 10 V. You need not remove the 10A74-4C card from the System 10 mainframe in order to do this.

NOTE: The Model 10CJB-4 has an internal excitation selection switch. WHEN THE 10CJB-4 IS USED WITH A MODEL 10A74-4C, THIS SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION.

Fig. 5 Model 10A74-4C Excitation Programming Jumper Pins and Shunt Calibration Resistors

Excitation Programming Jumper Pins Terminal post for connection of shunt resistor Excl. (V) Side 2 Rea/1/O Connector -0.5V 1/40 -0.6V 1/40 -0.7V 1/40 -0.8V 1/40 -0.9V 1/40 -1.0V 1/40 -1.1V 1/40 -1.2V 1/40 -1.3V 1/40 -1.4V 1/40 -1.5V 1/40 -1.6V 1/40 -1.7V 1/40 -1.8V 1/40 -1.9V 1/40 -2.0V 1/40 -2.1V 1/40 -2.2V 1/40 -2.3V 1/40 -2.4V 1/40 -2.5V 1/40 -2.6V 1/40 -2.7V 1/40 -2.8V 1/40 -2.9V 1/40 -3.0V 1/40 -3.1V 1/40 -3.2V 1/40 -3.3V 1/40 -3.4V 1/40 -3.5V 1/40 -3.6V 1/40 -3.7V 1/40 -3.8V 1/40 -3.9V 1/40 -4.0V 1/40 -4.1V 1/40 -4.2V 1/40 -4.3V 1/40 -4.4V 1/40 -4.5V 1/40 -4.6V 1/40 -4.7V 1/40 -4.8V 1/40 -4.9V 1/40 -5.0V 1/40 -5.1V 1/40 -5.2V 1/40 -5.3V 1/40 -5.4V 1/40 -5.5V 1/40 -5.6V 1/40 -5.7V 1/40 -5.8V 1/40 -5.9V 1/40 -6.0V 1/40 -6.1V 1/40 -6.2V 1/40 -6.3V 1/40 -6.4V 1/40 -6.5V 1/40 -6.6V 1/40 -6.7V 1/40 -6.8V 1/40 -6.9V 1/40 -7.0V 1/40 -7.1V 1/40 -7.2V 1/40 -7.3V 1/40 -7.4V 1/40 -7.5V 1/40 -7.6V 1/40 -7.7V 1/40 -7.8V 1/40 -7.9V 1/40 -8.0V 1/40 -8.1V 1/40 -8.2V 1/40 -8.3V 1/40 -8.4V 1/40 -8.5V 1/40 -8.6V 1/40 -8.7V 1/40 -8.8V 1/40 -8.9V 1/40 -9.0V 1/40 -9.1V 1/40 -9.2V 1/40 -9.3V 1/40 -9.4V 1/40 -9.5V 1/40 -9.6V 1/40 -9.7V 1/40 -9.8V 1/40 -9.9V 1/40

NOTE ALSO: When the optional Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor is used with the 10A74-4C, THE EXCITATION LEVEL MUST BE SET TO 10 V-DC (i.e., ±5 V-DC).

3.b SETUP OF MODEL 10A1 FOR TIME-COHERENT 10A74-4C DATA COLLECTION IN SYSTEM 10

Communicating over the internal Analog Signal Bus, the Model 10A1 Control Signal Card controls and coordinates the TRACK / HOLD function of all Model 10A74-4C cards mounted in the same "A-card" rack of a "B-sized" System 10 mainframe (only). When a 10A74-4C's rear I/O Connector is dedicated to a Bridge Completion Connector or Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor, that card's TRACK / HOLD function can only be controlled by means of a Model 10A1.

In a multi-rack System 10 mainframe, a separate 10A1 is required to control the 10A74-4C cards occupying each rack. All of the mainframe's 10A1 cards will then be linked via a special interconnect cable (No. 52369), which is supplied with the cards.

To ensure that all 10A74-4C input channels in the system “capture” their data at the same instant, a single “master” 10A1 must be designated for synchronization to the system scan cycle. The System 10 scan cycle can be “slaved” in turn to an external pulse signal received through the RS-422 interface provided by a designated Model 10BACI-422 Auxiliary Computer Interface Card.

To designate the "master" 10A1, you will need to apply the TRACK HOLD CONTROL (THC) command. This command informs the system's Central Processor of the particular 10A1 that is to be "synced" to its scan cycle. Turn ON the system EEPROM Switch and enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{THC} = \mathrm{s} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

where "s" is a four-digit number consisting of the DECK No., SLOT No., and SUBCHANNEL No. of the selected 10A1 card (here, the SUBCHANNEL number is simply "1"). Thus, for example, to designate the 10A1 located in Slot 3 of a "B-sized" mainframe's Deck No. 1 as the "master" for track-hold control in that mainframe, you would enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{THC} = 1 0 3 1 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

The system's "master" 10A1 causes a continuous "HOLD" command to be applied to all 10A74-4C inputs from all mainframe decks, except during the few microseconds per scan when it is itself processed as a data channel. During this processing period, the "HOLD" command is released and all 10A74-4C channels are permitted to track their respective strain-gage inputs. When the processing of the 10A1-dedicated channel is complete, the 10A74-4C inputs are again "held" until the next scan. A data set with minimal time skew is thereby generated with each scan cycle.

3.c CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A74-4C card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A74-4C channel "type" codes, see Table 2, above.

In System 10, when a Model 10A74-4C is connected to quarter-bridge or half-bridge gage configurations for purposes of stress analysis, you can perform both "EMM-CALCULATED" and "SIMULATED (SHUNT)" calibration of any of its input channels, regardless of the type of bridge completion being used for that channel. For such a channel, THE CONVENTIONAL "TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT)" TECHNIQUE WILL NOT WORK AND THE "MVV-CALCULATED" TECHNIQUE USED WITH OTHER STRAIN GAGE CONDITIONERS IS NOT RECOMMENDED.

When a 10A74-4C is connected to full-bridge strain gage transducers, "TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT)" calibration may be applied, in addition to or as an alternative to "EMM-CALCULATED" and "SIMULATED (SHUNT)" calibration (in this case, as before, calibration via the MVV command is not recommended).

NOTE: If you are using a Model 10CJB-4 for bridge completion of a 10A74-4C channel and, prior to initial calibration, observe a significantly nonzero reading when no load is placed on the gage(s), you may impose a nominal ±1 mV/V offset by means of solder pads in the 10CJB-4 box. See Section 3.d for complete instructions.

EMM-CALCULATED CALIBRATION

To calibrate a 10A74-4C-based Channel No. "x," turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply a SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command of

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where “m” is the scaling factor corresponding to the channel’s full-scale range in microstrain, as given in Table 4. In calculating the numeric value of “m,” note that “N” is the number of active bridge arms (“1” for a 1/4-bridge configuration; “2” for a half-bridge configuration; and “4” for a full-bridge configuration); and “G” is the gage factor supplied by the strain gage manufacturer.

Table 4 Model 10A74-4C Scaling Factor ("m") Values

Full-Scale Range (microstrain) “m”

±7500 15,000 / (N x G)

±15000 30,000 / (N x G)

±30000 60,000 / (N x G)

TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION

PLEASE NOTE: AS MENTIONED ABOVE, THIS CALIBRATION TECHNIQUE APPLIES TO A MODEL 10A74-4C CHANNEL ONLY WHEN THAT CHANNEL IS CONNECTED TO A FULL-BRIDGE STRAIN GAGE TRANSDUCER, AS ARE THE FOUR CHANNELS SHOWN IN FIG. 4.

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a "full-bridge" 10A74-4C channel if the final measurement accuracy provided by EMM-CALCULATED CALIBRATION does not meet the requirements of the measurement application. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION

This is a convenient “shunt resistor” method, where the second (“span”) input is not produced by loading the source transducer, but by “simulating” a particular up-scale value of mechanical input. This known EQUIVALENT INPUT then serves to determine the SCALING FACTOR for the channel.*

For a 10A74-4C data channel, the equivalent input is produced by shunting a resistor of known magnitude across one arm of the strain gage bridge, thereby simulating a known value of input for either a positive or negative up-scale reading. If the transduc-

er manufacturer has supplied the exact value of the transducer's equivalent input, it can be used as a reference point for calibrating the channel.

Equivalent input can be approximated from a knowledge of the Shunt Calibration Resistance (R), the transducer's Bridge Resistance (B), and the transducer's Full-Scale Sensitivity (K, in mV/V full scale). To determine the EQUIVALENT INPUT (X) as an approximate percentage of full-scale output, you may use the following equation:

$$ \mathbf {X} = 25000 \mathbf {B} / \mathbf {K} (\mathbf {R} + 0.5 \mathbf {B}) \% $$

Since the equivalent input is here expressed as a percentage of full-scale output, you must multiply it by the rated full-scale capacity of the transducer, in order to determine the actual input simulated by the shunt.

IMPORTANT: FOR A 10A74-4C CHANNEL WITH BRIDGE COMPLETION—BY MEANS EITHER OF A SYSTEM BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR OR THE MODEL 10CJB-4—THE EQUIVALENT INPUT SHOULD BE EXPRESSED IN MICROSTRAIN (MICROINCHES/INCH).

The 10A74-4C is equipped with a 100-kΩ, 0.1% calibration resistor for each active channel. These resistors are located on turret terminals at the rear of the card (see Fig. 5, above). You may, if you wish, replace each channel's installed 100K shunt resistor with a resistor of another value (strain-gage transducer manufacturers often supply such resistors with their instruments).

In System 10, a strain gage channel's shunt resistor may be switched in and out by means of the SHUNT CALIBRATE-POSITIVE (SHP) or SHUNT CALIBRATE-NEGATIVE (SHN) command. A RESUME (RSM) command should then be applied to remove the shunt and resume normal channel measurement. Since these are "runtime" commands, the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.6 for general instructions regarding the "SHUNT CALIBRATION" technique in System 10.

NOTE: All four channels' calibration shunts can be simultaneously and "remotely" controlled, if desired, as an alternative to using the software "SHUNT CALIBRATE" commands provided by the system, provided that a System 10 BRIDGE COMPLETION CONNECTOR or Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor is not attached to the card.* This remote calibration control is accomplished by means of logic-level inputs to the 10A74-4C card. The relevant connections are given in Fig. 6.

Fig. 6(a) shows how the “CALIBRATE POSITIVE” and “CALIBRATE NEGATIVE” commands can be independently applied to all four 10A74-4C channels simultaneously, without the need of an external logic reference supply.

Closing the switch in Fig. 6(a) to contact point "A" will produce a Logic 0 level at Pin 9 ("NOT +CALIBRATE"). Since this is a negative-true logic line, the Logic 0 input will activate the "+CALIBRATE" condition for all four channels. That is, it will switch in each channel's shunt resistor for a positive up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT +CALIBRATE" line from POWER COMMON will then return all channels to the "NO +CALIBRATE" condition.

Similarly, closing the switch to contact point "B" will produce a Logic 0 level at Pin 10 ("NOT -CALIBRATE"), thereby switching in each channel's shunt resistor for a negative up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT -CALIBRATE" line from POWER COMMON will then return all channels to the "NO -CALIBRATE" condition.

Fig. 6 Logic Inputs for 10A74-4C Remote Shunt Calibration and/or Track-Hold Control (Without Bridge Completion)

CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 + CALIBRATE A PWR COMMON -CALIBRATE B PWR COMMON TRACK/HOLD OPEN = Logic 1 (NO ±Calibration) CLOSED = Logic 0 (±Calibration) OPEN = Logic 1 (Track) CLOSED = Logic 0 (Hold)

Fig. 6(a) Switch Closure, No External Supply

CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 + CALIBRATE PWR COMMON - CALIBRATE +5 V +5 V +5 V TRACK/HOLD

Fig. 6(b) Active TTL Logic

You may also use active TTL logic, as illustrated in Fig. 6(b), to produce the “+CALIBRATE” or “-CALIBRATE” condition for all four 10A74-4C channels.

3.d SETTING AN INITIAL ZERO OFFSET WITH THE MODEL 10CJB-4

Often the very process of mounting strain gages to the stressed material can introduce a significant residual strain, which will become apparent as a large nonzero offset in the data reading prior to initial calibration. When you are using the Model 10CJB-4 Quad Bridge Completion Card with the Model 10A74-4C, you can remove at least a portion of this initial strain component for a given 10A74-4C channel by applying an approximate 1 mV/V positive or negative offset, as follows:

1. Remove the top plate of the 10CJB-4 box (4 screws in corners).
2. Refer to Fig. 7 and locate the set of three "1 MV/V OFFSET" jumper pads corresponding to the channel in question (like the 10CJB-4's terminal blocks, the pad sets are labelled "A," "B," "C," and "D"—corresponding to 10A74-4C Subchannel Nos 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively).
3. Remove all load from the source gage(s).
4. Observe the data reading of the channel. If it is a positive nonzero value, apply a negative 1 mV/V offset by carefully placing a solder drop between the center pad and the “-” pad. If it is a negative nonzero value, place a solder drop between the center pad and the “+” pad.
5. Now calibrate the channel to remove any remaining offset.

Fig. 7 Model 10CJB-4 Offset Jumpers

1 NWW OFFSET + - A □□□ □ B □□□ □ C □□□ □ D Side 2

3.e CONTROL OF 10A74-4C TRACK/HOLD OPERATION VIA LOGIC INPUT

When the 10A74-4C's rear I/O CONNECTOR is not dedicated to a Model 10QBC-4, 10HBC-4, 10FBC-4, or 10VAC, its Pin K can be used as an alternative source of TRACK/HOLD control (see Fig. 6). As with Pins 9 and 10, logic levels for Pin K are negative true, resulting in a Logic 1 level at the pin when it is unconnected. A Logic 1 (0 V) level at the pin keeps all four 10A74-4C analog input channels in "TRACK" mode, while a Logic 0 level (+5 V) keeps all four channels in the "HOLD" mode.

4 LEAD-WIRE AND NONLINEARITY EFFECTS WITH QUARTER-BRIDGE STRAIN GAGE CONFIGURATION

In stress analysis applications, it often happens that the completion resistors for a quarter-bridge strain gage are located some distance from the gage. If the resistance of the wires connecting the gage to the completion circuitry is considerable, it can "desensitize" the bridge, producing less output voltage from the bridge for a given amount of strain as the wire resistance increases.

A second cause of possible inaccuracy is the slight nonlinearity inherent in all bridge configurations. This nonlinearity is proportional to the amount of "upset" of the bridge. For small amounts of strain (below about 5000 microstrain, with a gage factor of 2), the output is nearly linear. However, as the change in gage resistance increases due to increasing strain, the nonlinearity effect becomes measurable.

4.a PREVENTING THE EFFECTS OF LEAD-WIRE RESISTANCE

When connecting a Model 10A74-4C to a quarter-bridge strain gage configuration, you can eliminate all effects of reasonable lead wire resistance by using a Model 10CJB-4 Four-Channel Bridge Completion Card in the vicinity of the gages, since the 10CJB-4 has inherent bridge-voltage sensing. WHERE THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE, YOU SHOULD USE A SHUNT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE with a three-wire run to the gage (see Fig. 8).*

graph TD
    A["+S"] --> B["Gage & Cable"]
    B --> C["Rb"]
    C --> D["Rb"]
    D --> E["+Exc"]
    E --> F["+Sense"]
    F --> G["To +Exc Circuit"]
    H["Rb"] --> I["Gage & Cable"]
    I --> J["Rb"]
    J --> K["-S"]
    K --> L["Soltage Signal"]
    L --> M["Cal Sense"]
    M --> N["Rs (100K 1% provided)"]
    N --> O["A Negative"]
    O --> P["Positive Resume"]
    Q["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"] --> R["-Signal"]
    S["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"] --> T["-Sense"]
    U["Cable to Bridge Compl. Circuit"] --> V["-Exc"]
    W["Shunt Circuit on Conditioner Card (simplified)"] --> X["To First Amp"]
    Y["Shunt Circuit on Conditioner Card (simplified)"] --> Z["To -Exc Circuit"]

Fig. 8 Shunt Calibration with a 3-Wire, Single-Active Strain Gage

Use the shunt ONLY ON THE INACTIVE COMPLETION ARM, AS SHOWN, INSTEAD OF ON THE GAGE ARM. To find the EQUIVALENT STRAIN (S) for a given GAGE FACTOR (G), BRIDGE RESISTANCE (R_b) , and SHUNT RESISTANCE (R_s) , use this expression:

$$ \mathbf {S} = \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{b}} / \mathbf {G} (\mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{b}} + \mathbf {R} _ {\mathrm{s}}) $$

To determine the shunt resistance required to simulate a given amount of strain, you can solve for R_s :

$$ R _ {s} = R _ {b} (1 \cdot G S) / G S $$

If shunt calibration is not possible, you can alternatively compensate for the effects of lead wire resistance by applying a CORRECTED SCALING FACTOR of

$$ \mathbf {m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = \mathbf {m} (1 + R _ {\mathrm{L}} / R _ {\mathrm{b}}) $$

where "m" is the "normal" SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), which is determined for the strain gage conditioner during calibration (see Section 3.b, above); "R L " is the lead wire resistance; and "R b " is the resistance of each of the three bridge-completion resistors (see Fig. 8).

Suppose, for example, that you are using a Model 10A74-4C channel for quarter-bridge strain measurement, with bridge completion provided by the Model 10QBC-4. Assume a gage factor ("G") of 2, a lead wire resistance R_L of 2.5 Ω, and a bridge resistance R_b of 350 Ω. If the 10A74-4C channel is configured for full-scale ±30,000 μS (= 0.03 S), its normal "m" factor is determined by the equation

$$ \mathrm{m} = 6 0, 0 0 0 / (\mathrm{N} \times \mathrm{G}) $$

as explained in Section 3.b. Since the number of gages (N) = 1,

$$ \mathrm{m} = 6 0, 0 0 0 / \mathrm{G} = 3 0, 0 0 0 $$

—and the corrected SCALING FACTOR in units of STRAIN is therefore

$$ \mathrm{m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = (3 0, 0 0 0) \left(1 + \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{L}} / \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{b}}\right) = (3 0, 0 0 0) (1. 0 0 7) = 3 0, 2 1 0 $$

This corrected factor can then be applied to the strain gage channel in question by means of the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command.

4.b PREVENTING THE EFFECTS OF BRIDGE NONLINEARITY

The effects of this nonlinearity can be minimized by SHUNT CALIBRATION at 80% of the expected full-scale strain, thus distributing it more uniformly over the range. WHERE THE GAGE IS TO BE USED IN EITHER TENSION OR COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS—BUT NOT BOTH—an additional compensating term can be employed to determine the fully corrected SCALING FACTOR:

$$ \mathrm{m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = \mathrm{m} (1 + \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{L}} / \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{b}} \pm (\mathrm{GS}) / 2) $$

Choose the STRAIN (S) to equal 80% of the expected maximum strain. IF THE GAGE IS USED IN TENSION MEASUREMENT, THE TERM "(GS)/2" IS TO BE ADDED; IF IT IS USED IN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENT, THE TERM IS TO BE SUBTRACTED. Note too that the lead wire correction term "R L /R b " can be discarded if its contribution is negligible.

Using the same example as above, where "S" = 0.03, and now assuming that the gage is intended to measure TENSION only, we have

$$ \mathrm{m} _ {\mathrm{c}} = (3 0, 0 0 0) \left(1 + \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{L}} / \mathrm{R} _ {\mathrm{b}} + (\mathrm{GS}) / 2\right) = (3 0, 0 0 0) (1. 0 3 7) = 3 1, 1 1 0 $$

5 USE OF THE MODEL 10VAC VOLTAGE INPUT ADAPTOR WITH THE MODEL 10A74-4C

The Model 10VAC Voltage Input Adaptor is a special connector assembly which allows the Model 10A74-4C to receive up to four independent external analog signals in place of its normal strain-gage inputs, when it is desired to apply the special TRACK-HOLD function of the 10A74-4C to these analog voltage signals.

Each 10VAC voltage input can take one of three ranges: ±5 V-DC, ±10 V-DC, or ±20 V-DC. Inputs may be mixed as desired. The channel “type” code to be assigned for each voltage range is given in Table 2.

Providing screw terminals for direct connection of analog signal leads, the 10VAC attaches directly to the 10A74-4C's rear I/O CONNECTOR. Fig. 9 shows how external analog signal sources are cabled to the two screw-terminal blocks. To access the 10VAC connection board, simply remove the screws that hold together both halves of the 10VAC connector housing. Note that floating inputs are to be grounded at the site of the signal source, and not at the conditioner connector.

When the 10VAC is used with the 10A74-4C, THE 10A74-4C'S EXCITATION LEVEL MUST BE SET TO ±5 V-DC (see Section 3.a for the procedure).

You can use two CALIBRATION METHODS for any 10A74-4C DATA CHANNEL originating from a 10VAC:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the channel is being used to measure voltage itself. In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the 10VAC-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate a 10VAC-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

graph TD
    A["Reg. Power Supply (if required)"] --> B["ANALOG SIGNAL SOURCE"]
    B --> C["CHANNEL 1"]
    C --> D["+Signal"]
    D --> E["SHIELD"]
    E --> F["10VAC Connection Board"]
    F --> G["Chanc. 3 + Signal"]
    F --> H["Chanc. 3 -Signal"]
    F --> I["Chanc. 4 + Signal"]
    F --> J["Chanc. 4 -Signal"]
    F --> K["SHIELD"]
    L["Add ground for floating inputs"] --> B
    M["Connects to 10A74-4C Rear I/O Connector"] --> F
    N["NOT USED"] --> F
    O["Chan. 2 + Signal"] --> F
    P["Chan. 2 -Signal"] --> F
    Q["NOT USED"] --> F

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 2, above. If, for example, a voltage-measuring 10VAC channel is “typed” as “72” (corresponding to a full scale of ±20 V-DC) and you want the channel to read tenths of a volt, you would enter an “m” value of “20.0.”

NOTE: The accuracy of “absolute” calibration of a 10VAC-based channel is limited to ±0.05% of full scale.

Two-Point (Deadweight) CALIBRATION

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to a 10VAC-based channel if the received voltage input is an analog of another parameter which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. It can also be used to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input that measures voltage itself (beyond the inherent limit of ± 0.05% of full scale). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

NOTE: When the 10VAC is attached to the 10A74-4C, the 10A74-4C's shunt calibration provisions are not applicable.

For application of "TRACK" and "HOLD" commands to any 10A74-4C/10VAC DATA CHANNEL by means of a Model 10A1 Control Signal Card mounted in the same mainframe "A-Card Deck," see Section 3.b Note that when the 10VAC is attached to the 10A74-4C, control of TRACK/HOLD operation by means of an external logic signal received at I/O Connector Pin "K" is no longer possible.

MODEL 10A76

VIBRATION

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The single-channel Model 10A76 measures the true RMS value of the vibratory component of the output signal of a conventional strain gage accelerometer of up to 50 mV, full scale—for which selectable excitation of 1, 5, or 10 V-DC is provided. It is ideal for any number of applications where the accurate monitoring of vibration is critical—as, for example, in the testing of motors, gear-boxes, pumps, engines, conveyors, fans, and compressors.

The 10A76 yields two “subchannels,” with corresponding analog outputs to wire-wrap pins:

• Subchannel No. 1: VIBRATORY COMPONENT (RMS)
• Subchannel No. 2: AVERAGE ACCELERATION

Providing a "front-end" signal amplifier with fixed gain of 100, the 10A76 also features a 10-Hz high-pass filter with selectable gain, followed by a band-pass filter with selectable upper cut-off frequencies. It can thus be configured for specific test or process conditions such as operating frequency or RPM, expected vibration amplitude, etc. (see Section 3, below).

As explained in Section 3.d, the 10A76 employs a combined “calculated” and “two-point” calibration procedure.

ADDITIONAL 10A76 SPECIFICATIONS

Input Range: Accepts a signal of up to 50 mV, full scale, from a conventional strain gage accelerometer, for "type" codes assigned to 10A76 data channels on the basis of desired pass-band cutoff frequency, Table 2, Section 3.c, below

Excitation: Selectable 1, 5, or 10 V-DC nominal; 80 mA, maximum

Amplifier:

Normal-Mode Range: ±100 mV operating; ±5 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±2 V operating; ±5 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -90 dB; 60 Hz: -60 dB; 1 kHz: -50 dB

Input Impedance (Differential and Common-Mode): 10^8 MΩ and 5-nanoamp bias current; for special analog filtering provisions, see the Filter specification, below

Offset: Initial: ±0.2% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C

(cont'd)

Gain Accuracy*: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration

Gain Stability (center of chosen passband): vs. Temperature: ±100 ppm/°C

Filter:

1) LOW-PASS: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 100 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

2) BAND-PASS: Upper cutoff frequency for each channel selectable by command: 20, 40, 80, 125, 250, 500, 1000, or 1600 Hz (see Section 3.c)
3) HIGH-PASS: 10 Hz, with selectable gain of 1, 2, 5, 10, or 20

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered output for RMS vibration frequency available on main-frame wire-wrap pin

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A76's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 1 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector. With regard to 10A76 cabling, please note the following:

a. 4-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 1(a), and is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR.
b. 6-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 1(b), and is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the transducer.

Table 1 Model 10A76 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector ConditionerPin LineNumber Function
1 +EXCITATION
A -EXCITATION
2 +SENSE
B	-SENSE
3	+SIGNAL
C	-SIGNAL
4,D Not Committed
5	SIGNAL COMMON
E	Not Committed
6	FILTERED OUTPUT
All Other Pins	Not Committed

* Initial (uncalibrated) inaccuracy may be as great as ±0.5% of full scale. Maximum error that could occur upon replacement of a Model 10A76 not followed by calibration is ±1% of full scale.

Fig. 1 Model 10A76 Transducer Cabling

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) +EXCITATION -ESSEN -SIGNAL +SIGNAL -EXCITATION +SENSE SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug Figure 1(a) 4-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

Conditioner CONNECTOR (No. 60322) +SENSE +EXCITATION -SIGNAL +SIGNAL -EXCITATION -SENSE SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug Fig. 1(b) 6-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

1. Turn OFF mainframe power and remove the 10A76 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B.
2. Refer to Fig. 2 and locate the EXCITATION SELECTION JUMPER PINS. One "mini-jumper" is provided for interconnecting any two horizontally or vertically adjacent jumper pins.

Fig. 2 10A76 Excitation and Filter Gain Selection Jumper Pins

Excitation Selection Jumper Pins Rear I/O Connector High-Pass Filter Gain Selection Jumper Pins Side 2

1. Position the jumper as shown in Fig. 3 to set the desired excitation voltage.
2. Do not reinstall the 10A76 card until you have set the high-pass filter gain (next section).

3.b SETTING HIGH-PASS FILTER GAIN

1. Locate the HIGH-PASS FILTER GAIN SELECTION JUMPER PINS shown in Fig. 2. One "minijumper" is provided for interconnecting any two vertically adjacent jumper pins.
2. Position the jumper as shown in Fig. 4 to set the desired gain (1, 2, 5, 10, or 20).
3. Reinsert the 10A76 card in its mainframe slot and reactivate mainframe power.

3.c SETTING BAND-PASS FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY

Assume here that Channel No. "x" has been "located" to the 10A76's Subchannel No. 1 ("Vibratory Component") and that Channel No. "y" has been "located" to Subchannel No. 2 ("Average Acceleration"). For data-channel "location," see Manual Section 1.G.1.

Fig. 3 10A76 Excitation Selection Jumper Pins

Gain = 1 A B C D E Gain = 2 A B C D E Gain = 5 A B C D E Gain = 10 A B C D E Gain = 20 A B C D E

Fig. 4 10A76 Filter Gain Selection Jumper Pins

Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and assign an appropriate "type" code "v" to Channel Nos. x and y, via the TYPE (TYP) command:

TYP x = v [CR] TYP y = v [CR]

The number you enter for "v" will depend on the desired band-pass cutoff frequency, as follows:

Table 2 10A76 "Type" Codes

Band-Pass Cutoff ChannelFrequency Type Code ("v")

20 Hz 40

40 Hz 41

80 Hz 42

125 Hz 43

250 Hz 44

500 Hz 45

1000 Hz 46

1600 Hz 47

3.d CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A76 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A76 channel "type" codes, see Table 2, above.

In System 10, you must use the following special procedure to calibrate a 10A76 channel. Assume here that Channel No. "x" has been "located" to the 10A76's Subchannel No. 1 ("Vibratory Component") and that Channel No. "y" has been "located" to Subchannel No. 2 ("Average Acceleration"). For data-channel "location," see Manual Section 1.G.1.

1. Choose a full-scale acceleration value appropriate to your accelerometer. This value should be expressed in units of "g" (where "g" is the earth's gravitational constant—approximately 32 ft/sec ^2 or 9.80 m/sec ^2 ). We will call this full-scale acceleration value "A."
2. Now turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and apply a SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command to Channel No. y:

EMM y = m _1 [CR]

For “m _1 ” ( t he “m” coefficient of Channel No. y’s “mx + b” linear relation, as discussed in Manual Section 1.G.2), you should enter the larger of these two numbers:

$$ 1. 0 0 0 \quad \text { or } \quad (1. 0 0 0 \times A) $$

For example, if your full-scale acceleration “A” is 100 (g), you would enter “100.0” for “m _1 .”

1. Orient the accelerometer HORIZONTALLY AT REST, to create a state of "zero acceleration."
2. Enter a ZERO (ZRO) command of

ZRO y [CR]

(cont'd)

1. Orient the accelerometer VERTICALLY AT REST, to create a state of "gravitational acceleration" (= 1 g).

2. Enter a FORCE (FRC) command of

$$ F R C y = 1. 0 0 [ C R ] $$

1. You must now determine the high-pass filter gain that includes the desired full scale. Note that the effective full scale for the vibratory component of acceleration is given by

$$ \mathbf {A} \cdot \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {g}} $$

You must therefore select from the following table a value of the factor “ m_g ” which, when multiplied by the full-scale acceleration “A,” includes the highest expected vibration reading.

Table 3

“ m_g ” Filter Gain	High-Pass
1.414 1
0.707 2
0.2828 5
0.1414 10
0.0707 20

For example, if A = 100 (g), and you expect a vibration reading of up to 25 (g), you should select the “m _g ” value of “0.2828,” since 100 x 0.2828 = 28.28.

1. Referring to the above table and the instructions given in Section 3.b, set the 10A76 to the high-pass filter gain that corresponds to the selected "m_g" value. For the example in Step 7, this would be "5."

2. Command

EMM y [CR]

and note the answer. This is " m_y ," the scaling factor you "forced" into Channel No. y in Step 6.

1. Now set the "m" coefficient of Channel No. x ("Vibratory Component") by commanding

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {x}} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where the value you enter for "m_x" is

$$ \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {g}} \cdot \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {y}} $$

("m_g" is the factor you selected in Step 7; "m_y" is the answer from Step 9).

MODEL 10A78

AC STRAIN GAGE

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Model 10A78 is a single-channel conditioner of phase-sensitive carrier-amplifier design (rather than a two-channel, fully DC instrument). Intended for applications involving transformer-coupling to the transducer bridge (as with rotary-transformer torque sensors), this conditioner can also be used in conventional installations when high sensitivity is required or where the electrical environment is especially noisy. Responding only to the modulated carrier frequency, the 10A78 rejects extraneous voltages that can cause errors in DC systems, particularly when there is a need to "blow up" a portion of the transducer range. User-adjustable phase and symmetry controls are provided.

The Model 10A78's data channel is best calibrated by means of a "two-point (dead-weight)" or shunt-calibration technique, following an initial "calculated" calibration. The supplied calibration resistor is 59 kilohms, 1%. Note that the 10A78 can NOT be calibrated via the System 10 MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command. Note also that a specially modified version of the 10A78 is required if you wish to control the shunt-calibration process by means of logic-level inputs through the rear I/O CONNECTOR.

ADDITIONAL 10A78 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: Conventional 4-arm strain gage bridges, nominal 350 ohms (or higher)

Input Ranges (Full-Scale): ±0.75, 1.50, or 3.00 mV/V; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel "type" code assigned to a 10A78 data channel, see Table 1, below. Since channel zeroing is by digital techniques, no input balance control is provided. The allowable input range, therefore, must include any initial unbalance (which, in commercially produced strain gage transducers, is usually negligible). Other transducers may have to be externally trimmed to be used with the Model 10A78, if zero unbalance exceeds 20% of full scale.

Excitation: Regulated 3 V-AC (rms) at 3280 Hz; 50 mA (rms), maximum

Amplifier:

Common-Mode Range: ±1 V operating; ±9 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC and at 60 Hz: infinite; at 3 kHz: -60 dB

Input Impedance (Differential and Common-Mode): 10 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±3% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±0.005% f.s./°C; vs. Time: ±0.02% f.s./month

Gain Accuracy*: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration

(cont'd)

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 7.5 Hz; 60 dB down at 60 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 250 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 350 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 500 msec

Auxiliary Output: Filtered output available on mainframe wire-wrap pin

Table 1 10A78 "Type" Codes
Full-Scale Channel Input Type Code

0.75 mV/V 70

1.50 mV/V 71

3.00 mV/V 72

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A78's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector. With regard to 10A78 cabling, please note the following:

a. 4-wire strain gage cabling is given in Fig. 1(a), and is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines (and also the CALIBRATION SENSE line to the +SIGNAL line) at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. It is recommended that the resistance of the conductors not exceed 0.0001 of the bridge resistance.
b. 8-wire strain gage cabling is given in Fig. 1(b), and is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer, or when fine wire is used.* In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines (and also the CALIBRATION SENSE line to the +SIGNAL line) at the transducer. Note also the wire connected to the -SIGNAL line, at the transducer, but left unconnected at the 10A78. This wire is to be paired with the CAL SENSE line for shielding purposes.

NOTE: The special 8-wire cabling shown in Fig. 1(c) is required for connecting a Model 10A78 to a Lebow 1600 Series Transducer. The cable should be shielded in four pairs, as shown, with the shield open at the transducer end. In the case of connection to a Lebow 1600 Series Transducer, also note that

a. SENSE and EXCITATION lines should be tied at the transducer.
b. The 10A78's Pin 5 ("LEBOW CAL") is to be connected to the "CAL" pin on the Lebow sensor (Pin 4 is not used in this case).
c. Leave the last (extra) wire unconnected at both ends, and pair it with the "LEBOW CAL" line for the fourth shield.
d. THE MODEL 10A78 MUST BE INTERNALLY SET TO "SIGNAL COMMON" MODE, via the following procedure:

* This cabling is to be used when connecting a Model 10A78 to a Lebow 1800 Series Transducer.

1. Turn OFF mainframe power and remove the 10A78 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B.
2. Refer to Fig. 2, below, and locate the SIGNAL PROGRAMMING JUMPER PADS on the component side of the board.
3. The 10A78 is normally shipped with a solder-drop connection between the pair of jumper pads labelled "+S." When the special Lebow 1600 cabling is used, however, the connection between the "+S" pads should be removed, and a solder-drop connection should be made between the pair of jumper pads labelled "S.C."
   (cont'd)

Fig. 1 Model 10A78 Transducer Cabling

EXCITATION + SIGNAL-SIGNAL -EXCITATION CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) -SENSE CAL SENSE + SENSE SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug Figure 1(a) 4-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

+SENSE +EXCITATION +SIGNAL-SIGNAL CAL SENSE -EXCITATION -SENSE EXTRA WIRE (paired with "CAL SENSE," UNCONNECTED at Conditioner Connector) CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SHIELD Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug (b) 8-Wire Strain Gage (20 ft, or longer)

Fig. 1(b) 8-Wire Strain Gage Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) + SENSE + EXCITATION -SIGNAL A B D + SIGNAL -EXCITATION -SENSE CAL (E) LEBOW CAL SHIELD EXTRA WIRE (paired with "LEBOW CAL," UNCONNECTED at Conditioner Connector and at Transducer) Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug

Fig. 1(c) 8-Wire Cabling to Lebow 1600 Series Transducer (ONLY)

To "unblob" the "+S" jumpers, use a fine-point solder gun to heat the solder drop, until it has melted sufficiently for you to wipe it off with a clean rag. Make sure that you remove all traces of solder from the jumper pads you wish to "unblob."

1. Reinsert the 10A78 card in its mainframe slot and reactivate mainframe power.

Table 2 Model 10A78 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector ConditionerPin LineNumber Function
	1 +EXCITATION (3 V-AC)A -EXCITATION (3 V-AC)2 +SENSEB -SENSE3 +SIGNALC -SIGNAL4 C D SIGNAL COMMON5 LEBOW CALAll Other Pins Not Committed

Fig. 2 10A78 Signal Programming Jumper Pads and Shunt Calibration Resistor

Solder drop for Transducer Cabling other than Lebow 1600 Series Solder drop for special Lebow 16 Cabling Rear I/O Connector Shunt Resistor (# R47) s.c. Terminal post for connection of resistor Side 2

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a PHASE AND SYMMETRY ADJUSTMENT FOR ALL TRANSDUCERS EXCEPT A LEBOW 1800 SERIES TRANSDUCER

Before you do a "two-point" or "shunt" calibration of your 10A78 for the first time, you should perform an initial "on-line" phase and symmetry adjustment. When using a Lebow 1800 Series Transducer (only), you should follow the special procedure given in the next section. For any other transducer, use the following procedure. ONCE SET FOR YOUR TRANSDUCER, THIS ADJUSTMENT NEED NOT BE REPEATED UNLESS A SIGNIFICANT CHANGE IN CABLE LENGTH OR CAPACITANCE IS REQUIRED.

a. Turn ON the system EEPROM Switch and enter a command of

SCALING FACTOR (EMM)

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where "x" is the Channel Number of the 10A78's measurement channel, and "m" is the full-scale input range in the desired engineering units and with the desired resolution.

b. Provide a "live" display of the data reported by Channel No. x.
c. Without removing the 10A78 from its slot, locate the PHASE AND SYMMETRY CONTROLS, which are accessible from the front of the card (see Fig. 3).

Phase Con Symme

Fig. 3 10A78 Phase and Symmetry Controls

d. Load the transducer in the positive direction with a convenient "deadweight" value which is greater than one-half of full scale. Using a small insulated screwdriver, adjust the 10A78's PHASE CONTROL until a maximum reading is obtained for the 10A78 channel.

e. Remove the transducer load.

f. Make sure the system EEPROM Switch is still ON and enter a ZERO (ZRO) command of

ZRO x [CR]

g. Now switch in the 10A78's internal shunt resistor for a positive up-scale reading by entering a command of

SHP x [CR]

h. Record the reading you get.

i. Open the positive shunt and switch in the resistor for a negative reading by entering a command of

SHN x [CR]

j. Adjust the 10A78's SYMMETRY CONTROL until the negative value of the reading you recorded in Step h appears.

k. Open the negative shunt by entering a command of

RSM x [CR]

I. You are now ready to perform “on-line calibration” of the 10A78 channel by either the “Two-Point (Deadweight)” or “Simulated (Shunt)” Calibration method (see Section 3.c, below).

3.b PHASE AND SYMMETRY ADJUSTMENT FOR A LEBOW 1800 SERIES TRANSDUCER

NOTE: WHEN USING THE 10A78 WITH A LEBOW 1800 SERIES TRANSDUCER, YOU SHOULD FIRST REPLACE THE 10A78'S INTERNAL 59K SHUNT RESISTOR WITH THE CALIBRATION RESISTOR SUPPLIED WITH THE TRANSDUCER.

a. Locate the "CAL/RUN" Switch in the cable harness of the 1800 Series transducer. Place this switch in the "CAL" position.

b. Perform Steps a through c of the above procedure (Section 3.a).

c. Establish a zero input for the 10A78 channel by removing all load from the 1800 Series transducer.

d. Switch in the 10A78's internal shunt resistor for a positive up-scale reading by entering a command of

SHP x [CR]

e. Using a small insulated screwdriver, adjust the 10A78's PHASE CONTROL until a maximum reading is obtained for the channel.

f. Open the positive shunt by entering a command of

RSM x [CR]

g. Make sure the EEPROM Switch is still ON, and zero the reading of the 10A78 channel by entering a command of

ZRO x [CR]

h. Close the channel's positive shunt once more via the SHP command, as in Step d, above.

i. You will now "force" the 10A78 channel to read the "EQUIVALENT INPUT" VALUE GIVEN BY THE TRANSDUCER MANUFACTURER FOR THE CALIBRATION RESISTOR YOU INSTALLED IN THE 10A78 (for a general discussion of EQUIVALENT INPUT, see Section 3.c, below, and Manual Section 1.G.7). Enter a FORCE (FRC) command of

FRC x = z [CR]

where "z" is the equivalent input expressed in the desired engineering units.

j. Open the positive shunt and switch in the resistor for a negative reading by entering a command of

SHN x [CR]

k. Adjust the 10A78's SYMMETRY CONTROL to display the negative value of the same EQUIVALENT INPUT you entered in Step i (or some other specific negative engineering-unit value, if such a value is given by the transducer manufacturer for the calibration resistor).

I. Open the negative shunt by entering a command of

RSM x [CR]

m. Move the transducer's "CAL/RUN" Switch to the "RUN" position.

n. Zero the 10A78 channel's reading once more, as you did in Step g, above.

THE LEBOW 1800 / DAYTRONIC 10A78 SYSTEM IS NOW FULLY CALIBRATED. YOU NEED NOT PERFORM A SUBSEQUENT "DEADWEIGHT" OR "SIMULATED" CALIBRATION.

3.c CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of the ANALOG INPUT CHANNEL dedicated to a specific Model 10A78 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A78 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use two calibration methods with the Model 10A78 (note that this conditioner cannot be calibrated by the "MVV-CALCULATED" CALIBRATION technique that may be applied to other Strain Gage Conditioner Cards):

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can easily be applied to a 10A78 channel. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION

This method is similar to the conventional TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) procedure. The difference is that the second (“span”) input is not produced by loading the source transducer, but by “simulating” a particular up-scale value of mechanical input. This known EQUIVALENT INPUT then serves to determine the SCALING FACTOR for the channel.

For the 10A78's data channel, the equivalent input is produced by shunting a resistor of known magnitude across one arm of the strain gage bridge, thereby simulating a known value of input for either a positive or negative up-scale reading. If the transducer manufacturer has supplied the exact value of the transducer's equivalent input, it can be used as a reference point for calibrating the channel.

Equivalent input can be approximated from a knowledge of the Shunt Calibration Resistance (R), the transducer's Bridge Resistance (B), and the transducer's Full-Scale Sensitivity (K, in mV/V full scale). To determine the EQUIVALENT INPUT (X) as an approximate percentage of full-scale output, you may use the following equation:

$$ \mathrm{X} = 25000 \mathrm{B} / \mathrm{K} (\mathrm{R} + 0.5 \mathrm{B}) \% $$

Since the equivalent input is here expressed as a percentage of full-scale output, you must multiply it by the rated full-scale capacity of the transducer, in order to determine the actual input simulated by the shunt.

Shunt calibration is an easier though generally less accurate technique then two-point (deadweight) calibration. It is useful, however, when overall “deadweighting” is impossible or inconvenient, and is good for an accuracy of about 0.2% (depending, of course, on the accuracy of the specified equivalent input, and on the resistor/bridge tolerance and temperature).

The 10A78 is equipped with a 59-kΩ, 0.1% calibration resistor, located on turret terminals at the rear of the card (see Fig. 2). You may, if you wish, replace the installed 59K shunt resistor with a resistor of another value (strain-gage transducer manufacturers often supply such resistors with their instruments).

In System 10, a strain gage channel's shunt resistor may be switched in and out by means of the SHUNT CALIBRATE-POSITIVE (SHP) or SHUNT CALIBRATE-NEGATIVE (SHN) command. A RESUME (RSM) command should then be applied to remove the shunt and resume normal channel measurement. Since these are "runtime" commands, the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.6 for general instructions regarding the "SHUNT CALIBRATION" technique in System 10.

NOTE: If you wish to control the shunt calibration process by means of logic-level inputs through the 10A78's rear I/O CONNECTOR—a standard feature of other strain gage conditioner cards—you will require a specially modified version of the 10A78.

MODEL 10A96

AMPLIFIED ACCELEROMETER VIBRATION CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The single-channel Model 10A96 measures the true RMS value of the vibratory component of the output signal of an Amplified Piezoelectric Accelerometer, for which an excitation of ±15 V-DC is provided. It is ideal for any number of applications where the accurate monitoring of vibration is critical—as, for example, in the testing of motors, gear-boxes, pumps, engines, conveyors, fans, and compressors.

The 10A96 yields two “subchannels,” with corresponding analog outputs to wire-wrap pins:

• Subchannel No. 1: VIBRATORY COMPONENT (RMS)
• Subchannel No. 2: AVERAGE ACCELERATION

The 10A96's "front-end" amplifier gain is user-selectable, which allows the card to accept accelerometer signals from ± 50mV to ± 5V . The card also features a 10-Hz high-pass filter with selectable gain, followed by a band-pass filter with selectable upper cut-off frequencies. It can thus be configured for specific test or process conditions such as operating frequency or RPM, expected vibration amplitude, etc. (see Section 3, below).

As explained in Section 3.d, the 10A96 employs a combined “calculated” and “two-point” calibration procedure.

ADDITIONAL 10A96 SPECIFICATIONS

Input Range: User-selectable gain accommodates accelerometer signal from ±50 mV to ±5 V, full scale; for “type” codes assigned to 10A96 data channels on the basis of desired pass-band cutoff frequency, Table 2, Section 3.c, below

Excitation: Fixed ±15 V-DC nominal; 15 mA, maximum

Amplifier:

Normal-Mode and Common-Mode Range: ±5 V operating; ±7 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: -60 dB; at 60 Hz and 1 kHz: -50 dB

Input Impedance (Differential and Common-Mode): 10^8 MΩ and 5-nanoamp bias current; for special analog filtering provisions, see the Filter specification, below

Offset: Initial: ±0.2% of full scale; vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C

Gain Accuracy*: ±0.02% of full scale typical, following calibration

(cont'd)

* Initial (uncalibrated) inaccuracy may be as great as ±1.0% of full scale. Maximum error that could occur upon replacement of a Model 10A96 not followed by calibration is ±2% of full scale.

Gain Stability (center of chosen passband): vs. Temperature: ±100 ppm/°C

Filter:

1) LOW-PASS: 3-pole modified Butterworth; 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 100 Hz

Step Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 100 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 150 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 600 msec

2) BAND-PASS: Selectable upper cut-off frequency for each subchannel: 20, 40, 80, 125, 250, 500, 1000, or 1600 Hz (see Section 3.c)
3) HIGH-PASS: 10 Hz, with selectable gain of 1, 2, 5, 10, or 20

Auxiliary Outputs: Filtered output for RMS vibration frequency available on main-frame wire-wrap pin

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model 10A96's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60322, shown in Fig. 1.5 (in Manual Section 1.E.1). Table 1 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O Connector.

Fig. 1 shows 5-wire connections to a Daytronic Model ACL3 Amplified Piezoelectric Accelerometer. The 10A96 will work with any similar instrument with a sensitivity of 50.0 mV/g, using similar cable connections. Note that a 5-wire cable with a single shield could be used, if desired, instead of the individually shielded pairs shown in Fig. 1.

Table 1 Model 10A96 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector ConditionerPin LineNumber Function
1 +15 V-DC EXCITATION
A -15 V-DC EXCITATION
2,B Not Committed
3 +SIGNAL
C -SIGNAL
4,D,5	Not Committed
E	SIGNAL COMMON
6	Not Committed
F	FILTERED OUTPUT
All Other Pins	Not Committed

+13.5 to +16.5 V-DC Supply Input A + EXCITATION Output / Supply Common (–) B -SIGNAL -13.5 to -16.5 V-DC Supply Input C - EXCITATION ± 5 V-DC Output D + SIGNAL CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60322) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 SIGNAL COMMON SHIELD Model ACL3 Electrical Connector (Bendix PT1H-10-6P—mates with PT06A-10-6S)

Fig. 1 Model 10A96 Transducer Cabling
Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector
Ground Lug

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SETTING FRONT-END AMPLIFIER GAIN

1. Turn OFF mainframe power and remove the 10A96 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B.
2. Locate the FRONT-END AMPLIFIER GAIN SELECTION JUMPER PINS shown in Fig. 2. One "minijumper" is provided for interconnecting any two vertically adjacent jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper as shown in Fig. 3 to set the gain to the desired gain (1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or 100)
4. Do not reinstall the 10A96 card until you have set the high-pass filter gain (next section).

3.b SETTING HIGH-PASS FILTER GAIN

1. Locate the HIGH-PASS FILTER GAIN SELECTION JUMPER PINS shown in Fig. 2. One "minijumper" is provided for interconnecting any two vertically adjacent jumper pins.
2. Position the jumper as shown in Fig. 4 to set the gain to set the desired gain (1, 2, 5, 10, or 20).
3. Reinsert the 10A96 card in its mainframe slot and reactivate mainframe power.

Fig. 2 10A96 Amplifier and Filter Gain Selection Jumper Pins

"Front-End" Amplifier Gain Selection Jumper Pins Rear I/O Connector High-Pass Filter Gain Selection Jumper Pins Side 2

Fig. 3 10A96 Front-End Amplifier Gain Selection Jumper Pins

Gain = 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Gain = 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Gain = 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Gain = 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Gain = 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Gain = 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Gain = 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Gain = 1 A B C D E Gain = 2 A B C D E Gain = 5 A B C D E Gain = 10 A B C D E Gain = 20 A B C D E

Fig. 4 10A96 Filter Gain Selection Jumper Pins

3.c SETTING BAND-PASS FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY

Assume here that Channel No. "x" has been "located" to the 10A96's Subchannel No. 1 ("Vibratory Component") and that Channel No. "y" has been "located" to Subchannel No. 2 ("Average Acceleration"). For data-channel "location," see Manual Section 1.G.2. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and assign an appropriate "type" code "v" to Channel Nos. x and y, via the TYPE (TYP) command:

$$ \text { TYP } x = v [ \text { CR } ] $$

$$ \text { TYP } y = v [ \text { CR } ] $$

The number you enter for "v" will depend on the desired band-pass cutoff frequency, as follows:

Table 2 10A96 "Type" Codes

Band-Pass Cutoff Channel Frequency Type Code ("v")

20 Hz 40

40 Hz 41

80 Hz 42

125 Hz 43

250 Hz 44

500 Hz 45

1000 Hz 46

1600 Hz 47

3.d CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model 10A96 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For 10A96 channel "type" codes, see Table 2, above.

In System 10, you must use the following special procedure to calibrate a 10A96 channel. Assume here that Channel No. "x" has been "located" to the 10A96's Subchannel No. 1 ("Vibratory Component") and that Channel No. "y" has been "located" to Subchannel No. 2 ("Average Acceleration"). For data-channel "location," see Manual Section 1.G.1.

1. Choose a full-scale acceleration value appropriate to your accelerometer. This value should be expressed in units of "g" (where "g" is the earth's gravitational constant—approximately 32 ft/sec ^2 or 9.80 m/sec ^2 ). We will call this full-scale acceleration value "A."
2. Now turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and apply a SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command to Channel No. y:

EMM y = m _1 [CR]

For “m _1 ” ( t he “m” coefficient of Channel No. y’s “mx + b” linear relation, as discussed in Manual Section 1.G.2), you should enter the larger of these two numbers:

$$ 1. 0 0 0 \quad \text { or } \quad (1. 0 0 0 \times A) $$

For example, if your full-scale acceleration “A” is 100 (g), you would enter “100.00” for “m _1 .”

1. Disconnect any presently connected transducer from the 10A96's rear I/O CONNECTOR, and connect an external VOLTAGE STANDARD as shown in Fig. 5, below. Set the voltage standard to 0 mV.

Voltage Standard + - + SIGNAL -SIGNAL COMMON A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 Connections Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector

Fig. 5 Calibration Connections to 10A96 I/O Connector

1. With the EEPROM Switch still ON, apply a ZERO (ZRO) command to Channel No. y:

ZRO y [CR]

1. Set the voltage standard to 50 mV. Note the data reading of Channel No. y. If this reading is above 1.2 (V), then reduce the gain of the 10A96's front-end amplifier (as explained in Section 3.a) and repeat Steps 4 and 5. If the reading is less than 0.4 (V), then increase the gain of the front-end amplifier and repeat Steps 4 and 5.

2. With the voltage standard still at 50mV and the system EEPROM Switch ON, apply the following FORCE (FRC) command to Channel No. y:

$$ F R C y = 1. 0 0 0 [ C R ] $$

1. You must now determine the high-pass filter gain that includes the desired full scale. Note that the effective full scale for the vibratory component of acceleration is given by

$$ \mathbf {A} \cdot \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {g}} $$

You must therefore select from the following table a value of the factor “ m_g ” which, when multiplied by the full-scale acceleration “A,” includes the highest expected vibration reading. For example, if A = 100 (g), and you expect a vibration reading of up to 25 (g), you should select the “ m_g ” value of “0.2828,” since 100 x 0.2828 = 28.28.

Table 3

“mg” Filter Gain

1.414 1

0.707 2

0.2828 5

0.1414 10

0.0707 20

1. Referring to Table 3 and the instructions given in Section 3.b, above, set the 10A96 to the high-pass filter gain that corresponds to the selected "m_g" value. For the example in Step 7, this would be a gain of "5."

9. Command

EMM y [CR]

and note the answer returned by the system. This is “ m_y ,” the scaling factor you “forced” for Channel No. y in Step 6.

1. Now set the "m" coefficient for Channel No. x ("Vibratory Component") by commanding

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {x}} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

where the value you enter for "m_x" is

$$ \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {g}} \cdot \mathbf {m} _ {\mathbf {y}} $$

("m g " is the factor you selected in Step 7; "m y " is the answer from Step 9).

1. Disconnect the voltage standard from the 10A96's rear I/O CONNECTOR and connect the transducer as shown in Fig. 1.

MODEL AA14-4F010

THERMOCOUPLE

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The AA14-4F010 is a high-isolation, four-channel conditioner, accepting real-world temperature signals from Types E, J, K, N, R, S, and T Thermocouples. Based on NIST polynomials, linear output is produced over each thermocouple's stated operating range, and within the rated accuracy limits—without the need for additional output processing. See Table 1 for the "mV/degree" linear output produced by the AA14-4F010 for different TC types and ranges (°C or °F).

PLEASE NOTE: WHILE ALL FOUR CHANNELS OF A GIVEN AA14-4F010 CARD MUST BE DEDICATED TO THE SAME TC TYPE, INDIVIDUAL CARDS DEDICATED TO DIFFERENT TC TYPES MAY BE MIXED AS DESIRED WITHIN THE TOTAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM. IT IS ALSO REQUIRED THAT THE AA14-4F010'S CHANNEL NO. 1 BE USED.

This conditioner features true galvanic isolation with pulse-width modulation, allowing sensor-to-chassis or sensor-to-sensor common-mode voltages as high as 1500 V (rms) to be accommodated. Internal reference-junction compensation is automatically selected by thermocouple choice. No external cold junction is required (although the user may supply his own Controlled Ambient Temperature Zone for reference-junction purposes, if desired). A conventional Daytronic four-channel isothermal connector assembly (No. 60323, shown in Figs. 2 and 3) is supplied with each Model AA14-4F010, with screw terminals for direct connection of TC leads (which cannot be soldered), and with a precision thermistor for measurement of the reference-junction temperature. The same connector may be used with any TC type.

In the event of a broken thermocouple wire or other “open TC” condition, the AA14-4F010 will automatically report an indeterminate off-scale reading for the TC channel in question, with positive or negative polarity selectable on a per-channel basis (as explained in Section 3.a).

Each AA14-4F010 input channel employs an active low-pass filter with a fixed cutoff frequency of 10 Hz. A nominal ±5-V ANALOG OUTPUT is produced by each active AA14-4F010 input channel, for purposes of real-time signal monitoring. Each of these "Auxiliary Outputs" is available on a corresponding mainframe wire-wrap pin. Each output may be individually set, if desired, to represent the prefiltered value of the corresponding input (see Section 3.b).

"Absolute" calibration lets you quickly set up each TC-based data channel simply by entering appropriate "type" and "range" information. During operation, appropriate reference-junction compensation, real-time digital linearization, and engineering-unit scaling are automatically applied for each type of thermocouple used. A second, two-point "zero and span" calibration technique is provided, however, for applications where it is desirable to force multiple TC readings to the same exactly known temperature.*

NOTE: Fig. 1 shows the stand-off circuit boards (or "tiles") that provide the analog filtering and galvanic isolation for an AA14-4F010 card's data channels. FILTER TILES (ONLY) MAY BE INSTALLED OR REMOVED BY THE USER, IN THE FIELD. CONTACT THE DAYTRONIC SERVICE DEPARTMENT FOR COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS.

Fig. 1 Model AA14-4F010 Modular Card Components

I/O Connector

Four-Channel Isolator Tile

Fixed 10-Hz Filter (Chans. 3 & 4)

Fixed 10-Hz Filter (Chans. 1 & 2)

ADDITIONAL AA14-4F010 SPECIFICATIONS

Number of Input Channels: Four

Thermocouple Types and Ranges: See Table 1; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel "type" codes assigned to AA14-4F010 data channels, see Table 3 (Section 3.c)

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±80 mV operating; ±240 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: 1200 V (rms) operating and without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC and at 60 Hz: -130 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 10 MΩ; Common-Mode: 470 pF to earth

Offset: Initial: ±10 μV; vs. temperature: ±0.2 μV/°C; vs. time: ±0.5 μV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.05% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. temperature: ±25 ppm/°C; vs. time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth, 3 dB down at 10 Hz; 60 dB down at 195 Hz

Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output):

To 1% of final value: 70 msec

To 0.1% of final value: 85 msec

To 0.02% of final value: 95 msec

Auxiliary Outputs: Nominal ±5 V-DC signals available on mainframe wire-wrap pins*; individually jumper-selectable to represent either the filtered or prefiltered value of the channel (see Section 3.b)

Power-Supply Slot Allotment: Maximum consumption of supply current from the Conditioner Card Slot is 95 mA

Table 1 Thermocouple Ranges for the Model AA14-4F010

TC Type Range Resolution* (mV/degree)**
E -200°C to +1000°C 0.1°C 5.0000
E -328°F to +1832°F 0.1°F 2.7778
J -200°C to +1200°C 0.1°C 4.0000
J -328°F to +2192°F 0.1°F 2.2222
K -200°C to +1372°C 0.1°C 4.0000
K	-328°F to +2501.6°F	0.1°F 2.2222
N	-180°C to +1300°C 0.1°C 4.0000
N	-292°F to +2372°F 0.1°F 2.2222
R -50°C to +1768°C	0.1°C 2.0000
R -58°F to +3214.4°F	0.1°F 1.1111
S -50°C to +1768°C	0.1°C 2.0000
S -58°F to +3214.4°F	0.1°F 1.1111
T	-200°C to +400°C	0.1°C 5.0000
T -328°F to +752°F	0.1°F 2.7778

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model AA14-4F010's I/O CONNECTOR mates with Daytronic CONDITIONER CONNECTOR No. 60323, shown in Fig. 2. This connector contains four “±” screw-terminal pairs, one for each TC sensor. TC leads should be directly attached to the corresponding screw terminals (they should never be soldered). As shown in Fig. 3, each screw terminal connects internally to a specific pin on the AA14-4F010's rear 20-pin I/O CONNECTOR. Table 2 gives standard pin assignments for the I/O connector.

Since reference-junction compensation is provided by the dual-bead thermistor embedded in the Conditioner Connector, no external cold junction is required.

IMPORTANT: UNUSED THERMOCOUPLE INPUT CHANNELS should be shorted together as shown in Fig. 4, to prevent possible crosstalk from the "OPEN TC" detection circuit into working TC channels.

Table 2 Model AA14-4F010 Pin Assignments

I/O Connector Pin Number	Screw Terminal	Conditioner Channel Number	Conditioner Line Function
1	1(+)	1	+SIGNAL
A	1(-)	1	-SIGNAL
2			Not Committed
B			Not Committed
3	3(+)	2	+SIGNAL
C	3(-) 2	-SIGNAL
4			Not Committed
D			Not Committed
		(cont'd)

* For certain restricted ranges, a resolution of 0.01^ or F may be achieved. See Table 3, Section 3.c.

** See "Auxiliary Outputs," above.

Fig. 2 Four-Channel Thermocouple Connector Assembly (No. 60323)

Channel Thermocouple Assembly (No. 60323) Cable Clamp Precision Reference-Junction Thermistor Screw-Terminals (for secure connection of thermocouple leads) 20-Pin Connector (attaches to rear I/O Connector of AA14-4F010 Card) Cable Relief Post

I/O Connector Conditioner Conditioner Pin Screw Channel Line Number Terminal Number Function

5	5(+)	3	+SIGNAL
E	5(-) 3	-SIGNAL
6			Not Committed
F			Not Committed
7	7(+)	4	+SIGNAL
H	7(-) 4	-SIGNAL
8			Not Committed
J			Not Committed
9 INTERNAL		THERMISTOR: T1
K,L	USE	THERMISTOR: GROUND (COMMON)
10	ONLY	THERMISTOR: T2

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SELECTION OF "OPEN TC" POLARITY

In the event of a broken thermocouple wire or other "open TC" condition, the Model AA14-4F010 will automatically report an indeterminate off-scale reading for the TC channel in question. The conditioner is normally preset at the factory for positive off-scale "open TC" indication for each channel. However, you may easily reset any channel for negative off-scale "open TC" indication, as follows:

1. Remove the AA14-4F010 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the AA14-4F010 is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 5, below, and locate the OPEN TC POLARITY PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS on the top side of the Isolator Tile. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel's set of three jumper pins.

Fig. 3 Model AA14-4F010 Transducer Cabling Thermocouple Sensors (SAME TYPE) Channel 1 Channel 2 + - + SIGNAL - + SIGNAL - + SIGNAL - SHIELD CONDITIONER CONNECTOR (No. 60323) A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 H 7 J 8 K 9 L 10 Etc. Connector pins shown as viewed from rear (cable) side of connector Ground Lug

Thermocouple Conditioner I/O Connector +SIG (Chn. n) -SIG (Chn. n) GROUND LUG Fig. 4 Jumpering of an Unused AA14-4F010 Input

Fig. 5 Model AA14-4F010 Programming Jumper Pins

Open TC Polarity Programming Jumper Pins: Positive OFF-SCALE "OPEN TC" READING NEGATIVE OFF-SCALE "OPEN TC" READING Output Mode Programming Jumper Pins: POSTFILTER (FILTERED) OUTPUT PREFILTER (UNFILTERED) OUTPUT

1. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 5 to interconnect the pair of pins corresponding to the desired "open TC" polarity for that channel. You will need to use a small pair of needle-nosed pliers to move the jumper.
2. Reinsert the AA14-4F010 card in its mainframe slot.

3.b SELECTION OF ANALOG OUTPUT MODES

As mentioned in Section 1, each AA14-4F010 channel's ±5-V ANALOG OUTPUT can be set to represent either the filtered or prefiltered reading of that channel. To set the output mode for each of your AA14-4F010's active input channels, ^* you should

1. Remove the AA14-4F010 card from its slot (see Section 3.a, Step 1, above).
2. Refer to Fig. 5 and locate the OUTPUT MODE PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS beneath the AA14-4F010's Filter Tile(s). One "minijumper" is provided for each channel's set of three jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 5 to interconnect the pair of pins that corresponds to the desired output mode for that channel. You will need to use a small pair of needle-nosed pliers to move the jumper.
4. Reinsert the AA14-4F010 card in its mainframe slot.

3.c CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model AA14-4F010 card, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For AA14-4F010 channel "type" codes, see Table 3, below.

In System 10, the initial configuration and ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION of an AA14-4F010 channel (No. "x") involve direct entry of the channel's TYPE CODE, SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), and ZERO OFFSET ("b" term) via the corresponding mnemonic commands. The values of these parameters that are entered will depend on the TC type and the desired engineering units (°C or °F), as given in Table 3, below. You may also perform a subsequent TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) calibration of an AA14-4F010 channel in System 10, as explained below.

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

In the following procedure, Channel No. "x" is a System 10 "REAL CHANNEL" sourced by an AA14-4F010 card. Note that, with the exception of the LOCATE (LCT) command (Step 2), each of the commands can be applied to a continuous range of channels by entering the command in "range" form, where the single channel-number argument "x" is replaced by "x TO y" (indicating all channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y).

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH.
2. Make sure that Channel No. x has been assigned the proper A-SLOT / SUBCHANNEL "location." See Manual Section 1.G.1 for details on the LOCATE (LCT) command.

* The output mode setting for an UNUSED channel is immaterial, and will not affect operation of the AA14-4F010.

1. Apply a RESET (RST) command to Channel No. x:

RST x [CR]

The channel will be retyped as "55" (i.e., a direct millivolt reading from the system's internal Called Signal Bus). Its SCALING FACTOR ("m") will be changed to "5000" and its ZERO OFFSET ("b") to "0." Its current "location" (LCT) assignment will not be affected.

1. Apply the following commands to Channel No. x, using the values of "v," "m," and "b" given in Table 3 for the channel's specific TC type and range:

$$ \text { TYP } x = v [ \text { CR } ] $$

$$ \mathbf {E M M} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {m} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

$$ \mathbf {B E E} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {b} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

Be sure to enter the "m" value as shown (with a "0" or "00" after the decimal point), if you want your final measurement to be in tenths or hundredths of a degree, respectively.

Table 3 Calibration Values for an AA14-4F010 Channel

Type Code Scaling Factor Zero Offset
TC Type Range & Resolution ("v") ("m") ("b")
E -200.0°C to +1000.0°C 41 1000.0		0.0*
E -200.00°C to +250.00°C	67		250.00	0.00*
E -328.0°F to +1832.0°F	41		1800.0	32.0
J -200.0°C to +1200.0°C 42 1250.0			0.0*
J -200.00°C to +250.00°C	64		312.50	0.00*
J -328.0°F to +2192.0°F	42		2250.0	32.0
K -200.0°C to +1372.0°C 43 1250.0		0.0*
K -200.00°C to +250.00°C	61		312.50	0.00*
K -328.0°F to +2501.6°F	43		2250.0	32.0
N -180.0°C to +1300.0°C 44 1250.0			0.0*
N -292.0°F to +2372.0°F	44		2250.0	32.0
R -50.0°C to +1768.0°C	45		2500.0	0.0*
R -58.0°F to +3214.4°F	45		2250.0	32.0
S -50.0°C to +1768.0°C	46		2500.0	0.0*
S -58.0°F to +3214.4°F	46		2250.0	32.0
T -200.0°C to +400.0°C	47		1000.0	0.0*
T -328.0°F to +752.0°F	47		1800.0	32.0

1. Use the FILTER (FIL) command to apply to Channel No. x a level of digital smoothing that is appropriate to your application:

FIL x = f [CR]

The integer “f” should be 1, 2, or 3 for a TC range with tenth-of-a-degree resolution, and a number from 4 through 9 for a range with hundredth-of-a-degree resolution (see Manual Section 2.G for a complete explanation of the FIL command).

1. Turn OFF the system EEPROM SWITCH.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be easily applied to an AA14-4F010 channel on a real-time basis, to improve the ABSOLUTE calibration of an input when independently and accurately known temperature references are available (preferably the high and low extremes to which the sensor will be subjected). The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for these commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique.

4 DIAGNOSTIC WIRE-WRAP PINS

As a special diagnostic and service tool, the five pins shown in Fig. 6 are directly accessible from the front of an installed AA14-4F010 card. These pins allow voltmeter or oscilloscope observation of data-channel output signals. THEIR USE IS INTENDED PRIMARILY FOR TRAINED SERVICE TECHNICIANS. With regard to the on-board diagnostic pins, please note the following:

• PROPER ESD PRACTICE SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHEN MAKING CONTACT WITH AN AA14-4F010 BOARD INSTALLED IN A "LIVE" DAYTRONIC SYSTEM MAINFRAME. ALWAYS GROUND YOURSELF TO THE MAINFRAME CHASSIS BEFORE TOUCHING THE BOARD.
• THE ANALOG SIGNAL PRESENT AT EACH ACTIVE "CHANNEL" PIN REPRESENTS EIGHT TENTHS (0.8) OF THAT CHANNEL'S NOMINAL CALL-BUS VOLTAGE. For a channel delivering a standard full-scale (+5-V) output, the corresponding diagnostic pin will therefore register +4 V.
• THE ANALOG SIGNAL PRESENT AT EACH ACTIVE "CHANNEL" PIN REPRESENTS THE FILTERED CHANNEL OUTPUT, AND IS NOT AFFECTED BY THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODE CURRENTLY SELECTED FOR THAT CHANNEL (see Section 3.b).
• THE "SLOT CALL" PIN DELIVERS A LOGIC SIGNAL THAT MAY BE USED TO SYNCHRONIZE AN OSCILLOSCOPE FOR TIMING ANALYSIS OF THE AA14-4F010 CARD.

Fig. 6 Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Slot Call Signal Common

MODEL AA30-4

LVDT

CONDITIONER CARD

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The AA30-4 is a four-channel conditioner for measurement of displacement, force, pressure, and other parameters obtained with a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) or variable reluctance transducer.

Based on the synchronous carrier-demodulator principle, the AA30-4 supplies regulated, remotely sensed AC excitation for each active transducer channel—thus allowing direct measurement of thickness (when two separate inputs are summed) or of taper (when their difference is calculated). It then demodulates, filters, and amplifies the resulting signals to produce system outputs precisely proportional to LVDT core displacement. The AA30-4 automatically adjusts to the signal phase shift of the transducer in use, thereby insuring optimum sensitivity and linearity.

Unlike the Model 10A30-2C or 10A31-4, the Model AA30-4 does not require special cabling to accommodate "long-stroke" LVDT's (full-scale range of ±1 inch or greater). Also, the AA30-4's enhanced linearity correction lets it accommodate a wider range of displacement transducers.

Like most Daytronic "Advanced Analog" ("AA") cards, the AA30-4 features optional PROGRAMMABLE LOW-PASS ACTIVE FILTERING for the removal of unwanted high-frequency measurement-signal components. Selectable analog filtering is offered for the AA30-4 from 0.2 through 200 Hz in 16 steps—or, if desired, a fixed filter of either 10 or 50 Hz for all channels may be specified at the time of order. When the AA30-4 is used in System 10, its filter cutoff values are set by means of an on-board 16-position switch for each channel.

A nominal ±5-V ANALOG OUTPUT is produced by each active AA30-4 input channel, for purposes of real-time signal monitoring. Each of these “Auxiliary Outputs” is available on a corresponding mainframe wire-wrap pin. Each output may be individually set, if desired, to represent the prefiltered value of the corresponding input.*

Separate excitation for each channel uses remote sensing of excitation voltage and is slaved to a common System Reference Voltage. The result is consistently stable ratio-metric measurement, unaffected by possible power-supply drift. A "Slave Excitation" input is available if the user wishes to provide an external excitation voltage and frequency instead of the AA30-4's internal supply.**

The AA30-4 is manufactured using the latest surface-mount technology, resulting in the highest immunity to shock and vibration. As explained in Section 2, I/O connections are via secure, clearly labelled screw terminals in a special AA30-4 CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY.

Fig. 1 Model AA30-4 Modular Card Components

graph LR
    A["I/O Connector"] --> B["Filter Chans.<br>3 & 4"]
    A --> C["Filter Chans.<br>1 & 2"]
    D["FOR FUTURE USE"] --> E["Block with two vertical rectangles"]

Fig. 1 shows the stand-off circuit boards (or "tiles") that provide the analog filtering for an AA30-4 card's data channels. FILTER TILES (ONLY) MAY BE INSTALLED OR REMOVED BY THE USER, IN THE FIELD. CONTACT THE DAYTRONIC SERVICE DEPARTMENT FOR COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS.

THE FOLLOWING AA30-4 VERSIONS ARE CURRENTLY AVAILABLE:

• Model AA30-4F010—Four input channels, with FIXED 10-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA30-4F050—Four input channels, with FIXED 50-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA30-4F1—Four input channels, with "F1" PROGRAMMABLE FILTERING for each*

ADDITIONAL AA30-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Transducer Types: 5- or 7-wire LVDT's capable of 3280-Hz operation and having primary impedance of 80 Ω or greater (all Daytronic LVDT transducers are suitable); 3- or 5-wire variable reluctance transducers

Input Ranges (rms, full-scale): Automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to AA30-4 data channels, see Table 1, below

Standard: 70, 140, 280, or 410 mV/V

Long-Stroke: 820 mV/V or 1.64 V/V

On-Board Excitation (per channel): Nominal 3 V-AC (rms) at 3280 Hz; 37.5 mA (rms), maximum, for each voltage, subject to 120 mA total current draw for all 4 channels

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±6 V operating; ±12 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±5 V operating; ±12 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC: infinite; at 60 Hz: -120 dB; at 3 kHz: -60 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 200 kΩ; Common-Mode: 125 kΩ

Offset: Initial: ±1% of full scale; vs. temperature: ±0.20 ppm/°C; vs. time: ±0.01% of full scale/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale, following calibration

* "F1" is currently the only programmable filter tile that applies to the Model AA30-4.

Gain Stability: vs. temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth

"F1" Programmable Filtering (all four channels): Switch- or software-selectable to one of 16 different cutoff frequencies: 0.2; 0.4; 0.8; 1.0; 1.6; 2.0; 4.0; 5.0; 8.0; 10; 20; 25; 40; 50; 100; or 200 Hz (see Table 2)

Fixed Filtering (all four channels): 10 or 50 Hz (see Table 3)

Auxiliary Outputs: Nominal ±5 V-DC signals available on mainframe wire-wrap pins ^* ; individually jumper-selectable to represent either the filtered or prefiltered reading of the channel; “prefiltered” outputs have the following response characteristics: -3 dB at 300 Hz; -60 dB at 4.4 kHz; Step-Response Settling Time (Full-Scale Output): To 1% of final value: 2 msec; to 0.1% of final value: 2.5 msec; to 0.02% of final value: 3 msec.

Power-Supply Slot Allotment: Maximum consumption of supply current from the Conditioner Card Slot is 165 mA

Table 1 AA30-4 "Type" Codes

Full-Scale Channel Input (RMS) Type Code

70 mV/V 5A

140 mV/V 5B

280 mV/V 5C

410 mV/V 5D

820 mV/V 5E

1.64 V/V 5F

Table 2 "F1" Programmable Filter Characteristics for "AA" Cards

Bandwidth Step-Response Settling Time
Selected Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of to 0.02% of
Frequency (Hz)	at -3 dB (Hz)	at -60 dB (Hz)	final value (msec)	final value (msec)	final value
0.2	0.2	3.9	3500	4250	4750
0.4	0.4	7.8	1750	2125	2375
0.8	0.8	16	875	1063	1188
1.0	1.0	20	700	850	950
1.6	1.6	31	438	531	594
2.0	2.0	39	350	425	475
4.0	4.0	78	175	213	238
5.0	5.0	98	140	170	190
8.0	8.0	156	88	106	119
10.0	10.0	195	70	85	95
20.0	20.0	390	35	43	48
25.0	25.0	488	28	34	38
40.0	40.0	780	18	21	24
50.0	50.0	975	14	17	19
100.0	100.0	1950	7.0	8.5	9.5
200.0	200.0	3900	3.5	4.3	4.8

Table 3 Fixed Filter Characteristics for "AA" Cards

Bandwidth Step-Response Settling Time
Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of to 0.02% of Filter at -3 dB at -60 dB final value final value final value Designation (Hz) (Hz) (msec) (msec) (msec)
“F010”	10	195	70	85	95
“F050”	50	975	14	17	19

2 CONNECTIONS

2.a TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model AA30-4's rear I/O CONNECTOR mates with the special AA30 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR, via the cable connections shown in Fig. 4. Mounted on the internal board of the connector assembly (shown in Fig. 2) is a block of nine clearly labelled screw terminals for each of the AA30-4's four input channels.

To access the connector board, simply remove the screws that hold together both halves of the connector housing. Use the two internal clamp bars to secure transducer cables once all leads have been connected.

The connector assembly's mounting screws are designed to secure the connector to the rear of the system mainframe and to provide a solid GROUND CONNECTION for cable "shields" via the two L-shaped ground lugs. An offset in the mounting holes ensures that the connector cannot be attached upside down.

With regard to AA30-4 cabling, please note the following:

a. 5-wire LVDT cabling (Fig. 4(a)) or 3-wire variable reluctance transducer cabling (Fig. 4(c)) is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR.

7-wire LVDT cabling (Fig. 4(b)) or 5-wire variable reluctance transducer cabling (Fig. 4(d)) is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines at the transducer.

b. For each LVDT transducer connected to the AA30-4, you may either

• connect the “center wire” that joins both series-opposed secondary coils to the conditioner connector’s CENTER WIRE Terminal, as shown in Figs. 4(a) and 4(b); or, alternatively (to simplify the overall cabling),
• connect the transducer center wire to the CABLE SHIELD at the transducer end, instead of bringing this line through a cable shield to the conditioner connector's CENTER WIRE Terminal.

c. Unlike the Models 10A30-2C and 10A31-4, the Model AA30-4 does not require special connections for input of "long-stroke" LVDT signals (full-scale range of ±1 inch or greater).

d. When wiring a variable reluctance transducer to the AA30-4, you must install a 10-kilohm "half-bridge completion" resistor between the -SIGNAL Terminal and each of the two EXCITATION lines, as shown in Figs. 4(c) and 4(d).

IMPORTANT: The ±EXCITATION, ±SENSE, ±SIGNAL, and CENTER WIRE terminals for an UNUSED LVDT INPUT CHANNEL should be jumpered as shown in Fig. 3, below. If an input is left open, high-frequency oscillation can result, which can in turn produce significant interchannel crosstalk, and possibly inaccurate data readings.

Fig. 2 Model AA30-4 Connector Assembly Board

40-Pin Connector (attaches to rear I/O Connector of AA30 Card) Channel 3 SHIELD +EXCITATION +SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION +SIGNAL CENTER WIRE -SIGNAL Channel 1 SHIELD +EXCITATION +SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION +SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL Channel 2 SHIELD +EXCITATION +SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION +SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL * SIGNAL COMMON Fig. 3 Jumpering of an Unused AA30-4 Input

Fig. 4 Model AA30-4 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4:"] --> B["Primary Coil"]
    B --> C["SEC. 1"]
    B --> D["SEC. 2"]
    C --> E["+ Excitation"]
    D --> F["+ Excitation"]
    E --> G["SIGNAL COMMON"]
    F --> H["SIGNAL COMMON"]
    G --> I["See Fig. 5"]
    H --> J["SHIELD + EXCITATION + SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION + SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL * SIGNAL COMMON"]

Fig. 4(a) 5-Wire LVDT Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4:

graph TD
    A["PRIMARY COIL"] --> B["SECS. 1"]
    A --> C["SECS. 2"]
    B --> D["SIGNAL COMMON"]
    C --> D
    D --> E["+SIGNAL -SIGNAL"]
    D --> F["+EXCITATION -EXCITATION"]
    G["AA30-4 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR"] --> H["SHIELD + EXCITATION + SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION + SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL"]
    H --> I["See Fig. 5"]
    I --> J["• SIGNAL COMMON"]

Fig. 4(b) 7-Wire LVDT Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

AA30-4 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4: + EXCITATION + SIGNAL - EXCITATION See Fig. 5 SHIELD + EXCITATION + SENSE SLAVE IN - SENSE - EXCITATION + SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* - SIGNAL * SIGNAL COMMON 3-Wire Variable ce Transducer under 20 ft. in length)

Fig. 4(c) 3-Wire Variable Reluctance Transducer Cabling (under 20 ft. in length)

Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4:

+SENSE +EXCITATION +SIGNAL -EXCITATION -SENSE AA30-4 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR See Fig. 5 SHIELD + EXCITATION + SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION + SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL 10K 10K -SIGNAL * SIGNAL COMMON Wire Variable Transducer

Fig. 4(d) 5-Wire Variable Reluctance Transducer Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

2.b CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL EXCITATION SOURCE

An external excitation supply furnished by the user can be optionally applied to each active AA30-4 channel, in place of the card's on-board 3280-Hz, 3-VAC (rms) reference. The external excitation must be 2 to 6 kHz, 2 to 3.5 V-AC (rms sine wave), referenced to "center wire" (Signal Common).

As shown in Fig. 5, below, the excitation source's positive lead will connect directly to the "SLAVE IN" terminal of each channel to which it is applied, with the negative lead connecting directly to the "CENTER WIRE" terminal. It is strongly recommended that all AA30-4 channels be "slaved" to the same sine-wave signal source, in order to prevent harmonic "beating" with another frequency.

As explained in Section 3.a, an appropriate jumper setting must be made for each channel that is being "slaved" to an external excitation source.

EXTERNAL EXCITATION: 2 - 3.5 V-AC (rms); 2 - 6 kHz + - External SHIELD + EXCITATION + SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION + SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL Channel 1 SHIELD + EXCITATION + SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION + SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL Channel 2 SHIELD + EXCITATION + SENSE SLAVE IN -SENSE -EXCITATION + SIGNAL CENTER WIRE* -SIGNAL * SIGNAL COMMON

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SELECTION OF EXCITATION SOURCE

To enable the "SLAVE" input of a specific AA30-4 channel in order to apply an external AC excitation source to that channel, you should

1. Remove the AA30-4 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the AA30-4 is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 6, below, and locate the EXCITATION PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel's set of three jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 6 to interconnect the pair of pins corresponding to the desired excitation source for that channel. You will need to use a small pair of needle-nosed pliers to move the jumper.
4. Reinsert the AA30-4 card in its mainframe slot.

3.b SELECTION OF ANALOG FILTERING

NOTE: If your AA30-4 card is equipped with FIXED ANALOG FILTERING, you may ignore this manual section.

When using an AA30-4 with PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG FILTERING in System 10, you may set an individual corner frequency for the analog filter of each active input channel, ^* as follows:

Fig. 6 Model AA30-4 Programming Jumper Pins and Filter Selection Switches

(see Table 4) Chan. 4 Chan. 3 Chan. 2 Chan. 1 Chan. 1 Excitation Programming Jumper Pins Chan. 2 Chan. 3 Chan. 4 STANDARD INTERNAL EXCITATION SLAVE TO EXTERNAL EXCITATION Output Mode Programming Jumper Pins: POSTFILTER (FILTERED) OUTPUT PREFILTER (300-Hz) OUTPUT

* The analog filter setting for an UNUSED channel is immaterial, and will not affect operation of the AA30-4.

a. Remove the AA30-4 card from its slot (see Section 3.a, Step 1, above).

b. Refer to Fig. 6 and locate the 16-position FILTER SELECTION SWITCHES located between the main card and the Filter Tiles.

c. Referring to Table 4, below, set each channel's switch for the desired frequency. You will need to use a small screwdriver (or equivalent tool) to set the switch to the appropriate number/letter.

d. Reinsert the AA30-4 card.

NOTE: In addition to the normal-mode analog filtering supplied by the AA30-4 card, System 10 can provide additional processor-controlled DIGITAL SMOOTHING on a per-channel basis. For each individual channel, you may indicate the desired amount of digital smoothing by applying a FILTER (FIL) command to that channel (see Manual Section 2.G.2).

Table 4 Model AA30-4 Filter Switch Settings

Cutoff Frequency Switch Setting

0.2 Hz 7

0.4 Hz 6

0.8 Hz 5

1.0 Hz 3

1.6 Hz 4

2.0 Hz 2

4.0 Hz 1

5.0 Hz F

8.0 Hz 0

10 Hz E

20 Hz D

25 Hz B

40 Hz C

50 Hz A

100 Hz 9

200 Hz 8

3.c SELECTION OF ANALOG OUTPUT MODES

As mentioned in Section 1, each AA30-4 channel's ±5-V ANALOG OUTPUT can be set to represent either the filtered or prefiltered reading of that channel. To set the output mode for each of your AA30-4's active input channels, ^* you should

1. Remove the AA30-4 card from its slot (see Section 3.a, Step 1, above).

2. Refer to Fig. 6 and locate the OUTPUT MODE PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS beneath the AA30-4's Filter Tiles. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel's set of three jumper pins.

3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 6 to interconnect the pair of pins that corresponds to the desired output mode for that channel. You will need to use a small pair of needle-nosed pliers to move the jumper.

4. Reinsert the AA30-4 card in its mainframe slot.

* The output mode setting for an UNUSED channel is immaterial, and will not affect operation of the AA30-4.

3.d CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model AA30-4 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For AA30-4 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, a relatively linear Model AA30-4 channel normally employs TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION.* See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this conventional "zero and span" calibration technique. Note, however, the following special procedure that applies to an LVDT-based Channel No. "x":

1. Make sure the channel has been properly "typed" and "located" (see Manual Section 1.G.2).
2. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and enter a command of

$$ \text { BEE } x = 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

This command sets an initial ZERO OFFSET ("b" term) of zero for Channel No. x.

1. Observing a "live" reading of the channel, mechanically adjust the fixture and physical position of the LVDT until the lowest reading occurs. This is the LVDT's "electrical null" point.

2. With the transducer still in "null" position, enter a command of

$$ Z R O \times [ C R ] $$

1. Displace the LVDT probe by a precisely known distance, preferably between 80% and 100% of the transducer's nominal full-scale rating.

2. Command

$$ F R C x = z [ C R ] $$

where “z” is the exact value of the displacement produced in Step 5, expressed in appropriate engineering units (the precision of the final measurement will match that of the entered “z” value).

1. Repeat Steps 4, 5, and 6, if necessary, until the LVDT's zero and span points coincide with the calibration block or micrometer reference being used.

4 DIAGNOSTIC WIRE-WRAP PINS

As a special diagnostic and service tool, the five pins shown in Fig. 7 are directly accessible from the front of an installed AA30-4 card. These pins allow voltmeter or oscilloscope observation of data-channel output signals. THEIR USE IS INTENDED PRIMARILY FOR TRAINED SERVICE TECHNICIANS. With regard to the on-board diagnostic pins, please note the following:

• PROPER ESD PRACTICE SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHEN MAKING CONTACT WITH AN AA30-4 BOARD INSTALLED IN A "LIVE" DAYTRONIC SYSTEM MAINFRAME. ALWAYS GROUND YOURSELF TO THE MAINFRAME CHASSIS BEFORE TOUCHING THE BOARD.
• THE ANALOG SIGNAL PRESENT AT EACH ACTIVE "CHANNEL" PIN REPRESENTS EIGHT TENTHS (0.8) OF THAT CHANNEL'S NOMINAL CALL-BUS VOLTAGE. For a channel delivering a standard full-scale (+5-V) output, the corresponding diagnostic pin will therefore register +4 V.
• THE ANALOG SIGNAL PRESENT AT EACH ACTIVE "CHANNEL" PIN REPRESENTS THE FILTERED CHANNEL OUTPUT, AND IS NOT AFFECTED BY THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODE CURRENTLY SELECTED FOR THAT CHANNEL (see Section 3.c).
• THE "SLOT CALL" PIN DELIVERS A LOGIC SIGNAL THAT MAY BE USED TO SYNCHRONIZE AN OSCILLOSCOPE FOR TIMING ANALYSIS OF THE AA30-4 CARD.

Fig. 7 Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Slot Call Signal Common

AA30-4 QUAD LVDT CARD

MODEL AA41-2 MODEL AA41-4

FREQUENCY INPUT

CONDITIONER CARD

PLEASE NOTE: In this manual, "AA41" will be used to refer to BOTH the two-channel Model AA41-2 AND the four-channel Model AA41-4, in cases where it is not necessary to distinguish them.

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Models AA41-2 and AA41-4 are two- and four-channel conditioners (respectively) for measuring rpm, flow, and other phenomena that can be sensed by pulse transformer transducers with 2-wire isolated windings (tachometer pickups, turbine flowmeters, etc.), transistor or logic-circuit drivers, "zero-velocity" (true digital output) sensors, and similar frequency-generating transducers.

The AA41 accepts a wide range of waveshapes and voltage levels. A “Smart Schmitt” threshold level for each input channel may be individually selected via internal jumper connections, depending on the expected peak voltage input: 0.1-2 V; 0.5-10 V; 2.5-50 V; or 10-200 V. This ensures reliable triggering when the input is at the low end of the voltage range. All ranges are protected against an overload of up to 200 V. Nominal ±5 V-DC excitation is supplied for use with a “zero-velocity” sensor.

Standard AA-card "F1" programmable filter tiles let you tailor the dynamic frequency range and signal response of each AA41 channel to your application's requirements.* Setting a frequency channel's programmable filter to the 1.6-Hz cutoff provides the following input ranges:

• 10% to 100% of full scale for a range of 250 or 500 Hz
- 2% to 100% of full scale for a range of 1 or 2 kHz
- 1% to 100% of full scale for a range of 4, 8, 16, or 32 kHz

If a faster response is more important than dynamic range, you may select a higher "F1" bandwidth value (see Table 2). However, programmable filter settings above 25 Hz are not recommended for use with the AA41, because of inadequate usable dynamic frequency range. When the card is used in System 10, its filter cutoff values are set by means of an on-board 16-position switch for each channel.

Capacitive coupling of 0.1 or 10 microfarads is provided for low-frequency inputs, to eliminate false triggering by signal noise and/or any positive or negative DC offset that exists for the frequency signal.** A special trigger-level control guarantees reliable triggering when the input is at the low end of the frequency range, while a precise

* Or, if desired, a fixed filter of either 10 or 50 Hz for all channels may be specified at the time of order.
** Noise suppression is always recommended when using a magnetic pickup as the frequency source.

2.4576-MHz crystal frequency reference ensures accuracy of all calibration, whether "CALCULATED" or "TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT)."

A nominal ±5-V ANALOG OUTPUT is produced by each active AA41 input channel, for purposes of real-time signal monitoring. Each of these “Auxiliary Outputs” is available on a corresponding mainframe wire-wrap pin. Note that the AA41’s Auxiliary Outputs represent filtered (“postfilter”) channel outputs only (unlike most other “AA” cards).

The AA41 is manufactured using the latest surface-mount technology, resulting in the highest immunity to shock and vibration. As explained in Section 2, I/O connections are via secure, clearly labelled screw terminals in a special AA41 CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY.

Fig. 1 Model AA41-2 / AA41-4 Modular Card Components

graph LR
    A["I/O Connector"] --> B["Conditioner Tile Chans. 3 & 4 (Model AA41-4 Only)"]
    A --> C["Filter Chans. 3 & 4 (Model AA41-4 Only)"]
    A --> D["Filter Chans. 1 & 2"]
    E["FOR FUTURE USE"] --> F[" "]

Fig. 1 shows the stand-off circuit boards (or “tiles”) that provide the analog filtering for an AA41 card’s data channels.

WARNING

THE CONDITIONER TILE FOR CHANNELS 3 AND 4 OF A MODEL AA41-4 IS TO BE INSTALLED OR REMOVED ONLY BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN, SINCE SUBSEQUENT REALIGNMENT OF THE AA41 CARD IS REQUIRED. FILTER TILES, HOWEVER, MAY BE INSTALLED OR REMOVED BY THE USER, IN THE FIELD. CONTACT THE DAYTRONIC SERVICE DEPARTMENT FOR COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS.

THE FOLLOWING AA41-2 / AA41-4 VERSIONS ARE CURRENTLY AVAILABLE:

• Model AA41-2F010—Two input channels, with FIXED 10-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA41-2F050—Two input channels, with FIXED 50-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA41-2F1—Two input channels, with "F1" PROGRAMMABLE FILTERING for each*
• Model AA41-4F010—Four input channels, with FIXED 10-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA41-4F050—Four input channels, with FIXED 50-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA41-4F1—Four input channels, with "F1" PROGRAMMABLE FILTERING for each*

ADDITIONAL AA41-2 / AA41-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Number of Input Channels: Two for Model AA41-2; four for Model AA41-4

Inputs:

Type: Any AC or unipolar pulse signal, grounded or floating, irrespective of waveform

Threshold Level: Accommodates signals from 100 mV to 200 V

Frequency Ranges: Nominal 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000, or 32000 Hz, full-scale, with dynamic frequency range dependent on the selected analog filtering (see Table 2, below); automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for the System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to AA41 data channels, see Table 1, below

Excitation: Nominal 10 (i.e., ±5) V-DC; ±50 mA, total (all channels)

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±200 V operating and without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±50 V operating; ±100 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC and at 60 Hz: -100 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: 200 kΩ; Common-Mode: 125 kΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.02% of full scale; vs. temperature: ±20 ppm/°C; vs. time: ±10 ppm/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. time: ±50 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth

"F1" Programmable Filtering (all four channels): Switch- or software-selectable to one of 16 different cutoff frequencies: 0.2; 0.4; 0.8; 1.0; 1.6; 2.0; 4.0; 5.0; 8.0; 10; 20; 25; 40; 50; 100; or 200 Hz (see Table 2)

Fixed Filtering (all four channels): 10 or 50 Hz (see Table 3)

Auxiliary Outputs: Nominal ±5 V-DC signals representing filtered channel readings (only) available on mainframe wire-wrap pins*

Power-Supply Slot Allotment: Maximum consumption of supply and excitation current from the Conditioner Card Slot is 120 mA

Table 1 AA41 "Type" Codes
Full-Scale Channel Input Type Code

250 Hz 40

500 Hz 41

1000 Hz 42

2000 Hz 43

4000 Hz 44

8000 Hz 45

16000 Hz 46

32000 Hz 47

Table 2 "F1" Programmable Filter Characteristics for "AA" Cards

Bandwidth Step-Response Settling Time
Selected Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of to 0.02% of Frequency at -3 dB at -60 dB final value final value final value
(Hz)	(Hz)	(Hz)	(msec) (msec) (msec)
0.2	0.2	3.9	3500	4250	4750
0.4	0.4	7.8	1750	2125	2375
0.8	0.8	16	875	1063	1188
1.0	1.0	20	700	850	950
1.6	1.6	31	438	531	594
2.0	2.0	39	350	425	475
4.0	4.0	78	175	213	238
5.0	5.0	98	140	170	190
8.0	8.0	156	88	106	119
10.0	10.0	195	70	85	95
20.0	20.0	390	35	43	48
25.0	25.0	488	28	34	38
40.0	40.0	780	18	21	24
50.0	50.0	975	14	17	19
100.0	100.0	1950	7.0	8.5	9.5
200.0	200.0	3900	3.5	4.3	4.8

Table 3 Fixed Filter Characteristics for "AA" Cards

Filter Designation	Bandwidth Step-Response Settling Time
	Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of to 0.02% of at -3 dB at -60 dB final value final value final value (msec)
	(Hz)	(Hz)	(msec)	(msec)	(msec)
“F010”	10	195	70	85	95
“F050”	50	975	14	17	19

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

2.a STANDARD CABLING

The Model AA41's rear I/O CONNECTOR mates with the special AA41 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR, via the cable connections shown in Fig. 3. Mounted on the internal board of the connector assembly (shown in Fig. 2) is a block of ten clearly labelled screw terminals for each of the AA41's four possible input channels.

To access the connector board, simply remove the screws that hold together both halves of the connector housing. Use the two internal clamp bars to secure transducer cables once all leads have been connected.

The connector assembly's mounting screws are designed to secure the connector to the rear of the system mainframe and to provide a solid GROUND CONNECTION for cable "shields" via the two L-shaped ground lugs. An offset in the mounting holes ensures that the connector cannot be attached upside down.

Fig. 3(a) shows recommended cabling for intrinsically grounded transistor or logic-circuit drivers; Fig. 3(b), for pulse transformer transducers with two-wire isolated windings (tachometers, turbine flowmeters, etc.); and Fig. 3(c), for "zero-velocity" (true digital output) sensors requiring 10-V excitation.

40-Pin C (attaches 1) Connection SHIELD +SIGNAL +SIGNAL A +SIGNAL B -SIGNAL -5V POWER COM -5V NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION SHIELD +SIGNAL +SIGNAL A +SIGNAL B -SIGNAL -5V POWER COM -5V NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION

Fig. 2 Model AA41 Connector Assembly Board

2.b SPECIAL CABLING

Fig. 4 summarizes three kinds of special AA41 connections you might need to establish for a given AA41 channel:

UNGROUNDED FREQUENCY SOURCE

For floating-source inputs and inputs from zero-velocity sensors, where the -SIGNAL is not grounded at the frequency source, the -SIGNAL terminal should be tied directly to POWER COMMON. This connection is also shown in Figs. 3(b) and 3(c).

Fig. 3 Model AA41 Transducer Cabling

AA41-2: Channel 1 or 2: AA41-4: Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4: Frequency Source + SIGNAL - -SIGNAL See Fig. 4 10K See Note on Pull-Up Resistor AA41 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR SHIELD + SIGNAL + SIGNAL A + SIGNAL B -SIGNAL +5V POWER COM -5V a) Cabling to a died Frequency Source

Fig. 3(a) Cabling to a Grounded Frequency Source

AA41-2: Channel 1 or 2:
AA41-4: Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4:
AA41 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR

+SIGNAL + Frequency Source - -SIGNAL 10K See Fig. 4 SHIELD +SIGNAL +SIGNAL A +SIGNAL B -SIGNAL +5V POWER COM -5V See Note on Pull-Up Resistor

Fig. 3(b) Cabling to an Ungrounded Frequency Source

AA41-2: Channel 1 or 2:
AA41-4: Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4:
AA41 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR

graph LR
    A["Zero-Velocity Sensor"] -->|+SIGNAL| B["See Note on Pull-Up Resistor"]
    A -->|+EXCITATION| B
    B --> C["SHIELD"]
    B --> D["+SIGNAL"]
    B --> E["+SIGNAL A"]
    B --> F["+SIGNAL B"]
    B --> G["-SIGNAL"]
    B --> H["+5V"]
    B --> I["POWER COM"]
    B --> J["-5V"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Fig. 3(c) Cabling to a Zero-Velocity Sensor

Connect "-SIGNAL" and "+SIGNAL A" Terminals for suppression of high-frequency noise (if source is a magnetic pickup)
Fig. 4 Special AA41 I/O Connections

Connect +SIGNAL line to "+SIGNAL B" Terminal to eliminate DC offset + SIGNAL - -SIGNAL SHIELD + SIGNAL + SIGNAL A (0.1 μF) + SIGNAL B (10 μF) -SIGNAL + 5V POWER COM -5V Connect "-SIGNAL" and "POWER COM" Terminals if -SIGNAL line is not grounded at the frequency source

ELIMINATION OF DC OFFSET

Each AA41 input channel is supplied with two capacitive-coupled inputs: “+SIGNAL A” provides 0.1-microfarad capacitance, while “+SIGNAL B” provides 10-microfarad capacitance. These special inputs may be used with either floating or grounded configurations; they would not normally be used with zero-velocity sensors requiring 10-V excitation (see Fig. 3(c)).

Fig. 4 shows how the larger (10- F) capacitive coupling can be used to eliminate any positive or negative DC offset that exists for an AA41 channel's frequency signal. Simply connect the +SIGNAL line from the frequency source to the “+SIGNAL B” terminal instead of to the normal +SIGNAL terminal. The capacitor is here in series with the +SIGNAL input and allows only AC to pass.

SUPPRESSION OF HIGH-FREQUENCY NOISE IN LOW-FREQUENCY INPUT

False triggering can sometimes occur, especially at the low-frequency input range, because of stray pickup of frequencies outside the common-mode range. Capacitive coupling of the frequency input to ground can in such cases serve to suppress unwanted signal noise. This noise suppression is always recommended when using a MAGNETIC PICKUP as the frequency source.

Thus, if you find a channel's frequency reading to be unacceptably unstable or "noisy," you should tie that channel's -SIGNAL terminal to the "+SIGNAL A" terminal while maintaining the normal +SIGNAL connection.

2.c Pull-Up RESISTOR

When used with an open-collector type sensor, an AA41 channel requires a pull-up resistor (typically 10 k ) between the +SIGNAL and the corresponding +5 V-DC EXCI-TATION.

3 SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SELECTION OF INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE

Perform the following steps to select the proper peak voltage input range for each active AA41 channel.* At the same time, you will be setting the trigger level for that channel, thereby ensuring reliable triggering when the input is at the low end of the voltage range. EACH AA41 CHANNEL IS PRESET AT THE FACTORY FOR AN INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE OF 2.5 - 50 V. If you require a different range, you should

1. Remove the AA41 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the AA41 is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 5, below, and locate the INPUT VOLTAGE PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS located on the rear edge of the card. For an AA41-4, the pins for Channels 3 and 4 are on the underside of the Conditioner Tile. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel's set of three jumper pins.

* The input voltage range setting for an UNUSED channel is immaterial, and will not affect operation of the AA41.

Fig. 5 Model AA41 Programming Jumper Pins and Filter Selection Switches

Input Voltage Programming Jumper Pins 10-200 V 2.5-50 V 0.5-10 V 0.1-2 V 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Filter Selection Switches (see Table 4) Chan. 1 Chan. 3 Chan. 2 Chan. 1 Chan. 2 Chan. 4

1. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 5 to interconnect the pair of pins corresponding to the desired input voltage range for that channel. You will need to use a small pair of needle-nosed pliers to move the jumper.
2. Reinsert the AA41 card in its mainframe slot.

3.b SELECTION OF ANALOG FILTERING

NOTE: If your AA41 card is equipped with FIXED ANALOG FILTERING, you may ignore this manual section.

When using an AA41 with PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG FILTERING in System 10, you may set an individual corner frequency for the analog filter of each active input channel,* as follows:

a. Remove the AA41 card from its slot (see Section 3.a, Step 1, above).
b. Refer to Fig. 5 and locate the 16-position FILTER SELECTION SWITCHES located between the main card and the Filter Tile(s).
c. Referring to Table 4, below, set each channel's switch for the desired frequency. You will need to use a small screwdriver (or equivalent tool) to set the switch to the appropriate number/letter.
d. Reinsert the AA41 card.

NOTE: In addition to the normal-mode analog filtering supplied by the AA41 card, System 10 can provide additional processor-controlled DIGITAL SMOOTHING on a per-channel basis. For each individual channel, you may indicate the desired amount of digital smoothing by applying a FILTER (FIL) command to that channel (see Manual Section 2.G.2).

* The analog filter setting for an UNUSED channel is immaterial, and will not affect operation of the AA41.

Table 4 Model AA41 Filter Switch Settings

Cutoff Frequency Switch Setting

0.2 Hz 7

0.4 Hz 6

0.8 Hz 5

1.0 Hz 3

1.6 Hz 4

2.0 Hz 2

4.0 Hz 1

5.0 Hz F

8.0 Hz 0

10 Hz E

20 Hz D

25 Hz B

40 Hz C

50 Hz A

100 Hz 9

200 Hz 8

3.c CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model AA41 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For AA41 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use three calibration methods with the Model AA41:

ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

Described in Manual Section 1.G.3.b, this method is applicable only when the AA41 is being used to measure frequency itself (in Hz). In this case, the user need only specify an appropriate SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient), once the AA41-based input channel has been properly configured.

Thus, to calibrate an AA41-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command:

EMM x = m [CR]

where “m” equals the full-scale range corresponding to the channel’s present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel’s data readings. Channel “type” codes and associated full-scale ranges are given in Table 1, above. If, for example, a frequency-measuring AA41 channel is “typed” as “43” (corresponding to a full scale of 2000 Hz) and you want the channel to read tenths of a hertz, you would enter an “m” value of “2000.0.”

Note that “absolute” calibration of an AA41-based channel yields an accuracy of ±0.02% of full scale.

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

This is generally the most convenient means of calibrating an AA41 channel, when the full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured) is accurately known.

Thus, to calibrate an AA41-based Channel No. "x," you need only turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following FREQUENCY CALIBRATION (FRQ) command:

$$ \text { FRQ } x = i, u [ \text { CR } ] $$

For “i,” enter the manufacturer-supplied full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured), in hertz. For “u,” enter the corresponding value of the measured phenomenon, expressed in the desired engineering units. You need not zero the channel in this case. The FRQ command will only work if Channel No. x has been assigned the proper “type” code (see Table 1).

Note that a channel calibrated by the FRQ command will report measurement data to a precision matching that of the entered "u" value. If, for example, you're measuring "liters per minute," and enter a "u" of "750," then all subsequent channel readings will be rounded to the nearest liter per minute. If the entry is "750.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a liter per minute.

Two-Point (Deadweight) Calibration

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to an AA41 channel if the full-scale rating of the frequency source is unknown, and if the channel's received frequency input is an analog of another parameter—such as Gallons Per Minute—which has one or more independently and accurately known calibration values. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

4 DIAGNOSTIC WIRE-WRAP PINS

As a special diagnostic and service tool, the five pins shown in Fig. 6 are directly accessible from the front of an installed AA41 card. These pins allow voltmeter or oscilloscope observation of data-channel output signals. THEIR USE IS INTENDED PRIMARILY FOR TRAINED SERVICE TECHNICIANS. With regard to the on-board diagnostic pins, please note the following:

• PROPER ESD PRACTICE SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHEN MAKING CONTACT WITH AN AA41 BOARD INSTALLED IN A "LIVE" DAYTRONIC SYSTEM MAINFRAME. ALWAYS GROUND YOURSELF TO THE MAINFRAME CHASSIS BEFORE TOUCHING THE BOARD.
• THE ANALOG SIGNAL PRESENT AT EACH ACTIVE "CHANNEL" PIN REPRESENTS EIGHT TENTHS (0.8) OF THAT CHANNEL'S NOMINAL CALL-BUS VOLTAGE (WHICH, FOR THE AA41 IS ALWAYS THE FILTERED CHANNEL OUTPUT). For a channel delivering a standard full-scale (+5-V) output, the corresponding diagnostic pin will therefore register +4 V.
• THE "SLOT CALL" PIN DELIVERS A LOGIC SIGNAL THAT MAY BE USED TO SYNCHRONIZE AN OSCILLOSCOPE FOR TIMING ANALYSIS OF THE AA41 CARD.
• THE "CHANNEL 3" AND "CHANNEL 4" PINS ARE ONLY ACTIVE FOR AN AA41-4 CARD.

Fig. 6 Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Slot Call Signal Common

AA41-2 / AA41-4 DUAL / QUAD FREQUENCY CARD

MODEL AA72-2 MODEL AA72-4

STRAIN GAGE

CONDITIONER CARD

PLEASE NOTE: In this manual, "AA72" will be used to refer to BOTH the two-channel Model AA72-2 AND the four-channel Model AA72-4, in cases where it is not necessary to distinguish them.

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

The Models AA72-2 and AA72-4 are general-purpose two- and four-channel conditioners (respectively) for use with DC-excited load cells, pressure sensors, and any other conventional strain gage transducer employing a 4-arm bridge of nominal 350 Ω or higher, with a full-scale range of 0.75, 1.50, or 3.00 mV/V.

The AA72's advanced design techniques overcome errors that traditionally plague the strain-gage conditioning process. Separate excitation for each channel uses remote sensing of bridge voltage and is slaved to a common System Reference Voltage. The result is consistently stable ratiometric measurement, unaffected by possible power-supply drift. Input impedances in excess of 10,000 MΩ are presented to signal leads to eliminate cable resistance as a source of error. Allowable cable length has virtually no practical limits.

The AA72 features selectable per-channel excitation (1, 5, or 10 V-DC). Using low excitation helps reduce gage heating effects in stress analysis of materials with low thermal conductivity. Table 1 gives the full-scale mV/V ranges that correspond to each excitation level.

Like most Daytronic "Advanced Analog" ("AA") cards, the AA72 features optional PROGRAMMABLE LOW-PASS ACTIVE FILTERING for the removal of unwanted high-frequency measurement-signal components. Selectable analog filtering is offered for the AA72 either from 0.2 through 200 Hz in 16 steps ("F1" filtering) or from 2 through 2000 Hz in 16 steps ("F2" filtering). Or, if desired, a fixed filter of either 10 or 50 Hz for all channels may be specified at the time of order. When the AA72 is used in System 10, its filter cutoff values are set by means of an on-board 16-position switch for each channel.

A nominal ±5-V ANALOG OUTPUT is produced by each active AA72 input channel, for purposes of real-time signal monitoring. Each of these “Auxiliary Outputs” is available on a corresponding mainframe wire-wrap pin. Each output may be individually set, if desired, to represent the prefiltered value of the corresponding input. When such is the case, the output bandwidth is limited only by that of the AA72 card (see “Specifications”).

A convenient shunt calibration technique is provided. Each channel's shunt resistor may be switched in and out by software command or by means of logic-level inputs through the rear I/O CONNECTOR.

When connected to an optional Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card (or equivalent circuitry supplied by the user), the AA72 can accept input from a two-wire 1/4-bridge, three-wire 1/4-bridge, 1/2-bridge, or full-bridge strain gage configuration. See Section 4 for details.

The AA72 is manufactured using the latest surface-mount technology, resulting in the highest immunity to shock and vibration. As explained in Section 2, I/O connections are via secure, clearly labelled screw terminals in a special AA72 CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY.

Fig. 1 Model AA72-2 / AA72-4 Modular Card Components

graph LR
    A["I/O Connector"] --> B["Conditioner Tile Chans. 3 & 4<br>(Model AA72-4 Only)"]
    A --> C["Filter Chans.<br>3 & 4<br>(Model AA72-4 Only)"]
    A --> D["Filter Chans.<br>1 & 2"]
    E["FOR FUTURE USE"] --> F[" "] --> G[" "]

Fig. 1 shows the stand-off circuit boards (or "tiles") that provide the analog filtering for an AA72 card's data channels.

WARNING

THE CONDITIONER TILE FOR CHANNELS 3 AND 4 OF A MODEL AA72-4 IS TO BE INSTALLED OR REMOVED ONLY BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN, SINCE SUBSEQUENT REALIGNMENT OF THE AA72 CARD IS REQUIRED. FILTER TILES, HOWEVER, MAY BE INSTALLED OR REMOVED BY THE USER, IN THE FIELD. CONTACT THE DAYTRONIC SERVICE DEPARTMENT FOR COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS.

THE FOLLOWING AA72-2 / AA72-4 VERSIONS ARE CURRENTLY AVAILABLE:

• Model AA72-2F010—Two input channels, with FIXED 10-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA72-2F050—Two input channels, with FIXED 50-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA72-2F1—Two input channels, with "F1" PROGRAMMABLE FILTERING for each
• Model AA72-2F2—Two input channels, with "F2" PROGRAMMABLE FILTERING for each
• Model AA72-4F010—Four input channels, with FIXED 10-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA72-4F050—Four input channels, with FIXED 50-Hz FILTERING for each
• Model AA72-4F1—Four input channels, with "F1" PROGRAMMABLE FILTERING for each
• Model AA72-4F2—Four input channels, with "F2" PROGRAMMABLE FILTERING for each

ADDITIONAL AA72-2 / AA72-4 SPECIFICATIONS

Number of Input Channels: Two for Model AA72-2; four for Model AA72-4

Transducer Types: Conventional 4-arm strain gage bridges, nominal 350 ohms (or higher); 1/4- and 1/2-bridge gage configurations can be accommodated by means of the Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card described in Section 4 (or equivalent external bridge-completion circuitry supplied by the user)

Input Ranges (Full-Scale): See Table 1; automatically selected—on an individual channel basis—when the channel is configured; for System 10 channel “type” codes assigned to AA72 data channels, see Table 1. Since channel zeroing is by digital techniques, no input balance control is provided. The allowable input range, therefore, must include any initial unbalance (which, in commercially produced strain gage transducers, is usually negligible). Other transducers may have to be externally trimmed to be used with the Model AA72, if zero unbalance exceeds 20% of full scale.

Excitation (per channel): Selectable 1, 5, or 10 V-DC (i.e., ±0.5, ±2.5, or ±5 V-DC, respectively), nominal; ±40 mA, maximum, for each voltage, subject to 120 mA total current draw for all four channels*

Amplifier (per channel):

Normal-Mode Range: ±40 mV operating (±3.6 mV/V with 10-V excitation); ±8 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Range: ±1 V operating; ±8 V without instrument damage

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio: DC and at 60 Hz: -120 dB

Input Impedance: Differential: greater than 10,000 MΩ; Common-Mode: greater than 10,000 MΩ

Offset: Initial: ±0.02 mV; vs. Temperature: ±1 μV/°C; vs. Time: ±5 μV/month

Gain Accuracy: ±0.02% of full scale

Gain Stability: vs. Temperature: ±50 ppm/°C; vs. Time: ±20 ppm/month

Filter (per channel): 3-pole modified Butterworth

"F1" Programmable Filtering (all four channels): Switch- or software-selectable to one of 16 different cutoff frequencies: 0.2; 0.4; 0.8; 1.0; 1.6; 2.0; 4.0; 5.0; 8.0; 10; 20; 25; 40; 50; 100; or 200 Hz (see Table 2)

"F2" Programmable Filtering (all four channels): Switch- or software-selectable to one of 16 different cutoff frequencies: 2; 4; 8; 10; 16; 20; 40; 50; 80; 100; 200; 250; 400; 500; 1000; or 2000 Hz (see Table 3)

Fixed Filtering (all four channels): 10 or 50 Hz (see Table 4)

Auxiliary Outputs: Nominal ±5 V-DC signals available on mainframe wire-wrap pins**; individually jumper-selectable to represent either the filtered or prefiltered (5-kHz bandwidth) reading of the channel

Power-Supply Slot Allotment: Maximum consumption of supply current from the Conditioner Card Slot is 200 mA (the actual consumption for any given AA72 channel will depend on its transducer bridge resistance and excitation level)

Table 1 Model AA72 Ranges and "Type" Codes

Channel

1-V Excitation 5V Excitation 10-V Excitation "Type" Code

7.5 mV/V 1.5 mV/V 0.75 mV/V 70

15.0 mV/V 3.0 mV/V 1.50 mV/V 71

30.0 mV/V 6.0 mV/V 3.00 mV/V 72

Table 2 "F1" Programmable Filter Characteristics for "AA" Cards

Bandwidth Step-Response Settling Time
Selected Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of to 0.02% of Frequency at -3 dB at -60 dB final value final value final value (Hz) (Hz) (Hz) (Hz) (msec) (msec) (msec)
0.2	0.2	3.9	3500	4250	4750
0.4	0.4	7.8	1750	2125	2375
0.8	0.8	16	875	1063	1188
1.0	1.0	20	700	850	950
1.6	1.6	31	438	531	594
2.0	2.0	39	350	425	475
4.0	4.0	78	175	213	238
5.0	5.0	98	140	170	190
8.0	8.0	156	88	106	119
10.0	10.0	195	70	85	95
20.0	20.0	390	35	43	48
25.0	25.0	488	28	34	38
40.0	40.0	780	18	21	24
50.0	50.0	975	14	17	19
100.0	100.0	1950	7.0	8.5	9.5
200.0	200.0	3900	3.5	4.3	4.8

Table 3 "F2" Programmable Filter Characteristics for "AA" Cards

Bandwidth Step-Response Settling Time
Selected Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of to 0.02% of Frequency at -3 dB (Hz)	at -60 dB (Hz)	final value final value final value (msec) (msec) (msec)
2	2	40	375	430	480
4	4	80	190	215	240
8	8	160	90	110	120
10	10	200	75	90	100
16	16	320	45	55	60
20	20	400	38	43	50
40	20	800	18	22	25
50	50	1000	15	18	20
80	80	1600	9.0	11	12
100	100	2000	7.5	9.0	10
200	200	4000	4.0	4.5	5.0
250	250	5000	3.0	3.5	4.0
400	400	8000	2.0	2.2	2.5
500	500	10000	1.5	2.0	2.0
1000	1000	20000	0.75	0.9	1.0
2000	2000	40000	0.4	0.5	0.55

Table 4 Fixed Filter Characteristics for "AA" Cards

Bandwidth Step-Response Settling Time
Response Response to 1% of to 0.1% of to 0.02% of Filter at -3 dB at -60 dB final value final value final value Designation (Hz) (Hz) (msec) (msec)
“F010” 10 195 70	85	95
“F050” 50 975 14	17	19

2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

The Model AA72's rear I/O CONNECTOR mates with the special AA72 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR, via the cable connections shown in Fig. 4. Mounted on the internal board of the connector assembly (shown in Fig. 2) is a block of eleven clearly labelled screw terminals for each of the AA72's four possible input channels.

To access the connector board, simply remove the screws that hold together both halves of the connector housing. Use the two internal clamp bars to secure transducer cables once all leads have been connected.

The connector assembly's mounting screws are designed to secure the connector to the rear of the system mainframe and to provide a solid GROUND CONNECTION for cable "shields" via the two L-shaped ground lugs. An offset in the mounting holes ensures that the connector cannot be attached upside down.

With regard to AA72 cabling, please note the following:

a. 4-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 4(a), and is to be used when the cable is under 20 feet in length. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines (and also the CALIBRATION SENSE line to the +SIGNAL line) at the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR. It is recommended that the resistance of the conductors not exceed 0.0001 of the bridge resistance.
b. 8-wire cabling to a full-bridge strain gage transducer is given in Fig. 4(b), and is to be used when the cable is 20 feet or longer, or when fine wire is used. In this case, the +SENSE and -SENSE lines are tied to the corresponding EXCITATION lines (and also the CALIBRATION SENSE line to the +SIGNAL line) at the transducer. Note also the extra wire connected to the -SIGNAL line at the transducer, but left unconnected at the AA72. This wire is to be paired with the CAL SENSE line to establish proper shielding and to avoid asymmetrical dynamic loading.

IMPORTANT: The ±EXCITATION, ±SENSE, and ±SIGNAL pins for an UNUSED STRAIN GAGE INPUT CHANNEL should be jumpered as shown in Fig. 3, below. If an input is left open, high-frequency oscillation can result, which can in turn produce significant interchannel crosstalk, and possibly inaccurate data readings.

ALSO NOTE: Logic connections for remote control of shunt calibration (using the CONDITIONER CONNECTOR'S "NOT ±CALIBRATE" terminals) are discussed in Section 3.d and shown in Fig 6. For connection of an optional Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card to the AA72, see Section 4.b.

Shunt Resistors: R1 (Chn. 1) R2 (Chn. 2) R3 (Chn. 3) R4 (Chn. 4) 40-Pin Connector (attaches to rear I/O Connector of AA72 Card) Fig. 2 Model AA72 Connector Assembly Board Channel 1 SHIELD +EXCITATION +SENSE +SIGNAL -SIGNAL CAL SENSE -SENSE -EXCITATION +CAL COMMAND -CAL COMMAND POWER COMMON Channel 4 SHIELD +EXCITATION +SENSE +SIGNAL -SIGNAL CAL SENSE -SENSE -EXCITATION +CAL COMMAND -CAL COMMAND POWER COMMON Channel 3 SHIELD (SHLD) +EXCITATION (+EX) +SENSE (+SEN) +SIGNAL (+SIG) -SIGNAL (-SIG) CAL SENSE (CAL SEN) -SENSE (-SEN) -EXCITATION (-EX) +CAL COMMAND (+CAL) -CAL COMMAND (-CAL) POWER COMMON (PWR COM)

Fig. 3 Jumpering of an Unused AA72 Strain Gage Input

Fig. 4 Model AA72 Transducer Cabling

graph TD
    A["Signal"] -->|+ EXCITATION| B["AA72 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR"]
    C["SIGNAL"] -->|+ EXCITATION| B
    D["EXCITATION"] -->|+ EXCITATION| B
    B --> E["SHIELD (SMID)"]
    B --> F["+ EXCITATION (+ EX)"]
    B --> G["+ SENSE (+ SEN)"]
    B --> H["+ SIGNAL (+ SIG)"]
    B --> I["--SIGNAL (-SIG)"]
    B --> J["CALL SENSE (CALL SEN)"]
    B --> K["--SENSE (-SEN)"]
    B --> L["--EXCITATION (-EX)"]
    B --> M["+ CAL COMMAND (+ CAL)"]
    B --> N["--CAL COMMAND (-CAL)"]
    B --> O["POWER COMMON (PWR COM)"]

AA72-2: Channel 1 or 2:

AA72-4: Channel 1, 2, 3, or 4:

graph TD
    A["AC Source"] --> B["+ SENSE"]
    A --> C["+ EXCITATION"]
    A --> D["+ SIGNAL-SIGNAL"]
    A --> E["CAL SENSE"]
    A --> F["−EXCITATION"]
    A --> G["−SENSE"]
    H["AA72 CONDITIONER CONNECTOR"] --> I["SHIELD (SHLD)"]
    H --> J["+ EXCITATION (+EX)"]
    H --> K["+ SENSE (+SEN)"]
    H --> L["+ SIGNAL (+SIG)"]
    H --> M["−SIGNAL (−SIG)"]
    H --> N["CAL SENSE (CAL SEN)"]
    H --> O["−SENSE (−SEN)"]
    H --> P["−EXCITATION (−EX)"]
    H --> Q["+ CAL COMMAND (+CAL)"]
    H --> R["−CAL COMMAND (−CAL)"]
    H --> S["POWER COMMON (PWR COM)"]
    B --> T["See Fig. 6"]

EXTRA WIRE
(paired with "CAL SENSE."
UNCONNECTED at
Conditioner Connector)
Fig. 4(b) 8-Wire Strain Gage
Cabling (20 ft. or longer)

3

SETUP AND/OR OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

3.a SELECTION OF EXCITATION LEVELS

To set the DC excitation for each AA72 channel, you should

1. Remove the AA72 card from its mainframe slot. For "Card Insertion and Removal," see Manual Section 1.B. Since the AA72 is "hot-pluggable," you need NOT turn off mainframe power before removing the card.
2. Refer to Fig. 5 and locate the EXCITATION PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS. For the four-channel Model AA72-4, these pins are located between the main card and the Conditioner Tile for Channels 3 and 4, but are nonetheless easily accessible from the top of the card. One "minijumper" is provided for each channel, for interconnecting adjacent jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 5 to interconnect the pair of pins corresponding to the desired excitation voltage for that channel (1, 5, or 10 V).* You will need to use a small pair of needle-nosed pliers to move the jumper.
4. Reinsert the AA72 card in its mainframe slot.

Fig. 5 Model AA72 Programming Jumper Pins and Filter Selection Switches

Excitation Programming Jumper Pins: 1051(V-DC) Filter Selection Switches (see Table 5) Chan. Chan. 1 2 Chan. Chan. 3 4 Chan. 4 Chan. 3 Chan. 2 Chan. 1 Output Mode Programming Jumper Pins: Chan. 4 Chan. 3 Chan. 2 Chan. 1

POSTFILTER (FILTERED) OUTPUT

PREFILTER (UNFILTERED) OUTPUT

3.b SELECTION OF ANALOG FILTERING

NOTE: If your AA72 card is equipped with FIXED ANALOG FILTERING, you may ignore this manual section.

When using an AA72 with PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG FILTERING in System 10, you may set an individual corner frequency for the analog filter of each active input channel, ^* as follows:

a. Remove the AA72 card from its slot (see Section 3.a, Step 1, above).
b. Refer to Fig. 5 and locate the 16-position FILTER SELECTION SWITCHES located between the main card and the Filter Tile(s).
c. Referring to Table 5, below, set each channel's switch for the desired frequency. You will need to use a small screwdriver (or equivalent tool) to set the switch to the appropriate number/letter.
d. Reinsert the AA72 card.

NOTE: In addition to the normal-mode analog filtering supplied by the AA72 card, System 10 can provide additional processor-controlled DIGITAL SMOOTHING on a per-channel basis. For each individual channel, you may indicate the desired amount of digital smoothing by applying a FILTER (FIL) command to that channel (see Manual Section 2.G.2).

Table 5 Model AA72 Filter Switch Settings

Cutoff Frequency“F1” Filter “F2” Filter Switch Setting

0.2 Hz 2 Hz 7

0.4 Hz 4 Hz 6

0.8 Hz 8 Hz 5

1.0 Hz 10 Hz 3

1.6 Hz 16 Hz 4

2.0 Hz 20 Hz 2

4.0 Hz 40 Hz 1

5.0 Hz 50 Hz F

8.0 Hz 80 Hz 0

10 Hz 100 Hz E

20 Hz 200 Hz D

25 Hz 250 Hz B

40 Hz 400 Hz C

50 Hz 500 Hz A

100 Hz 1000 Hz 9

200 Hz 2000 Hz 8

3.c SELECTION OF ANALOG OUTPUT MODES

As mentioned in Section 1, each AA72 channel's ±5-V ANALOG OUTPUT can be set to represent either the filtered or prefiltered reading of that channel. To set the output mode for each of your AA72's active input channels, ^* you should

1. Remove the AA72 card from its slot (see Section 3.a, Step 1, above).
2. Refer to Fig. 5 and locate the OUTPUT MODE PROGRAMMING JUMPER PINS beneath the AA72's Filter Tile(s). One "minijumper" is provided for each channel's set of three jumper pins.
3. Position the jumper for each channel as shown in Fig. 5 to interconnect the pair of pins that corresponds to the desired output mode for that channel. You will need to use a small pair of needle-nosed pliers to move the jumper.
4. Reinsert the AA72 card in its mainframe slot.

3.d CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

For initial configuration of ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS dedicated to a specific Model AA72 card when used in System 10, see the general remarks on System 10 "real-channel" configuration in Manual Section 1.G.1 and elsewhere in the System 10 Guidebook. For AA72 channel "type" codes, see Table 1, above.

In System 10, you can use three calibration methods with the Model AA72, unless it is being used with a Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card (in which case a special calibration procedure is required, as explained in Section 4.c, below):

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

This is generally the most convenient means of calibrating an AA72 channel, when the transducer's full-scale "mV/V" sensitivity rating is accurately known.

Thus, to calibrate an AA72-based Channel No. "x," you need only

1. Turn ON the system EEPROM SWITCH and then apply the following MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command:

$$ \mathbf {M V V} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {i}, \mathbf {u} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

For “i,” enter the manufacturer-supplied transducer sensitivity rating in “mV/V, full scale.” For a “Type 70” channel (7.5/1.5/0.75 mV/V, full scale), you should enter an “i” value greater than 0.02 and less than or equal to 1.00 (mV/V). For a “Type 71” channel (15.0/3.0/1.50 mV/V, full scale), you should enter a value greater than 0.04 and less than or equal to 2.00 (mV/V). For a “Type 72” channel (30.0/6.0/3.00 mV/V, full scale), you should enter a value greater than 0.80 and less than or equal to 4.00 (mV/V).

For “u,” enter the transducer’s nominal full-scale rating in whatever engineering units are desired for the channel’s data reading—but only if the channel is set for 10-volt excitation (Section 3.a). NOTE: If the channel being calibrated is set for 1-volt excitation, the “u” value to be entered should be 10 times the actual value of the nominal full-scale rating. If it is set for 5-volt excitation, “u” should be 2 times the actual value.

The MVV command will only work if Channel No. x has been assigned the proper "type" code ("70," "71," or "72").

1. Zero the channel by commanding

ZRO x [CR]

Note that a channel calibrated by the MVV command will report measurement data to a precision matching that of the entered "u" value. If, for example, you're measuring "psi," and enter a "u" of "500," then all subsequent channel readings will be rounded to the nearest psi. If the entry is "500.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a psi.

TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION

Using the standard ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands, this conventional "zero and span" method can be applied to an AA72 channel if the full-scale "mV/V" rating of the channel's strain gage transducer is unknown, or if the final measurement accuracy provided by CALCULATED CALIBRATION does not meet the requirements of the measurement application. The mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch must be ON for the ZRO and FRC commands to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.5 for a general discussion of this calibration technique.

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION

Suitable for all AA72 excitation levels, this method is similar to the conventional TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) procedure. The difference is that the second ("span") input is not produced by loading the source transducer, but by "simulating" a particular up-scale value of mechanical input. This known EQUIVALENT INPUT then serves to determine the SCALING FACTOR for the channel.

For an AA72 data channel, the equivalent input is produced by shunting a resistor of known magnitude across one arm of the strain gage bridge, thereby simulating a known value of input for either a positive or negative up-scale reading. If the transducer manufacturer has supplied the exact value of the transducer's equivalent input, it can be used as a reference point for calibrating the channel.

Equivalent input can be approximated from a knowledge of the Shunt Calibration Resistance (R), the transducer's Bridge Resistance (B), and the transducer's Full-Scale Sensitivity (K, in mV/V full scale). To determine the EQUIVALENT INPUT (X) as an approximate percentage of full-scale output, you may use the following equation:

X = 25000B / K(R + 0.5B) %

Since the equivalent input is here expressed as a percentage of full-scale output, you must multiply it by the rated full-scale capacity of the transducer, in order to determine the actual input simulated by the shunt.

Shunt calibration is an easier though generally less accurate technique than two-point (deadweight) calibration. It is useful, however, when overall “deadweighting” is impossible or inconvenient, and is good for an accuracy of about 0.2% (depending, of course, on the accuracy of the specified equivalent input, and on the resistor/bridge tolerance and temperature).

The AA72 is equipped with a 100-kΩ, 0.1% calibration resistor for each active channel. These resistors are located on turret terminals on the Connector Assembly Board (see Fig. 2). You may, if you wish, replace each channel's installed 100K shunt resistor with a resistor of another value (strain-gage transducer manufacturers often supply such resistors with their instruments).

In System 10, a strain gage channel's shunt resistor may be switched in and out by means of the SHUNT CALIBRATE-POSITIVE (SHP) or SHUNT CALIBRATE-NEGATIVE (SHN) command. A RESUME (RSM) command should then be applied to remove the shunt and resume normal channel measurement. Since these are "runtime" commands, the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective. See Manual Section 1.G.6 for general instructions regarding the "SHUNT CALIBRATION" technique in System 10.

NOTE: Per-channel shunt calibration for the AA72 can be “remotely” controlled, if desired, as an alternative to using the software “SHUNT CALIBRATE” commands provided by the system. This remote calibration control is accomplished by means of logic-level inputs to the AA72 card. The relevant connections are given in Fig. 6.

Fig. 6(a) shows how the “CALIBRATE POSITIVE” and “CALIBRATE NEGATIVE” commands can be independently applied to any active AA72 channel, without the need of an external logic reference supply.

Closing the switch in Fig. 6(a) to contact point "A" will produce a Logic 0 level at the "NOT +CAL COMMAND" terminal. Since this is a negative-true logic line, the Logic 0 input will activate the "+CALIBRATE" condition of the channel. That is, it will switch in the channel's shunt resistor for a positive up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT +CALIBRATE" line from POWER COMMON will then return the channel to the "NO +CALIBRATE" condition.

Similarly, closing the switch to contact point "B" will produce a Logic 0 level at the "NOT -CAL COMMAND" terminal, thereby switching in the channel's shunt resistor for a negative up-scale reading. Opening the switch to disconnect the "NOT -CALIBRATE" line from POWER COMMON will then return the channel to the "NO -CALIBRATE" condition.

You may also use active TTL logic, as illustrated in Fig. 6(b), to produce the “+CALIBRATE” or “-CALIBRATE” condition for either AA72 channel.

Fig. 6 Logic Inputs for AA72 Remote Shunt Calibration

Fig. 6(a) Switch Closure, No External Supply OPEN = Logic 1 (NO ±Calibration) CLOSED = Logic 0 (±Calibration) A B SHIELD (SHLD) + EXCITATION (+EX) + SENSE (+SEN) + SIGNAL (+SIG) -SIGNAL (-SIG) CAL SENSE (CAL SEN) -SENSE (-SEN) -EXCITATION (-EX) + CAL COMMAND (+CAL) -CAL COMMAND (-CAL) POWER COMMON (PWR COM) Fig. 6(b) Active TTL Logic +5 V TTL +5 V SHIELD (SHLD) + EXCITATION (+EX) + SENSE (+SEN) + SIGNAL (+SIG) -SIGNAL (-SIG) CAL SENSE (CAL SEN) -SENSE (-SEN) -EXCITATION (-EX) + CAL COMMAND (+CAL) -CAL COMMAND (-CAL) POWER COMMON (PWR COM)

4 OPTIONAL BRIDGE COMPLETION: MODEL 10CJB-2 DUAL BRIDGE COMPLETION CARD

4.a PURPOSE

The optional Model 10CJB-2 Dual Bridge Completion Card lets you connect each of your Model AA72's inputs to a 2-wire 1/4-bridge, 3-wire 1/4-bridge, 1/2-bridge, or full-bridge strain gage configuration.* Each 1/4-bridge configuration may use either 120 or 350 ohms nominal gage resistance. The function of the Model 10CJB-2 is to "complete" the connected bridge—that is, to allow it to be "seen" by the Model AA72 as a full (4-arm) Wheatstone bridge.

For calibration of AA72 channels originating from the Model 10CJB-2, see Section 4.c, below.

4.b 10CJB-2 TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS

Remove the top plate of the Model 10CJB-2 box (4 screws in corners). Inside the box are two sets of labelled screw terminals, one for each of the AA72's input channels ("A" and "B"). As shown in the following figures, you will connect your gage wires directly to these terminals, and, if necessary, interconnect certain terminal pairs by means of jumper wires. Gage leads should enter the 10CJB-2 through the cutout on the right-hand side of the box.

NOTE: A SPECIAL DAYTRONIC CABLE MUST BE USED TO CONNECT THE 10CJB-2 TO THE AA72'S REAR I/O CONNECTOR. Contact the Daytronic Service Department for full details.

Fig. 7(a) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a 2-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (represented by the single gage resistor). Here, you must install a jumper wire between the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals, and between the +SIG terminal and either the 120 terminal or the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.

Fig. 7(b) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a 3-wire 1/4-bridge gage configuration (again represented by the single gage resistor). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied. The gage's third (self-compensating) lead is connected either to the 120 terminal or to the 350 terminal, depending on the nominal gage resistance.

Fig. 7(c) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a 1/2-bridge gage configuration (represented by the two connected gage resistors). Here again, the -SIG and 1/2 BR terminals must be tied.

Fig. 7(d) shows connections between the 10CJB-2 and a full-bridge gage configuration (represented by the four connected gage resistors).

Fig. 7 Model 10CJB-2 Transducer Cabling

Fig. 7(a) 2-Wire 1/4-Bridge Completion Model 10CJ B-2 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1 or 2) -SIG 1/2 BR -EX 120 350 +SIG +EX Signal Excitation

graph TD
    A["Signal"] --> B["Excitation"]
    B --> C["-SIG"]
    B --> D["1/2 BR"]
    B --> E["-EX"]
    C --> F["120"]
    D --> G["350"]
    E --> H["+SIG"]
    F --> I["+EX"]
    G --> J["+SIG"]
    H --> K["+EX"]

Fig. 7(c) 1/2-Bridge Completion Model 10CJ B-2 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1 or 2) -Excitation -SIG 1/2 BR -EX 120 350 +SIG +EX Signal + Excitation

Fig. 7(d) Full-Bridge Connection Model 10CJ B-2 Screw Terminal (Chn. 1 or 2) -Signal -Excitation +Signal +Excitation -SIG 1/2 BR -EX 120 350 +SIG +EX

4.c CALIBRATION

CALCULATED CALIBRATION

You can calibrate an AA72 channel receiving strain-gage input from a Model 10CJB-2 Bridge Completion Card by applying the MV/V CALIBRATION (MVV) command as described in Section 3.d, above. Note however that, in this case,

• for "i" (the transducer sensitivity rating), you should enter one of the following full-scale "mV/V" values, whichever corresponds to the channel's "type" setting (see Table 1): 0.75 (for "Type 70"), 1.50 (for "Type 71"), or 3.00 (for "Type 72").
• for "u" (the nominal full-scale rating), you should enter the full-scale microstrain range that corresponds to the selected transducer sensitivity rating, as given in the following table:

Table 6 Strain Gage Microstrain Ranges (AA72)
Full-Scale Full-Scale Output (mV/V) Microstrain Range

0.75 u = 3000 / (N · G)

1.50 u = 6000 / (N · G)

3.00 u = 12000 / (N · G)

Here, "N" is the number of active strain-gage arms in the gage configuration. Thus, for a 1/4-bridge gage, N = 1; for a half-bridge gage, N = 2; and for a full-bridge gage, N = 4. "G" is the gage factor of the strain gage, and is normally provided by the manufacturer.

TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION

See Section 3.d, above, for the general procedure. Your first calibration point (entered via the ZERO (ZRO) command) should be zero. Your second calibration point (entered via the FORCE (FRC) command) should be expressed in microstrain (microinches/inch).

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION

See Section 3.d, above, for the general procedure. Your EQUIVALENT INPUT value, which is entered via the FORCE (FRC) command—following zeroing of the channel and switching in of the shunt resistor)—should be expressed in microstrain (microinches/inch).

Coarse Zero Offset

In the event that, during "Two-Point" or "Simulated" calibration of the 10CJB-2 channel, you are unable to set the desired span via the FORCE (FRC) command, you can apply a positive or negative zero offset of approximately 1 mV/V for balance correction, as follows:

1. Remove the top plate of the 10CJB-2 box and locate the three programming jumper pads for the channel in question. Labelled "A" for Channel 1 and "B" for Channel 2, the pads are near the left edge of the 10CJB-2 circuit board.
2. Place a solder drop between the center pad and either the "+" or "-" pad, depending on the desired offset polarity.
3. Re-enter your ZRO and FRC values (with or without calibration "shunt").

5 DIAGNOSTIC WIRE-WRAP PINS

As a special diagnostic and service tool, the five pins shown in Fig. 8 are directly accessible from the front of an installed AA72 card. These pins allow voltmeter or oscilloscope observation of data-channel output signals. THEIR USE IS INTENDED PRIMARILY FOR TRAINED SERVICE TECHNICIANS. With regard to the on-board diagnostic pins, please note the following:

• PROPER ESD PRACTICE SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHEN MAKING CONTACT WITH AN AA72 BOARD INSTALLED IN A "LIVE" DAYTRONIC SYSTEM MAINFRAME. ALWAYS GROUND YOURSELF TO THE MAINFRAME CHASSIS BEFORE TOUCHING THE BOARD.
• THE ANALOG SIGNAL PRESENT AT EACH ACTIVE "CHANNEL" PIN REPRESENTS EIGHT TENTHS (0.8) OF THAT CHANNEL'S NOMINAL CALL-BUS VOLTAGE. For a channel delivering a standard full-scale (+5-V) output, the corresponding diagnostic pin will therefore register +4 V.
• THE ANALOG SIGNAL PRESENT AT EACH ACTIVE "CHANNEL" PIN REPRESENTS THE FILTERED CHANNEL OUTPUT, AND IS NOT AFFECTED BY THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODE CURRENTLY SELECTED FOR THAT CHANNEL (see Section 3.c).
• THE "SLOT CALL" PIN DELIVERS A LOGIC SIGNAL THAT MAY BE USED TO SYNCHRONIZE AN OSCILLOSCOPE FOR TIMING ANALYSIS OF THE AA72 CARD.
• THE "CHANNEL 3" AND "CHANNEL 4" PINS ARE ONLY ACTIVE FOR AN AA72-4 CARD.

Fig. 8 Diagnostic Wire-Wrap Pins

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Slot Call Signal Common

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.F SCAN AND TIME SETUP

1.F.1 SETTING SYSTEM BASE CHANNEL: SBC

The SYSTEM BASE CHANNEL (SBC) command is useful only when you need a way to distinguish the data-channel ranges of multiple System 10 mainframes operating in the same environment. IN MOST SYSTEM 10 APPLICATIONS, YOU WILL HAVE NO REASON TO CHANGE THE BASE CHANNEL FROM ITS NORMAL DEFAULT VALUE OF "1."

If you want to change the current base channel, enter a command of

$$ \mathbf {S B C} = \mathbf {x} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where “x” is any CHANNEL NUMBER from “1” through the number that would result in a highest channel at the system limit of “997.”

WARNING: This is a fairly drastic step, and should only be done at the beginning of the configuration process, before any actual channels have been defined. Changing the base channel will automatically shift all channel numbers accordingly, as well as the current TERMINATOR (TER) and SCAN (SCN) settings (see next section). You should also review all CALCULATES, EXECUTES, DIGITAL I/O, and other configuration statements that may contain channel-number references. Any such statements will need to be individually revised to correspond to the new channel-number sequence.

1.F.2 DEFINITION OF SCAN RANGE

NOTE: DEFINITION OF SYSTEM SCAN RANGE SHOULD PRECEDE THE CALIBRATION OF SYSTEM DATA CHANNELS (SECTION 1.G).

There are two mnemonic commands by which you can specify the precise range of data channels to be scanned by the System 10 Central Processor.* The TERMINATOR (TER) command is a "WRITE" command, and thus requires the EEPROM Write Protect Switch to be ON. The SCAN (SCN) command, on the other hand, is ordinarily a "RUN-TIME" command, and does not require the EEPROM to be enabled.

The data reported by any system channel outside the currently effective scan range will not be updated with each scan cycle. You should especially bear this in mind when outputting data for a range of channels via the DUMP (DMP), STREAM (STR), HARD COPY (HCY), SNAPSHOT (SNP), or LIMIT ZONE (LZN) commands (see Section 1.H.2)—or when applying the ZERO (ZRO), FORCE (FRC), and TARE (TAR) commands to one or more data channels (see Sections 1.G.5 and 2.G.3).

* Every mainframe's initial default scan range is normally preset at the factory, the typical range being from Channel No. 1 through the highest channel number called for by the system configuration specified at the time of order.

System PSEUDOCHANNELS reporting constant values defined by the operator or computer via the "CHN=" or some similar command are normally assigned numbers above that of the highest channel to be scanned (see Section 2.D.1). Also note that Channel Nos. 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE) are always scanned, regardless of the TER and SCN commands currently in effect.

a. SETTING DEFAULT SCAN RANGE: TER

The TERMINATOR (TER) command defines the default scan range to be automatically in effect upon each System 10 powerup. This is the continuous range of data channels from the current SYSTEM BASE CHANNEL ("SBC")—normally Channel No. 1—up to and including the last-specified TERMINATOR ("TER") CHANNEL. Thus, following a command of

$$ \mathbf {T E R} = \mathbf {x} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where "x" is the Channel Number of the TERMINATOR CHANNEL, the system will scan from Channel No. 1 (or other presently specified SBC) through Channel No. x, on every system powerup and until application of an overriding SCAN (SCN) command.*

b. SETTING TEMPORARY SCAN RANGE: SCN

The default scan range defined by the last-entered TER command can be overridden on a run-time basis (while data acquisition is in process) by entering a SCAN (SCN) command with the EEPROM disabled (i.e., EEPROM Switch OFF).

The SCAN (SCN) lets you specify the first and last data channels of a scanned array, so that the system scans from Channel No. x through Channel No. y (where y ≥ x ):

$$ \mathbf {S C N} = \mathbf {x}, \mathbf {y} [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

As soon as system power is cycled after entry of the above "run-time" SCN command, the effective scan range will revert to that defined by the last-entered TERMINATOR (TER) command.

Note, however, that the entry of a SCAN (SCN) command with the EEPROM Switch ON will in fact establish a new default scan range that will override the currently specified TER range and that will be automatically in effect upon each System 10 powerup. Normally, you would do this when you want to scan a subrange of channels within the TER range that begins with a channel higher than the current system base channel. If, for example, the present "SBC" is Channel No. 1 and the present "TER" is Channel No. 60, and you wanted the default scan range to be from Channel No. 20 through Channel No. 40, you would turn ON the EEPROM Switch and command

$$ \mathbf {S C N} = 2 0, 4 0 [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

c. FLAGGING OUT-OF-SCAN CHANNELS: VSS

For "B-sized" System 10 mainframes only, you can arrange for the display of any data channel presently outside the effective scan range to be prefixed by an ampersand (&). This is to alert the operator to the possibility that the displayed data reading for that channel may be invalid, if it is a "REAL" CHANNEL.

To produce ampersand flagging of all displayed out-of-scan channels, make sure the EEPROM Switch is ON, and apply a VIDEO SCAN SYMBOL (VSS) command of

$$ \mathbf {V S S} = 1 [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

To cancel ampersand flagging, command

$$ \mathbf {V S S} = 0 [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

1.F.3

SETTING SYSTEM TIME AND DATE: TME AND DTE

To set your System 10's internal clock-time ("t"), make sure the EEPROM Switch is ON and command

$$ \mathbf {T M E} = \mathbf {t} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where "t" is a number of up to 6 digits expressing the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds. For example, commanding

$$ \mathrm{TME} = 1 5 0 7 2 4 [ \mathrm{CR} ] ^ {*} $$

sets the clock-time to 15:07:24 (= 3:07:24 p.m.). Though not entered in the TIME (TME) command, the separating colons will be shown in every time display.

NOTE: The reporting of TIME is assigned automatically to CHANNEL NO. 998 (only).

To set the internal date ("d"), make sure the EEPROM Switch is ON and command

$$ \mathbf {D T E} = \mathbf {d} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where “d” is a number of up to 6 digits expressing the current date in month, day, and year. For example, commanding

$$ D T E = 6 0 9 0 1 [ C R ] ^ {*} $$

sets the date to 06/09/01 (= June 9, 2001). Though not entered in the DATE (DTE) command, the separating slashes will be shown in every date display.

NOTE: The reporting of DATE is assigned automatically to CHANNEL NO. 999 (only).

For setting the VISUAL EFFECTS of the TIME and DATE displays, see Section 2.C.12(b).

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.G CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS

1.G.1 SETUP OF "REAL" (ANALOG INPUT) CHANNELS: TYP AND LCT

Before it can be calibrated for accurate reporting of “real world” measurement data, a System 10 “REAL” (ANALOG INPUT) CHANNEL must first be “configured” (or “initialized”).

1. For the "TYPING" and "LOCATING" of a real channel via the TYPE (TYP) and LOCATE (LCT) commands, refer to Section 7 ("Data Channel Configuration") of the "On the Air" book for your mainframe type ("A-sized" or "B-sized"), located in the front of this Guidebook. The TYPE CODES applicable to each Conditioner Card model are given in the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2 of this Guidebook.
2. Once a real channel has been assigned an appropriate TYPE CODE based on an installed "source" Conditioner Card and has been "located" to a specific subchannel of that card, you may proceed to enter other channel setup parameters either before or after the channel has been calibrated—ASSUMING THAT THE CHANNEL HAS NOT BEEN PRECONFIGURED AT THE FACTORY, PRIOR TO SHIPMENT (CHECK YOUR CUSTOMIZED "SYSTEM 10 DATA SHEET" IN APPENDIX A OF THIS GUIDEBOOK).*

These other channel setup parameters include:

• t he channel's "Filter" Constant (FIL), if you want it to be a value other than the real-channel default of "5"—see Section 2.G.2
• t he channel's High / Low Limits (HIL, LOL), if you want them to be values other than the defaults of "3000" and "-3000," respectively—see Section 2.F.2
• t he channel's"Limit Logic" (LLT, LBT, LGT) variables, if you want them to be values other than the default of "N/A"—see Section 2.F.4

1.G.2 METHODS OF CALIBRATION

System 10 channels requiring CALIBRATION are those that contain physical measurement data from the “real world.” These include

• "REAL" (ANALOG INPUT) CHANNELS "sourced" by Daytronic SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARDS*
• Peak Capture / Track-Hold channels based on “real” channels (for the calibration of channels derived from the Model 10A79-4 Analog Peak Capture Card, see Section 3.A.4 of this Guidebook)

All other channel types—"PSEUDOCHANNELS," "CONVERSION CHANNELS," etc.—do not require calibration.**

In most cases, several alternative calibration methods will be available for a data channel originating from a given Conditioner Card. Which method you choose will depend on

• t he type sburce transducer for the channel
• t he precise characteristics of the transducer/cable/conditioner combination
• t he extent of your knowledge of these characteristics
- t he possibility and/or convenience of producing actual or simulated transducer inputs of accurately known value

In general terms, you will calibrate a signal-conditioner channel by commanding the System 10 Central Processor to compute and store two constant values: a SCALING FACTOR ("m")—also called "multiplier" or "gain" factor—and a ZERO OFFSET ("b"). Automatically and continuously applied to all subsequent readings of the given channel, these two CALIBRATION CONSTANTS define the linear proportionality expressed by the equation y = mx + b , where "y" is the measurement value reported for the channel and "x" is the ratio of the actual voltage of the analog input signal to the positive full-scale voltage of the channel's chosen input "TYPE." As such, "x" is a unitless number operated upon by the "slope" coefficient "m" and the offset term "b" to yield a true analog measurement. Both "m" (EMM) and "b" (BEE) are to be expressed in the engineering units of the chosen input "TYPE."

PLEASE NOTE: As explained in Section 1.G.3, "ABSOLUTE" calibration of a frequency-, current-, or voltage-measuring channel involves the direct setting of the channel's "m" and "b" constants by application of the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) and ZERO OFFSET (BEE) commands, respectively. For all other calibration techniques, it is normally the case that both "m" and "b" are automatically calculated and stored by the Central Processor during the run-time calibration procedure, and are NOT ENTERED DIRECTLY BY THE USER via the EMM and BEE commands.

In fact, certain EMM and BEE values (other than the normal defaults) are automatically loaded for certain channel types as soon as those types are defined. Thus, for a thermocouple-based “real” channel or other channel capable of “ABSOLUTE (CPU)” calibration, specific “m” and “b” values are loaded as soon as the channel is “typed.” These values should normally NOT BE CHANGED.

* With the exception of channels based on the Model 10A35 Encoder Conditioner Card.
** Except for LINEARIZATION ("LIN") channels, whose calibration is strictly based on prestored "look-up" tables (see Section 2.L).

The most likely reason you would have for changing a “real” channel’s current EMM value would be to change the effective decimal-point precision for that channel’s data reading. However, if you wish to calibrate a channel by directly entering its two calibration constants, you will have to use an “x” value that is, as mentioned above, the ratio of the actual input to the stated positive full-scale range. For example, if the channel is assigned a “TYPE” designation of “61” (= VOLTAGE INPUT CHANNEL, 50 mV-DC full scale), and the actual input is currently +45 mV, then x = 0.9 (and NOT “45”). If the 45-mV input corresponds to a measurement of, say, 1000 kPa, then for “y = mx + b” we can write

$$ 1 0 0 0 \mathrm{kPa} = \mathrm{m(kPa)(0.9)} + 0 (\mathrm{kPa}) $$

which yields an "m" (to the nearest kPa) of "1111" for the ±50-mV range, plus-or-minus the inherent initial accuracy of the conditioner. There are exceptions to this procedure, including certain VOLTAGE and CURRENT conditioners (10A60-4, 10A61-2) and THERMOCOUPLE conditioners that have their own linearization standards. Contact the factory for precise instructions.

As the examples given below will make clear, the PRECISION (i.e., decimal-point location) of the measurements reported by a given “real” channel will always match the precision of one of the numbers entered by the operator or computer during the calibration procedure.

The basic System 10 calibration methods are listed below, and are described in the following Guidebook sections. TO FIND OUT WHICH CALIBRATION METHOD OR METHODS MAY BE USED WITH A GIVEN CONDITIONER CARD, YOU SHOULD REFER TO THE RESPECTIVE SUBSECTION OF SECTION 1.E.2 OF THIS GUIDEBOOK.

• ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION (CPU)—see Section 1.G.3(a)
• ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION—see Section 1.G.3(b)
• CALCULATED CALIBRATION (FRQ)—see Section 1.G.4(a)
• CALCULATED CALIBRATION (MVV)—see Section 1.G.4(b)
• CALCULATED CALIBRATION (OTHER)—see Section 1.G.4(c)
- TWO-POINT (DEADWEIGHT) CALIBRATION—see Section 1.G.5
• SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION—see Section 1.G.6

1.G.3 ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

a. CPU-BASED ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

This form of “ABSOLUTE” CALIBRATION applies primarily to temperature-measuring channels. Here, the zero and scaling characteristics of the sensor/conditioner combination are fixed and known (by the System 10 Central Processor). Since the “m” (EMM) and “b” (BEE) values for such channels are prestored in System 10 memory, with suitable engineering-unit scaling, THERE IS NO NEED FOR ANY FURTHER CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ON THE PART OF THE USER, once the channel’s TYPE CODE has been specified.

Note that for a thermocouple-based “real” channel or other channel capable of CPU-base absolute calibration, specific EMM and BEE values are automatically loaded as soon as the channel is “typed.” THESE INITIALLY LOADED CALIBRATION CONSTANTS SHOULD NOT NORMALLY BE CHANGED.

b. ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION FOR A FREQUENCY, CURRENT, OR VOLTAGE CHANNEL: EMM

This form of “ABSOLUTE” CALIBRATION applies primarily to frequency-, current-, and voltage-measuring channels when it is frequency, current, or voltage (respectively) that is actually being measured—that is, when the received measurement signal is not an analog of some other parameter.

Here it is necessary to apply a SCALING FACTOR ("m" coefficient) which is equal to the full-scale range corresponding to the channel's present TYPE designation, expressed to the precision desired for the channel's data reading.* This is done by means of the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command.

Suppose, for example, that Channel No. x has been given a TYPE CODE of "67," and has been "located" to a Model 10A63-2 Dual Voltage Conditioner Card. This channel is to be used to measure voltage itself, with a resolution of ± 1mV . It may be calibrated "absolutely" simply by entering an EMM command of

$$ \mathsf {E M M} \times = 5. 0 0 0 [ \mathsf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

since the stated full-scale range for "TYPE 67" is ±5 V, and since we wish the channel to read to the nearest thousandth of a volt.

Before choosing absolute calibration for a frequency, current, or voltage channel, you should note that the resulting accuracy is limited to either the stated “initial offset” accuracy or the stated “gain accuracy” of the respective Conditioner Card, whichever represents a greater error value (for individual card specifications, see the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2 of this Guidebook).

1.G.4 CALCULATED CALIBRATION

a. FREQUENCY INPUT CHANNEL: FRQ

This form of “CALCULATED” CALIBRATION is used exclusively with frequency-measuring channels, when the manufacturer-supplied full-scale rating of the frequency source (or the highest frequency expected to be measured) is known. This method involves sending an appropriate FREQUENCY CALIBRATION (FRQ) command to the System 10. It is generally faster, more convenient, and inherently more accurate alternative to “Two-Point (Deadweight)” calibration of a frequency input channel—although final accuracy of calibration will depend, of course, on the accuracy of the transducer manufacturer’s specifications.

For complete instructions, refer to the subsection of Section 1.E.2 of this Guidebook that treats the channel's "source" Frequency Input Conditioner Card (10A40, 10A41-2C, or AA41-2 / AA41-4).

b. STRAIN GAGE INPUT CHANNEL: MVV

This form of "CALCULATED" CALIBRATION is used exclusively with channels originating from Strain Gage Conditioners (with the exception of the Models 10A74-

CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

OF ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS

1.G

4C and 10A78), when the manufacturer-supplied transducer sensitivity (in mV/V, full-scale) is known. This method involves sending appropriate MILLIVOLT/VOLT CALIBRATION (MVV) and ZERO (ZRO) commands to the System 10. It is generally faster, more convenient, and inherently more accurate alternative to "Two-Point (Deadweight)" calibration of a strain gage input channel—although final accuracy of calibration will depend, of course, on the accuracy of the transducer manufacturer's specifications.

For complete instructions, refer to the subsection of Section 1.E.2 of this Guidebook that treats the channel's "source" Strain Gage Conditioner Card (10A70-2, 10A72-2C, 10A73-4, or AA72-2 / AA72-4).

c. OTHER CHANNEL TYPES

"CALCULATED" CALIBRATION may also be employed with a channel originating from a Model 10A74-4C Quad Strain Gage Track-Hold Conditioner, Model 10A43 Dwell Angle Conditioner, Model 10A48 Modulated Carrier Flow Conditioner, Model 10A76 Vibration Conditioner, or Model 10A96 Amplified Accelerometer Vibration Conditioner Card.

The precise commands sent to the System 10 will vary with the conditioner card that sources the channel. See the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2 for complete instructions.

1.G.5

Two-Point (Deadweight)

CALIBRATION: ZRO AND FRC

This is a conventional “zero and span” technique accomplished by the ZERO (ZRO) and FORCE (FRC) commands. It may be used for most types of “real” channel when the application of one or more accurately known transducer loads is possible. It can even be used with temperature-measuring channels (in place of standard “Absolute (CPU)” calibration, when it is desirable to force multiple temperature readings to the same exactly known temperature. The only Conditioner Cards to which it is not normally applicable (in its standard form) are the Models 10A43, 10A48, 10A74-4C, 10A76, and 10A96.

A TUTORIAL OVERVIEW of this calibration method is given in Section 10 ("Data Channel Calibration") of the "On the Air" book for your mainframe type ("A-sized" or "B-sized"), located in the front of this Guidebook. If you have not already done so, you should study this section to familiarize yourself with the procedure, which is given in slightly more detail below.

1. Provide "Live" Channel Data Display

Using the guidelines given in Section 5 of the “On the Air” book, you should first arrange for a “live” display of the channel to be calibrated.

NOTE: If your System 10 does not have LCD/VFD or CRT video capability, you can "display" the channel to be calibrated by transmitting its data reading from the Computer Interface Port to a receiving CRT terminal. You can use the STREAM (STR) command for this purpose, along with a special HEADER or TAILER that allows nonscrolling CRT display of the system's "datastream" output (see Sections 1.H.2(d) and 1.H.3 of this Guidebook for details).

Also, you should make sure that all channels to be calibrated are within the currently effective SCAN RANGE. See Section 1.F.2. Applying the ZERO (ZRO) or FORCE (FRC) command to an unscanned channel will probably result in an erroneous data reading for that channel.

2. Set Default Scaling: EMM Command

It is recommended that you enter the following SCALING FACTOR (EMM) command in order to set the "m" constant of the channel being calibrated (Channel No. "x") to the initial default value of "5000," if it does not already have this value (this command requires that the mainframe's EEPROM Switch be ON):

$$ \text { EMM } x = 5 0 0 0 [ \mathrm{CR} ] ^ {*} $$

3. First Calibration Point: ZRO Command

a. If possible, establish a zero input for the channel by removing all load from the source transducer. If it is impossible or inconvenient to produce a transducer input of zero—as, for example, with absolute pressure measurements—then you can use a nonzero “CAL1” point. In this case, you would apply an accurately known value of input loading to the source transducer—a value (positive or negative) less than 20% of the nominal full-scale rating.
b. If the channel originates from an LVDT Conditioner Card (Model 10A30-2C, 10A31-4, or AA30-4), a command of

$$ \text { BEE } x = 0 [ \text { CR } ] ^ {*} $$

should first be entered, with the EEPROM Switch ON (where "x" is the Channel Number of the LVDT-based channel being calibrated). Then you should mechanically adjust the fixture and physical position of the LVDT until the lowest reading occurs. This is the LVDT's "electrical null" point.

c. If you established a true zero input for Channel No. x in Step a, above, by removing all load from the source transducer, make sure the EEPROM Switch is ON, and enter a command of

$$ Z R O \times [ C R ] ^ {*} $$

This command sets Channel No. x's ZERO OFFSET (BEE) term such that the existing (zero) input yields a reading of exactly zero.*

NOTE: If there are a number of channels to be calibrated, you can, if you wish, zero all or some of them at the same time—perhaps during an initial system “zero” condition—by using the “range” form of the ZERO (ZRO) command:

$$ Z R O \times T O y [ C R ] ^ {*} $$

CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

OF ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS

1.G

If you established a known nonzero input for Channel No. x in Step a, make sure the EEPROM Switch is ON, and enter a command of

$$ \mathbf {Z R O} \mathbf {x} = \mathbf {z} _ {1} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where “ z_1 ” is the numerical value of the known input, with appropriate polarity. This command sets Channel No. x’s ZERO OFFSET (BEE) term such that the existing (nonzero) input yields a reading of “ z_1 .”

4. Second Calibration Point: FRC Command

a. Apply an accurately known value of input loading to the source transducer—a value (positive or negative) from 80% to 100% of the nominal full-scale rating.

b. Command

$$ F R C x = z [ C R ] ^ {*} $$

where “z” is the numerical value of the known input, with appropriate polarity. This command “forces” the data reading of Channel No. x to equal the value “z,” thereby setting the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) value that is to be applied to all subsequent readings of the channel.*

NOTE: For a "real" channel, the FRC command also sets the desired precision. If, for example, you're measuring "pounds," and enter a "z" of "300," then all subsequent readings will be rounded to the nearest pound. If the entry is "300.0," then all readings will be rounded to the nearest tenth of a pound.

Despite its apparent "WRITE" form, the FRC command—like both forms of the ZRO command—is strictly "IMPERATIVE" (see Section 1.C.1); it has no corresponding "READ" form.

5. Readjust Calibration Points, If Required

If necessary, repeat Steps 3 and 4, above, to obtain the most accurate "zero and span." If, for example, the channel originates from an LVDT Conditioner Card (Model 10A30-2C, 10A31-4, or AA30-4), you should repeat the application of ZRO and FRC commands until the LVDT's zero and span points coincide precisely with the calibration block or micrometer reference being used.

1.G.6

SIMULATED (SHUNT) CALIBRATION: SHP, SHN, AND RSM

This calibration technique is used primarily with channels originating from Strain-Gage Conditioners (with the exception of the Model 10A70-2).** It is similar to the

* In normal setup, you need not necessarily apply the FRC command to a channel immediately after you zero that channel—although for any given channel, application of ZRO must always precede application of FRC. You may, if you wish, apply other commands to other channels or to the system itself, between the applications to the same channel of ZRO and FRC.

** Although applied principally to strain gage transducers using a known shunt resistance, "simulated" calibration can also be useful when calibrating Frequency, Current, or Voltage inputs, particularly when the "simulating" input is an exact voltage reference standard, perhaps generated by an external calibrator.

1.G

CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION OF ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS

"Two-Point (Deadweight)" calibration discussed in the previous section, except that second ("span") input is not produced by loading the source transducer, but by "simulating" a particular up-scale value of mechanical input. This known EQUIVALENT INPUT then serves to determine the channel's effective SCALING FACTOR ("m").

For a channel originating from a Daytronic Strain Gage Conditioner Card (with the exception of the Model 10A70-2), the equivalent input is produced by shunting a resistor of known magnitude across one arm of the strain gage bridge, thereby simulating a known value of input for either a positive or negative up-scale reading. If the transducer manufacturer has supplied the exact value of the transducer's equivalent input, it can be used as a reference point for calibrating the channel.

Equivalent input can be approximated from a knowledge of the Shunt Calibration Resistance (R), the transducer's Bridge Resistance (B), and the transducer's Full-Scale Sensitivity (K, in mV/V full scale). To determine the EQUIVALENT INPUT (X) as an approximate percentage of full-scale output, you may use the following equation:

$$ \mathbf {X} = 25000 \mathbf {B} / \mathbf {K} (\mathbf {R} + 0.5 \mathbf {B}) $$

Since the equivalent input is here expressed as a percentage of full-scale output, you must multiply it by the rated full-scale capacity of the transducer, in order to determine the actual input simulated by the shunt.

Shunt calibration is an easier though generally less accurate technique then two-point (deadweight) calibration. It is useful, however, when overall “deadweighting” is impossible or inconvenient, and is good for an accuracy of about 0.2% (depending, of course, on the accuracy of the specified equivalent input, and on the resistor/bridge tolerance and temperature).

For the value and location of the per-channel SHUNT CALIBRATION RESISTOR(S) installed on a specific Strain Gage Conditioner Card, see the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2 of this Guidebook. You may, if you wish, replace each channel's installed shunt resistor with a resistor of another value (strain-gage transducer manufacturers often supply such resistors with their instruments).

As explained below, a System 10 strain gage channel's shunt resistor is switched in and out by means of the SHUNT CALIBRATE-POSITIVE (SHP) or SHUNT CALIBRATE-NEGATIVE (SHN) command. A RESUME (RSM) command must then be applied to remove the shunt and resume normal channel measurement. Since these are "run-time" commands, the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective.

NOTE: For most Strain Gage Conditioner Cards, shunt calibration can be "remotely" controlled, if desired, as an alternative to using the software commands provided by the system.* This remote calibration control is accomplished by means of logic-level inputs to the card's rear I/O CONNECTOR. For the external logic interconnections specific to a given card, see the respective subsection of Section 1.E.2 of this Guidebook.

* "Remote" shunt calibration control can be either per-channel (as with the Models 10A72-2C and AA72-2 / AA72-4) or all channels together (as with the Models 10A73-4 and 10A74-4C). Note that the Model 10A78 must be specially modified before it can accept logic inputs for remote shunt calibration of its single strain gage channel.

1. Provide "Live" Channel Data Display

See Section 1.G.5, Step 1 (above).

1. Set Default Scaling: EMM Command

See Section 1.G.5, Step 1 (above).

1. First Calibration Point: ZRO Command

a. Establish a zero input for Strain Gage Channel No. x by removing all load from the source transducer.
b. Make sure the EEPROM Switch is ON, and enter a command of

ZRO x [CR]\*

This command sets Channel No. x's ZERO OFFSET (BEE) term such that the existing (zero) input yields a reading of exactly zero. See the comments regarding the ZERO (ZRO) command in Section 1.G.5, above.

1. Switch In the Shunt Resistor

To close and latch Channel No. x's SHUNT CALIBRATION SWITCH for a positive up-scale reading, command*

SHP x [CR]

For a negative up-scale reading, command*

SHN x [CR]

As mentioned above, these are “run-time” commands, and so the main-frame’s EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective.

1. Second Calibration Point: FRC Command

Command

FRC x = z [CR]\*

where "z" is the known EQUIVALENT INPUT produced by the shunt, with appropriate polarity. This command "forces" the data reading of Channel No. x to equal the value "z," thereby setting the SCALING FACTOR (EMM) value that is to be applied to all subsequent readings of the channel. See the comments regarding the FORCE (FRC) command in Section 1.G.5, above.

1. Switch Out the Shunt Resistor to Resume Normal Measurement

Before Channel No. x can resume normal measurement, its SHUNT CALIBRATION SWITCH must be unlatched (i.e., reset) by entering a "run-time" command of*

RSM x [CR]

NOTE: To unlatch any and all latched calibration conditions that may exist on any system measurement channels, command

RSM [CR]

SYSTEM 10 GUIDEBOOK

1.H FORMATTING AND MANAGEMENT OF STANDARD DATA TRANSMISSIONS

1.H.1 INTRODUCTION: TYPES OF TRANSMISSIONS

A System 10 mainframe can be made to transmit different kinds of "data" from its Computer Interface Port. In this section we will be concerned only with the transmission from this port of numerical values contained in system DATA CHANNELS (whether these values represent actual measurements, calculations, downloaded constants, etc.), and of "limit status" information pertaining to these values.*

Depending on the requirements of your application, you can instruct System 10 to issue from its Computer Interface Port any one of several different types of serial ASCII outputs that represent channel data retrieved from the system's continuously updated DATA RAM. The respective DATA INTERROGATION COMMANDS are summarized in the following table.

Table 1.2 Summary of DATA INTERROGATION Commands
Name of System 10 will respond by Optional Output Formatting Command Transmitting Data for... Available for Transmission

CHANNEL (CHN) one or a selected range of Channel-Number “Echo”; data channels, in sequence Limit-Zone Indication; and one time only Alternative OUTPUT and/or TRANSMISSION Terminator
DUMP (DMP)	all scanned data channels** or a selected range of channels, in sequence and one time only	Channel-Number “Echo”; Limit-Zone Indication; Alternative OUTPUT and/or TRANSMISSION Terminator
SNAPSHOT (SNP)	all scanned data channels** or a selected range of channels, in sequence and one time only, as a time-coherent data set	Channel-Number “Echo”; Limit-Zone Indication; Alternative OUTPUT and/or TRANSMISSION Terminator
STREAM (STR)	one data channel, all scanned channels**, or a selected range of channels, in sequence, continuously repeated until commanded to halt	Limit-Zone Indication; HEADER and/or TAILER string; Number of Characters per Channel; Columnar Format; Alternative OUTPUT and/or TRANSMISSION Terminator
(cont’d)

* Note, however, that System 10 can also transmit (among other kinds of "data")
a. configuration data, in response to a specific "READ" command (see Section 1.C.4)
b. bit-state data, in response to a BIT command (see Section 2.H.2(c))
c. a pre-entered character string, on receipt of a command such as INTERRUPT (ITR) or SEND (SND) (see Section 2.B.6)
** Transmission of "all scanned channels" includes Channel Nos. 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE).

Name of System 10 will respond by Optional Output Formatting Command Transmitting Data for... Available for Transmission

HARD COPY (HCY)	one data channel, all scanned channels*, or a HEADER and/or TAILER string; selected range of channels, Number of Characters per in sequence and one time Channel; Columnar Format; only Alternative OUTPUT and/or	Limit-Zone Indication;
		TRANSMISSION Terminator
LIMIT ZONE (LZN)	“limit-status” information for one or a selected range of data channels, in sequence and one time only	Alternative OUTPUT and/or TRANSMISSION Terminator

Note that ANY transmission from the Computer Interface Port may be instantly halted by application of an ESCAPE (ESC) command, which is described in Section 1.H.2(d), below.

Specific forms for each command in Table 1.2 are given in the following section. Optional formatting of transmissions is treated in Section 1.H.3. For complete instructions on connecting an external receiving device—computer, terminal, printer, recorder, etc.—to your System 10's Computer Interface Port, see Section 2.B of this Guidebook.

Note here that

a. Each of the commands in Table 1.2 is a "RUN-TIME" COMMAND and may be entered either via the System 10's plug-in keyboard (if present) or via its Computer Interface Port.

Regardless of the means of entry, the DUMP (DMP), SNAPSHOT (SNP), STREAM (STR), and HARD COPY (HCY) commands will always produce an output from the Computer Interface Port only. These commands will never cause requested data to be displayed on the system "billboard," even when they are entered through the keyboard.

The CHANNEL (CHN) and LIMIT ZONE (LZN) commands, on the other hand, will produce an appropriate billboard response, but only when they are entered via the keyboard—in which case no output from the Computer Interface Port will be produced. When entered via the Computer Interface Port, the CHN and LZN commands will, like the other DATA INTERROGATION COMMANDS, produce appropriate output from that port (only).

b. When using the multichannel or "range" (x TO y) form of the DUMP (DMP), SNAPSHOT (SNP), STREAM (STR), HARD COPY (HCY), and LIMIT ZONE (LZN) commands, you should take care that the specified range of data channels to be transmitted is within or equal to the system's currently specified SCAN RANGE (see Section 1.F.2).**

c. Every data value transmitted in response to one of the above commands can take a maximum of seven characters, in addition to a minus sign, if applicable. Maximum data precision is one part in ±32767 (16 bits). Scaling multiplier fac-

* Transmission of "all scanned channels" includes Channel Nos. 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE).

** Unless, of course, you deliberately want the transmission to include unscanned and therefore "frozen" data values, or DOWNLOAD PSEUDOCHANNELS that are outside the scan range.

FORMATTING AND MANAGEMENT OF STANDARD DATA TRANSMISSIONS

1.H

tors, however, permit data values to be scaled or expressed by numbers within the range of -3276700 through 3276700. Any numeric character can be replaced by a decimal point.

Note too that data scaled to produce numbers larger than allowed by 16-bit precision will be automatically counted by increments greater than "1," or will have one or more dummy zeros added, as may be required. Dummy zeros are not shown to the right of a decimal point.

d. A time delay between successive channel transmissions can be specified via the DELAY (DLY) command, as explained in Section 1.H.4, below.

1.H.2

SPECIFIC TRANSMISSION COMMANDS

With regard to the per-channel responses shown below, note that

• "x" is the Channel Number of the transmitted channel
• “w” is the value for this channel currently in System 10 RAM memory
• “z” is a number indicating the LIMIT ZONE in which this data value currently lies*:
  z = 1 indicates data in the LESS THAN limit zone
  z = 2 indicates data in the BETWEEN limit zone
  z = 3 indicates data in the GREATER THAN limit zone

- Spaces are shown in the responses only for the sake of clarity; they are not transmitted.

- P arentheses ( ) indicate optional elements within the response format (as further explained in Section 1.H.3). They are not themselves part of the transmission.

- All transmissions are shown with System 10's standard line-and-transmission termination of [CR][LF] (= CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED). You can specify alternative terminating characters for every output line and/or for every complete transmission from the Computer Interface Port by means of the OUTPUT TERMINATOR (OPT) and END OF TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR (EOT) commands, as explained in Section 1.H.3.

a. CHANNEL (CHN) COMMAND

Command: Response (transmission from Computer Interface Port or answer appearing on mainframe "billboard" display, depending on means of command entry):

CHN x [CR]

Outputs (x,) w (, z) [CR][LF] for Channel No. x only; billboard will display CHN x = w only, even if the LIMITS (LIM) command is in effect (see Section 1.H.3(b))

(cont'd)

* See Section 2.F.3 of this Guidebook for definitions of the three limit zones. Until a HIGH LIMIT (HIL) command has been applied to a given data channel, its effective high-limit value will be +3000 mV (or “scaled” equivalent); until a LOW LIMIT (LOL) command has been applied, the effective low-limit value will be -3000 mV or equivalent. For limit setting, see Section 2.F.2.

CHN x TO y [CR]

Outputs (x,) w (, z) [CR][LF] for all data channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y (y ≥ x); billboard will display data for Channel No. x only (you may use the keyboard's Step key to produce sequential readings on the billboard for a range of channels, following an initial keyboard entry of CHN x [CR]—see Section 1.C.4(b)

Note that the "WRITE" (or "CHN=") form of the CHANNEL (CHN) command has several important uses, as summarized in Guidebook Section 4 under the CHN mnemonic. For instance, it lets you load a particular DOWNLOAD PSEUDOCHANNEL No. x with a fixed data value or with the current reading of another data channel (see Section 2.D).

Also note that on both an EXTENDED KEYBOARD and an OPERATOR'S KEYBOARD, you may enter a CHANNEL (CHN) command by means of the Chan key. Thus, to interrogate for the current data reading of, say, Channel No. 27, you need only press the Chan key and then type 27 [CR]. You may then use the Step key, as mentioned above, to produce a sequence of billboard channel readings starting with Channel No. 28.

b. DUMP (DMP) COMMAND

Command: Response (transmission from Computer Interface Port only, regardless of means of entry, one time only):

DMP [CR] Outputs (x,) w (, z) [CR][LF] for all scanned channels, including Nos. 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE)

DMP x TO y [CR] Outputs (x,) w (, z) [CR][LF] for all channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y (y ≥ x)

c. SNAPSHOT (SNP) COMMAND

This command permits the “dumping” of a data set without the time-skew effects that arise when data values reported by different channels reflect measurements made at different times. In this case, each “dump” is automatically preceded by an instantaneous locking of the System 10 DATA RAM and is followed by an unlocking of the RAM (see the LOCK (LOK) and UNLOCK (UNL) commands, Section 2.E).

Command: Response (transmission from Computer Interface Port only, regardless of means of entry, one time only):

SNP [CR] Outputs (x,) w (, z) [CR][LF] for all scanned channels, including Nos. 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE)

SNP x TO y [CR] Outputs (x,) w (, z) [CR][LF] for all channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y (y ≥ x)

d. STREAM (STR) AND ESCAPE (ESC) COMMANDS

Command: Response (transmission from Computer Interface Port only, regardless of means of entry, continuously repeated until cancelled by ESCAPE (ESC)):
STR [CR]	Outputs x, w (, z) [CR][LF] for all scanned channels, including Nos. 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE), along with specified HEADER and/or TAILER
STR x [CR]	Outputs x, w (, z) [CR][LF] for Channel No. x only, along with specified HEADER and/or TAILER
STR x TO y [CR]	Outputs x, w (, z) [CR][LF] for all channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y (y ≥ x), along with specified HEADER and/or TAILER

To halt a transmission produced in response to any of the above STREAM (STR) commands, you must apply the ESCAPE (ESC) command. This you may do by pressing the keyboard's Esc key or by transmitting either the mnemonic ESC or the ASCII [Esc] character (= hex 1B) to System 10 via the Computer Interface Port. When applied, the ESC command not only terminates any transmission from the Computer Interface Port currently in progress, but also has the effect of clearing any partial command that has been entered.

For use of a special "header" or "tailer" string to allow nonscrolling CRT display of the datastream output, see Section 1.H.3(c), below.

e. HARD COPY (HCY) COMMAND

Command: Response (transmission from Computer Interface Port only, regardless of means of entry, one time only):
HCY [CR]	Outputs x, w (, z) [CR][LF] for all scanned channels, including Nos. 998 (TIME) and 999 (DATE), along with specified HEADER and/or TAILER
HCY x [CR]	Outputs x, w (, z) [CR][LF] for Channel No. x only, along with specified HEADER and/or TAILER
HCY x TO y [CR]	Outputs x, w (, z) [CR][LF] for all channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y (y ≥ x), along with specified HEADER and/or TAILER

f. LIMIT ZONE (LZN) COMMAND

Command: Response (transmission from Computer Interface Port or answer appearing on mainframe “billboard” display, depending on means of command entry):
LZN x [CR]	Outputs z [CR][LF] for Channel No. x only; billboard will display the words BELOW LIMITS (for z = 1), BETWEEN LIMITS (for z = 2), or ABOVE LIMITS (for z = 3)
(cont’d)

1.H

FORMATTING AND MANAGEMENT OF STANDARD DATA TRANSMISSIONS

LZN x TO y [CR]

Outputs z [CR][LF] for all data channels from Channel No. x to and including Channel No. y (y ≥ x); billboard will display limit-zone information for Channel No. x only (you may use the keyboard's Step key to produce sequential limit-zone readings on the billboard for a range of channels, following an initial keyboard entry of LZN x [CR]—see Section 1.C.4(b)

1.H.3

FORMATTING OF TRANSMISSIONS

Note that ECHO (ECO), NO CHANNEL (NCH), LIMITS (LIM), and NO LIMITS (NOL) are all "RUN-TIME" COMMANDS, and so the mainframe's EEPROM Write Protect Switch need not be on for them to be effective. As in the previous section, "x" here indicates CHANNEL NUMBER, "w" indicates DATA VALUE, and "z" indicates LIMIT-ZONE INDICATOR NUMBER (1, 2, or 3).

a. CHANNEL-NUMBER "ECHO": ECO AND NCH

To produce a per-channel format of

$$ \mathbf {x}, \mathbf {w} (, z) [ \mathbf {C R} ] [ \mathbf {L F} ] $$

for every transmission from the Computer Interface Port in response to a CHANNEL (CHN), DUMP (DMP), or SNAPSHOT (SNP) command, enter a command of

$$ \mathrm{ECO} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

ECHO (ECO) is automatically in effect for the STREAM (STR) and HARD COPY (HCY) commands, and cannot be revoked (for responses to these commands) via the NO CHANNEL (NCH) command.

To cancel the Channel-Number “echo” for all CHN, DMP, and SNP transmissions, enter the NO CHANNEL (NCH) command:

$$ \mathrm{NCH} [ \mathrm{CR} ] $$

Note that the NO CHANNEL (NCH) command is automatically in effect, by default, on mainframe powerup.

b. LIMIT-ZONE INDICATION: LIM AND NOL

To produce a per-channel format of

$$ (x,) w, z [ C R ] [ L F ] $$

for every transmission from the Computer Interface Port in response to a CHANNEL (CHN), DUMP (DMP), or SNAPSHOT (SNP) command, and a per-channel format of

$$ x, w, z [ C R ] [ L F ] $$

for all responses to a STREAM (STR) or HARD COPY (HCY) command, enter a command of

$$ \text { L I M } [ \mathbf {C R} ] $$

This command does not affect the displayed answer to a keyboard-entered CHN x [CR] command.

FORMATTING AND MANAGEMENT OF STANDARD DATA TRANSMISSIONS

1.H

To cancel limit-zone indication for all transmissions to which it applies, enter the NO LIMITS (NOL) command:

NOL [CR]

Note that the NO LIMITS (NOL) command is automatically in effect, by default, on mainframe powerup.

C. "HEADER" AND "TAILER" STRINGS: HDR AND TLR

The HEADER (HDR) and TAILER (TLR) commands are intended for use when the Computer Interface Port is linked to an RS-232-c terminal or printer.

To specify an ASCII character string to be transmitted at the beginning of each data set issued from the Computer Interface Port in response to either a STREAM (STR) or HARD COPY (HCY) command, make sure the EEPROM Switch is ON and enter a command of

$$ \mathsf {H D R} = \text {" " [ C R ] ^ {*}} $$

To specify an ASCII character string to be transmitted at the end of each data set issued in response to an STR or HCY command, enter

$$ \text { TLR } = " " [ \text { CR } ] ^ {*} $$

The HEADER or TAILER string “\$” may consist of up to 80 standard ASCII characters. It must be entered within quotation marks (“”), which are not actually transmitted.

NOTE: In addition to alphanumeric text, a transmission header or tailer may contain one or more standard ASCII CONTROL CHARACTERS (Line Feed, Form Feed, Carriage Return, etc.) Each such character must be entered within the "\$" string as a hexadecimal word enclosed in square brackets. Two-character hexadecimal equivalents for standard ASCII control characters are given in Table 1.3, below (although the HDR or TLR string is not limited to the characters shown in this list).

For example, the command specifying a HEADER of

[CR][LF]TEST NO. 5[CR][LF]

would take this form:

$$ \mathrm{HDR} = \text {" [ 0D][0A]TEST NO. 5[0D][0A]"} $$

A TAILER string in which the text "END OF TEST NO. 5" is preceded by Carriage Return, Line Feed and followed by Form Feed (to ensure that each data set is printed on a fresh page) would be entered as

$$ \mathrm{TLR} = \text {" [ 0D] [ 0A ]END OF TEST NO. 5[0C]"} $$

The keyboard's Line Feed key may be used for direct entry of the Line Feed character (hex [0A]).

To cancel the system's currently specified header or tailer string, command, respectively,

$$ \mathrm{HDR} = \mathrm{N/A} [ \mathrm{CR} ] ^ {} \quad \text { or } \quad \mathrm{TLR} = \mathrm{N/A} [ \mathrm{CR} ] ^ {} $$

When entered through the Computer Interface Port, a "READ" command of HDR [CR] or TLR [CR] will cause the system to output from that port the currently

specified HEADER or TAILER string (respectively). However, System 10 will not answer a keyboard-entered interrogation of HDR [CR] or TLR [CR]—i.e., a billboard display of the current HEADER or TAILER string will not appear.

Table 1.3 Hexadecimal Coding of ASCII Control Characters

ASCII ASCIICharacter Hex Character Hex
NULL 00 DLE 10
SOH 01 DC1 11
STX 02 DC2 12
ETX 03 DC3 13
EOT 04 DC4 14
ENQ	05 NAK	15
ACK	06	SYNC	16
BELL	07 ETB 17
BS	08 CAN	18
HT	09 EM	19
LF	0A	SUB	1A
VT	0B	ESC 1B
FF	0C	FS	1C
CR	0D	GS	1D
SO	0E	RS	1E
SI	0F US	1F

USE OF HEADER OR TAILER TO PROVIDE NONSCROLLING "DATASTREAM" DISPLAY

You may use the HEADER (HDR) or TAILER (TLR) command to prevent scrolling of successive data sets transmitted to a CRT terminal via the STREAM (STR) command—and thus to achieve in-place updating of all data within one displayed set.

Simply include the [HOME] character as the first character in the HEADER string, or as the final character in the TAILER string. This will automatically drive the CRT cursor to the upper left corner of the screen, so that the display of each transmitted data set will begin at the same place.

However, since there is no universal ASCII[HOME] character, you will have to consult the literature accompanying your printer or terminal to find the specific CONTROL CHARACTER which it will recognize as [HOME]. The corresponding hexadecimal word (in square brackets) will be what you actually enter in your HEADER or TAILER string.

d. CHARACTERS PER CHANNEL: CPC

To format the DATA FIELD for all STREAM (STR) and HARD COPY (HCY) transmissions, you may use the CHARACTERS PER CHANNEL (CPC) command:

$$ \mathbf {C P C} = \mathsf {n} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where “n” is the desired number of character spaces you wish to constitute the data field for each channel transmission (including leading spaces). It may be any integer from 2 through 9, and is initially set at “8.”

Commanding, for example,

$$ \mathbf {C P C} = 9 [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

permits transmission of a data value of seven characters (the maximum allowed), plus two leading spaces.

e. COLUMNAR FORMAT: CLM

To cause data sets transmitted in response to a STREAM (STR) or HARD COPY (HCY) command to be displayed or printed in parallel columns, you may apply the COLUMNS (CLM) command:

$$ \mathbf {C L M} = \mathsf {n} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where "n" is the number of columns desired, and is initially set at "1." The maximum number of columns that can be displayed will depend on the width of the individual columns (all columns must be of the same width).

A column may have a minimum of 9 character spaces, to allow for

• channel number (3 spaces)
- comma (1 space)
- data field (2 spaces, where the CPC is the minimum of "2"—see previous section)
- 3 spaces to separate the column from an adjacent column to its immediate right*

A column may have a maximum of 17 character spaces, to allow for

• channel number (3 spaces)
- comma (1 space)
- data field (9 spaces, where the CPC is the maximum of "9"—see previous section)
- comma (1 space)
- limit-zone indicator (1 space—see the LIM command, Section 1.H.3(b))
• 2 column-separating spaces

f. ALTERNATIVE LINE AND/OR TRANSMISSION TERMINATION

SPECIFYING OUTPUT ("END-OF-LINE") TERMINATOR: OPT

In almost all cases, every System 10 is factory-set to end every line of transmission from its Computer Interface Port with CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED ([CR][LF]). If you require a different OUTPUT TERMINATOR in order to communicate effectively with a specific computer, printer, or other receiving device, you can use the following setup command:

$$ \mathbf {O P T} = [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where the OUTPUT TERMINATOR string “\$” may consist of one or two ASCII CONTROL CHARACTERS (only).**

As with the HEADER (HDR) and TAILER (TLR) commands, above, every OPT character must be entered as a hexadecimal word. If the OPT has only one char-

* The three separator spaces must be included in all columns with a data field of 8 spaces or fewer.
** If the system has an ASSIGN SATELLITE NUMBER (ASN) other than "0," the OPT cannot be set to any value other than [0D] (for ASN, see Section 3.B.3(b)).

1.H

FORMATTING AND MANAGEMENT OF STANDARD DATA TRANSMISSIONS

acter, it should be enclosed in square brackets (e.g., OPT = [0A] [CR]*, which would cause each line of output to be terminated by a Line Feed). If two characters are entered, both should be within the same pair of brackets, separated by a comma (e.g., OPT = [0D,0C] [CR]*, which would cause each line of output to be terminated by Carriage Return, Form Feed). For the allowed OPT characters, see Table 1.3, above.

Entering an OUTPUT TERMINATOR (OPT) character or characters will automatically enter the same character(s) as the current END OF TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR (EOT) (see below).

SPECIFYING END OF TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR: EOT

If no END OF TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR (EOT) command has been entered, the system will end every complete transmission from its Computer Interface Port—including every response to a "READ" COMMAND entered at that port—with the same character(s) specified by the last-entered OUTPUT TERMINATOR (OPT) command (with an initial default of [CR][LF]).

If, however, you want an end-of-transmission (EOT) terminator that is different from the current end-of-line (OPT) terminator, command

$$ \mathbf {E O T} = [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where the END OF TRANSMISSION TERMINATOR string “\$” may consist of up to four ASCII CONTROL CHARACTERS (only).*

As with the OUTPUT TERMINATOR (OPT) command, each character must be entered as a hexadecimal word. If the EOT has only one character, it should be enclosed in square brackets (e.g., EOT = [0C][CR]^ , which would cause each complete transmission to be terminated by a Form Feed). If two, three, or four characters are entered, they should all be within the same pair of brackets, separated by commas (e.g., EOT = [0A,0C,07][CR]^ ). For the allowed EOT characters, see Table 1.3, above.

Obviously, since a command of OPT = [CR] automatically loads a command of EOT = [CR] , an EOT command specifying a different "\$" string from that entered by the last OPT command must always follow that OPT command.

1.H.4 SETTING INTERTRANSMISSION DELAY: DLY

The DELAY (DLY) command lets you set a time delay from 0 through 100 milliseconds, to occur between successive data transmissions from the Computer Interface Port that are produced in response to any valid DATA INTERROGATION COMMAND or to any valid "READ" COMMAND of the "range" form. Such a delay would avoid overrunning the computer input buffer when full handshake protocols are not implemented. The initial default DLY value is "0" (= NO DELAY).

The command has this form:

$$ \mathbf {D L Y} = \mathbf {s} [ \mathbf {C R} ] ^ {*} $$

where “s” is the desired intertransmission delay period in milliseconds (0 ≤ s ≤ 100).